LONG TERM 2026

(TWO YEAR)

PHYSICS
BRAIN BANK
CLASS XI

Brilliant
STUDY CENTRE, PALA
Mutholy Campus, Ph: 04822 - 206100, 206800
[Link]., email: admissions@[Link].
blank
 CONTENTS

1. Units and Measurements................................................................. 05

2. Motion in a Straight Line.................................................................. 24

3. Motion in a Plane.............................................................................. 41

4. Laws of Motion.................................................................................. 67

5. Work, Energy and Power................................................................. 88

6. Systems of Particles and Rotational Motion................................ 113

7. Gravitation....................................................................................... 140

8. Mechanical Properties of Solids................................................... 164

9. Mechanical Properties of Fluids.................................................... 180

10. Thermal Properties of Matter......................................................... 201

11. Thermodynamics............................................................................ 222

12. Kinetic Theory................................................................................. 240

13. Oscillations..................................................................................... 257

14. Waves.............................................................................................. 278

blank
 CHAPTER
UNITS AND MEASUREMENTS
01

Physical Quantities:

The quantities which can be measured by an instrument and by means of which we can describe
the laws of physics are called physical quantities. eg. length, velocity, acceleration, force, time, pressure,
mass, density etc.
Physical quantities are of three types

Fundamental Derived Supplementary

or Quantities Quantities
Basic quantities

1. Fundamental and Derived Units

The physical units which can neither be derived from one another, nor they can be further resolved
into more simpler units are called fundamental units. e.g., metre, kg, sec
All other physical units which can be expressed in terms of fundamental units are called derived
units.

e.g., ms , kg ms ( N )
−1 −2

2. Supplimentary Units

a. Plane angle - Unit - radian (rad)

It is the angle subtended at the centre of a circle by an arc of length equal to its radius.
b. Solid angle - Unit - Steradian (sr)
It is the solid angle subtended at the centre of a sphere by a portion of its surface area equal to
a square with sides of length equal to the radius of the sphere.
UNITS :
To measure a physical quantity and express its measurement we need a ‘standard’ of the quantity.
This chosen standard is called unit of the physical quantity.
The magnitude of a physical quantity is given by M = nU
where n = numerical value of the measured quantity. U = unit of the quantity.
1
* Smaller the unit, greater will be the numerical value. i.e., Numerical value ∝
unit

5
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Classification of units
System of Units- FPS, CGS, MKS and SI.
1) CGS system: In this system length, mass and time are expressed in cm, gram, and second
respectively.
2) FPS system: In this system length, mass and time are measured in foot, pound and second
respectively
3) MKS system: In this system length, mass and time are expressed in metre, kilogram and second
respectively.
4) SI Units of Basic Quantities :

Base Quantity Name Symbol

Length meter m
Mass kilogram kg
Time second s
Electric current ampere A
Thermodynamic kelvin K
Temperature
Amount of Substance mole mol
Luminous Intensity candela cd

ERRORS IN MEASUREMENT

1. LEAST COUNT
We have studied that no measurement is perfect. Every instrument can measure upto a certain
accuracy called least count.
Least count : The smallest quantity an instrument can measure

mm. scale Vernier Screw gauge Stop watch Thermometer

L.C. = 1 mm L.C. = 0.1 mm L.C. = 0.01 mm L.C.=0.1 s L.C. = 1oC

2. PERMISSIBLE ERROR
Error in measurement due to the limitation (least count) of the instrument, is called permissible
error.
Maximum permissible error in a measured quantity is the least count of the measuring instrument
and if nothing is given about least count, then maximum permissible error is the place value of
the last digit.
3. Max. Permissible Error in the result due to error in each measurable quantity:

Let result f(x, y) contains two measurable quantities x and y

6
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Let error in x is = ± ∆x i.e. x ∈ ( x − ∆x, x + ∆x )

error in y is = ± ∆y i.e. y ∈ ( y − ∆y, y + ∆y )

Case:(I) If f(x, y) = x + y, df = dx + dy
error in f = ∆f = ± ∆x + ± ∆y

max possible error in f = ( ∆f )max = max of ( ± ∆x + ∆y ) = ± ( ∆x + ∆y )

( ∆f )max = ∆x + ∆y

Case: (II)

If f = x – y; df = dx – dy; ( ∆f ) = ± ∆x  ∆y

max of ( ± ∆x  ∆y ) ⇒ ( ∆f )max =
( ∆f )max =
max possible error in f = ± ( ∆x + ∆y )

For getting maximum permissible error, sign should be adjusted, so that errors get added up to
give maximum effect

Case (III) If f(x, y, z) = (constant) xaybzc

to scatter all the terms, let’s take log on both sides

log f = log (constant) + a log x + b log y + c log z

↓ Differentiating both sides

df dx dy dz
0+a
= +b +c
f x y z

∆f ∆x ∆y ∆z
±a
= ±b ±c
f x y z

 ∆f   ∆x ∆y ∆z 
  = max of  ± a ±b ±c 
 f max  x y z 

4. Errors in averaging:

Suppose to measure some quantity, we take several observations, a1, a2, a3 ----- an. To find the
absolute error in each measurement and percentage error, we have to follow these steps

( a1 + a 2 + ..... + a n )
a) First of all mean of all the observations is calculated : a mean = . The mean
n
of these values is taken as the best possible value of the quantity under the given conditions of
measurements.

7
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

b) Absolute Error: The magnitude of the difference between the best possible or mean value of the
quantity and the individual measurement value is called the absolute error of the measurement.
The absolute error in an individual measured value is:

∆a=
n a mean − a n

The arithmetic mean of all the absolute errors is taken as the final or mean absolute error.

 n 
( 1
∆a + ∆a + ∆a + ........... + ∆a n )
 ∑ ∆a i 
; ∆a mean  i =1 
2 3
∆a mean =
n n

we can say a mean − ∆a mean ≤ a ≤ a mean + ∆a mean

c) Relative and Percentage Error
Relative error is the ratio of the mean absolute error to the arithmetic mean,
∆a mean
Relative error =
a mean

When the relative error is expressed in percentage, it is called the percentage error
∆a mean
Thus Percentage error = ×100%
a mean

5. SIGNIFICANT FIGURES

The reliable digits plus the first uncertain digit are known as significant figures.
1. Common rules of counting significant figures:
Rule 1 :
All non-zero digits are significant
Rule 2 :
All zeros occuring between two non-zero digits are significant
Rule 3 :
Zeros to the right of the decimal are significant if there is a non zero digit before the decimal point.
If there is no non zero digit before the decimal point ,the zeros adjacent to the right of the decimal
point are not significant.
Rule 4:
In the number less than one, all zeros after decimal point and to the left of first non-zero digit are
insignificant
Rule 5:

The terminal or trailing zeros in a number without a decimal point are not significant.

8
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Rule 6:

The power of 10 is irrevelant to the determination of significant figure.

Examples Significant figures

3.0800 5
0.00418 3
7.09 × 105 3
91600 3
0.003005 4
3.200 × 109 4
250 2
78000,0000 2
0.0101 3
0.000800 3

ALGEBRAIC OPERATIONS WITH SIGNIFICANT FIGURES

Now let us see how to do arithmetic operations ie, addition, subtraction, multiplication and division
according to significant figures

In addition and subtraction, the final result should retain as many decimal places as there in the
number with the least decimal places.

eg: 24.36 + 0.0623 + 256.2 = 280.62223

It is to be rounded off to 1 decimal place.

∴ The result is 280.6

In multiplication and division, the final result should retain as many significant figures as there in
the original number with least significant digits.

eg: 2.80 × 4.5039 = 12.61092

It is to be rounded off to 3 significant figures.

∴ the result is 12.6.

ORDER OF MAGNITUDE
When physical quantities vary over a wide range it is difficult to get a comparison about their
magnitudes. For a quick comparison among them we can use powers of ten method. In this method
b
each number is expressed as a × 10 where 1 ≤ a ≤ 10 and b is a positive or negative integer. eg. diameter

of sun is 1.39 × 109m . diameter of hydrogen atom is 1.06 × 10–10m. To get an approximate idea of the
number one may round the number a to 1 if it is less than 5 and to 10 if it is greater than 5. Thus the
diameter of the sun is of the order of 109m and that of hydrogen atom is 10–10m . The exponent of 10 is
the order of the magnitude of the quantity.

9
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

DIMENSIONS
Dimension of a physical quantity are the powers to which the base quantities are raised to
represent the quantity.
1. Dimensional formula: The dimensional formula of any physical quantity is that expression which
represents how and which of the base quantities are included in that quantity.
Dimensional formula of mass is [M1L0T0] and that of speed(= distance/time) is [M0L1T–1]
2. Dimensional equation: The equation obtained by equating a physical quantity with its dimensional
formula is called a dimensional equation.
e. g. [v] = [M0L1T–1]
[F] = [MLT–2] is a dimensional equation, [MLT–2] is the dimensional formula of the force and the
dimensions of force are 1 in mass, 1 in length and –2 in time.
Examples
[ mass ] M [ 1 −3 ]
• [Density] = = = ML
[ volume] L3
1 2 −2
work  work  M L T [ M1L2T3 ]
• Power = ; [Power] = =
 time  =
time T

1 1 −2
Force  Force  M L T
• Pressure = ; [ Pressure] =  = = M1L−1T −2
Area  Area  L2

Arc Arc L
• (Angular displacement ) θ= ; [ θ]= = = [ M 0 L0 T 0 ] (Dimensionless)
radius radius L

θ [ θ] 1
• Angular velocity ( ω) = [ ω]= = = [ M 0 L0 T −1 ]
t [t] T

dω [ dω] [ M 0 L0 T −1 ]
• Angular acceleration ( =
α) [=
α] = = [ M 0 L0 T −2 ]
dt [ dt ] T
• Torque = Force × Arm length

• =
[Torque] = [Force] × [Arm length] [ M1L1T −2 ] ×=
[ L ] [ M1L2 T −2 ]
• If light of frequency ν is falling, energy of a photon is given by E = hν
Here h = Planck’s constant
E ] [ h ][ν ]
[=
1 1
ν = frequency = ⇒ [ ν ] = 
Time period T 

=
so h ] [ T −1 ] ; [ h ] M1L2 T −1
M1L2 T −2 [ =

10
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

3. Some special features of dimensions:

Principle of homogeneity of dimensions

Suppose in any formula, ( L + α ) term is coming (where L is length). As length can be added only
with a length, so α should also be a kind of length.

So [ α ] =[ L ]

Similarly consider a term ( F − β ) where F is force. A force can be added/subtracted with a force
only and give rises to a third force. So β should be a kind of force and its result ( F − β ) should
also be a kind of force.

Uses of dimensions:

1. To check the correctness of the formula :

If the dimensions of the L.H.S and R.H.S are same, then we can say that this eqn. is atleast
dimensionally correct. So this equation may be correct. (Homogeneity of dimensions)
But if dimensions of L.H.S. and R.H.S is not same then the equation is not even dimensionally
correct.
So it cannot be correct.

mv 2
e.g. centrifugal force, Fe =
r

(where m = mass, v = velocity, r = radius)

we have to check whether it is correct or not.
Dimension of L.H.S is, [F] = [M1L1T-2]

[ m ][ v 2 ] [ M ][ LT −1 ]
2

= = M1L1T −2
Dimension of R.H.S is,
[r] [ L]

So this eqn. is atleast dimensionally correct.

Thus we can say that this equation may be correct.

2. To convert a physical quantity from one system of units to another .

Convert SI unit of force - (Newton), to CGS unit (dyne)

F = M1L1T–2
1 1 −2 1 1 −2
M  L  T   Kg   m   s 
n  1   1   1 = 
n == 1 10o
  cm   s = 1000 ×100 ×=
M L T
 2  2  2  g 
1N = 105 dynes

2 100
• The acceleration due to gravity is 9.8 m / s =9.8 × cms −2 =
980 cms −2
1

11
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

3. To derive the relationship between different physical quantities

Homogeneity of dimensions enable us to derive relations between physical quantities, if the

dependent quantities are known
The period of the satellite may depend on gravitational constant G, mass of the earth m and orbital
radius r
[M]b[R]c ; [ M L T ] [=
M − a L3a T −2a ][ M b ][ Lc ] M − a + b L3a + c T −2a
0 0 −1
[T] = [G]=
a

1 1 3
1 = –2a, a = − ; 0=b–a ,b= − ; 0 = 3a + c c= +
2 2 2

1 1 3
− − R3
T ∝ G 2M 2
R 2 ; T = 2π
GM

LIMITATIONS OF DIMENSIONAL ANALYSIS:

• Dimensional analysis doesn’t give information about the “Some Number”: “The dimensionless
constant”.
• This method is useful only when a physical quantity depends on other quantities by multiplication
and power relations. (i.e., f = xa yb zc)
It fails if a physical quantity depends on sum or difference of two quantities (i.e.f = x + y – z)
1 2
i.e., we cannot get the relation, S
= ut + at from dimensional analysis
2

• This method will not work if a quantity depends on another quantity as sine, cosine, logarithmic
or exponential relation. The method works only if the dependence is by power functions.
• We equate the powers of M, L and T hence we get only three equations. So we can have only
three variables (only three dependent quantities)
So dimensional analysis will work only if the quantity depends only on three parameters, not more
than that.

12
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

QUESTIONS

1. In C.G.S. system, the magnitude of the force 1) N 2) N – 1

is 100 dynes. In another system where the 1 1
fundamental physical quantities are kilogram, 3) 4)
10 N N −1
metre and minute, the magnitude of the force
is 7. In the determination of Young modulus
1) 0.036 2) 0.36  4MgL 
 Y = πd 2   by using Searle’s method, a
3) 3.6 4) 36
wire of length L = 2 m and diameter d = 0.5
2. A new unit of length is chosen such that the mm is used. For a load M = 2.5 kg, an
speed of light in vacuum is unity. The distance extension  = 0.25 mm in the length of the
between the sun and the earth in terms of the
wire is observed. Quantities d and  are
new unit, if light takes 8 min. and 20 sec to
measured using a screw gauge and a
cover this distance is .......... units.
micrometer respectively. They have equal
1) 200 2) 500 pitches of 0.5 mm. The number of divisions
on each of their circular scales is 100. The
3) 300 4) 400
maximum probable error in the measurement
3. Surface tension of a liquid is 70 dyne/cm. Its of Y arises due to the error in  and d both.
value in SI is ..... × 10–3 N/m
1) The error in the measurement of d and 
1) 7.0 2) 35 are equal.
3) 70 4) 0.7 2) The error in the measurement of d is twice
4. A student measures the thickness of a human the error in the measurement of  .
hair by looking at it through a microscope of
3) The error in the measurement of  is twice
magnification 100. He makes 20 observations
the error in the measurement of d.
and finds that the average width of the hair
in the field of view of the microscope is 3.5 4) The error in the measurement of d is four
mm. The thickness of hair is times the error in the measurement of  .
1) 0.035 mm 2) 0.04 mm 8. If X = a + b, the maximum percentage error
3) 0.35 mm 4) 0.40 mm in the measurement of X will be

5. A vernier calliper has its main scale of 10cm  ∆a ∆b 

equally divided into 200 equal parts. Its 1)  +  ×100%
 a b 
vernier scale of 25 divisions coincides with
12mm on the main scale. The least count of
 ∆a ∆b 
the instrument is 2)  −  ×100%
a+b a+b
1) 0.020cm 2) 0.002cm
3) 0.010cm 4) 0.001cm
 ∆a ∆b 
6. In a vernier calliper, N divisions of vernier 3)  +  ×100%
a+b a+b
scale coincide with(N–1) division of main
scale (in which one division represents 1mm).
The least count of the instrument in cm should  ∆a ∆b 
4)  ×  ×100%
be  a b 

13
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

9. A quantity y is related to another quantity The percentage error in volume up to proper

x by the equation y = kxa where k and a significant figures is
are constants. If percentage error in the
1) 0.28% 2) 0.35%
measurement of x is p, then that in y depends
upon 3) 0.48% 4) 0.64%
1) K and a 2) x and a 16. The external and internal diameters of a
3) p and a 4) p, k and a all hollow cylinder are measured to be
10. The circular divisions of the given screw ( 4.23 ± 0.01) cm and ( 3.89 ± 0.01) cm . The
gauge are 50. It moves 0.5 mm on main scale
in one rotation. The diameter of the ball is thickness of the wall of the cylinder is

1) ( 0.34 ± 0.02 ) cm 2) ( 0.17 ± 0.02 ) cm

3) ( 0.17 ± 0.01) cm 4) ( 0.34 ± 0.01) cm

1) 2.25 mm 2) 2.20 mm
17. Planck time depends upon c, G, and h these
3) 1.20 mm 4) 1.25 mm letters have their usual meaning. find the
11. The number of significant figures in 0.06900 order of the magnitude of Planck time.
is 1) –14 2) –43
1) 5 2) 4
3) –34 4) –23
3) 2 4) 3
18. If the value of resistance is 10.48 Ω and the
12. The volume of a sphere is 1.76 cm3. The
volume of 25 such spheres taking into
value of current is 3.23 A, the potential
account the significant figures is
difference is 35.02935 V. Find its value in
1) 0.44 × 102 cm3 2) 44.0 cm3 significant number.
3) 44 cm3 4) 44.00 cm3 1) 35.02935 2) 35.02
13. If the length of a rectangle l = 10.5cm,
3) 35.029 4) 35.0
breadth b = 2.1cm and minimum possible
measurement by scale = 0.1cm, then the 19. In the formula X = 3YZ2, X has dimensions
area is of capacitance and Z has dimensions of
1) 22.0cm2 2) 22.1cm2 magnetic induction. The dimensions of Y are

1) [ M L T A ] 2) [ ML ]
−3 −2 −2 4 −2
3) 22.05cm2 4) 22 cm2
14. Each side of a cube is measured to be 3) [ M L A T ] 4) [ M L T A ]
−3 −2 4 4 −3 −2 8 4

5.402 cm. Find the volume of the cube in

appropriate significant figures. 20. ‘Pascal second’ is a unit of
1) 157.6 2) 157.639 1) Energy 2) Young’s modulus
3) 157.63 4) 157 3) Stress 4) Viscosity
15. The length l, breadth b, and thickness t of 21. Which of the following group have different
a block of wood were measured with the dimensions?
help of a measuring scale. The results with 1) Potential difference, EMF, voltage
premissible errors (in cm) are
2) Pressure, stress
l = 15.12 ± 0.01, b = 10.15 ± 0.01, and
3) Heat, energy, work done
t = 5.28 ± 0.01 4) Dipole moment, electric flux, electric field

14
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

22. The time dependence of a physical quantity 27. The mass of the liquid flowing per second
by P P0 exp ( −αt ) [Where α is a per unit area of cross section of the tube
2
is given=
constant and t is time.] The constant α is proportional to px and vy where p is the
pressure difference and v is the velocity then
1) is dimensionless the relation between x and y is
2) Has dimensions [T–2] 1) x = y 2) x = –y
3) y =x
2
4) y = –x2
3) Has dimensions [T2]
28. Planck’s constant h, speed of light c and
4) Has dimensions of P gravitational constant G are used to form a
unit of length L and a unit of mass M. Then
23. The time period T of a small drop of liquid the wrong relation(s) is(are)
due to surface tension depends on density ρ ,
radius r and surface tension S. The relation 1) M ∝ c 2) M ∝ G
is
1 3) L ∝ h 4) L ∝ G
1) T = [ρr 3
/ S] 2
2) T = ρrS 29. Of the following quantities , which one has
the dimensions different from the remaining
3) T = ρr / S 4) T
= S / ρr three?
24. Y a sin ωt + bt + ct 2 cos ωt . The
Given that = 1) Energy density
2) Force per unit area
unit of abc is same as that of
3) Product of charge per unit volume and
y voltage
1) y 2)
t 4) Angular momentum per unit mass
30. A small steel ball of radius r is allowed to fall
under gravity through a column of a viscous
2 3
y y liquid of coefficient of viscosity η . After
3)   4)   sometime the velocity of the ball attains a
t t
constant value known as terminal velocity,vT.
25. The Hubble constant has the dimension of The terminal velocity depends on (i) the mass
of the ball m (ii) η (iii) r (iv) acceleration due
1) time 2) (time)–1 to gravity g. Which of the following relations
is dimensionally correct?
3) length 4) mass
mg ηr
α 1) v T ∝ 2) v T ∝
26. Given, Force = . What are the ηr mg
density + β3
dimensions of α, β ? mgr
3) v T ∝ ηrmg 4) v T ∝
η
1) [ ML T ] , [ ML ]
2 −2 −1/3

31. If frequency F, velocity v, and density D

2) [ M L T ] , [ M L ]
2 4 −2 1/3 −1
are considered fundamental units, the
dimensional formula for momentum will be
3) [ M L T ] , [ M L ]
2 −2 −2 1/3 −1

1) DvF2 2) Dv2F–1
4) [ M L T ] , [ ML ]
2 −2 −2 −3

3) D2v2F2 4) Dv4F–3

15
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

32. Which of the following product of e, h, µ , G 37. The dimensions of h/e(h = Planck’s constant,
(where µ is the permeability) be taken so e = Charge on electron) are same as those
that the dimensions of the product are same of
as that of the speed of light?
−2 −1 0 2 0
1) Magnetic pole strength
1) he µ G 2) h eG µ

2 2 −1 −1 0
2) Magnetic moment
3) h e G µ 4) hGe µ

33. The velocity of waves produced in water 3) Magnetic field

depends on their wavelength λ , the density
of water and acceleration due to gravity g. 4) Magnetic flux
These quantities are related as (where k is
a dimensionless constant) 38. The speed (v) of ripples on water surface
2 −1 −1 −1 2
depends on surface tension σ ) density ρ )
1) v = kλ g d 2) v = kλg and wavelength λ ). The square of speed (v)
is proportional to
2 2 3 −1 −1
3) v = kλdg 4) v = kλ g d
σ ρ
34. If the velocity of light (c); gravitational constant 1) 2)
(G) and Planck’s constant (h) are chosen as ρλ σλ
fundamental units, then the dimensions of
mass in new system are λ ρλ
3) 4)
1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 −1/2 σρ σ
1) c .G .h 2) c G h
Integer Type
1/2 −1/2 1/2 −12 1/2 1/2
3) c .G .h 4) c G h
39. If unit of length, mass and time each be
a doubled the unit of work is increased by .......
35. The dimensions of in the equation
2 b times.
a−t
P= where P is the pressure, x is the
bx 40. The effective length of a simple pendulum
distance and t is the time are is the sum of the following three: length of
string, radius of bob, and length of hook. In
1) MT–2 2) M2LT–3 a simple pendulum experiment, the length
of the string, as measured by a meter scale,
3) ML3T–1 4) LT–3
is 92.0 cm. The radius of the bob combined
∈0 L∆V with the length of the hook, as measured by
36. A quantity X is given by where ∈0 is a vernier callipers, is 2.16cm. The effective
∆t length of the pendulum is (in cm)
the permittivity of free space, L is a length.
∆V is a potential difference and ∆t is a time 41. An experiment measures quantities a, b and
interval. The dimensional formula for X is the
ab 2
same as that of c, then X is calculated from X = . If the
c3
1) resistance 2) charge percentage errors in a, b, and c are
± 1%, ± 3% and ± 2% , respectively, then
3) voltage 4) current
the percentage error in X can be .......%

16
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

Assertion - Reason Type 45. Statement I : The parallax method cannot

be used to find the distance
1) Both Assertion and Reason are True
of every distant star.
and Reason is a correct explanations of
Assertion Statement II : The parallax angle of the
star becomes too small to be
2) Both Assertion and Reason are True but
measured accurately.
Reason is not the correct explanation of
Assertion 46. Statement I : S.I. units are logical and
3) Assertion is True but the Reason is false coherent.
4) Both Assertion and Reason are false Statement II : S.I. system of units is a
rationalised system.
42. Assertion : All derived quantities may be
represented dimensionally in 1 T
terms of the base quantities. 47. Statement I : In the relation f = ,
2 µ
Reason : The dimension of a base
quantity in other base where symbols have
quantities is always zero. standard meaning, µ
   represent linear mass
43. Assertion : The unit vectors i , j and k density.
have units of distance and
dimensions [Mo L1 To]. Statement II : The frequency has the
dimensions of inverse of
Reason : The product of a scalar and time.
a vector is a new scalar.
Match the following Type
44. Assertion : When the radius of sphere is
measured with an error of 48. Match List I with List II and select the correct
± 2% , e r r o r i n t h e answer by using the codes given below the
calculations of its surface lists.
area is ± 4% .
List I List II
∆S ∆R (Item) (Units of Length)
Reason 4πR 2 ;
: s= 2
=
S R A) Distance between 1) Micron
Statement Type earth and stars
B) Inter atomic 2) Angstrom
The following questions consist of two distance in a solid
statements each given as Statement I and
C) Size of nucleus 3) Light year
Statement II. It is needed to choose any one
of the following responses. D) Wavelength of 4) Fermi
infrared Laser
1) Statement I and Statement II both are 5) Kilometer
correct
2) Statement I and Statement II both are 1) A - 5, B - 4, C - 2, D - 1
incorrect
2) A - 3, B - 2, C - 4, D - 1
3) Statement I is correct , and Statement II
is incorrect 3) A - 5, B - 2, C - 4, D - 3
4) Statement I is incorrect, but Statement II
is correct. 4) A - 3, B - 4, C - 1, D - 2

17
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

49. Match the following. 50. Match the following.

List I List II List I List II

A) R/L P) Time A) Electrical P) [M–1 L–2 T4 A2]

resistance
B) CR Q) Frequency

C) E/B R) Speed B) Capacitance Q) [ML2 T–2 A–2]

D) S) None C) Magnetic field R) [ML2 T–3 A–2]

ε 0µ 0
D) Inductance S) [MT–2 A–1]
1) A - Q, B - P, C - R, D - S
1) A - R, B - P, C - S, D - Q
2) A - Q, B - P, C - S, D - R
2) A - P, B - S, C - R, D - Q
3) A - P, B - Q, C - R, D - S
3) A - S, B - R, C - P, D - Q
4) A - Q, B - R, C - P, D - S
4) A - S, B - P, C - R, D - Q

18
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

KEY WITH HINTS

n 2 M1L1T1−2 6. 3 NVD = (N –1)SD;

1. 3 =
n1 M 2 L 2 T2−2  N −1 
1 VD =   SD ;
 N 
n
−2 V. C. = least count = 1 SD – 1 VD
 gm  cm  sec. 
2 =    
100  kg   m  min ute   N −1  0.1
V.C. =
1 −  SD = cm
 N  10N
−2
 1  1  1 
    1MSD 1mm 1
 1000  100  60  LC
or = = = cm
N N 10N

100 × 3600 7. 1 ∆d =∆ =LC

=
n2 = 3.6
1000 ×100
pitch 0.5mm
= =
2. 2 As distance = velocity × time = c × t total circular scale division 100

∴ s =1× ( 8 × 60 + 20 ) = 500 new unit

4MgL
−5 Y=
dyne 70 ×10 N πd 2 
3. 3 σ 70=
=
cm 10−2 m

= 70 × 10–3 N/m ∆Y ∆  ∆d 
∴ = + 2 
Y   d 
4. 1 Magnification of microscope = 100
Observed width of the hair = 3.5 mm
0.5 mm /100  0.5mm /100 
Observed width =
+ 2 
Magnification = 0.25 mm  0.5mm 
Re al width

0.5 ×10−2 0.5 ×10−2

Observed width 3.5 =
+
Real width = 0.25 0.25
Magnification width 100
Hence, the error in the measurement of
10 d and l are equal.
5. 2 I SD = cm = 0.050 cm
200 8. 3 ∆x = ∆a + ∆b

∆x  ∆a + ∆b 
1.2 ×
= 100   ×100
=
1 VD = cm 0.048 cm x  a+b 
25

LC= 1MSD – 1VSD = 0.05 – 0.048  ∆a ∆b 

= +  ×100
= 0.002 cm a+b a+b

19
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

9. 3 y = kxa; Thickness t = R1 – R2 = 0.17 cm

Now don’t get confused with k. It’s just a ∆t = ∆R1 + ∆R 2 = 0.01 cm
constant !
( t +=
∆t ) ( 0.17 ± 0.01) cm
∆y ∆x ∆y
= a.=
; a.p 17. 2 Planck time tp
y x y
∴ Depends on both a and p. hG 6.62 ×10−34 × 6.67 ×10−11
= =
5
C ( 3 ×108 )5
5 × 0.5
10. =
3 Zero error = = 0.05 mm
50
44.164 ×10−45
Actual measurement = =
= 4.26 ×10−43
40
243 ×10
25 × 0.5
=2 × 0.5 + − 0.05 ∴ the order is –43
50
18. 4 Value of current (3.23 A) has minimum
= 1 + 0.25 – 0.05 = 1.2 mm significant figure (3). So the value of
11. 2 Zeroes placed to the left of the first non potential difference V (=IR) has only three
zero digit are not significant. significant figures. Hence, its value is 35.0 V.

12. 2 Here volume is an intrinsic property of 19. 4 X = capacitance = [M–1L–2T4A2];

each sphere. So, it will have the same Z = magnetic induction = [ML0T–2A–1]
number of significant digits even they are ∴ From X = 3YZ2;
measured in bulk.
X M −1L−2 T 4 A 2
∴ The final result should be having 3 =
Y =
significant digits. Just multiply 1.76 × 25 3Z2 [ ML0 T −2 A −1 ]2
and then scale the result to 3 significant
20. 4 Pascal × second = Pressure × time
digits.
13. 2 A = 10.5 × 2.1 = 22.05cm2 = 22.1 cm2 = ML−1T −=

2
×T [ ML−1T −1 ]
14. 1 Total surface area again,

6 × ( 5.402 ) =
=
2
175.089cm 2 =
175.1 cm 2 dV
F = ηA.
dx
(upto correct number of significant figure)
Total volume =
MLT −2 1 [ −1 −1 ]
3 =
∴η = . −1 ML T
= (=
5.402 ) 157.639
= cm3 157.6 cm3 L2 T
(upto correct number of significant figure). 21. 4 Dipole moment, p = qa;
15. 2 percentage error in volume is So its dimensions [ p ] = [ M L T Q ]
0 1 0 1

 
 0.01 0.01 0.01 
 + + 100 =
 15.12 10.15 5.28 
0.35% ∫
Electric flux φ = E . ds ;

[φ] =[ M1L3T −2Q−1 ]

( R1 ± =
16. 3 ∆R1 ) ( 2.115 ± 0.005 ) cm
Electric field [ E ] = [ M L T Q ]
1 1 −3 −1

( R 2 ± ∆=
R 2 ) (1.945 ± 0.005 ) cm

20
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

2 P P0 exp ( −αt )
22. =
2
β =[ M1/3 L−1 ]
To find the constant α ; Also α = force × density
All the quantities inside the exp ( ) will=
be
[ =
MLT −2 ][ ML−3 ] [ M 2 L−2T −2 ]
dimensionless [M0L0T0].
M
So∴[ α ] [ T ] =[ M 0 L0T 0 ] ∝ px vy
2
27. 2
At
[ α ] =[ M 0 L0 T −2 ]
ML−2 T −1 = [ ML−1T −2 ] [ LT −1 ]
x y
∴ the dimension are [ M 0 L0 T −2 ] or [ T −2 ]

23.
a b c
1 T∝ρ r S ; x = 1, –x + y = – 2, – 2x – y = – 1
a c y = –1, x = – y
=
T (=
ML−3 ) Lb ( MT −2 ) M a + c L−3a + b T −2c
a + c = 0; 28. 2 [ h ] [ =
= ML2 T −1 ] , [ c ] [ LT −1 ] ,
–3a + b = 0 [ G ] = [ M −1L3T −2 ]
–2c = 1
hc hG
1 3 1 M∝ , L∝
S o l v i n g a= , b= and c = − G c3
2 2 2
29. 4 Energy density =
1/2
 ρr 3  Energy
∴T =
k  = ML−1T −2
 S  volume

24. y a sin ωt + bt + ct 2 cos ωt ;

4 = F charge work
= =
× = ML−1T −2
A volume charge
y y
a y,=
= b ,c 2
=
t t ML2 T −1
= M 0 L2 T −1 (Different)
M
3
y y y
a ×b×c = y× × 2 =   30. 1 mg = F= 6πηrv T ;
t t t
mg mg
25. 2 Hubble constant; =
vT ; vT ∝
6πηr ηr
speed of galaxy
H=
Distance of galaxy from us 31. P mv ∝ Fx v y d z ;
4 =

MLT −1
= [ Fx v y D z ]
speed 1 −1
=
H = = ( Time )
distance time = [T ] [ LT −1 ]y [ ML−3 ]z
−1 x

3 Equating the powers we get,

26. 3 Dimensions of β = dimensions of density
z = 1; y = 4 ;x = – 3 ∴P =F−3 v 4 D1
= [ML ];
–3

21
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

32. v ea h bµ c G d
1= a − t2 a 1 t2
35. 1=P = . −
bx b x bx
b c d
( AT )a ( ML2 T −1 ) ( MLT −2 A −2 ) ( M −1L3T −2 )
a 1 
a – 2c = 0, a – b – 2c – 2d = –1; [Pressure] =  .  .
b x 

2b + c + 3d = 1, b + c – d = 0
 t2 
a = –2, b = 1, c = –1, d = 0 Also [Pressure] =  ;
 b.x 

v e −2 hµ −1G o
=
[ ML−1T −= ]    ∴  =a   1  a  [

2
MT −2 ]
33. 2 v∝λ ρ g ;
a b c
 b   L   b 

b
M 0 L1T −1 = La ( ML−3 ) ( LT −2 )c ∆V ( −1 −3 4 2 ) ( ) ( ML2 T −3 A −1 )
36. 4 x=
∈0 L × = M L TA L
∆t T
b a −3b + c −2c
=M L T
[ =
= M 0 L0 T 0 A1 ] current
b = 0; a – 3b + c = 1; – 2c = –1
h ML2 T −1
=
37. 4 = ML2 T −2 A −1
Solving e AT

1 1 = Magnetic flux
=
a =
, b 0 and
= c
2 2 a b c
38. 1 v∝σ ρ λ ; LT–1 = (MT–2)a (ML–3)bLc;
1/2 1/2 2
∴v∝λ g ; ∴ v =λ
k g
a+b=0
3 Let [ m ] = K.c G h ;
x y z
34. –3b + c = 1

–2a = –1
[ m ] = [ LT −1 x
] .[ M −1L3T −2 ]y .[ ML2T −1 ]z
1 1 1 σ
[ ML0T 0 ] = M − y + z .Lx +3y + 2z .T − x −2y−z b=
− ;c=
− ;a=; v∝
2 2 2 ρλ

Compare powers of M, L and T on both 2 −2

sides 39. 2 [W
= ] ML2 T −2 ; [ W
= ] 2M × ( 2L ) ( 2T )

1 1 1 2M × 4L2
x= , y=
− ,z= =
= 2ML2 T −2
4T 2
2 2 2
∴ [Mass in new system] 40. 94

1/2 −1/2 1/2

= c .G .h 92.0 + 2.16 = 94.16 = 94.2cm

22
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

41. 13 46. 1 A coherent system means a system

based on a certain set of basic units
ab 2 ∆x ∆x ∆a 2∆b 3∆c from which all derived units are obtained
X= ; = = + + by multiplication or division without
c3 x x a b c introducing numerical factors. In SI system
= 1 + 2 × 3 + 3 × 2 = 13% of units heat energy, electric energy and
mechanical energy are measured in joule
(J). But in CGS system, they have different
42. 2
units.
43. 4
1 T 2 T
47. From f
1= = , f
2 µ 4 2 µ
44. 1

b T [ MLT −2 ] [ M ] Mass
45. 1 The parallax angle is given by θ = or=
µ = = =
s 4 2 f 2 [ L2T −2 ] [ L] length
where b is the base (distance between
two points on the earth) and s is the = linear mass density.
distance of the star from the earth. For a
very distant star, s is very large and hence 48. 2
the parallax angle θ becomes too small
49. 1
to be measured accurately. Thus, both
Statement I and Statement II are correct. 50. 1

23
 CHAPTER
MOTION IN A STRAIGHT LINE
02

ONE DIMENSION MOTION

It is that motion in which a particle or a body moves in one particular direction with respect to a
point of reference.

Objects in Rest and motion

Rest: An object is said to be at rest if its position does not change with time with respect to its
surroundings

Motion: An object is said to be in motion if it changes its position with time, with respect to its
surroundings.

1. Distance and Displacement

Distance is the actual path length covered by a moving particle or a body in a given interval of
time, while displacement is the change in position vector. ie., a vector joining initial to final position.

Consider a particle at A moving to C along a path ABC. Its initial and final position vectors are
    
r1 and r2 . The distance travelled is the actual path ABC while the displacement is ∆ r = r2 − r1

• Displacement ≤ distance travelled.

• Displacement is a vector quantity and distance travelled is a scalar quantity.

• The value of distance travelled can never be zero or negative. The value of displacement can
be positive, negative or zero.

2. Speed and Velocity

The distance covered by a particle per unit time is known as speed. The rate of change of position
is known as velocity.

24
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Average speed and Average velocity

The average speed of a particle in a given time interval is defined as the ratio of total distance
total distance
travelled to the total time taken. average speed =
total time

Average velocity is defined as the ratio of total displacement to the total time taken

total displacement ∆r r2 − r1
average velocity = vav = ; =
total time ∆t ∆t

• When particle moves the first half of a distance at a speed of v1 and second half of the distance
at speed v2 then

2v1v 2
v av =
v1 + v 2

Instantaneous Speed and Instantaneous Velocity

The magnitude of speed at any instant of time is known as instantaneous speed.

∆s ds
Instantaneous speed = lim = where s is the distance travelled in time t.
∆t → 0 ∆t dt

∆r
Instantaneous velocity of a particle is the velocity of the particle at an instant v av =
∆t
 
∆r dr
Instantaneous velocity v = lim =
x →∞ ∆t dt
 
dr dr ds
Magnitude of the instantaneous velocity is v = = = . ie, It is equal to the instantaneous
dt dt dt
speed at time t

Uniform Velocity

If the velocity of a particle remains constant as time passes, it is moving with uniform velocity and
the body is in uniform motion. If the velocity changes with time the body is accelerated.

3. Acceleration

It is the rate of change of velocity. Acceleration is a vector.

Average Acceleration is the ratio of change in velocity in a certain time interval to the time interval.
 
v 2 − v1
a v =
t 2 − t1

25
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Instantaneous Acceleration is the acceleration of a body at a certain instant of time.

 
 ∆v dv
=a lim
=
∆t → 0 ∆t dt
As ∆t → 0 , this average acceleration become instantaneous acceleration.
Graphical analysis of 1-D motion
I. Position - time graph.
Position-time graph is plotted by taking time t along horizontal axis and position x on vertical axis.
• Slope of position-time graph at any instant of time gives instantaneous velocity.
(i) When particle is at rest.

(ii) When the particle is moving with uniform velocity

Graph : Straight line having non-zero slope

dx
v=
dt
(iii) When the particle is moving with uniform acceleration.
x – t graph will be parabolic

II. Velocity - time graph

v-t graph is plotted by taking time on horizontal axis and velocity on vertical axis.
• Slope of v-t graph gives acceleration.
• Area under v-t graph gives displacement

26
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

(i)

Motion in positive direction with positive acceleration.

(ii)

Motion in positive direction with –ve acceleration

(iii)

Motion of an object with negative acceleration. In between time 0 to t1 it moves in +ve x direction
and after t1 it starts moving in opposite direction.

(iv)

Motion in –ve direction with –ve acceleration

27
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

III. Acceleration - time graph

a-t graph is plotted by taking acceleration along vertical axis and time along horizontal axis. Area
under a-t gives “change” in velocity.

Kinematic equations for uniformly accelerated motions

Suppose the body is having a constant acceleration a and at t = 0, the velocity is u and at t = t,
the velocity is v

(i) v = u + at

1 2
s ut +
(ii) = at
2

(iii) v2 = u2 + 2as

 1 1
(iv) s n = u + a  n −  ⇒ u + a ( 2n − 1)
 2 2

Retardation or Deceleration

When the velocity and acceleration of a body are along opposite direction, the speed of the body
decreases. Then the body is said to be decelerated.

Stopping time and stopping distance

u
Stopping time, t =
a
u2
Stopping distance, s =
2a

Motion of a body under gravity.

When a body moves under the action of earth’s gravitational field alone, the body is said to be
freely falling.

A body is dropped from some height with initial velocity zero and a = g, then equations of motion:

28
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

• If a body starts from rest and moves with uniform acceleration that distance covered by the
2
body in t second is proportional to t 2 as h ∝ t , ratio of distance covered in 1 second,
2 seconds and 3 seconds is 12 : 22 : 32 or 1 : 4 : 9

• If a body starts from rest and move with uniform acceleration then distance covered by the
body in n th second is proportional to (2n – 1). Ratio of distance covered in 1 second,
2 second, 3 second is 1:3:5.

• The motion is independent of the mass of the body, as in any equation of motion, mass is
not involved. That is why a heavy and light body when released from the same height, reach
velocity i.e., t
the ground simultaneously and with same= ( 2h / g ) and v
= 2gh

• In case of motion under gravity, time taken to go up is equal to the time taken to fall through
u
the same distance. Time of descent (t1) = Time of ascent (t2) =
g

2t
• ∴ Total time of flight T = t1 + t 2 =
g

• A ball is dropped from a building of height h and it reaches after t seconds on earth. From
the same building it two ball are thrown (one upwards and other downwards) with the same
velocity u and they reach the earth surface after t1 and t2 seconds respectively, then
t = t1 t 2

29
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

QUESTIONS

1. A particle moves 3 m north, then 4 m 5. A car moves from A to B with a uniform speed
east, and then 12 m vertically upwards, its v1 and returns to A with a uniform speed v2.
displacement is The average speed for this round trip is
1) 12 m 2) 13 m v1 + v 2
1) 2) v1v 2
3) 19 m 40 15 m 2
v1v 2 2v1v 2
2. Correct statement among the following is 3) 4)
v1 + v 2 v1 + v 2
1) When displacement is zero, distance
travelled may not be zero 6. Which of the following velocity-time graphs
2) When displacement is zero, distance shows a realistic situation for a body in
travelled is also zero motion.
1) 2)
3) When distance is zero, displacement is
not zero
4) Distance travelled and displacement are
always equal
3. A body moves from one corner of an 3) 4)
equilateral triangle of side 10 cm to the same
corner along the sides. Then the distance and
displacement are respectively
1) 30 cm and 10 cm
2) 30 cm and 0 cm
3) 0 cm and 30 cm 7. The displacement-time graph of a body is
shown in figure.
4) 30 cm and 30 cm
4. The displacement - time graph of a particle
is as shown below. It indicates that

The velocity-time graph of the motion of the

1) the particle starts with a certain velocity, body will be
but the motion is retarded and finally the 1) 2)
particle stops
2) the velocity of the particle is constant
throughout
3) the acceleration of the particle is constant
throughout 3) 4)
4) the particle starts with a velocity, the
motion is accelerated and finally the
particle moves with a constant velocity.

30
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

8. If a car covers 2/5th of the total distance with 13. A truck on a straight road at rest accelerates
v1 speed and 3/5th distance with v2 speed at 2 m/s2 until it reaches a velocity of 20 m/s.
then average speed is Then it travels for 15 s at constant velocity
1 v1 + v 2 until brakes are applied, stopping the truck
1) v1v 2 2) in a uniform manner in an additional 5 s. The
2 2
magnitude of the average velocity of the truck
in the journey is
2v1v 2 5v1v 2
3) 4)
v1 + v 2 3v1 + 2v 2 1) 12.5 m/s 2) 15 m/s

9. During an accelerated motion of a particle. 3) 17.5 m/s 4) 20 m/s

1) Average velocity of the particle is always 14. If the displacement of a particle varies with
less than its final velocity
time as x= t +3
2) Average velocity of the particle is always
greater than its final velocity 1) velocity of the particle is inversely
3) Average velocity of the particle may be proportional to t
zero also
2) velocity of particle varies linearly with t
4) Average velocity of the particle is half its
final velocity 3) velocity of particle is proportional to t
10. A point moves in a straight line so that its
displacement x metre at time t second is 4) initial velocity of the particle is zero
2 2
given by x = 1 + t . Its velocity in ms–1 at time 15. A particle moves with velocity v towards
east for time t and with velocity 2v for
t second is time 2t along north. Find the average
1) (1 + t2)1/2 2) t(1 + t2) velocity.
3) t(1 + t2)–1/2 4) t(1 + t)–1/2
15v 5v
11. The acceleration time graph of a particle 1) 2)
moving in a straight line is as shown in the 3 3
figure. The velocity of the particle at time
t = 0 is 2 m/s. The velocity after 2 s will be 17 v 17 v
3) 4)
2 3
16. A car travels half the distance with a constant
velocity of 40 m/s and the remaining half with
a constant velocity of 60 m/s. The average
velocity of the car is

1) 42 m/s 2) 50 m/s
1) 6 m/s 2) 4 m/s
3) 48 m/s 4) 45 m/s
3) 2 m/s 4) 8 m/s
12. A 10 hr t our is made at an average speed of 17. A 150 m long train is moving with a uniform
40 kph. If during the first half of the distance velocity of 45 km/h. The time taken by the
the average speed of the bus was 30 kph, train to cross a bridge of length 850 m
what was the average speed (in km/hr) for is
the second half of the trip?
1) 56 s 2) 68 s
1) 40 2) 60
3) 70 4) 80 3) 80 s 4) 92 s

31
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

18. The position - time relation of a particle 22. A particle starts moving from rest with uniform
moving along the x-axis is given by acceleration. It travels a distance x in the first
x = a – bt + ct2 2 s and a distance y in the next 2 s. Then
where, a, b and c are positive numbers. The 1) y = x 2) y = 2x
velocity - time graph of the particle is 3) y = 3x 4) y = 4x
1) 2)
23. A particle is moving along the x-axis whose
acceleration is given by a = 3x – 4, where
x is the location of the particle. At t = 0, the
particle is at rest at x = 4/3 m. The distance
travelled by the particle in 5 s is

3) 4) 1) zero 2) 42 m
3) Infinite 4) None of these
24. A car moving with a speed of 40 km/h can be
stopped by applying the brakes after at least
2 m. If the same car is moving with a speed
of 80 km/h. What is the minimum stopping
19. A body is moving with a uniform acceleration distance?
covers 40 m in the first 4 s and 120 m in next
4 s. Its initial velocity and acceleration are 1) 8 m 2) 2 m
1) 0, 5 m/s2 2) 4 m/s, 5 m/s2 3) 4 m 4) 6 m
3) 4 m/s, 0 4) 4 m/s, 5 m/s 2
25. When the speed of a car is u, the minimum
20. The velocity-time graph of a particle moving distance over which it can be stopped is
in a straight line is shown in figure. The s. If the speed becomes nu, what will be
acceleration of the particle at t = 9 s is the minimum distance over which it can be
stopped during the same time?

1) 2) ns

3) 4) n2s
26. A driver travelling at 90 km/h applies brakes
for 5 s. If the braking acceleration was 2 m/
s2, what was his final speed?
1) 15 m/s 2) 10 m/s
1) Zero 2) 5 ms –2
3) 5 m/s 4) 25 m/s
3) –5 ms –2
4) –2 ms –2
27. A parachutist after bailing out falls 80 m
21. The motion of a particle along a straight line is without friction. When the parachute opens, it
described by equation x = 8 + 12t – t3 where decelerates at 2 m/s2. He reaches the ground
x is in metre and t in second. The retardation with a speed of 20 m/s. At what height, did
of the particle when its velocity becomes zero, he bail out?
is:
1) 180 m 2) 280 m
1) 6 m/s2 2) 12 m/s2
3) 380 m 4) 480 m
3) 24 m/s2 4) Zero

32
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

28. Two balls A and B of same masses are thrown 32. A body starts from rest and is uniformly
from the top of the building. A, thrown upward accelerated for 30 s. The distance travelled
with velocity V and B, thrown downward with in the first 10 s is x1, next 10 s is x2 and the
velocity V, then last 10 s is x3. Then, x1 : x 2 : x3 is
1) Velocity of A is more than B at the ground 1) 1 : 2 : 4 2) 1 : 2 : 5
2) Velocity of B is more than A at the ground
3) 1 : 3 : 5 4) 1 : 3 : 9
3) Both A and B strike the ground with same
velocity 33. A stone thrown upward with a speed ‘u’ from
the top of the tower reaches the ground with
4) None of these
a velocity ‘3u’. The height of the tower is
29. A ball is thrown vertically upwards. Which of
the following plots represent the speed time 3u 2 4u 2
graph of the ball during its flight if the air 1) 2)
g g
resistance is ignored?

1) 2) 6u 2 9u 2
3) 4)
g g

34. When a ball is thrown up vertically with

velocity v0, it reaches a maximum height of
h. If one wishes to triple the maximum height,
3) 4) the ball should be thrown with velocity:

1) 3 v0 2) 3v0

3v 0
3) 9v0 4)
30. A ball of mass m1 and and another ball of 2
mass m2 are dropped from equal height.
35. There are two balls. A and B at same level. A
If the time taken by the balls are t1 and t2,
is thrown up with 20m/sec. After 1 sec, ball B
respectively, then
is thrown with 40m/sec, after how much time
1) t1 = t2 2) t1 = 2t2 the two balls cross each other?

t1 m1 t1 m 2 1 sec 2) 2 sec
3) = 4) =
t 2 m2 t 2 m1
3) 1.5 sec 4) 3 sec
31. A ball is released from the top of a tower of
height h. It takes time T to reach the ground. 36. A stone is dropped from a certain height which
What is the position of the ball (from ground) can reach the ground in 5 s. It is stopped after
after time T/3? 3 s of its fall and then it is again released.
The total time taken by the stone to reach
h 7h the ground will be
1) m 2) m
9 9
1) 6 s 2) 6.5 s
8h 17h
3) m 4) m
9 18 3) 7 s 4) 7.5 s

33
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

37. If a freely falling body travels in the last 42. A stone falls from a balloon that is descending
second of a distance equal to the distance at a uniform rate of 12 m/s The displacement
travelled by it in the first three seconds, the of the stone from the point of release after 10
time of travel is (in s) s is ...... m

1) 3 2) 5
43. A particle starts from the origin with a velocity
of 10 ms –1 and moves with a constant
3) 6 4) 7
acceleration till the velocity increases to
38. Two bodies of different masses m1 and m2 50 ms–1. At that instant, the acceleration is
are dropped from two different heights ‘a’ and suddenly reversed. What will the velocity
‘b’. The ratio of the time taken by the two to (in m/s) of the particle when it returns to the
cover these distances is: starting point?

1) a : b 2) b : a 44. Two balls of equal masses are thrown

upwards, along the same vertical direction
3) a: b 4) a2 : b2 at an interval of 2 seconds, with the same
initial velocity of 40 m/s. Then these collide
39. A body is released from a height and falls at a height of (Take g = 10 m/s2) ...... m
freely towards the earth. Another ball is
released from the same height exactly one Assertion - Reason Type
second later. The separation between two
bodies, two seconds after the release of the
second body is 1) If both the Assertion and Reason are true
and the Reason is true explanation of the
1) 4.9 m 2) 9.8 m Assertion

3) 19.6m 4) 24.5 m 2) If both the Assertion and Reason are true

but the Reason is not the true explanation
40. A particle is thrown upwards from ground. It of the Assertion
experiences a constant air resistance which
can produce a retardation of 2 m/s2 opposite 3) If Assertion is true but Reason is false
to the direction fo velocity of particle. The ratio
of time of ascent to the time of descent is (g 4) If Assertion is false but Reason is true
= 10 m/s2)
45. Assertion : An object can have constant
2 speed but variable velocity.
1) 1 : 1 2)
v
Reason : Speed is a scalar but velocity
is a vector quantity.
2 3
3) 4)
3 2 46. Assertion : A body can have an
acceleration even if its
velocity is zero at a given
Numerical Type
instant of time.
41. A body freely falling from the rest has a
velocity V after it falls through a height ‘h’. Reason : A body is momentarily at rest
The distance it has to fall down for its velocity when it reverses its direction
to become double (in h) is of motion.

34
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

Statement Type 50. The position of an object moving along X-axis

is given by x = a – bt2, where a = 8.5 m, b =
1) If both Statement I and Statement II are
2.5 ms–2 and t is measured in seconds.
true
2) If both Statement I and Statement II are
false Column I Column II
3) If Statement I is true but Statement II is A) Velocity of object at 1) –15 ms–1
false t = 2.0 s
4) If Statement I is false but Statement II is
true B) Velocity of object at 2) –10 ms–1
47. Statement I : The instantaneous velocity t=0
does not depend on
instantaneous position C) Instantaneous 3) 0 ms–1
vector. speed of object at
Statement II : The instantaneous velocity t = 2.0 s
and average velocity of a
particle are always same. D) Average velocity 4) 10 ms–1
between t = 2.0 s
48. Statement I : A negative acceleration of a
and t = 4.0 s
body can be associated with
a ‘speeding up’ of the body.
Statement II : Increase in speed of a moving For the above situation match the terms in
body is independent of its Column I with the values of Column II and
direction of motion. choose the correct option from the codes
given below.
49. Statement I : The slope of displacement
- time graph of a body 1) A - 1; B - 2; C - 3; D -4
moving with high velocity
is steeper than the slope of
2) A - 2; B - 3; C - 4; D - 1
displacement - time graph of
a body with low velocity.
3) A - 4; B - 3; C - 2; D - 1
Statement II : Slope of displacement - time
graph = Velocity of the body. 4) A - 3; B - 2; C - 1; D - 4

35
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

KEY WITH HINTS

1. 2 displacement From t3 to t4, velocity is negative and

constant as indicated by negative and
= 32 + 42 + 122 = 169 = 13m constant slope.

2. 1 Distance depends on path followed by a

body. 2
8. 4 If total distance is s then s is covered
Distance depends on initial and final 3 5
with v1 and v2 s is covered with v2.
positions of a moving body. 5
If a moving body reaches to starting
point then displacement is zero but not s
Average speed is given by < v > =
distance. t1 + t 2
3.
2 Assume body starts from A and moves
along path ABCA and finally reaches to A. = = s s

∴ distance = AB + BC + CA = 10 + 10 + 2s 3s s 2 3 
+ +
5v1 5v 2 5  v1 v 2 
10 = 30 cm
displacement = 0 cm 5
=
 initial and final points are same. 2v 2 + 3v1
v1v 2

5v1v 2
< v >=
3v1 + 2v 2

9. 3 During an accelerated motion of particle,

average velocity of the particle may be
zero also. If body reaches its starting
4. 1 point.
5. 4
1/2
10.
2
3 x = (1 + t 2 )
1 + t 2 or x =

(1 + t dx 1 2 −1/2
) −1/2
=
Average speed =
d 2v1v 2 v== t (1 + t 2 )
2t =
d / 2 d / 2 v1 + v 2 dt 2
+
v1 v2
11. 1 Area under a-t graph gives the change in
6. 2 Time cannot return velocity (dv = a dt)
7. 4 From 0 to t 1, velocity is positive and
constant as indicated by positive and 1
constant slope. ∴ v f − vi = × 2× 4 = 4 m / s
2
From t1 to t3, slope is zero, hence velocity
is zero. ∴ v f = vi + 4 = 2 + 4 = 6 m / s

36
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

2 2 y = C + mx; Slope m = 2c, +ve;

=
12. 2 v avg = ; 40
1 1 1 1 Intercept, C = –b, –ve
+ +
v1 v 2 30 v 2
19. 1

1 2 1
= − ; ∴ v2 =
60 kmph
v2 40 30
13. 2 a = 2 m/s2; u = 0 m/s; v = 20 m/s; 1
A to B : 40 = u × 4 + a × 42 ;
2
20 1 2
v=
u + at1 , t1 == 10s;s1 = at1 , s 2 =
vt 2
2 2 40 = 4 u + 8 a -------- (i)
1
A to C : 40 + 120 = u × 8 + a × 82 ;
20 1 2 2
= = 4 m / s2 ; =
retardation s3 a ′t 3
5 2
160 = 8 u + 32 a ------- (ii)
Solving (i) and (ii),
distance
v avg = we get u = 0, a = 5 m/s2
time
20. 3 Acceleration between 8 and 10 s
(or at t = 9 s);
1 ( )2 1 2
2 10 + 20 (15 ) + ( 4 ) ( 5 )
2
= 15 m / s 4
10 + 15 + 5

2 21. 2 ;
14. 2 x = t + 3 ; ∴ x = ( t + 3)
dx
v
or = = 2 ( t + 3) ;
dt
; t=2
∴ velocity-time equation is linear.
;
displacement
15. 4 Average velocity =
time
Retardation = 12 m/s2
22. 3=x 0;=
t1 2,=
t 2 2s;
= s1 x
2 2
( vt ) + ( 4vt ) 17 v
= =
3t 3 t1 + =
t 2 4s; =
s2 y

16. 3
150 + 850 1000 1 ( )2
17. t
3 = = ×=6 80s =
x =a 2 2a
5 75 2
45 ×
18
dx 1 ( )2
18. 3 x = a – bt + ct2; v = =− b + 2ct x=
+y a=
4 8a
dt 2
y = 8a − x = 6a ; y = 3x
v-t graph ; y = –b + 2 cx, straight line

37
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

4 28. 3 v2 – u2 = 2as;
23. 1 At t = 0, v = 0, x = m ;  Displacement, acceleration and initial
3
4×3 speed are same.
a
= −=4 0
3 ∴ Velocity on striking the ground also
same.
As both the particle velocity and
acceleration are zero at t = 0, it will 29. 3 During ascent speed decreases with time
always remains at rest and hence distance and becomes zero and during descent
travelled at any time interval would be speed increases with time.
zero. 30. 1 Time is independent of mass.
24. 1 v = u – 2as ;
2 2 1 2 1 2
h
= gt=
1 gt 2 ⇒ t=
1 t2
0 = (40)2 – 2a × 2 ----- (i) ; 2 2
0 = (80)2 – 2a × d ----- (ii);
1 2
d=8m 31. 3 We have h = gT ;
2 2 2 T 2
25. 4 v − u = 2as, v = 0; s ∝ u In second,
When the initial velocity is made n times, 3 2
the distance over which can be stopped 1 T h
distance fallen = g   =
becomes n2 times. 2 3 9
26. 1 Given driver is travelling at So position of the ball from the ground is
5 h 8h
u = 90 × = 25 m / s h− = m
18 9 9
After applying brakes for 5 s, the final
speed is given by 1 2
3 x1
32. = =a (10 ) 50a;
v = u + at (Retardation a = –ve); 2

= 25 – 2(5) = 15 m/s 1 2 1
x 2 = a ( 20 ) − ( a )(10 )2 =150a
27. 3 A to B : motion under gravity 2 2
v2 = 2 × 10 × 80 = 1600
1 2 1 2
x3 = a ( 30 ) − a ( 20 ) = 250a
2 2

∴ x1 : x 2 : x 3 =
1: 3 : 5

33. 2 v = u + at; 2u = at ;
2u 1 2

=t = ;h gt + ut
g 2
B to C : motion under retardation ;
v′=
2
v 2 − 2ah 1 4u 2 2u 2u 2 2u 2 4u 2
2 = ( g ) 2 + u   = + =
( 20=
) 1600 − 2 × 2 × h ; 2 g  g  g g g
4h = 1200;
34. 1 If h is the maximum height attained thrown
⇒h=
300 m
Total height = 80 + 300 = 380 m with velocity v0, then v 0 = 2gh

38
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

If v’ is the velocity when height is three

h t12 t1 a
times the initial height reached, then =1
= ;
h2 t 22 t 2 b
v0 h
= = ; v′ 3 v0
v′ 3h ∴ t1 : t 2 =
a: b
35. 3 The displacement of each ball will be same 1 2
39. 4 s1 = g ( 3)
when they cross each other. For ball A 2
t2
s = 20t – g ; 1 ( )3
2 s2 = g 2
Ball B is at the same point in time t – 1; 2
2
g ( t − 1)
( )
s 40 t − 1 −
= 1
2 ∆s = 5 × × 10 = 25 = 24.5 ( g = 9.8 )
2
From the two equations;
2 2
g(t) g ( t − 1) 2h 1
20t − = 40t − 40 − ; =
40. 2 t or t ∝
2 2 a a
On solving t = 1.5 sec
t a2 10 − 2 2
1 =
1
= =
36.
2
3 Here h = × 10 × ( 5 ) =125m ; t2 a1 10 + 2 3
2
41. 4 v1 = 2v; at1 = 2at; t1 = 2t ;
In 3 s it falls through:
1 2 1 2 1 2( )
1 2 h1
= =gt g (=
2t ) gt =
4 4h
h1 = ×10 × ( 3) = 45 m 2 2 2
2
42. 610
Rest 80 m is covered in 4 s. Hence, total
1
time taken is 3s + 4s = 7s. ut + gt 2 ( Take g =
s= 9.8 m / s 2 )
2
1 2
37. 2 If s′ = gt is a distance travelled in the
2 1
first 3 seconds. =
s 12 (10 ) + ( 9.8 )(100 )
2
 1
sn g  n −
If=  is the distance travelled 490 + 120 = 610 m
 2
43. 70
in the last second. For s1 distance, v2 = u2 – 2as1;
 1 1 2 2500 = 100 – 2as1 ;
Equating s’ = sn, we get g  n − = gt
 2 2 2400
∴ s1 =
2a
1 1 10
n− =( 9 ) ; =
n = 5; n=5s For s2 distance v2 = u2 – 2as2
2 2 2
2500
38. 3 If the height covered by the mass m1 is h1 0 = 2500 – 2as2; s2 =
2a
and mass m2 is h2 respectively, then
4900
1 2 total distance = ;
b; h
h1 = a, h2 == gt ; h ∝ t12 20
2

39
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

At initial point u = 0 m/s; 47. 3 Statement I true Statement II false.

4900 48. 1 A body having negative acceleration can
v2 = 2as= 2a × ; ∴v=70 m / s
2a be associated with a speeding up, if object
moves along negative X-direction with
44. 75 increasing speed.
h1 = h2 (at the time of collision);
49. 1 Since slope of displacement - time graph
1 measures velocity of an object.
40t − ×10 × t 2
2 50. 2 Given, x (t) = a – bt2, a = 8.5 m and
b = 2.5 m/s2
1 2
dx
= 40 ( t − 2 ) −
×10 × ( t − 2 ) = −2bt
2 Velocity of object =
dt

Solving this equation, we get, t = 5 dx

second. (A) Velocity at t = 2.0 s = = −4b
dt t =2

Substituting the value of t, = – 4 × 2.5 = –10 ms–1

we get, h1 = h2 = 75 m dx
(B) velocity at t= 0= = 0 ms −1
45. 1 Since velocity is a vector quantity, dt t =0
hence as its direction changes keeping
magnitude constant, velocity is said to be (C) Instantaneous speed = Magnitude of
changed. But for constant speed in equal velocity = |–10 ms–1| = 10 ms–1
time interval distance travelled should be (D) Average velocity
equal. x ( t 2 ) − x ( t1 ) x ( 4) − x ( 2)
46. 1 Suppose velocity of a body an= d = t 2 − t1 4−2
acceleration are in opposite direction, then
surely acceleration acting in the opposite
direction will slow down the velocity of the a − b ( 4 )2  − a − b ( 2 )2  4b − 16b
body. Ultimately the body will= momentarily =
come to rest before reversing its direction 2 2
but at this instant of time only velocity will
be zero and acceleration will still be acting 12b
=− =−6b =−6 × 2.5 ms −1 =−15 ms −1
on the body. 2

40
 CHAPTER
MOTION IN A PLANE
03

A. VECTORS
Physical quantities are of two types:
• Scalars
• Vectors
Scalar Quantities or Scalars
The physical quantities which have only magnitude but no direction, are called scalar quantities
or scalars. Mass, length, time, distance covered, speed, temperature, work etc, are a few examples of
scalars.
Vector quantities or vectors
The physical quantities which have magnitude as well as direction are called vector quantities or
vectors. Displacement, velocity, acceleration, force, torque, gravitational intensity etc. are a few examples
of vectors.
Vectors in a plane (or in two dimensions)
Consider the motion of an object in the X-Y plane with origin at O. Let at time t, the object be at

point A. If we draw an arrow with its tail at point O and head at point A, as shown in Fig., then OA is

called position vector of the object at point A and is generally represented by r .


The magnitude of the vector is called the modulus of the vector. The modulus of a vector A is
 
represented by | A | or A. e.g., For a force F = 5N acting towards North, the magnitude of the force
vector is 5N
* Negative vector : A vector is said to be negative of a given vector if its magnitude is the same
as that of the given vector but direction is opposite to that of it.
* Equal vectors : Two vectors are said to be equal if they have same magnitude and direction
regardless of the position of their initial points.

41
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

* Collinear vectors : Vectors which are either along the same line or along parallel lines irrespective
of their magnitudes and directions are collinear vectors.
* Coplanar vectors : Vectors which are parallel to the same plane or lying in the same plane are
coplanar vectors.
* Unit vector : A unit vector of the given vector is a vector of unit magnitude and has the same
direction as that of the given vector. A unit vector in a given direction is also defined as a vector
in that direction divided by the magnitude of the given vector. It is a unitless and dimensionless
vector and represents direction only.

 a
Unit vector of a is written as â and is given by â = 
|a|
 ˆ ˆ ˆ a x ˆi + a y ˆj + a z kˆ
If a = a x i + a y j + a z k then â =
a 2x + a 2y + a 2z
ˆ ˆ ˆ
In Cartesian coordinates, i, j, k are the unit vectors along x-axis, y-axis and z-axis respectively.
* Null vector or zero vector : A vector of zero magnitude is known as zero or null vector. Its

direction is not defined. It is denoted by 0
Resultant vector
The resultant vector of two or more vectors is defined as that, single vector which produces the
same effect as is produced by individual vectors together. It is to be noted that the nature of the resultant
vector is the same as that of the given vectors.
Laws of vector addition
(1) Vectors of the same nature alone can be added eg. a force vector cannot be added to velocity
vector, but can be added to force vector only.
(2) Vector addition is commutative. It states that the sum of the vectors remains the same in
whatever order they may be added ie.,
   
A+B = B+A
(3) Vector Addition is Associative : It states that the sum of the vectors remains the same in
whatever, grouping they are added i.e.,
     
( A + B ) + C =A + ( B + C )
(i) Triangle law of vectors
It states that if two vectors acting on a particle at the same time are represented in magnitude
and direction by the two sides of a triangle taken in an order, their resultant vector is represented in
magnitude and direction by the third side of the triangle taken in the opposite order.
Magnitude and direction of R
 
Let the two vector A and B , inclined at an angle θ , act on a particle at the same time. Let them
 
be represented in magnitude and direction by the two sides OP and PQ of triangle OPQ, taken in the

same order, Then, according to triangle law of vector addition, the resultant R is represented by the

third side OQ of triangle, taken in opposite order.

42
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Bsin θ
R
i.e.,= A 2 + B2 + 2ABcos θ ; tan
= β
A + Bcos θ
(ii) Parallelogram law of vector addition
 
Let the two vectors A and B , inclined at angle θ be acting on a particle at the same time.

 
Let they be represented in magnitude and direction by two adjoining sides OP and OS of
parallelogram OPQS, drawn from a point O. According to parallelogram law of vectors, their resultant
 
vector R will be represented by the diagonal OQ of the parallelogram.
Bsin θ
R
= A 2 + B2 + 2ABcos θ and tan
= β
A + Bcos θ

Lamis’ theorem

Lami’s theorem states that if three forces acting at a point are in equilibrium, then each force is proportional
to the sine of the angle between the other two forces. Let A, B and C be three forces acting at a point
on a body making angles α, β and γ with each other,
A B C
Then = =
sin α sin β sin γ

Conditions for Zero Resultant Vector

If three vectors acting on a point object at the same time are represented in magnitude and direction by the
three sides of a triangle taken in the same order, their resultant is zero. Now the object is in equilibrium.

43
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Then

A B C
= =
OP PQ QO
  
Consider three vectors A, B and C -acting on an object at the same time. Let they be represented
in magnitude and direction by the various sides of a triangle taken in the same order, their resultant
vector is zero.
Polygon law of vector addition
   
Let the number of vectors A, B, C and D etc. be acting in different directions as shown in the Fig..

This method of finding the resultant is called polygon law of vectors.

Thus polygon law of vectors states that if a number of vectors, acting on a particle at the same
time are represented in magnitude and direction by various sides of an open polygon taken in the same
order, their resultant is represented in magnitude and direction by the closing side of the polygon taken
in opposite order.
Polygon law of vectors is an extension of the triangle law of vectors. According to polygon law of
    
vectors. A+B+C+D =R
SUBTRACTION OF VECTORS
  
Subtraction of vector B from a vector A is defined as the addition of vector − B (negative of
 
vector B ) to vector A . Thus
   
A − B = A + ( −B )
   
If the angle between A and B is θ , then the angle between A and − B is (180 − θ )
o

 
| A − B | = A 2 + B2 − 2ABcos θ

44
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

RESOLUTION OF A VECTOR
The process of splitting up a vector into two or more vectors is known as resolution of a vector.
The vectors into which a given vector is split are known as component vectors. When a vector is splitted
into two component vectors at right angles to each other, the component vectors are called rectangular
components of a vector.
Rectangular components of a vector in a plane :


Let vector A makes an angle θ with x-axis as shown in the figure. Then,

A A x ˆi + A y ˆj
=
Here, A x = A cos θ and A y =
A sin θ

2
∴ A=
2
x + Ay A 2 ( cos 2 θ + sin 2 θ )

Ay
(A + A 2y )
2 1/2
A
or = x and tan=
θ
Ax
Rectangular components of a vector in a space :


Let α, β and γ are the angles between vector A and the x, y and z-axes, respectively as shown
in the figure. Then

A = A x ˆi + A y ˆj + A z kˆ . The magnitude of vector A is A = A 2x + A 2y + A 2z

PRODUCT OF TWO VECTORS

The Product of two vectors can be of two types

(A) Scalar product or dot product of two vectors .

(B) Vector or cross product of two vectors

45
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

SCALAR PRODUCT OR DOT PRODUCT

   
The dot product or scalar product of two vectors A and B given by =
A. B ABcos θ
Properties of scalar product
   
i) A.B = B.A
      
ii) A. ( B + C ) = A.B + A.C
   
( A.A )
1/2
A.A AA
iii) = = cos 0o A=2
or A

ˆi.i=
ˆ ˆj.j
=ˆ k.k
ˆ=ˆ 1

ˆi.jˆ 0,=
Also= ˆj.kˆ 0,=
ˆˆ 0
k.i

CROSS PRODUCT OR VECTOR PRODUCT

 
The cross product or vector product of two vectors A and B is given by
   
B ABsin θ nˆ where n̂ is a unit vector indicating the direction of A × B .
A ×=
Properties of vector product
   
i) A × B =−B × A
      
ii) A × ( B + C) = A × B + A × C
 
iii) =A × B ABsin = 90o nˆ AB nˆ
iv) ˆi × ˆ=j k,
ˆ ˆj × kˆ= ˆi, kˆ × ˆi= ˆj Similarly, ˆj × ˆi =− k,
ˆ kˆ × ˆj =−ˆi, ˆi × kˆ =−ˆj
ˆi × ˆi = 0, ˆj × ˆj = kˆ × kˆ = 0
Vector product of two parallel vectors is zero.
  
A × B ABsin
= = 0o nˆ n
This leads us to the following condition of parallelism of two vectors.
“Two nonzero vectors are parallel if and only if the magnitude of their cross product is zero.”
Vector product of two vectors in Cartesian coordinates

Let A = A x ˆi + A y ˆj + A z kˆ

and B = Bx ˆi + B y ˆj + Bz kˆ
ˆi ˆj kˆ
 
Then A=
×B Ax Ay =A z ˆi ( A y Bz − A z By ) + ˆj ( A z Bx − A x Bz ) + kˆ ( A x B y − A y Bx )
Bx B y Bz

  
Note: If A + B + C =
0
     
then A × B = B × C = C × A

46
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

RELATIVE VELOCITY
Let θ be the angle between the directions of motion of the objects A and B, moving with velocities
 
v A and v B as shown in Fig.

   
Where, v A
= (=
OQ ) and v ( OP )
B

In magnitude, the relative velocity of A with respect to B is given by

v AB = v 2A + v 2B − 2v A v B cos θ

Applications of relative velocity

Crossing River
When a man crosses a river, the direction of the movement of the man will be in the direction of
the resultant velocity of the man and the river.
For shortest time
The man should travel perpendicular to the direction of flow of river.
When he crosses the river velocity along the river = vx = VR
Velocity perpendicular to the river = vf = VmR
2
vm
The net velocity= VmR + VR2

VmR
The angle θ is given by tan θ = (down stream with river flow)
VR

d
Time taken to cross the river t =
VmR

d
The drift along the river = x = Vxt , x = VR
VmR

47
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Shortest path

For this the swimmer should swim upstream making an angle θ with AB such that the resultant
velocity Vm is perpendicular to the river flow. i.e., Along AB.

2
Vm
The net speed= VmR − VR2 along AB

d d
=
Time to cross the river =
Vy 2
V
mR − VR2

−1  V 
θ =sin  R 
 VmR 
π −1  V 
To swim along shortest path the man should swim at an angle of + sin  m  upstream from
the direction of river flow. 2  Vm R 

Rain-man problem


v m -velocity of rain w.r.t. man


v r - velocity of rain w.r.t ground.


v m - velocity of man w.r.t ground

  
v=
r vm + vm

48
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

B. TWO DIMENSION MOTION

Projectile Motion
When a body is thrown at angle with horizontal, then its motion is governed by gravitational acceleration.
(neglect air resistance)
The body is known as projectile and its motion is known as projectile motion.

Horizontal motion Vertical motion

u x u cos θ
= u y u sin θ
=
ax = 0 ay = g
1 1
x uxt + axt2
= y uyt + ayt2
=
2 2
Trajectory of projectile
1
y u sin θt − gt 2
x u cos θt;=
=
2

x
Eliminating t, using t =
u cos θ

2
 x  1  x 
=∴ y u sin   − g 
 u cos θ  2  u cos θ 

gx 2
=y x tan θ − 2
2u cos 2 θ

The trajectory of the projectile is a parabola.

vy
v
At any instant t, during projectile motion, the velocity is= v 2x + v 2y and tan=
α
vx

Time of Flight (T)

at t = T, y = 0
1
y uyt + ayt2
=
2

1
0 ( u sin θ ) T +
= ( −g ) T 2
2

49
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

1 2
=gT ( u sin θ ) T
2

2u sin θ
T=
g

Range (R)
at t = T, x = R
1
x uxt + axt2
=
2

R ( u cos θ ) × T + 0
=
2u sin θ
R u cos θ×
=
g

u 2 sin 2θ
R=
g

o
• Range is maximum when θ =45

u2
∴ R max =
g
Maximum Height (H)
When y = H, then vy = 0
2
v=
y u 2y + 2a y y

=0 u 2 sin 2 θ + 2 ( −g ) H

2gH u 2 sin 2 θ
=

u 2 sin 2 θ
H=
2g

u 2 sin 2 45o u 2 R max

H
• When range is maximum the height H attained by the projectile = = =
2g 4g 4

u 2 R max
• When range is maximum the maximum height attained by the projectile H max
= =
2g 2

50
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Energy of projectile
When a projectile moves upwards its KE decreases and potential energy increases. But the total energy
1
remains constant. Let a body is projected with K.E. = mv 2 at an angle θ with the horizontal. Then
2

1
at the highest point its KE is mu 2 cos 2 θ
2

mgu 2 sin 2 θ 1
= mgH
Potential energy = = mu 2 sin 2 θ
2g 2

1 1 1
=
Total energy mu 2 cos 2 θ + mu
= 2
sin 2 θ mu 2
2 2 2
i.e., the energy at the point of projection.
Relative motion in projectile
If one of the projectiles is observed from the other projectile, then path of the projectile becomes
straight line. This is because acceleration of one of the projectiles with respect to the other projectile is
zero and so relative velocity vector becomes constant.
C. CIRCULAR MOTION
When a particle moves in a plane such that its distance from a fixed (or moving) point remains
constant then its motion is called as the circular motion with respect to that fixed (or moving) point.
Variables of Motion
(a) Angular Position
The angle made by the position vector with given line (reference line) is called the angular position.

(b) Angular Displacement

Angle rotated by the position vector of the moving particle with some reference line is called
angular displacement.
(c) Angular Velocity
∆θ
Rate of change of angular displacement is angular velocity, ω =
∆t

51
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

(i) Average Angular Velocity

Total angle of rotation θ2 − θ1 ∆θ
=
ωav ;=
ωav = where q1 and q2 are angular positions
Total time taken t 2 − t1 ∆t

of the particle at times t1 and t2

(ii) Instantaneous Angular Velocity
The rate at which the position vector of a particle with respect to the centre rotates, is called
as instantaneous angular velocity with respect to the centre.
∆θ dθ
=ω lim
=
x →0 ∆t dt
  
Relation Between Linear Speed and Angular Velocity is v = rω; v = ω× r
(d) Angular Acceleration
∆ω
Rate of change of angular velocity is angular acceleration α =
∆t

(i) Average Angular Acceleration

Let ω1 and ω2 be the instantaneous angular speeds at times t1 and t2 respectively, then the

ω2 − ω1 ∆ω
average angular acceleration α av is defined as=
α av =
t 2 − t1 ∆t

(ii) Instantaneous Angular Acceleration

It is the limit of average angular acceleration as ∆t approaches zero, i.e,
∆ω dω dθ dω dω
α = lim = = =ω
∆t → 0 ∆t dt dt dθ dθ

If a = 0, circular motion is said to be uniform

dθ dω d 2 θ
As =
ω ,=
α =
dt dt dt 2

i.e, second derivative of angular displacement with respect to time gives angular acceleration.

Tangential acceleration ( α T )
Tangential acceleration is in the direction of motion or opposite to motion, and this acceleration is
responsible for change in speed of the particle. Its magnitude is rate of change of speed of the particle.

dv d|v| d ( rω)
aT = or a T = or a T = ; a T = rα
dt dt dt

52
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Centripetal acceleration (ac)

In circular motion, direction of motion of the body changes due to centripetal force and acceleration
produced by this force is known as centripetal acceleration. Its direction is always towards centre of the
body magnitude of centripetal acceleration is given by

v2
ac = or a c = ω2 R
R

Types of circular motion

1) Uniform circular motion
If a particle moves with constant speed in a circle then that circular motion is known as uniform
circular motion.
∴ In uniform circular motion
tangential acceleration = 0

v2
Centripetal acceleration =
R
2) Non-uniform circular motion
If a particle moves with variable speed in circle, then that motion is known as non uniform circular
motion. In this motion, there will be both centripetal acceleration and tangential acceleration

a c ≠ 0 a T ≠ 0 ; then net acceleration is given by a=

net a 3C + a T2
2
dv 2 v v2
a=
T = = rate of change of speed and a c = rω = r   = = vω
dt r r

Here, the two components are mutually perpendicular. Therefore, net acceleration of the particle
will be:

2 2 2
 v 2   dv 
a= 2
a +a =
r
2
t
( rω ) +  dv  =
2 2
  +  = ( rω2 )2 + ( rα )2
 dt   r   dt 

53
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

QUESTIONS

1. The sum of the magnitudes of two forces 6. Four bodies A, B, C and D are projected with
acting at a point is 18N and the magnitude equal velocities having angles of projection
of their resultant is 12N. If the resultant is at 15o, 30o, 45o and 60o with the horizontal
90o with the smaller force, the magnitude of respectively. The body having the shortest
the forces in newton are range is

1) 6, 12 2) 11, 7 1) A 2) B
3) C 4) D
3) 5, 13 4) 14, 4
7. Which out of these does not affect the
   maximum height of a projectile?
2. The resultant A + B is R 1 . On reversing the
  1) Mass of projectile
vector B , the resultant becomes R 2 . What
2 2
is the value of R 1 + R 2 ? 2) Angle of projection
3) Acceleration due to gravity
2 2
1) A2 + B2 2) A − B
4) Magnitude of initial velocity
3) 2 ( A + B ) 4) 2 ( A − B ) 8. Which of the following sets of factors will
2 2 2 2

affect the horizontal distance covered by an

3. The vector sum of two forces is perpendicular athlete in a long-jump event?
to their vector differences. In that case, the 1) Speed before the jumps and his weight
forces:
2) The direction in which he leaps and the
1) cannot be predicted initial speed

2) are perpendicular to each other 3) The force with which he pushes the ground
and his speed
3) are equal to each other in magnitude 4) The direction in which he leaps and the
weight
4) are not equal to each other in magnitude
9. A shell fired from the ground is just able to
4. In a projectile motion, the velocity is cross in a horizontal direction the top of a wall
perpendicular to acceleration at 90 m away and 45 m high. The direction of
projection of the shell will be
1) no instance 2) one instant
1) 25o 2) 30o
3) two instants 4) all instants
3) 45o 4) none of these
5. When air resistance is taken into account 10. Three particles A, B and C are projected from
while dealing with the motion of the projectile, the same point with the same initial speeds
which of the following properties of the making angles 30o, 45o and 60o respectively
projectile, shows an increase? with the horizontal. Which of the following
statements is correct?
1) range
1) A, B and C have unequal ranges
2) maximum height 2) Range of A and C are equal and less than
3) speed at which it strikes the ground that of B
3) Ranges of A and C are equal and greater
4) the angle at which the projectile strikes the than that of B
ground
4) A, B and C have equal ranges

54
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

11. A body is projected at an angle of 30o with 16. Two balls are projected at an angle θ and
the horizontal and with a speed of 30 ms–1. ( 90o − θ )
to the horizontal with the same
What is the angle with the horizontal after 1.5
speed. The ratio of their maximum vertical
seconds? (g = 10 ms–2)
height is
1) 0o 2) 30o
1) 1 : 1 2) tan θ :1
3) 60 o
4) 90 o

2
12. A person can throw a stone to a maximum 3) 1: tan θ 4) tan θ :1
distance of h metre. The greatest height to 17. The equations of motion of a projectile are
which he can throw the stone is: given by x = 36 t metre and 2y = 96t – 9.8 t2
1) h 2) h/2 metre. The angle of projection is

3) 2h 4) 3h −1 4 −1 3
1) sin   2) sin  
13. The range R of projectile is same when its 5 5
maximum heights are h1 and h2. What is the
relation between R, h1 and h2? −1 4 −1 3
3) sin   4) sin  
3 4
1) R = h1h 2 2) R = 2h1h 2
18. From the top of a tower 20 m high a ball is
thrown horizontally. If the line joining the
3) R = 2 h1h 2 4) R = 4 h1h 2
point of projection to the point where it hits
14. Two paper screens A and B are separated by the ground makes an angle of 45o with the
150 m. A bullet pierces A and B. The hole in horizontal, then the initial velocity of the ball
B is 15 cm below; the hole in A. If the bullet is:
is travelling horizontally at the time of hitting
1) 10 ms–1 2) 4 ms–1
A, then the velocity of the bullet at A is: (g =
10 ms–2) 3) 15 ms–1 4) 3 ms–1
−1 −1
1) 100 3 ms 2) 200 3 ms 19. Two stones are projected with the same
velocity but making different angles with the
−1 −1
3) 300 3 ms 4) 500 3 ms horizontal. Their ranges are equal. If angle
of projection of one is 30o and its maximum
15. A body is projected, with velocity v1, at an height is y, then the maximum height of the
angle of 30o with the horizontal. Another body other will be
is projected vertically upwards with velocity
v2 from a point on horizontal line, vertically 1) 3y 2) 2y
below the highest point. If the two bodies
v2 y y
collide at highest point, then should be 3) 4)
v1 2 3

20. Two tall buildings are 30 m apart. The speed

with which a ball must be thrown horizontally
from a window 150 m above the ground in
one building so that it enters a window 27.5
m from the ground in the other building is
1) 2 2) 0.5
1) 2 ms–1 2) 6 ms–1
3) 3 2 4) 2 3 3) 4 ms–1 4) 8 ms–1

55
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

21. A person sitting in the rear end of the 26. A particle is projected at 60o to the horizontal
compartment throws a ball towards the front with an energy E. The kinetic energy and
end. The ball follows a parabolic path. The potential energy at the higher point are
train is moving with uniform velocity of 20 ms–1.
A person standing outside on the ground also E E  3E E 
1)  ,  2)  , 
observes the ball. How will the maximum 2 2  4 4
heights (hm) attained and the ranges (R)
seen by the thrower and the outside observer
compare each other?  E 3E 
3) ( E, 0 ) 4)  , 
1) same hm different R 4 4 
2) same hm and R
27. A ball thrown by a boy is caught by another
3) different hm same R after 2 sec. some distance away in the same
4) different hm and R level. If the angle of projection is 30o, the
22. An airplane moving horizontally with a speed velocity of projection is
of 180 km/hr drops a food packet while flying 1) 19.6 m/s 2) 9.8 m/s
at a height of 500 m. The horizontal range
is: 3) 14.7 m/s 4) None of these
1) 180 m 2) 980 m
28. A ball thrown by one player reaches the other
3) 500 m 4) 670 m in 6 sec. the maximum height attained by the
23. A boy projects a stone vertically perpendicular ball above the point of projection will be about
to the trolley car with a speed v. If the trolley
1) 10 m 2) 50 m
car moves with a constant velocity u, the time
of flight of the stone is 3) 45 m 4) 25 m

29. Two bodies are projected from ground with

u+v 2v equal speeds 20 m/sec from the same
1) 2)
g g position in same vertical plane to have
equal range but at different angle above the
2u horizontal. If one of the angle is 30o the sum
3) 4) None of these of their maximum heights is (assume g = 10
g
m/s2)
24. Kinetic energy of a body projected at an angle
of 30o is E. The kinetic energy at the topmost 1) 400 m 2) 20 m
point of the journey is
3) 30 m 4) 40 m
3E
1) E 2) 30. Two particles are projected, between a certain
4
time gap. While both are in air, the velocity of
one particle relative to the other:
E E
3) 4) 1) Varies linearly with time
2 4
2) Is always constant in magnitude and
25. The horizontal range of a projectile is 4 3 direction
times its maximum height. Its angle of
projection will be 3) Is always constant in magnitude only
1) 45o 2) 60o 4) Is always constant in direction only
3) 90o 4) 30o

56
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

34. A boat having a speed of 5 km/hr, in still water,

31. A boat is moving with a velocity 3iˆ + 4ˆj with
crosses a river of width 1 km long the shortest
respect to the ground. The water in the river
possible path in 15 minutes. The speed of the
is flowing with a velocity −3iˆ − 4ˆj with respect river in Km/hr.
to the ground. The velocity of the boat relative
to the water is 1) 1 2) 3

1) 6iˆ + 8jˆ 2) 8iˆ + 6ˆj 3) 4 4) 41

3) 6iˆ + 6ˆj 4) None of these 35. A man holds an umbrella at 30o with the
vertical to keep himself dry. He, then, runs at
32. A boat travels from south bank to north bank a speed of 10ms–1 and finds the rain drops to
of a river with a maximum speed of 8 km/h be hitting vertically. Speed of the rain drops
when the river flows at 4km/hr. To arrive at a w.r.t. the running man and w.r.t. earth are
point opposite to the point of start, the boat
should start at an angle.

−1 1
1) tan   W of N
2

−1 1
2) tan   N of W
2
1) 20ms–1, 10ms–1
3) 30 W of N
o
−1 −1
2) 10 ms , 20 3 ms
4) 30o N of W
−1 −1
33. A boy swims in a straight line to reach the 3) 10 3 ms , 20 ms
other side of a river. His velocity is 5ms–1 and
the angle of swim with shore is 30o. Flow of −1
4) 20 ms , 10 3 ms
−1

river opposes his movement at 2ms–1. If the

width of river is 200m, where does he reach 36. A person walks at the rate of 3 km/hr. Rain
the other bank. appears to him in vertical direction at the rate
of 3 3 km / hr . Find magnitude and direction
of true velocity of rain.

1) 6 km/hr, inclined at an angle of 45o to the

vertical towards the person’s motion

2) 3 km/hr, inclined at an angle of 30o to the

vertical towards the person’s motion
1) 106 m from O’ downstream
3) 6 km/hr, inclined at an angle of 30o to the
2) 186 m from O’ downstream vertical towards the person’s motion

3) 186 m from O’ upstream 4) 6 km/hr, inclined at an angle of 60o to the

vertical towards the person’s motion
4) 106 m from O’ upstream

57
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

37. For a particle performing uniform circular 42. A projectile attains a certain maximum height
motion, choose the incorrect statement from when projected from earth. If it is projected
the following. at the same angle and with the same initial
speed from the moon, where the acceleration
1) Magnitude of particle velocity (speed)
due to gravity is one-sixth that on the earth,
remains constant
by what factor will the maximum height of the
2) Particle velocity remains directed projectile increase?
perpendicular to radius vector
3) Direction of acceleration keeps changing 43. A particle is projected from a pipe at an angle
as particle moves. θ =45o with the vertical at a point P with a
4) Magnitude of acceleration does not remain speed u=10 ms–1. A strong horizontal wind
constant gives a constant horizontal acceleration equal
to 5 ms–2 to the particle such that the particle
38. A wheel has a constant angular acceleration reaches the ground at point Q which is exactly
of 3.0 rad/s2. During a certain 4.0 s interval, it below P. The height of point P (in m) from
turns through an angle of 120 rad. Assuming the ground is [g = 10 ms–2]
that at t = 0, angular speed ω0 =3 rad / s , how
long is motion at the start of this 4.0 second
interval?
1) 7 s 2) 9 s
3) 4 s 4) 10 s
39. A cyclist is riding with a speed of 27 km h–1. As
he approaches a circular turn on the road of Assertion-Reason Type
radius 80 m, he applies brakes and reduces
his speed at the constant rate of 0.50 ms–1
every second. The net acceleration of the 1) Both the Assertion and Reason are correct
cyclist on the circular turn is and Reason is not the correct explanation
of Assertion
1) 0.68 ms–2 2) 0.86 ms–2
3) 0.56 ms–2 4) 0.76 ms–2 2) Assertion is correct but Reason is not
correct
40. An insect trapped in a circular groove of
radius 12 cm moves along the groove steadily
and completes 7 revolutions in 100 s. The 3) Assertion is not correct but Reason is
linear speed of the insect is correct

1) 4.3 cms–1 2) 5.3 cm s–1

4) Both Assertion and Reason are correct
3) 6.3 cm s –1
4) 7.3 cm s –1
and Reason is the correct explanation of
Assertion
Integer Type
41. A particle starts from the origin of co-ordinates 44. Assertion : Horizontal range is same
at time t = 0 and moves in the x-y plane with for angle of projection
a constant acceleration α in the Y direction. .
2
Its equation of motion is y = β x . Its velocity
α Reason : Horizontal range is
component in the x-direction is . What
nβ independent of angle of
is the value of n ?
projection.

58
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

45. Assertion : The height attained by 49. Statement I : For motion in two or three
a projectile is twenty five dimensions, velocity and
percent of range, when acceleration vectors must
projected for maximum have any angle between 0o
range. and 90o between them.
Reason : The maximum height is Statement II : F o r m o t i o n i n t h r e e
independent of initial velocity dimensions, velocity and
of projectile. acceleration of an object
is always in the opposite
46. Assertion : A uniform circular motion is
direction.
an accelerated motion.
50. The displacement(x) of a particle depends on
Reason : Direction of acceleration in 2 2
uniform circular motion is time (T) as x = αt − β t
parallel to the velocity vector.
Column I Column II
Statement Type i) The particle will be at its p) 2α
1) Both Statement I and Statement II are true starting point after time
3β
2) Both Statement I and Statement II are false ii) The particle wil be at rest at q) α
time
3) Statement I is true but Statement II is false β
4) Statement I is false but Statement II is true iii) The average velocity of r) α
particle from t = 0 to t = t0 is
47. Statement I : If the speed of a body is 3β
equal to its instantaneous
constant, the body cannot
velocity at time t = t0. The
have a path other than a
value of t0 is equal to
circular or straight line path.
iv) No net force will act on the s) α
Statement II : It is not possible for a body particle at time t is equal to
to have a constant speed in 2β
an accelerated motion.
Now match the given columns and select the
48. Statement I : When range of a projectile correct option from the codes given below.
is maximum, its angle of
projection may be 45 o or 1) i - q, ii - s, iii - r, iv - p
135o. 2) i - q, ii - p, iii - s, iv - r
Statement II : Whether is 45o or 135o, 3) i - s, ii - r, iii - p, iv - q
value of range remains the
same, only the sign changes. 4) i - r, ii - q, iii - s, iv - p

59
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

KEY WITH HINTS

1. 3 4. 2 Velocity is normal to acceleration at the

highest point.
5. 4 In the presence of air resistance, the
range, maximum height, speed at which
the projectile strikes the ground will
decreases whereas the angle at which the
projectile strikes the ground will increase.

u 2 sin 2θ
6. 1 Range, R =
g

From figure, it is deduced that, For a given initial velocity; R ∝ sin 2θ
R2 + P2 = Q2
o u2
(12) = Q –P ...................(1)
2 2 2 Range will be maximum at θ =45 i.e.,
and hence g
and P + Q = 18 N................(2)
u 2 sin 30 u 2
Q2 – P2 = (Q + P) (Q – P; Q–P=8N At=θ 15,
= R = and at
g 2g
By rearranging and substituting, we get
Q = 13 N, P = 5 N
   3 u2
θ =30 and 60 ; R =
2. 3 A+B=R1 ; 2g
2 2 2
i.e., A + B + 2ABcos θ =R 1 ∴ Range is minimum at 15o.

   u2
7. H max
1= sin 2 θ
and A − B =
R2 2g
2 2 2
i.e., A + B − 2ABcos θ =R 2
Hmax is independent of mass.

∴ 2 ( A 2 + B2 ) =R12 + R 22 . u 2 sin 2θ
2 R
8. = ⇒ R depends upon only R
     g
3. 3 S= F1 + F2 and D= F1 − F2
and θ .
As two vectors are perpendicular to each
  u 2 sin 2 θ
other, hence S. D = 0 . 3 h
9. = = 45 m and
    2g
or ( F + F ) .( F − F ) =
1 2 10; 2

 2  2 u 2 sin 2θ
=R = 180 m
or ( F1 ) − ( F2 ) = 0
g
 2  2
or | F1 | − | F2 | = 0
 2  2   45 1
=
or | F1 | | = F2 | ; or | F1 | | F2 | = tan θ or
= θ 45o
180 4

60
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

10. 2 When a projectile is projected at an 15 1

angle θ or at an angle ( 90 − θ ) with
o 14. 4 Range= 150= ut and h= = × gt 2
100 2
the horizontal, the horizontal range
remains the same. The horizontal range
2 2 ×15 30
is maximum when the angle of projection or t
= =
is 45o. 100 × g 1000
11. 1 The time of flight is given by
2u sin θ 2 × 30 ×1 3
=
T = = 3 sec ∴ t=
g 10 × 2 10
Thus, after 1.5 sec the body is at the
150 150 ×10
highest point. As the direction of motion ∴ u= = = 500 3 ms −1
is horizontal after 1.5 seconds, the angle t 3
with the horizontal is 0o. 15. 2 If two bodies reach the highest point at the
u sin 2θ 2
same time they will collide
12. 2 R=
( v sin 30 )
2
g
o u2 t1 = 1
2θ 90 then=
When = R R=
max 2g
g
= For body projected at θ
u2
=
Given R max h,=
hence h
g v 22
t2 =
2g
u 2 sin 2 θ = For body projected vertically upwards.
Height H is given by: H =
2g ∴ For collision, t1 = t2;
( v1 sin 30 )
2
v 22 v
u 2
h ∴ = ; ∴ 2 = sin 30 = 0.5
θ 90o , H
When = = H max
= = 2g 2g v1
2g 2
13. 4 Range is same for angles of projection R2 u 2 sin 2 θ
θ and 90 − θ 16. 4 = 1;=
H1 ----- (i)
R1 2g
u 2 sin 2θ
R=
g u 2 sin 2 ( 90o − θ ) u 2 cos 2 θ
=
H2 =
2g 2g
u 2 sin 2 θ u 2 cos 2 θ
=
h1 = and h 2 Dividing (i) by (ii),
2g 2g
H1 tan 2 θ
we get =
H2 1
u 2 sin θ cos θ
Hence, h 1h 2 =
2g dx
17. 1 x = 36t; = 36
= vs ;
dt
1  u 2 sin 2θ  R
=
=
4  g  4
 dy
y=48t − 4.9t 2 ; =48 − 9.8 t =vy
dt

61
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

At t = 0, vy = 48; 23. 2 v 0 sin θ = v ------ (i)

v y 48 4 4
tan =
θ = = ; ∴ sin θ = v 0 cos θ =u
v x 36 3 5
18. 1 Since angle with the horizontal is 45o,
vertical height = range
⇒ 20 =u × 2 or u =10 ms −1

 2 × 20 
=
 t 2h / g
= = 2s 
 10  Time of flight depends on vertical
19.
1 As horizontal range of the two stones is component of velocity.
same. So the sum of angles of projection 2v 0 sin θ 2v
of two stones must be 900, θ =60
o =
T =
g g
According to question , 1
2 24. =
2 K.E at the point of projection =mu 2 E
1 2
u2   1
u 2 sin 2 30 2 =
K.E at the topmost point m ( u cos θ )
2
y
=
=
2g 2g 2
2
 3 2
2 2 u  
u sin 60  2  1 3
and y′ =
= =
=mu 2 cos 2 30o E
2g 2g 2 4

y′ 25. 4 R =4 3 H;
y′ 3y
∴ = 3 or =
y
u 2 sin 2θ u 2 sin 2 θ
20. 2 h = 150 – 27.5 = 122.5 m ⇒ 4 3
=
g 2g
2 ×122.5
=
t = 5 sec;
9.8
1
⇒ tan=
θ θ 30o
⇒=
R 30 3
u = = 6 ms −1
Hence, =
t 5
21. 1 The motion of the train will affect only the 1
26. 4 Initial K.E., E = mu 2
horizontal component of the velocity of the 2
ball. Since, vertical component is same for
both observers, the hm will be same, but At the highest point, velocity
R will be different.
u
1 2 =
cos 60o
ν u=
22. s ut +
3 = gt ; 2
2
∴ K.E. at higher point
1
500 = ×10 × t 2 or t =10 sec 2
2 1 1 u 11 2 E
180 × 5 =
mν 2= =m  = mu 
x
Horizontal range= 10 500 m
×= 2 2 2 42  4
18

62
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

u 2 sin 2 60o
PE at highest point= mg ×
2g
1 3
mu ( 3 / 2 )
2
2
=
= E
2 4

2u sin θ 2u sin 30 
27. 1=T ⇒2
=
g 9.8 33. 3 Velocity of river, v r = −2iˆ
Velocity of swimmer w.r.t river is
u = 19.63

2u sin θ 5cos 30iˆ + 5sin 30ˆj =
vs = 4.33iˆ + 2.5 ˆj
3 T
28. = ⇒6    
g vR = 2.33iˆ + 2.5jˆ
vS + Vf ; v R =
Time taken by swimmer =
2u sin θ
=
u sin θ 30 ;
⇒= Distance along y-axis 200
10 = = 80s
y-component of velocity 2.5

u 2 sin 2 θ 302
=
H = = 45 m
2g 2 ×10

u2
2 H
29. = sin 2 θ ,
2g
u2 [ 2 o
H=
1 + H 2 sin 30 + sin 2 60o ] Distance moved along x-axis
2g
O’F = x component of relative velocity ×
time = 2.33 × 80 = 186m upstream
202  1 3  d
=
H += 20m 2 t=
2 ×10  4 4  34.
v − u2
2

30. 2 The relative acceleration of one particle

w.r.t to the other is zero, so relative velocity
is constant in magnitude and direction.
 
31. 1 Vb =3iˆ + 4ˆj, Vw =−3iˆ − 4ˆj
  
Vb/ w =Vb − Vw =6iˆ + 8jˆ
Time taken to cross the river = 15 min.
32. 3 In order to arrive at the opposite bank, the 1
boat should start at an angle θ with north hr 0.25hr
= =
4
4
such that sin
= θ or
= θ 30o . The real
8 Width = 1 km
velocity of the boat will be Speed in the direction of shortest distance
d
=
v 82 − 4=
2
θ 30o W of N
48,= = = v2 − u 2
t

63
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

1 37. 4 For a particle performing uniform circular

= 52 − u 2 ; motion, magnitude of the acceleration
0.25
d remains constant.
v = 5 km/h; = = v2 − u 2 ;
t 38. 4 For angular motion

1 2 1
4
= 52 − u 2 ; u 2 = 25 − 16 = 9 ; θ = ω0 t + αt or 120 = 3t + × 3t 2
2 2
u = 3 km/hr. t2
40 =t + ; 80 =2t + t 2 ; t 2 + 2t − 80 =0
 2
35. 3 Velocity of man | v m | = 10 m / s ;
vm
sin 30o = ( t + 10 )( t − 8 )= 0; t= 10 or 8
v re
1 5
39. v 27 kmh −=
2 Here, = 27 × ms −1 ;
18

15
v = 7.5 ms −1 ; =
= r 80 m
2

vm = velocity of man; vre = velocity of rain

w.r.t earth; vrm = velocity of rain w.r.t man; v2
Centripetal acceleration, a c = ;
vm r
v re
= = 20 m / s ;
sin 30
o v
As, cos 30 = rm
v re ( 7.5ms −1 )2
=
ac = 0.7 ms −2
80m
=
v rm v=
re cos 30 10 3 ms −1
   Magnitude of the net acceleration is
36. 3 v r/m= v r − v m

( a c ) + ( a1 ) ( 0.7 )2 + ( 0.5 )2
2 2
a= =
= 0.86 ms–2
40. 2 Here, r = 12 cm.

7
Frequency ν = Hz
100
  
(3 3 )
2
Vr = Vr/m + Vm = + 32 The angular speed of the insect is

= 9×3 + 9= 36 = 6 m / s 7
ω= 2πν= 2π× = 0.44 rad s −1
3 1 100
tan=
θ = θ 30o
⇒=
3 3 3 The linear speed of the insect is
to the vertical to the direction of persons ν = ωr = 0.44 ×12 = 5.3 cms −1

motion

64
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

d2 y d2x 44. 2 Horizontal range depends upon angle of

41. 2 α and 2 =
= 0 projection and it is same for complementary
dt 2 dt
angles, i.e., θ and ( 90 − θ ) . Assertion

2 dy dx True, Reason False.

y=
βx ; ∴ 2βx .
=
dx dt
u 2 sin 2 θ u 2 sin 2θ
45. 2 H
= = , R
2g g
d2 y  d 2 x  dx 2 
2 = 2β  x. 2 +   
dt  dt  dt   Range will be maximum when θ =45
o

R
and in this condition R = 4H ⇒ H =
4
α
∴ α = 2βv 2x ∴ vx = ∴n = 2 =
(always) because R 4H cot θ and
2β o
θ =45 .

u 2 sin 2 θ u 2 sin 2 θ So maximum height is 25% of maximum

42. 6 h c
= = ; hm range.
2g c 2g m
Maximum height depend upon the velocity
of projection.
h gs
=
m
= 6
hc gm u2
H= . Assertion correct. Reason wrong.
43. 60
2g

In the horizontal direction, 46. 2 The acceleration of a body undergoing

uniform circular motion is called centripetal
1 2
=
0 u sin 45o t − at acceleration, and it is always directed
2 towards the centre. Assertion is correct,
Reason false.
10 5 2 47. 2 If the speed of a body is constant, all
t
= t ⇒=
t 2 2s
2 2 curved paths are possible.
In uniform circular motion, a body has
constant speed, but its direction keeps
on changing, due to which it has an
acceleration. Both statements wrong.

u 2 sin 2θ
48. 1 Range, R = ;
In the vertical direction, g
o u2 u2
1 when θ 45
= = = sin 90o
, R max
=
h u cos 45o t + gt 2 g g
2 2
o u −u 2
=
when θ 135
= , R max = sin 270o
g g
10
2 2 + 5. ( 2 2 )
2
=

2 Negative sign shows opposite direction.
Both statement true.
or h = 60 m

65
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

49. 2 In one dimension, the velocity and the

acceleration of an object are always along
( t 0 to=t t=
Given v av = 0) ( t t0 )
v=
the same straight line either in the same x t =t0
direction or in the opposite direction. ⇒ v t =t0
=
However, for motion in two or three
t0
dimensions velocity and acceleration
vectors may have any angle between 0o
αt 2 − βt 30 α
and 180o between them. Both statement 0 = 2αt 0 − 3β t 02 ⇒ t 0 = (s)
false. t0 2β

2 3 dx
50. 2 x = αt − β t ; v = = 2αt − 3β t 2 ; dv
dt a= = 2α − 6β t
dt
α
Putting x = 0, we get t = (q) If no net force acts;
β
a=0

2α α
Putting v = 0, we get t = (p) ⇒ 2α − 6βt = 0 ⇒ t = (r)
3β 3β

66
 CHAPTER
LAWS OF MOTION
04

INTRODUCTION

Sir Isaac Newton (1642-1727) presented these principles to the world in his book Philosophiae Naturalis
Principia Mathematica (The Mathe­matical Principles of Natural Philosophy), which was published in 5
July 1687 and is often referred to as the Principia, procedures for finding the motion of an object.

LINEAR MOMENTUM

Linear momentum of a body is the quantity of motion contained in the body. It is measured as the product
 
of the mass of the body and its velocity i.e., Momentum = mass × velocity, p= m × v

Momentum is a vector quantity, the direction is same as that of velocity.

The dimensional formula of momentum is [M1L1T–1], unit : kg-m/sec [S.I.], g-cm/sec [C.G.S.]

If two objects of different masses have same momentum, the lighter body possesses greater velocity.
v1 m 2 1
=p m=
1 v1 m 2 v 2 = constant ∴ = --------(1); i.e. v ∝
v 2 m1 m

Momentum of a body is measured by the force required to stop the body in unit time.

NEWTON’S FIRST LAW

According to Newton’s first law of motion, a body continues to be in a state of rest or of uniform motion
along a straight line, unless it is acted upon by an external force to change the state. This means force
applied on a body alone, can change its state of rest or state of uniform motion along a straight line.
Hence we define force as an external effort in the form of a push or pull which moves or tries to move a
body at rest ; stops or tries to stop a body in motion ; changes or tries to change the direction of motion
of a body.

Newton’s first law defines inertia and is rightly called the law of inertia. Inertia are of three types : Inertia
of rest, Inertia of motion, Inertia of direction

1. Inertia of rest : It is the inability of a body to change by itself, its state of rest. This means a body
at rest remains at rest and cannot start moving by its own.

Example : A person who is standing freely in a bus is thrown backward, when the bus starts
suddenly.

2. Inertia of motion : It is the inability of a body to change itself its state of uniform motion i.e., a
body in uniform motion can neither accelerate nor retard by its own.

67
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Example : (i) When a bus or train stops suddenly, a passenger sitting inside tends to fall forward.
This is because the lower part of his body comes to rest with the bus or train but
the upper part tends to continue its motion due to inertia of motion.
(ii) A person jumping out of a moving train may fall forward.
3. Inertia of direction : It is the inability of a body to change by itself direction of motion.
Example : (i) When a stone tied to one end of a string is whirled and the string breaks suddenly,
the stone flies off along the tangent to the circle.
(ii) When a car goes round a curve suddenly, the person sitting inside is thrown outwards.
NEWTON’S SECOND LAW
According to this law, the rate of change of linear momentum of a body is directly proportional to the
external force applied on the body, and this change takes place always in the direction of the force applied.
EXPLANATION OF NEWTON’S SECOND LAW
According to Newton’s second law of motion, the rate of change of linear momentum of a body is
directly proportional to the external force applied on the body, and this change takes place always in the
direction of the applied force.
  
m = mass, v = velocity; ∴ The linear momentum of the body p = mv -------(2)
 
Let F is external force applied on the body, and dp change in linear momentum in time dt.
  dp 
dp   dp
∝ F or F ∝ i.e., F = k -------(3); where k is a constant of proportionality.
dt dt dt

 
 d  dv    dv
=F k= ( mv ) km ; i.e., F = kma ------(4); where a = is acceleration.
dt dt dt

The unit of force is so chosen that the value of k =1.

 
∴F=ma -------(5)
If the acceleration produced is in three dimensions having components ax, ay, az along X-axis,
Y-axis, Z-axis respectively, then
  
a = ˆia x + ˆja y + ka
ˆ -----(6);
z ∴= (
F m ˆia x + ˆja y + ka z)
ˆ -----(7); F = ˆiFx + ˆjFy + kF
ˆ -----(8)
z

=Fx ma
= x , Fy ma y =
and Fz ma z -----(9)
As acceleration is a vector quantity and mass is a scalar, therefore force F = ma, is a vector and

direction is same as that of a .
Writing eqn. (4) in scalar form F = ma ------ (10).
Thus force is product of mass and acceleration of the body.
Hence second law of motion gives a measure of force.

68
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Dimension : Force = mass ×acceleration; [F] = [M1][L1T-2] = [M1L1T–2]

Units : Absolute units : (i) Newton (S.I.) (ii) Dyne (C.G.S)
Newton : One newton is that force which produces an acceleration of 1ms–2 on a body of mass
1 Kilogram. 1 Newton = 1 kg × 1 ms-2=1kgm/s2
Dyne : One dyne is that force which produces an acceleration of 1cm/s2 in a body of mass 1 gram.
1 dyne = 1 g × 1 cm s-2 = 1 g cm s–2.
Relation between Newton and dyne, 1 N = 1 kg × 1 ms–2 = 103 g × 102 cm s–2 = 105 dynes
Gravitational units
The gravitational unit of force in S.I. is 1 kilogram weight (kg wt) or 1 kilogram force (kg f). It is
that much force which produces an acceleration of 9.81 ms–2 on a body of mass 1kg., kg wt = 9.81 N.
The gravitational unit of force in C.G.S. system is 1 gram weight (g wt) or one gram force (1 gf).
It is that much force which produces an acceleration of 981 cm s–2 on a body of mass 1 gram.
1 gm-wt = 981 dyne.
Relation between gravitational units of force : 1 kg-f =107gm-f
Note: (1) F = ma formula is valid only if force is changing the state of rest or motion and the mass of
the body is constant and finite.
 d 
 dv  dm
(2) =
If m is not constant F (=
mv ) m + v ------------(11)
dt dt dt

(3) If force and acceleration have three component along x, y and z axis, then
 
F = Fx ˆi + Fy ˆj + Fz kˆ and a = a x ˆi + a y ˆj + a z kˆ
From above it is clear that Fx = max, Fy = may and Fz = maz
(4) No force is required to move a body uniformly along a straight line.
  
F = ma ∴F=0 (As a = 0 )
(5) When force is written without direction then positive force means repulsive while negative
force means attractive.
Example : Positive force - Force between two similar charges. Negative force - Force
between two opposite charges
(6) Out of so many natural forces, for distance 10-15 metre, nuclear force is strongest while
gravitational force is weakest. FNuclear > FElectromagnetic > FGravitational
F
(7) =
Ratio of electric force and gravitational force between two electrons E
1043 ∴ FE >> FG
FG

(8) Constant force : If the direction and magnitude of a force is constant, then it is said to be a
constant force.

69
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

(9) Variable or dependent force :

(i) Time dependent force : In case of impulse or motion of a charged particle in an alternating
electric field force is time dependent.
Gm1m 2
(ii) Position dependent force : Gravitational force between two bodies FG =
r2

1 q1q 2
or Force between two charged particles FE =
4πε 0 r 2

(iii) Velocity dependent force : Viscous force ( 6πηrv )

Force on charged particle in a magnetic field ( qvBsin θ )

(10) Central force : If a position dependent force is always directed towards or away from a fixed
point it is said to be central otherwise non-central. Example : Motion of earth around the
sun, motion of electron in an atom.
(11) Conservative and non conservative forces : If under the action of a force the work done
in a round trip is zero or the work is path independent, the force is said to be conservative
otherwise non conservative.
Example : Conservative force : Gravitational force, electric force, elastic force.
Non conservative force : Frictional force, viscous force.
Equilibrium of Concurrent Forces
(1) The necessary condition for the equilibrium of a body under the action of concurrent forces is that
the vector sum of all the forces acting on the body must be zero.

(2) Mathematically for equilibrium Σ Fnet =

0
(3) Three concurrent forces will be in equilibrium, if they can be represented completely by three
sides of a triangle taken in order.

(4) Lami’s Theorem : For equilibrium of concurrent forces

  
F1 F2 F3
= = --------(12)
sin α sin β sin γ

70
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

NEWTON’S THIRD LAW

To every action, there is always an equal (in magnitude) and opposite (in direction) reaction.

(1) When a body exerts a force on any other body, the second body also exerts an equal and opposite
force on the first.

(2) Action and reaction never act on the same body.

 
(3) If FAB = force exerted on body A by body B (Action) and FBA = force exerted on body B by body
 
A (Reaction). Then according to Newton’s third law of motion FAB = − FBA

Example : A book lying on a table exerts a force on the table which is equal to the weight of the
book. This is the force of action. The table supports the book, by exerting an equal force on the
book. This is the force of reaction. As the system is at rest, net force on it is zero. Therefore force
of action and reaction must be equal and opposite.

PRINCIPLE OF CONSERVATION OF LINEAR MOMENTUM

According to this principle, in an isolated system, the vector sum of the linear momenta of all the
bodies of the system is conserved and is not affected due to their mutual action and reaction.

Consider an isolated system consisting of n bodies of masses m1, m2 .......... mn moving with
  
velocities, v1 , v 2 , ..... v n respectively. The vector sum of linear momenta i.e., the total linear momentum
    
p of all the bodies in the system is given by p= m1v1 + m 2 v 2 + ..... + m n v n

Let M be the total mass of the system and Vcm be the velocity of the centre of mass of the system.
 
p = MVcm ------------(13)
 
dp d  dVcm 
=
Differentiating (13) with respect to time, we get, (=
MVcm ) M = Ma cm ------------(14)
dt dt dt

where a cm is the acceleration of centre of mass of the system.
 
According to Newton’s second law of motion Ma cm is equal to the external force F .

dp 
∴ From (11), = F -----------(15)
dt

In the case of an isolated system, no external force is acting on the system. i.e., F = 0

dp 
From (15), =0 Hence p = a constant,
dt
  
m1v1 + m 2 v 2 + .....m n v n = constant-----------(16)
which proves the principle of conservation of momentum

71
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Practical applications of the law of conservation of linear momentum

(i) When a man jumps out of a boat to the shore, the boat slightly moves away from the shore.
(ii) An astronaut in open space, who wants to return to the spaceship, throws some objects in a
direction opposite to the direction of motion of the spaceship. By doing so, he gains a momentum
equal and opposite to that of the thrown object and so he moves towards the spaceship.
(iii) Recoiling of a gun : For bullet and gun system, the force exerted by trigger will be internal so the
momentum of the system remains unaffected.

Let mG = mass of the gun, mB = mass of the bullet, v G = velocity of the gun,

v B = velocity of the bullet
 
Initial momentum of the system = 0; Final momentum of the system = m G v G + m B v B
By the law of conservation of linear momentum

   m 
mG vG + m B vB =
0 ; so recoil ; v G = − B v B --------(17)
mG


Here negative sign indicates that the velocity of recoil v G is opposite to the velocity of the bullet

 1
vG ∝ i. e. higher the mass of gun, lesser the velocity of recoil of gun.
mG

Impulse

When a large force acts on a body for a very small time interval, it is called impulsive force.

 t2 
Impulse of a force is a measure of total effect of the force. I = ∫ Fdt
t1

Impulse is a vector quantity and its direction is same as that of force.

The dimensional formula of impulse is [M1L1T–1]

Units : Newton-second or kg.m.s-1 (S.I.) and Dyne-second or [Link].s-1 (C.G.S.)

Force-time graph :

Impulse is equal to the area under F-t curve.

If we plot a graph between force and time, the area under the curve and time axis gives the value
of impulse.

1 1
I = Area between the curve and time axis = =× Base × Height =Ft
2 2

72
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

 dp t2
 p2
    
From Newton’s second law F = or
dt ∫
t1
Fdt =∫ ⇒ I =p2 − p1 =∆p
p1
dp

 
i.e. The impulse of a force is equal to the change in momentum. ( F∆t =∆p )
This statement is known as Impulse momentum theorem.
Examples : Hitting, kicking, catching, jumping, diving, collision etc.

∫
In all these cases an impulse acts. I = Fdt =Fav .∆t =∆p = constant ----------(18)
(i) In hitting or kicking a ball we decrease the time of contact so that large force acts on the ball
producing greater acceleration.
(ii) In catching a ball a player by drawing his hands backwards increases the time of contact and so,
lesser force acts on his hands and his hands are saved from getting hurt.

FRICTION
Friction is an opposing force that comes into play when one body actually moves (slides or rolls)
or even tries to move over the surface of another body. This resistance is represented by a single force
called friction. The force of friction is parallel to the surface and opposite to the direction of intended
motion.
TYPES OF FRICTION
(1) Static friction : Let us consider a block of weight mg lying on a horizontal surface as shown in
Fig.R is the normal reaction between the block and the horizontal surface. It balances mg,
i.e., R = mg ----(1)
Suppose a small force P is applied on the block to the right as shown. The force of friction F
opposes the motion. F = P -------(2)

This means as we increase P, friction F also increases, remaining equal to P always.

The opposing force that comes into play when one body tends to move over the surface of another,
but the actual motion has yet not started is called Static Friction.
Static friction is a self-adjusting force because it changes itself in accordance with the applied
force.

73
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

(2) Limiting friction : As we increase the applied force, a stage comes when the body is just at the
verge of moving over the other. The static friction at this stage is obviously maximum. This maximum
value of static friction is called Limiting Friction.
Hence Limiting Friction is the maximum opposing force that comes into play, when one body is
just at the verge of moving over the surface of another body..
The magnitude of limiting friction between any two bodies in contact is directly proportional to the
normal reaction between them. F ∝ R or F = µR -------(3)
Direction of the force of limiting friction is always opposite to the direction in which one body is at
the verge of moving over the other

Coefficient of static friction : µs is called coefficient of static friction and defined as the ratio
F
of force of limiting friction to the normal reaction µs = -------(4)
R

Dimensions of coefficient of static friction : [MoLoTo]. It has no unit. Value of coefficient of static
friction lies in between 0 and 1. Its value depends on material and nature of surfaces in contact. The
value of µs does not depend upon apparent area of contact.
(3) Kinetic or dynamic friction: If the applied force is increased further and sets the body in motion,
the friction opposing the motion is called kinetic friction. Kinetic friction depends upon the normal reaction.

Fk ∝ R or Fk = µ k R where µ k is called the coefficient of kinetic friction.

The value of µ k depends upon the nature of the surfaces in contact. Kinetic friction is always
lesser than limiting friction Fk < Fl ∴ µ k < µs
Types of kinetic friction
a) Sliding friction: The opposing force that comes into play when one body is actually sliding
over the surface of the other body is called sliding friction. e.g. A flat block is moving over a horizontal
table.
b) Rolling friction: When objects such as a wheel (disc or ring), sphere or a cylinder rolls over
a surface, the force of friction comes into play is called rolling friction. Rolling friction is directly proportional
to the normal reaction (R) and inversely proportional to the radius (r) of the rolling cylinder or wheel.
R
Frolling = µ r -------(5)
r

µ r is called coefficient of rolling friction. It would have the dimensions of length and measured
in metre.
Rolling friction is often quite small as compared to the sliding friction.
Advantages and Disadvantages of Friction
(1) Advantages of friction
(i) Walking is possible due to friction.
(ii) Two bodies stick together due to friction.

74
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

(iii) Brake works on the basis of friction.

(iv) Writing is not possible without friction.
(v) The transfer of motion from one part of a machine to other part through belts is possible by
friction.
(2) Disadvantages of friction
(i) Friction always opposes the relative motion between any two bodies in contact. Therefore
extra energy has to be spent in overcoming friction. This reduces the efficiency of machine.
(ii) Friction causes wear and tear of the parts of the machinery in contact. Thus their lifetime
reduces.
(iii) Frictional force result in the production of heat, which causes damage to the machinery.
Angle of Friction
Angle of friction may be defined as the angle which the resultant of limiting friction and normal
reaction makes with the normal reaction.
By definition angle θ is called the angle of friction

F F
tan θ = -------(6); tan θ = µ [As we know = µ]
R R

Hence coefficient of limiting friction is equal to tangent of the angle of friction.

Angle of Repose
Angle of repose is defined as the angle of the inclined plane with the horizontal such that a body
placed on it just begins to slide. By definition α is called the angle of repose
=
In limiting condition, F mg sin α and =R mg cos α

F
So = tan α
R

F F
µ tan=
∴ = = θ tan α -------(7) [As we know = µ = tan θ ]
R R

Thus the coefficient of limiting friction is equal to the tangent of angle of repose. As well as α = θ
i.e. angle of repose = angle of friction.

75
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Dynamics of Circular Motion

In circular motion or motion along any curved path, Newton’s law is applied in two perpendicular
directions one along the tangent and the other perpendicular to it i. e. towards centre. The component
of net force along the centre is called centripetal force. The component of net force along the tangent
is called tangential force.

dv mv 2
Tangential force ( Ft =
) ma=t m = m α r ; Centripetal force ( FC ) = mω2 r =
dt r

Motor Car moving over a convex bridge

The motion of a car over a convex bridge AB is the motion along the tangent of a circle AB. The
centripetal force is provided by the difference of weight mg of the car and the normal reaction R of the
bridge.

mv 2 mv 2
∴ mg − R = or R mg −
= -------- (8)
r r

Clearly, R < mg, i,e,. the weight of the moving car is less than the stationary car.

If R ≤ mg , the car will move along the track and if R > mg, the car will be detached from the
bridge

Circular Turning on Roads

When vehicles go through turnings, they travel along a nearly circular arc. There must be some
force which will produce the required centripetal acceleration. If the vehicles travel in a horizontal circular
path, this resultant force is also horizontal. The necessary centripetal force is being provided to the
vehicles by following three ways;

• By friction only

• By banking of roads only

• By both friction and banking of roads.

By Friction Only

Suppose a car of mass m is moving at a speed v in a horizontal circular arc of radius r. In this
case, the necessary centripetal force to the car will be provided by the force of friction f acting towards
the centre.

mv 2
Thus, f =
r

76
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Further, limiting value of f is µN or f L =µN =µmg  (N =mg )

mv 2
Therefore, for a safe turn without sliding, ≤ f L ----- (9)
r

mv 2
i.e., ≤ µmg or v ≤ µrg or v ≤ µrg ----- (10)
r

Here, two situations may arise. If m and r are known to us, the speed of the vehicle should not
v2
exceed µrg and if v and r known to us, the coefficient of friction should be greater than .
rg

Bending of a cyclist
A cyclist provides himself the necessary centripetal force by leaning inward on a horizontal track,
while going round a curve. Consider a cyclist of weight mg taking a turn of radius r with velocity v. In
order to provide the necessary centripetal force, the cyclist leans through angle θ inwards as shown
in figure.

The cyclist is under the action of the following forces:

The weight mg acting vertically downward at the centre of gravity of cycle and the cyclist.

The reaction R of the ground on cyclist. It will act along a line-making angle θ with the vertical.

The vertical component R cos θ of the normal reaction R will balance the weight of the cyclist,
while the horizontal component R sin θ will provide the necessary centripetal force to the cyclist.

mv 2
R sin θ = ------(i)
r

and R cos θ =mg ------(ii)

R sin θ mv 2 / r v2
=
Dividing equation (i) by (ii), we have = or tan θ -------- (iii)
R cos θ mg rg

77
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

−1  v2 
Therefore, the cyclist should bend through an angle θ = tan  
 rg 

It follows that the angle through which cyclist should bend will be greater, if

(1) The radius of the curve is small i.e., the curve is sharper.

(2) The velocity of the cyclist is large.

Note: For the same reasons, an ice skater or an aeroplane has to bend inwards, while taking a
turn.

By Banking of Roads Only

Friction is not always reliable at circular turns if high speeds and sharp turns are involved. To avoid
dependence on friction, the roads are banked at the turn so that the outer part of the road is some what
lifted compared to the inner part.

Applying Newton’s second law along the radius and in the vertical direction.

mv 2 v2
N
= sin θ and N=
cos θ mg; then=
tan θ =or v rg tan θ -------- (11)
r rg

78
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

QUESTIONS

1. A car is moving with uniform velocity on a 7. A 100 g iron ball having velocity 10 m/s
rough horizontal road. Therefore, according collides with a wall at an angle 30° and
to Newton’s first law of motion rebounds with the same angle. If the period
1) No force is being applied by its engine of contact between the ball and wall is 0.1
2) A force is surely being applied by its engine second, then the force experienced by the
3) An acceleration is being produced in the ball is
car 1) 10 N 2) 100 N
4) The kinetic energy of the car is increasing
3) 1.0 N 4) 0.1 N
2. A constant force acts on a body of mass
m which is at rest. A velocity v is acquired 8. A player caught a cricket ball of mass 150 gm
in moving a specific distance. v and m are moving at the rate of 20 m/sec. If the catching
related as process be completed in 0.1 sec the force of
1 1 the blow exerted by the ball on the hands of
1) v ∝ 2) v ∝ player is
m m
1) 0.3 N 2) 30 N
3) v ∝ m 4) v ∝ m 3) 300 N 4) 3000 N

3. The tension (N) in the spring is 9. A ball of mass 150g starts moving with an
acceleration of 20 m/s2. When hit by a force,
which acts on it for 0.1 s. The impulsive force
1) 0 2) 10 N is
3) 5 N 4) 25 N 1) 0.5 N-s 2) 0.1 N-s
4. A particle of mass 0.3 kg is subjected to a
force F = –kx with k = 15 N/m. What will be 3) 0.3 N-s 4) 1.2 N-s
its initial acceleration if it is released from a 10. Figure I, II, III and IV depict variation of force
point 20 cm away from the origin. with time.
1) 5 m/s2 2) 10 m/s2
3) 3 m/s2 4) 15 m/s2
5. A ball of mass 0.5 kg moving with a velocity
of 2 m/s strikes a wall normally and bounces (I) (II)
back with the same speed. If the time of
contact between the ball and the wall is one
millisecond, the average force exerted by the
wall on the ball is
1) 2000 N 2) 1000 N
3) 5000 N 4) 125 N (III) (IV)
6. A particle moves in X-Y plane under the

influence of a force F such that its instantaneous

momentum= is p ˆi 2 cos t + ˆj2sin t . What
is the angle between the force and the The impulse is highest in the case of situation
instantaneous momentum? depicted in figure(s).
1) 0o 2) 45o 1) I and II 2) III and I
3) 90o 4) 180o 3) III and IV 4) IV only

79
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

17.
F1= ( 2iˆ + ˆj − kˆ ) N ,
A force produces an acceleration of 4 ms–2
11. Three forces
in a body of mass m1 and the same force
F2 = ( 2iˆ + 3jˆ − 3kˆ ) N , F3= a ( ˆi + ˆj − kˆ ) N act produces an acceleration of 6 ms–2 in another
simultaneously on a particle. The value of ‘a’ body of mass m2. If the same force is applied
so that particle may be in equilibrium is to (m1 + m2), then the acceleration will be
1) 4 2) –4 1) 1.6 ms–2 2) 2 ms–2
3) 2 4) 6 3) 2.4 ms–2 4) 3.2 ms–2
12. A 10 kg stone is suspended with a rope of
18. Three blocks of masses m1, m2 and m3 are
breaking strength 30 kg wt. The minimum
connected by massless strings as shown on
time in which the stone can be raised through
a frictionless table. They are pulled with a
a height 10 m starting from rest is (taking
force T3 = 40 N. If m1 = 10 kg, m2 = 6 kg and
g = 10 N/kg)
m3 = 4 kg, the tension T2 will be
1) 0.5 seconds 2) 1.0 seconds
2
3) seconds 4) 2.0 seconds
3
13. A person is standing in an elevator. In which 1) 20 N 2) 40 N
situation he finds his weight less than the
actual weight. 3) 10 N 4) 32 N
1) The elevator moves upward with constant 19. Two masses m1 = 5 kg and m2 = 4.8 kg tied
acceleration to a string are hanging over a light frictionless
2) The elevator move downward with pulley. What is the acceleration of the masses
constant acceleration when they are free to move (g = 9.8 m/s2)
3) The elevator moves upward with uniform 1) 0.2 m/s2 2) 9.8 m/s2
velocity 3) 5 m/s2 4) 4.8 m/s2
4) The elevator moves downward with 20.  Two masses A and B, each of mass M are
uniform velocity fixed together by a massless spring. A force
14. A person of 60 kg enters a lift going up with an acts on the mass B as shown in figure.
acceleration 2 ms–2. The vertical downward
force acting on the person will be (g = 10
ms–2)
1) 480 N 2) 720 N At the instant, the mass A has acceleration
3) 240 N 4) 60 N a. What is the acceleration of mass B?
15. A body of mass 1.0 kg is falling with an F − Ma Ma
acceleration of 10 m/s2. Its apparent weight 1) 2)
M F+M
will be (g=10 m/s2).
1) 1.0 kg wt 2) 2.0 kg wt F + Ma MF
3) 4)
3) 0.5 kg wt 4) zero M F + Ma
16. Two spheres of masses 3 kg and 4 kg are
attached to ends of a string which passes 21. A block of mass m is placed on a smooth
over a frictionless pulley. Take g = 9.8 m/sec2. inclined wedge ABC of inclination θ as
The relative acceleration of the system is shown in the figure. The wedge is given
acceleration ‘a’ towards the right. The relation
1) 4 ms–2 2) 1.4 ms–2
between a and θ for the block to remain
3) 3 ms–2 4) 2.8 ms–2 stationary on wedge is

80
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

25. A horizontal force, just sufficient to move a

body of mass 4 kg lying on a rough horizontal
surface is applied on it. The coefficient of
static and kinetic friction between the body
and the surface are 0.8 and 0.6 respectively.
If the force continues to act even after the
block has started moving, the acceleration
of the block in ms–2 is (g = 10 ms–2)

g g 1 1
1) 2)
1) a = 2) a = 4 2
cosecθ sin θ
=
3) a g cos θ =
4) a g tan θ 3) 2 4) 4

22. A block of mass m1, of 3 kg, is lying on a 26. A fire man of mass 60 kg is holding a vertical
frictionless plane inclined at 30o with the pole. The coefficient of static friction between
horizontal. It is connected to a mass m2, of his hands and the pole is 0.5. If he is able to
4 kg, with the help of a string passing over a climb up the pole, what is the minimum force
pulley as shown in figure. The acceleration with which he should press the pole with his
of each block will be hand? Take g = 10 ms–2.
1) 1200 N 2) 600 N
3) 300 N 4) 150 N
27. A horizontal force of 12 N pushes a 0.5 kg
book against a vertical wall. The book is
initially at rest. If the coefficients of friction are
1) 2.55 ms–2 2) 3.55 ms–2 µ k =0.6 and µs =0.8 , which of the following
3) 4.55 ms–2 4) 5.55 ms–2 statements is true?

23. The angle between frictional force and the 1) The magnitude of the frictional force is 5N
instantaneous velocity of the body, moving 2) The magnitude of the frictional force is 7.2N
over a rough surface is
3) The normal force is 5 N
1) zero
4) The book will start moving and accelerated
π
2) 28. A block of mass 5 kg is kept on a horizontal
2
floor having coefficient of friction 0.09. Two
3) π mutually perpendicular horizontal forces of
3N and 4 N act on this block. The acceleration
4) equal to the angle of friction of the block is (g = 10 m/s2)
24. A body is placed on an inclined plane and 1) 0.5 m/s2 2) 0.1 m/s2
has to be pushed down. The angle made by
the normal reaction with the vertical will be 3) 0.2 m/s2 4) 0.4 m/s2
1) equal to the angle of repose 29. A marble block of mass 2 kg lying on ice when
given a velocity of 6m/s is stopped by friction
2) equal to the angle of friction
in 10 s. The coefficient of friction is:
3) less than the angle of repose
1) 0.01 2) 0.02
4) more than the angle of friction
3) 0.03 4) 0.06

81
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

30. A block of mass 1kg lies on a horizontal 1) 1.8 ms–2 2) 0.8 ms–2
surface in the truck, the coefficient of 3) 1.5 ms–2 4) 0.4 ms–2
friction between the block and the surface
is 0.6. If the acceleration of the truck is 35. A 100 kg car is moving with a maximum
5m/s2 the frictional force acting on the block velocity of 9 m/s across a circular track of
is radius 30 m. The maximum force of friction
between the road and the car is
1) 2 N 2) 5 N
1) 1000 N 2) 706 N
3) 3 N 4) 6 N
3) 270 N 4) 200 N
31. A 20 kg block is initially at rest on a rough
horizontal surface. A horizontal force of 75N is 36. A car moves at a speed of 36 km h–1 on a level
required to set the block in motion. After it is in road. The coefficient of friction between the
motion, a horizontal force of 60 N is required tyres and the road is 0.8. The car negotiates
to keep the block moving with constant a curve of radius R. If g = 10 ms–2, the car
speed. The coefficient of static friction is [g will skid (or slip) while negotiating the curve
= 9.8 m/s2] if the value of R is
1) 0.38 2) 0.44 1) 20 m 2) 12 m
3) 0.52 4) 0.60 3) 14 m 4) 16 m
32. A block A of mass 2 kg rests on another block 37. A body crosses the topmost point of a
B of mass 8 kg which rests on a horizontal vertical circle with critical speed. The value
floor. The coefficient of friction between A and of centripetal acceleration when the string
B is 0.2, while that between B and floor is 0.5. becomes horizontal is
When a horizontal force of 25 N is applied on 1) 3 g 2) 2g
the block B, the force of friction between A 3) g 4) zero
and B is
38. A ball of mass 0.25 kg attached to the ends
of a string of length 1.96 m is rotating in
a horizontal circle. The string will break,
if tension is more than 25 N. What is the
maximum velocity with which the ball can be
rotated?
1) Zero 2) 3.9 N
3) 5.0 N 4) 49 N 1) 3 m/s 2) 5 m/s
3) 9 m/s 4) 14 m/s
33. A block of mass 10 kg is placed on an inclined
plane. When the angle of inclination is 30o, 39. A stone of mass 1 kg is tied to a string 4 m
the block just begins to slide down the plane. long and is rotated at a constant speed of
The force of static friction nearly is 40 ms-1 in a vertical circle. The ratio of the
1) 2 kg wt 2) 3 kg wt tension at the top and at the bottom is
3) 4 kg wt 4) 5 kg wt 1) 11 : 12 2) 39 : 41
3) 41 : 39 4) 12 : 11
34. The coefficient of kinetic friction is 0.03 in the
diagram where mass m2 = 20 kg and m1= 4kg. Numerical Type
The acceleration of the block shall be (g= 10
ms–2) 40. Calculate the force (in N) required to impart to
car a velocity of 30 m/s in 10 second starting
from rest. The mass of the car is 1500 kg.
41. The momentum of the body is given by
P ( t ) = 3t 2 + 4t + 5 . Find the force (in N)
acting on the body at t = 5s.

82
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

42. The force in N which can push 150 N body Statement Type
upwards along an incline of 30o with an
1) If both Statement I and Statement II are
acceleration of 5 m/s2 will be
true
43. A block of mass 5 kg is lying on a rough 2) If both Statement I and Statement II are
horizontal surface. The coefficients of static false
and kinetic friction between the blocks and
the surface are 0.7 and 0.5 respectively. A 3) If Statement I is true but Statement II is
horizontal force just sufficient to move the false
block is applied to it. If the force continues to 4) If Statement I is false but Statement II is
act even after the block has started moving true
calculate the acceleration of block. (take
g = 10 ms–2) 47. Statement I : I n c i r c u l a r m o t i o n ,
acceleration always acts
Assertion - Reason Type towards the centre of the
circle.
1) If both the Assertion and Reason are true
and the Reason is true explanation of the Statement II : The speed of a particle in
Assertion uniform circular motion is
constant.
2) If both the Assertion and Reason are true
48. Statement I : It is difficult to run on the sand
but the Reason is not the true explanation
since no frictional force is
of the Assertion
produced by sand.
3) If Assertion is true but Reason is false Statement II : Force required to move a
body may be greater than
4) If Assertion is false but Reason is true
the weight of the body.
44. Assertion : It is difficult to move a cycle 49. Statement I : Angle of repose is equal to
along the road with its breaks angle of limiting friction.
on.
Statement II : When the body is just at the
Reason : Sliding friction is greater than point of motion, the force of
rolling friction. friction in this stage is called
as limiting friction.
45. Assertion : A cloth covers a table.
Some dishes are kept on it. 50. Match Column I with Column II.
The cloth can be pulled out Column I Column II
without disloding the dishes
A) Definition of force p) Newton’s third
from the table.
law
Reason : For every action, there is an B) Measure of force q) Impulse
equal and opposite reaction.
C) Effect of force r) Newton’s
46. Assertion : Same force applied for the second law
same time causes the same D) Recoiling of gun s) Newtons first
change in momentum for law
different bodies.
1) A - s, B - r, C - q, D - p
Reason : The total momentum of an 2) A - q, B - p, C - r, D - s
isolated system of interacting 3) A - p, B - q, C - r, D - s
bodies remains conserved.
4) A - s, B - q, C - r, D - p

83
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

KEY WITH HINTS

1. 2 Since force is needed to overcome ∴F=

10 N
frictional force.
2. 1 Work done = Force × displacement
The energy is manifested as kinetic
energy; K.E. = ½ mv2 = constant since v
acquired is of a definite magnitude.
½mv2 = constant
2 1
=
v2 constant or v ∝
m m
3. 3 5N force will not generate any tension in
a spring without the support of other 5N dv 20
8. 2 F= m = 0.15 × = 30N
force. Consequently the tension in the dt 0.1
spring will be 5N.
9. 3 Impulse = Force × time = m a t
4. 2 m = 0.3 Kg; F = – kx; = 0.15 × 20 × 0.1 = 0.3 N-s
Force (F) =15 × 0.2 =3N
10. 3 Impulse ∫ F dt = Area under F-t graph.
F 3
a =
= = 10 m / s 2   
m 0.3 11. 2 F1 + F2 + F3 =
0
Take any one direction along x-axis;
2+2+a=0
∆p mv − ( −mv )
5. 1 F=
av = a=–4
∆t ∆t
12. 2 m = 10 kg; breaking force
= 30 kgω
= t 300N
= Tmax
2mv 2 × 0.5 × 2
= =
= 2000N
∆t 10−3 T – mg = ma;
 300 − 10 ×10
=
⇒a = 20 m / s 2
3 p ˆi2 cos t + ˆj2sin t ;
=
6. 10
 dp
∴ F= = −2iˆ sin t + 2ˆjcos t 1 1
dt ⇒S= × a × t 2 ⇒ 10 = × 20 × t 2
2 2

∴ F.p − = ( −2iˆ sin t + 2ˆjcos t ) . ( ˆi2 cos t + ˆj2sin t ) ⇒t=1 sec
−4sin t cos t + 4sin t cos t =
= 0
 13. 2
 o
Hence angle between F and p = 90 14. 2 Downward force = m(g + a)
7. 1 F = Rate of change in momentum = 60 (10+2) = 720 N
15. 4 When a body falls down from a certain
2mv sin θ 2 ×10−1 ×10sin 30o height, then apparent weight is given by:
=
=
t 0.1 W’ = m(g – a)

84
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

Substituting m = 1.0 kg, a = 10 ms–2 and 21. 4 Using pseudo force

g = 10 ms–2, we get W’ = 0
 ( m 2 − m1 ) 
16. 2 Acceleration =  ×g
 ( m 2 + m1 ) 

ma cos
= θ mg sin θ=
; a g tan θ
 ( 4 − 3)  9.8
=   × 9.8 = = 1.4 m / s 2
 ( 4 + 3)  7 22. 2 At equilibrium, m2g – T = m2a ------ (1)
T – m1gsin θ = m1a ------ (2)
F F
3 m1
17.= = and m 2 ;
4 6 Adding (1) and (2)
With both m2g – m1g sin30° = (m1 + m2) a;

F F 25
=
a = = 2.4 m / s 2 ⇒a= = 3.55 ms −2
m1 + m 2 ( F / 4) + ( F / 6) 7
23. 3 Frictional force is always directed opposite
to the direction of motion.
40
=
18. 4 a = 2 m / s2 ; 24. 3 The body need not be pushed down,
10 + 6 + 4 when the angle of inclination is equal to
the angle of repose. In such a case it will
40 – T2 = 4a;
automatically move down.
⇒ T2 = 40 − 4 × 2 = 32N 25. 3 The minimum force required to just move
Alter: Direct formula; a body will be f s = µs mg . After the motion

T2 =
( m1 + m 2 ) × T3 =
16
× 40 = 32N
is started, the friction will become kinetic.
So the force which is responsible for the
m1 + m 2 + m3 20
increase in velocity of the block is
F= ( µs − µ k ) mg
( 5 − 4.8 ) × 9.8 2
19. 1 a = 0.2 m / s
=
5 + 4.8 = ( 0.8 − 0.6 ) × 4 ×10= 8 N

20. 1 For motion of mass A, T = Ma, where T
denotes tension in the spring F 8
So, a= = = 2 ms −2
For motion of mass B, Ma’ = F – T, where m 4
a’ denotes acceleration of B
26. 1 For climbing up the minimum force of
( F − Ma ) friction should be equal to his weight. That
Or Ma ' =F − Ma ⇒ a ′ = ; is: µR = Mg
M

( F − Ma ) Mg  10 
∴ Acceleration of mass B = Hence, R = =
 60 × N =
1200N
M µ  0.5 

85
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

27. 1 N = F = 12 newton; µs N =
9.6 Newton ; 32. 1 FBS between block B and surface
FBS = 0.5 ( m + M ) g
µ BS .R =
µk N =
7.2 Newton ; 0.5 ( 2 + 8 )10 =
50N , but the applied
force is 25N. So the lower block will not
W = mg = 5 Newton move therefore there is no pseudo force
and since w < µs N ; f = W = 5 Newton on upper block A. Hence there will be no
force of friction between A and B
33. 4 F= mg sin θ= 10 × 9.8 × sin 30
1
=10 × 9.8 × =5 × 9.8N
2
∴F=5 kgwt [1 kgwt = 9.8 N]

28. 2 Net external force F = ( 4 )2 + ( 3)2 = 5 N 34. 3 Let the acceleration of the system is ‘a’
From the F.B.D of m2;
Maximum friction T −=
F m 2 a ⇒ T − µm=
2g m2a
f max = ( 0.09 )( 5 )(10 ) =
µmg = 4.5N
⇒ T − 0.03 × 20 ×10 =20a
Since, F > fmax, block will move with an
acceleration; ⇒ T−6 =20a ---- (i)
F − f max 5 − 4.5
=a = = 0.1 m / s From the FBD of m1; m1g – T = m1a
m 5
⇒ 4 ×10 − T = 4a ⇒ 40 − T = 4a ----- (ii)
v v Solving (i) and (ii); a = 1.5 m/s2
29. 4 µmg= ma= m ; µg= ; 35. 3 Maximum force of friction = centripetal
t t
force;
2
mv 2 100 × ( 9 )
v 6 = = 270N
µ= = ; µ= 0.06 r 30
gt 10 ×10
36. 2 Speed of car (v) = 36 km h–1 = 10 ms–1.
30. 2 N = mg; f = µmg ; F = ma; The maximum centripetal force that
friction can provide is
Pseudo force F = ma = 1 × 5 = 5 N
mv 2
f= ( 0.6 ) (1) (10 ) =
µmg = 6N ; f max =
µmg =
R

f > F; So body does not slide. v 2 10 ×10
or R min
= = = 12.5 m
∴ Frictional force = applied force = µg 0.8 × 10
Pseudo force = 5N
This is the minimum radius the curve must
31. 1 Given, mass (m) = 20 kg have for the car to negotiate it without
Static force fs = 75N sliding at a speed of 10ms–1.
Kinetic force fk = 60 N 37. 1 The body crosses the topmost point of a
Coefficient of static friction; vertical circle with critical velocity so the
velocity at the lowest point of vertical circle
fs 75
µ=
s = ; µ=
s 0.38 = 5 Rg .
mg 20 × 9.8

86
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

When string supporting the body becomes 41. 34

horizontal, vertical distance travelled is R.
dp
F= ; P ( t ) = 3t 2 + 4t + 5
dt

F = 6 t + 4; At t = 5

F = 30 + 4 = 34 N

42. 150
F = Mg = 150 ⇒ M = 15 kg;
∴ v2 =u 2 − 2gR =5gR − 2gR =3gR ;
= 150 × sin 30o + 15 × 5
F Mg sin θ + Ma
=

v 2 3Rg 150
=
Centripetal acceleration = = 3g F= + 75 = 150 N
R R 2
38. 4 Maximum tension in the string = centripetal
43. 2 F =µs mg =0.7 × 5 × 10 =35N .
force.
mv 2 F o r c e r e s p o n s i b l e f o r p r o d u c i n g
T= ; acceleration of block is
r
f = applied force – force of dynamic friction
T × r 25 ×1.96
2
=
v = = 196 = F − µ k mg= 35 − 0.5 × 5 ×10= 10N

m 0.25
∴ v=
14 m / s f 10
a =
= = 2 ms −2
m 5

mv 2 mv 2 44. 1
39. 2 Ttop =− mg; Tbottom =+ mg
r r
45. 2 Dishes will remain over the table if the
friction on them is not enough to change
the state of motion as fast as that of the
v2 40 × 40 cloth.
Ttop −g − 10
= = r 4 ∴ Both the statements are true and
Tbottom v 2 40 × 40
+g + 10 Reason is not the correct explanation for
r 4 Assertion.

46. 2
400 − 10 390 39
=
= = ⇒ 39 : 41 47. 1 Both statements are true.
400 + 10 410 41
40. 4500 48. 4 Running on sand is difficult because the
v = u + at; 30 = 0 + a × 10; sand yields, so reaction force is missing.
30 49. 1
=
a = 3m / s 2
10
50. 1
∴ F = m × a = 1500 × 3 = 4500 N

87
 CHAPTER
WORK, ENERGY AND POWER
05

Work Done by Constant Force

In everyday life, the term ‘work’ is considered to be synonym of ‘labour’, ‘toil’, ‘effort’ etc. In physics,
there is a specific way of defining work.
Work is said to be done by a force when the force produces a displacement in the body on which
it acts in any direction except perpendicular to the direction of the force
For work to be done, following two conditions must be fulfilled.
(i) A force must be applied.
(ii) The applied force must produce a displacement in any direction except perpendicular to the
direction of the force.
 
Suppose a force F is applied on a body in such a way that the body suffers a displacement S in the
direction of the force. Then the work done is given by

W = FS
However, the displacement need not always take place in the direction of the force. Suppose a
  
constant force F , applied on a body, produces a displacement S in the body in such a way that S is

inclined to F at an angle θ . Now the work done will be given by the dot product of force and displacement.
 
W = F.S , since work is the dot product of two vectors therefore it is a scalar quantity.
W= ( Fcos θ ) S ------ (1)
FS cos θ, or W =
∴ W = component of force in the direction of displacement × magnitude of displacement.
So work is the product of the component of force in the direction of displacement and the magnitude
of the displacement.

=
Also, W F ( Scos θ ) ------ (2)
or work is the product of the component of displacement in the direction of the force and the
magnitude of the force.

88
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Special Cases:
o
Case (i) When θ =90 , then W = FS cos 90o = 0
So, work done by a force is zero if the body is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the direction of
the force.
Work done by a variable force
Often the force applied to an object varies with position. Important examples include electric and
gravitational force, which vary with the distance between interacting objects. The force of a spring is
another example; as the spring stretches, the force increases.

   
Here we cannot apply W = F. S . Since F is a variable. So we take a small part dS of its path.

This dS is very small so that force may not vary during this displacement. So the work done during this
displacement is
 
dW F=
= . dS F dS cos θ

The total work done in going from A to B as shown may be calculated by summing up i.e. integrating
the work done during all its small fractions.
  B B
WA →B ∫=
i.e. = F . dS
A
∫ ( F cos θ ) dS ,
A
In terms of rectangular components,

 
F = Fx ˆi + Fy ˆj + Fz kˆ and dS = dx ˆi + dy ˆj + dz kˆ

xB yB zB

therefore, WA →B = ∫ F dx + ∫ F dy + ∫ F dz
xA
x
yA
y
zA
z

Work done as Area under the force displacement graph

Suppose a particle moving along a straight line and a variable force acting on it.
xf

W= ∫ [Link]
x in
= Area under F - x graph from x = xin to xf.

89
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

In general, the work done from initial point xin to final point xf is given by the area under the force-
displacement curve as shown in the figure.
Area (work) above the x-axis is taken as positive, and below x-axis as negative
Units of work:
1. Unit of work:
I. In CGS system, the unit of work is erg.
One erg of work is said to be done when a force of one dyne displaces a body through one
centimetre in its own direction. ∴ 1 erg = 1 dyne × 1 cm = 1 g cm s–2 × 1 cm = 1 g cm2s–2
II. In SI, the unit of work is joule.
One joule of work is said to be done when a force of one Newton displaces a body through
one metre in its own direction.
1 Joule = 1 Newton × 1 metre = 1 kg × 1 m/s2 × 1 m = 1 kg m2 s–2.
Relation between joule and erg
1 joule = 1 newton × 1 metre; 1 joule = 105 dyne × 102 cm = 107 dyne cm
1 joule = 107 erg; 1 erg = 10 –7 joule
Dimensions of work
[Work] = [Force] [Distance] = [MLT–2] [L] = [ML2T–2]
On the basis of dimensional formula, the unit of work is kg m2 s–2.
Conservative and Non-conservative Forces
Gravitational, electrostatic, and restoring force of a spring are some of the natural forces produces
work done that depends only on the locations of the initial and final points and not on the path followed.
On the other hand, there are forces such as friction, whose work depends on path followed. Accordingly,
forces are divided into two categories - one whose work is path independent called conservative and
other whose work is path dependant called non-conservative forces. The forces of the former category
are known as conservative forces and of the latter one as non-conservative forces.
A force is conservative if the work done by it on a body moving it from one position to another
position depends only on the initial and final positions and not on the path followed by it.
or The net work done by the force on a body that moves through any closed path is zero.
A force is said to be non conservative if the work done by it on a body between two positions
depends on the path followed by the body between the two positions.
or The work done by the force on a body that moves through a closed path is non-zero.
Conservative Force and Potential Energy
For a conservative force F that depends upon position r, there is a potential energy function U
which also depends on r. When a conservative force does positive work, the potential energy of the
system decreases, i.e.,
dU
Work done = decrease in potential energy or Fdr = – dU or F = − -----(3)
dr
Hence the negative derivative of the potential energy function with respect to position gives the
conservative force acting on the system.

90
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

The change in potential energy when the body is displaced from r = a to r = b is U b − U a =[Link]∫
a
Note: F is negative if r is opposite to F and positive if r is in the same direction as F.
Energy
Definition: Energy is defined as internal capacity of doing work.
Energy appears in many forms such as mechanical, electrical, chemical, thermal (heat), optical
(light), acoustical (sound), molecular, atomic, nuclear etc., and can change from one form to the other.
Unit: erg is the CGS unit of energy and joules is the SI unit.
1 erg = 1 g × (1 cm/s)2; 1 J = 1 kg × (1 m/s)2
Kinetic Energy
The energy possessed by a body by virtue of its motion is called kinetic energy.
Examples: (i) Flowing water possesses kinetic energy which is used to run the water mills.
(ii) Moving vehicle possesses kinetic energy.
(iii) Moving air (ie, wind) possesses kinetic energy which is used to run wind mills.

1) Expression for kinetic energy :

Let m = mass of the body, u = initial velocity of the body ( = 0), F = force acting on the body,

a = Acceleration of the body, s = Distance travelled by the body, v = Final velocity of the body

2 v2
From v2 = u2 + 2as ⇒ v = 0 + 2as ∴s =
2a

Since the displacement of the body is in the direction of the applied force, then work done by the
force is

v2 1
W = F × s = ma ×
; ⇒ W = mv 2
2a 2

1
This work done appears as the kinetic energy of the body KE
= W
= mv 2 ------ (4)
2

2) Work-energy theorem: From equation (4) dW = mv dv

Work done on the body in order to increase its velocity from u to v is given by
v v
 v2  1 [ 2
W m∫ v =
= dv m   ; W
⇒= m v − u 2 ] ------ (5)
u
 2 u 2

Work done = change in kinetic energy W = ∆E ------ (6)

This is work energy theorem, it states that work done by a force acting on a body is equal to the
change produced in the kinetic energy of the body.

91
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Examples:

(i) In case of vertical motion of a body under gravity when the body is projected up, force of
gravity is opposite to motion and so kinetic energy of the body decreases and when it falls
down, force of gravity is in the direction of motion so kinetic energy increases.

(ii) When a body moves on a rough horizontal surface, as force of friction acts opposite to
motion, kinetic energy will decrease and the decrease in kinetic energy is equal to the work
done against friction.

3) Relation between kinetic energy and linear momentum: As we know

1 1 p 2 1
E
= 2
mv= v [ As=
p mv ] ∴ =
E pv
2 2  v  2
1 1 p2 2E
∴ KE, E = mv 2 = pv = ------ (7) p
and Momentum = = 2mE ------ (8)
2 2 2m v
From the above relation it is clear that a body can not have kinetic energy without having momentum
and vice-versa.
Potential Energy
The difference in potential energy between two points A & B is equal to the work done by external

( )
force Fext against the conservative forces in moving a particle slowly (that is without developing kinetic

energy) between those two points.

B
 
UB − UA = ( )
∆U =Wext A → B =∫ Fext .dr
slowly
A

      
Fext + FC =
ma ⇒ Fext + FC =
0 ⇒ Fext =
−FC

B
 
∆U =− ∫ FC . dr ⇒ ∆U =− WC
A

Change in potential energy between two points is equal to the negative of work done by conservative
forces.
Gravitational potential energy for uniform gravitational force:
Near the earth surface, the variation in the gravitational force between a body of mass m and the
earth can be neglected. For such a system, change in gravitational potential energy in any vertically
upward displacement h of mass m is given by ∆U = mgh and in vertical downward displacement h is
given by ∆U = −mgh
Elastic Potential Energy
(1) Restoring force and spring constant: When a spring is stretched or compressed from its normal
position (x = 0) by a small distance x, then a restoring force is produced in the spring to bring it to the
normal position. According to Hooke’s law this restoring force is proportional to the displacement x and
its direction is always opposite to the displacement.

92
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

   
ie, F ∝ − x ; or F = − k x ------ (9); where k is called spring constant.

if x = 1, F = k (Numerically); or k = F
Hence spring constant is numerically equal to the force required to produce unit displacement in
the spring.
Actually k is a measure of the stiffness/softness of the spring.
F [ F] [ MLT −2 ]
Dimensions : As k = ∴[ k ] = = = [ MT −2 ]
x [x] L
Units : S.I. unit is newton/metre, C.G.S. unit is dyne/cm
(2) Expression for elastic potential energy: When a spring is stretched or compressed from its
 
=
normal position (x = 0), work has to be done by external force against restoring force. Fext F=
restoring kx

.
Let the spring is further stretched through the distance dx, then work done
 
dW F=
= ext .dx Fext .dx cos
= 0o kx dx  As cos
= 0o 1

Therefore total work done to stretch the spring through a distance x from its mean position
is given by
x x x
 x2  1 2
W ∫=
= dW ∫ kx=
dx k  =  kx ------ (10)
0 0
 2 0 2
This work done is stored as the potential energy of the stretched spring.
1 2 1  F F2
∴ Elastic potential energy
= U = kx ; U Fx =
 As k Also U =
2 2  x  2k

1 2 1 F2
U
∴ Elastic potential energy= kx
= = Fx ------ (11)
2 2 2k
Note: If the spring is stretched from initial position x1 to final position x2 then work done
1
=
= Increment in elastic potential energy = k ( x 22 − x12 )
2

93
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

(3) Energy graph for a spring: If the mass attached with the spring performs simple harmonic
motion about its mean position then its potential energy at any position (x) can be given by

1 2
U= kx ------ (12); So for the extreme position
2

1 2
U = ka [ As x = ± a for extreme ]
2

This is the maximum potential energy or the total energy of the mass.

1 2
∴ Total energy E = ka ------ (13) (v = 0 at extreme so KE = 0)
2

1 1 2 1 ( 2
2
Now kinetic energy at any position K = E − U = ka − kx = k a − x 2 ) ------ (14)
2 2 2

1 2
∴ U max = ka [ At extreme x =
± a ] and U min =
0 [ At mean x =
0]
2

1 2
K max = ka [ At x = 0] and K min = 0 [ At extreme x = ± a]
2

It means kinetic energy changes parabolically with respect to position but total energy remains
always constant irrespective to position of the mass.

94
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Motion in a Vertical Circle

Consider the motion of a small body (say stone) tied to a string and whirled in a vertical circle.
If at any time the body is at angular position θ , as shown in the figure, the forces acting on it are the
tension T in the string along the radius towards the centre and the weight of the body mg acting vertically
downwards.

mv 2 mv 2
Applying Newton’s law towards centre, T − mg cos
= θ or=
T + mg cos θ
r r

The body will move on the circular path only if Tmin > 0(as if Tmin ≤ 0 ) the string will slack and the

body will fall down instead of moving on the circle.) So for completing the circle, i.e. looping the loop,
2
the minimum tension in the string T = 0 ( θ =180o ) . mv H − mg =
0 ie, v H = gr ---------- (15)
r

Now applying conservation of mechanical energy between highest point H and lowest point L.
1 1 1 1
mg × 2r + =mv 2H mv 2L ; 2mgr + =mrg mv 2L ; 5mgr
= mv L2=
; vL 5rg
2 2 2 2

i.e, for looping the loop, the minimum velocity at lowest point must be v L = 5gr ---------- (16)
In case of motion in a vertical plane, the tension is maximum at lowest position and in the above
case of looping the loop Tmax = 6 mg --------- (17)
VARIOUS FORMS OF ENERGY : THE LAW OF CONSERVATION OF ENERGY
Mechanical energy can be classified into two distinct categories : one based on motion, namely
kinetic energy; the other on configuration (position), namely potential energy. Energy comes in many a
forms which transform into one another
The Equivalence of Mass and Energy
Till the end of the nineteenth century, physicists believed that in every physical and chemical
process, the mass of an isolated system is conserved. Albert Einstein (1879-1955), showed that mass
and energy are equivalent and are related by the relation E = m c2
where c, the speed of light in vacuum is approximately 3 ×108 m s–1.
When 1 kg mass is converted into energy.
E = 1× (3 ×108)2 J = 9 ×1016 J. This is equivalent to the annual electrical output of a large (3000
MW) power generating station.

95
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

The principle of conservation of energy

The total mechanical energy is conserved, if the forces doing work are conservative. If some of
the forces involved are non conservative, part of the mechanical energy may get transformed into other
forms such as heat, light and sound. The total energy of an isolated system does not change. Energy
may be transformed from one form to another but the total energy of an isolated system remain constant.
Energy can neither be created, nor be distroyed.
Conservation of Mechanical Energy
The work-energy theorem, shows that the change ∆KE in a body’s kinetic energy is equal to the

net work done on it: ∆KE =

Wnet

Consider separately the work W c done by conservative force and the work W nc done by
nonconservative forces. Then KE
= We + Wne

We’ve defined the change in potential energy ∆U as the negative of the work done by conservative

forces. So we can write.

∆KE = −∆U + Wnc ; or ∆KE + ∆U = Wnc

We define the sum of the kinetic and potential energy as the mechanical energy. The Equation
shown that the change in mechanical energy is equal to the work done by non-conservative forces.
i.e. ∆E
= Wnc ; ∴ ∆E
= 0 if Wnc= 0

Thus if work done by non-conservative forces is zero the mechanical energy of the system is
unchanged. This is called law of conservation of mechanical energy. It may also be written as
∆U + ∆KE = 0; or ∆U = −∆KE ( Increase in PE = Decrease in KE)

or U + KE = constant; or U in + KE in =U f + KE f

Power
Power of a body is defined as the rate at which the body can do the work.
∆W W
Average power ( P
=av ) =
∆t t

 
dW F. ds  
Instantaneous power ( Pin=
st. ) =  As dW
= F . ds 
dt dt


    ds 
Pinst = F . v ------ (18)  As v = 
 dt 
ie, power is equal to the scalar product of force with velocity.

96
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Important points

(1) ] [ F][ v=]

Dimensions: [ P= [ MLT −2 ][ LT −1 ] ] [ ML2 T −2 ]
∴ [ P=
(2) Units : watt or joule/ sec [S.I.], erg/sec [C.G.S.]
Practical units: kilowatt (kW), Mega watt (MW) and Horse Power (hp)
Relations between different units: 1 watt = 1 Joule / sec = 107 erg/sec
1 hp = 746 watt; 1 MW = 106 watt; 1 kW = 103 watt

1
(3) If work done by two bodies is same then power ∝
time

ie, the body which perform the given work in lesser time possess more power and vice-versa.
(4) As power = work/time, any unit of power multiplied by a unit of time gives unit of work (or energy),
ie, kilowatt-hour or watt-day are units of work or energy.

J
1k Wh = 10

3
× ( 60 × 60 sec ) = 3.6 ×106 joule
sec

dW
(5) P
The slope of work-time curve gives the instantaneous power. As = = tan θ
dt

dW
(6) Area under power time curve gives the work done as P =
dt
∴W
= ∫ P dt ∴ W = Area under P-t curve

COLLISION
Collision
Collision in a system takes place when there is an interactive force acts for a short time between
two or more bodies.
(i) In a collision, a relatively large force acts on each colliding particle for a relatively short time.

(ii) In collision, it is not necessary that the colliding particles come in contact physically.

(iii) In a collision, if the motion of colliding particles before and after the collision is along the same
line, the collision is said to be head on or one dimensional. Particles move in other directions than
initial direction after collisions is called oblique impact.

97
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

(iv) The law of conservation of momentum holds good for any type of collision (elastic, inelastic or
perfectly inelastic). The total momentum of the system after the collision must be equal to the
total momentum of the system before collision. Although the momentum of individual particles
within the system may be changed, but the total momentum remains constant.

(v) A perfectly elastic collision: If in a collision, along with momentum KE is also conserved, the
collision is said to be perfectly elastic.

(vi) An inelastic collision: If in a collision, some kinetic energy is lost, the collision is said to be inelastic.
All real collisions belong to this category. Here, KE appears in other forms.

(vii) A perfectly inelastic collision: If in a collision, two bodies stick together or move with same velocity
after the collision, the collision is said to be perfectly inelastic.

(viii) The conservation of momentum and the conservation of total energy holds for all the three types
of collisions, but KE conservation hold only for perfectly elastic collisions.

(ix) The collisions of elementary particles, like electrons, protons with the nucleus are examples of
nearly perfectly elastic collisions. In real collisions, like collision of a ball with a wall, etc., some
KE is lost in the form of heat and sound. However, these are usually neglected and collisions are
treated as elastic collisions.

Elastic collision

During collision if KE is conserved the collision is elastic, i.e., Initial KE will be equal to the final
KE. For an inelastic collision the KE is not conserved, i.e., the final KE will not be equal to the initial KE.
The loss in KE appears in other forms of energy.

Inelastic collision

If two bodies after collision stick together the collision is perfectly in-elastic.

The ratio of relative velocity after collision to the relative velocity before collision is called coefft.
of restitution e.
 
| v 2 − v1 |  
e =   ------(19);
= e 0,=
v 2 v1 , perfectly inelastic collision.
| u 2 − u1 |
   
e = 1 | v 2 − v1 | = | u 2 − u1 | , perfectly elastic collision.; For all other collision, 0 < e < 1.
Collision in one dimension

Elastic collision

Consider two bodies moving along a line with velocities u1 and u2 collide elastically, after collision
they travel with velocities v1 and v2.

98
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

By law of conservation of momentum

m1u1 + m 2 u 2 = m1v1 + m 2 v 2 ; m1 ( u1 − v1 ) = m 2 ( v 2 − u 2 ) ---------(20)

since collision is elastic, KE is conserved.
1 1 1 1
m1u12 + m 2 u=
2
2 m1v12 + m 2 v 22 ; m1 ( u12 − v12=
) m2 ( v22 − u 22 ) ---------(21)
2 2 2 2

Dividing eqn. (21) by (20); u1 + v1 = v 2 + u 2 ; ( u1 − u 2 ) = v 2 − v1 ---------(22)

Thus in one dimensional elastic collision, relative velocity of approach = relative velocity of
recession.
Multiplying eqn. (22) with m2 and subtracting it from eqn. (20)

 m1 − m 2  2m 2
( m1 − m 2 ) u1 + 2m 2 u 2 =
( m1 + m 2 ) u1; v1 =
 m + m  u1 + m + m u 2 ---------(23)
 1 2  1 2

Similarly multiplying eqn. (22) with m1 and adding to (19)

2m1 m − m1
2m1u1 + ( m 2 − m1 ) u 2 = ( m1 + m 2 ) v 2 ; v 2 = u1 + 2 u 2 ---------(24)
m1 + m 2 m1 + m 2

If the masses are equal, m1 = m2 = m; then v1 = u2 and v2 = u1

ie, For an elastic collision of two bodies of equal masses, in one dimension the velocities are
interchanged, initially if u2 = 0, then v1 will become zero ie, if the second body was at rest initially then
the Ist body stops motion and the second body moves with the velocity of the first body.

99
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

QUESTIONS

1. A weightlifter lifts a weight off the ground and 6. An escalator is moving downwards with a
holds it up, then uniform speed u. A man of mass m is running
upwards on it at a uniform speed v. If the
1) work is done in lifting as well as holding
height of the escalator is h, the work done
the weight
by the man in going up the escalator is
2) no work is done in both lifting and holding
the weight
1) zero 2) mgh
3) work is done in lifting the weight but no mghu mghv
work is required to be done in holding it 3) 4)
(v − u) (v − u)
up
7. A ball is released from the top of a tower. The
4) no work is done in lifting the weight but
ratio of work done by the force of gravity in
work is required to be done in holding it
Ist second, 2nd second and 3rd second of the
up
motion of the ball is
2. If a person is pushing a box inside a moving
train, the work done in the frame of earth will
1) 1 : 2 : 3 2) 1 : 4 : 16
be:

( s0 = displacement of the train relative to 3) 1 : 3 : 5 4) 1 : 9 : 25

ground. s = displacement of the box w.r.t
train.)
   8. A mass M is lowered with the help of a string
1) zero 2) F. ( s + s0 ) by a distance h at a constant acceleration
g/2. The work done by the string will be:
  
3) F. s 4) F.s 0
Mgh Mgh
3. A body is acted upon by a force which is 1) 2) −
2 2
inversely proportional to the distance x. The
work done will be proportional to 3Mgh 3Mgh
3) 4) −
1) x 2) x 2
2 2
3) x3/2 4) none of these 9. Two springs have their force constants as k1
 and k2 (k1 > k2). When they are stretched by
A force of F= 2x ˆi + 2ˆj + 3z kˆ N is acting on
2
4.
the same force.
a particle. Find the work done by this force
in displacing the body from (1, 2, 3) m to (3,
6, 1) m 1) No work is done in case of both the springs
1) –10 J 2) 100 J
2) Equal work is done in case of both the
3) 10 J 4) 1 J springs
5. The work done in dragging a stone of mass
100 kg up an inclined plane 1 in 100 through 3) More work is done in case of second
a distance of 10 m is (take g = 9.8 m/s2) spring
1) zero 2) 980 J
3) 9800 J 4) 98 J 4) More work is done in case of first spring

100
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

10. A force F acting on an object varies with 14. A stone is dropped from the top of a tall tower.
distance x as shown in the figure. The ratio of the kinetic energy of the stone
at the end of three seconds to the increase
in the kinetic energy of the stone during the
next three seconds is

1) 1 : 1 2) 1 : 2

3) 1 : 3 4) 1 : 9

15. Two springs with spring constants K1 = 1500

N/m and K2 = 3000 N/m are stretched by the
same force. The ratio of potential energy
stored in springs will be

1) 1 : 2 2) 2 : 1
The work done by the force in moving the
object from x = 0 to x = 8 m is 3) 4 : 1 4) 1 : 4
1) zero J 2) 80 J
16. At time t = 0, a particle starts moving along
3) –40 J 4) 40 J the x-axis. If its K.E. increases uniformly
11. A uniform chain of length 2 m is kept on a with time t, the net force acting on it must be
table such that a length of 60 cm hangs freely proportional to :
from the edge of the table. The total mass of
the chain is 4 kg. The work done in pulling 1) t 2) t
the entire chain on the table is (Take g = 10
m/s2)
1
1) 12.9 J 2) 6.3 J 3) 4) Constant
3) 3.6 J 4) 2.0 J t
12. A particle is acted upon by a force of constant 17. A stone projected up with a velocity u reaches
magnitude which is always perpendicular to a maximum height h. When it is at a height
the velocity of the particle, the motion of the of 3h/4 from the ground, the ratio of KE and
particle takes place in a plane. It follows that PE at that point is :
1) Its velocity is constant
2) Its acceleration is constant 1) 3 : 1 2) 1 : 1
3) Its kinetic energy is constant 3) 1 : 3 3) 1 : 2
4) It moves a straight line
13. Is the work required to be done by an external 18. A man running has half the kinetic energy of
force on an object on a frictionless, horizontal a boy of half his mass. The man speeds up
surface to accelerate it from a speed v to a by 1 ms–1 and then has kinetic energy as that
speed 2v. of the boy. What were the original speeds of
man and the boy?
1) equal to the work required to accelerate
the object from v = 0 to v.
1) 2 ms −1 ; ( 2 2 − 1) ms −1
2) twice the work required to accelerate the
object from v = 0 to v 2) ( 2 − 1) ms −1 , 2 ( 2 − 1) ms −1
3) three times the work required to accelerate
the object from v = 0 to v 3) ( 2 + 1) ms −1 ; 2 ( 2 + 1) ms −1
4) four times the work required to accelerate
the object from v = 0 to v 4) None of these

101
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

19. Two identical 5 kg blocks are moving with 24. A ring of mass m can slide over a smooth
same speed of 2 m/s towards each other vertical rod as shown in figure. The ring is
along a frictionless horizontal surface. The connected to a spring of force constant k = 4
two blocks collide, stick together and come mg/R, where 2R is the natural length of the
to rest. Consider the two blocks as a system. spring. The other end of spring is fixed to the
The work done by external and internal forces ground at a horizontal distance 2 R from the
are respectively. base of the rod. If the mass is released at a
1) 0, 0 2) 0, 20 J height 1.5 R, then the velocity of the ring as
it reaches the ground is
3) 0, –20 J 4) 20 J, – 20 J
20. A bullet when fired at a target with a velocity
of 100 ms–1, penetrates one metre into it. If
the bullet is fired with the same velocity at a
similar target with a thickness 0.5 metre, then
it will emerge from it with a velocity of
−1 50
1) 50 2 ms 2) ms −1
2
−1 −1
3) 50 ms 4) 10 ms
1) gR 2) 2 gR
21. Under the action of a force, a 2 kg body
moves such that its position x as a function of 2gR 3gR
3) 4)
time t is given by x = t3/3, where x is in meter
and t in seconds. The work done by the force
on the first two seconds is: 25. A body of mass 5 kg is moving with a
momentum of 10 kg-m/s. A force of 0.2 N
1) 1.6 J 2) 16 J
acts on it in the direction of motion of the body
3) 160 J 4) 1600 J for 10 seconds. The increase in its kinetic
22. A bead X resting on a smooth horizontal energy is
surface, is connected to two identical springs 1) 2.8 joules 2) 3.2 joules
and is made to oscillate to and fro along the
3) 3.8 joules 4) 4.4 joules
line of the springs. When the bead passes
through the central position, its energy is 26. A constant power P is applied to a particle of
mass m. The distance travelled by the particle
when its velocity increases from v1 to v2 is
(neglect friction)
m 3 m
1) mostly potential energy 1) ( v2 − v13 ) 2) ( v 2 − v1 )
3P 3P
2) all potential energy
3P 2 m 2
3) half potential energy and half kinetic energy 3) ( v2 − v12 ) 4) ( v2 − v12 )
4) all kinetic energy m 3P
23. The potential energy of a spring when 27. A quarter horse power motor runs at a speed
stretches through a distance x is 10 J. What is of 600 rpm. Assuming 40% efficiency, the
the amount of work done on the same spring work done by the motor in one rotation will
to stretch it through an additional distance x? be
1) 10 J 2) 20 J 1) 7.46 J 2) 7400 J
3) 30 J 4) 40 J 3) 7.46 erg 4) 74.6 J

102
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

28. A body moves along a straight line by a 34. A saucer of mass 10 g is kept floating in air
machine delivering constant power. The with the help of bullets, each of mass half of
distance moved by the body in time t depends the saucer, fired at same velocity at the rate of
on 10 bullets per second. If the bullets rebound
1) (mt)4/3 2) (mt)3/4 with same speed in opposite direction, the
velocity of bullet at the time of impact is
3) t2/3 m1/3 4) t3./2 m–1/2
29. In a hydroelectric power station, the height of
the dam is 10 m. How many kg of water must
fall per second on the blades of a turbine in
order to generate 1 MW of electrical power?
Take g = 10 ms–2.
1) 103 kgs–1 2) 104 kgs–1
3) 105 kgs–1 4) 106 kgs–1
30. A wind-powered generator converts wind 1) 98 cms–1 2) 9.8 cms–1
energy into electrical energy. Assume that the
generator converts a fixed fraction of the wind 3) 98 ms–1 4) 1000 cms–1
energy intercepted by its blades into electrical
energy. For wind speed u, the electrical power 35. A body of mass 2 kg makes an elastic collision
output will be proportional to (head-on) with another body at rest and
continue to move in the original direction at
1) u 2) u2
a speed equal to 1/3rd of its original speed.
3) u3 4) u4 The mass of second body is .............
31. A certain rain cloud at an altitude of 2.0 km
contains 3.6 × 107 kg of water vapour. How 1) 2 kg 2) 3 kg
long would it take a 2.0 kW pump to raise
the same amount of water from the Earth’s 3) 1 kg 4) 4 kg
surface to the cloud’s position?
1) 2 × 105 h 2) 5 × 105 h 36. The momentum of a body increases by 50%
due to change in its velocity. The kinetic
3) 5 × 103 h 4) 2 × 103 h
energy of the body increases by
32. A sphere is suspended by a thread of length 
. What minimum horizontal velocity has to be 1) 125% 2) 50%
imparted to the ball for it to reach the height
of the suspension?
3) 250% 4) 50 %
2) ( g )
2
1) g
37. A moving mass of 8 kg collides elastically with
a stationary mass of 2 kg. If E be the initial
 kinetic energy of the moving mass, the kinetic
3) 4) 2g
g energy left with it after the collision will be:

33. A billiard ball moving with a speed of 5 m/s 1) 0.80 E 2) 0.64 E

collides with an identical ball, originally at
rest. If the first ball stops dead after collision, 3) 0.36 E 4) 0.08 E
then the second ball will move forward with
a speed of 38. A 20 g bullet pierces through a plate of mass
1) 10 m/s 2) 5 m/s M1 = 1 kg and then comes to rest inside
3) 2.5 m/s 4) 1 m/s a second plate of mass M2 = 2.98 kg as
shown in the figure. It is found that the two

103
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

plates, initially at rest, now move with equal 42. A car of mass m moving at a speed u is
velocities. Find the percentage loss in the stopped in a distance x by the friction between
initial velocity of the bullet when it is between the tyres and the road. If the kinetic energy
M1 and M2. Neglect any loss of material of the of the car is doubled, its stopping distance
plates due to the action of bullet. will be ........ times of x.

43. A bomb of mass 30 kg at rest explodes into

two pieces of masses 18 kg and 12 kg. The
velocity of 18 kg mass is 6 ms–1. The kinetic
energy (in J) of the other mass is

Assertion - Reason Type

1) If both the Assertion and Reason are true

1) 50% 2) 25%
and the Reason is true explanation of the
Assertion
3) 100% 4) 75%
2) If both the Assertion and Reason are true
39. A bullet of mass m moving with a horizontal but the Reason is not the true explanation
velocity u strikes a stationary wooden block of the Assertion
of mass M suspended by a string of length L
3) If Assertion is true but Reason is false
= 50 cm. The bullet emerges out of the block
with speed u/4. If M = 6 m, the minimum 4) If Assertion is false but Reason is true
value of u so that the block can complete the
vertical circle is (take g = 10 ms2) 44. Assertion : Work done by the friction or
viscous force on a moving
1) 10 ms–1 2) 20 ms–1 body is negative

Reason : Work done is a scalar

3) 30 ms–1 4) 40 ms–1
quantity which cannot be
negative like mass.
40. A ball of mass m is moving normally towards
a wall of mass (M >> m) with a velocity 45. Assertion : In an elastic collision of
4m/s. The wall is also moving. After striking two bodies, the momentum
elastically with the wall, velocity of ball and energy of each body is
becomes 8 m/s. Find the speed of the wall: conserved.

1) 4 m/s 2) 2 m/s Reason : If two bodies stick to each

other after colliding, the
collision is said to be perfectly
3) 2 2 m / s 4) 4 2 m / s inelastic.

Numerical Type 46. Assertion : A spring has potential energy,

both when it is compressed
or stretched.
41. An 8 kg metal block of dimensions 16 cm × 8
cm × 6 cm is lying on a table with its face of Reason : In compressing or stretching,
largest area touching the table. If g = 10 ms–2, work is done on the spring
then the minimum amount of work done (J) against the restoring force.
in making it stand with its length vertical is

104
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

Statement Type 50. Match the following.

1) If both Statement I and Statement II are
true
2) If both Statement I and Statement II are
false
3) If Statement I is true but Statement II is
false
4) If Statement I is false but Statement II is
true
47. Statement I : The energy stored in spring A particle is moving along a straight line. Its
on compressing or stretching displacement-time graph is shown.
is called elastic potential
energy.
Now match the given column and select the
Statement II : The force constant is different correct option from the codes given below.
for different materials.
48. Statement I : The principle of conservation Column I Column II
of energy is valid for inelastic i) Work done on p) Positive
collision. particle from 0 to t1
Statement II : The principle of conservation ii) Work done on q) Negative
of energy holds good in particle from t1 to t2
both elastic and inelastic iii) Work done on r) Zero
collisions. In case of inelastic particle from t2 to t3
collision, kinetic energy iv) Work done on s) Unpredictable
before and after collision is particle from t3 to t4
not same.
49. Statement I : A quick collision between two 1) i - p, ii - q, iii - r, iv - s
bodies is more violent than
slow collision, even when
2) i - q, ii - r, iii - p, iv - s
initial and final velocities are
identical.
3) i - r, ii - r, iii - p, iv - q
Statement II : T h e r a t e o f c h a n g e o f
momentum determine that
4) i - p, ii - r, iii - q, iv - s
force is small or large.

105
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

KEY WITH HINTS

1. 3 When a weightlifter lifts a weight by height ∴ Actual displacement of man per second
h(say), then work done by the lifting force F. = (v – u)
W1 = Fs cos 0o = + Fs Hence, the actual displacement of man in
going up the escalator of height h is
vh
But work done in holding it up is zero . Therefore,
because the displacement is zero. (v − u)
 
2. 2 Displacement w.r.t ground= s + s0
vh
Work done = mg ×
Since train is moving with constant velocity
(v − u)

net force acting on block is = F 7. 3 Initial velocity of ball is zero i.e., u = 0;
   ∴ Displacement of ball in tth second
= F. ( s + s0 )
Therefore, work done
 1  1
s= gt − ; s ∝  t − 
3. 4 Given  2  2
1 k or s1 : s 2 : s3
F∝ ⇒F=
x x

k  1  1  1
=
W ∫ x=
dx n x + c 1 −  :  2 −
=
 2 
 :3−  = 1 : 3 : 5
2  2
W = mgs
x2 y z2
Now, W ∝ s ∴ W1 : W2 : W3 =
1: 3 : 5
4. 1 W= ∫ F dx + ∫ F dy + ∫ F dz
x1
x
y1
y
z1
z

8. 2 Tension in the string

3 6 1
 g
= ∫
2 x dx + 2dy + 3z 2 dz = ∫
− 10 J ∫ =T = M ( g − a ) = M  g − 
1 2 3  2

1 Mg g
5. 4 Slope of inclined plane, sin θ = = ; W =F × S =−M   h
100 2 2
Component of weight down the inclined
plane F2
9. 3 W=
1 2k
F = mg × sin θ = 100 × 9.8 × = 9.8N
100
If both springs are stretched by same force
s = distance moved = 10 m then
1
W∝ ; As k1 > k2 therefore W1 < W2
W = Fs = 9.8 × 10 = 98 J k
6. 4 Relative speed of man with respect to
i.e., more work is done in case of second
escalator = (v – u)
spring.

106
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

10. 1 Work done = Area under F-x graph with 15. 2 Force F = – K × displacement (x),
proper algebraic sign 1
P.E.= U= Kx 2
1 1 2
= × 20 × 4 − × 20 × 4 =0 J
2 2
2
11. 3 Mass of length 2 m of the chain = 4 kg 1  − F  1 F2
=
∴U K=
 
Mass of length 60 cm or 0.60 m of the 2 K  2K
4 × 0.60
=
chain = 1.2 kg
2 U 1 F2 2K 2 K 2 3000 2
1 = × = = =
Weight of the hanging part of the chain =
U2 2 K1 F 2 K1 1500 1
1.2 × 10 = 12 N 16. 3 KE ∝ t , K.E. = E = ct, where c is
Since of centre of gravity of the hanging
part lies at its mid-point, i.e., 30 cm or 0.30 constant. KE is represented by a straight
m line with slope c.

∴ W =12 × 0.30 =3.6 J p2

E = ct ; ∴ P =2ctm
As=
12. 3 When a force of constant magnitude which 2m
is perpendicular to the velocity of particle
acts on a particle, work done is zero and dp d
F
Force, = = ( 2ctm )1/2
hence change in kinetic energy is zero. dt dt
13. 3 The net work needed to accelerate the
object from v = 0 to v is 1 −1/2 1
2cm
= t ; ∴F∝
1 1 2 1 2 t
W1 = KE1f − KE1i = mv 2 − m ( 0 ) = mv 2
2 2 2
17. 3 TE = PE at height h is mgh
The work required to accelerate the object 3h 3h
from speed v to speed 2 v is At height ; PE = mg
4 4
1 2 1
W2 = KE 2f − KE 2i = m ( 2v ) − mv 2
2 2 h
KE = TE − PE = mg
4
1 1 2
=
m ( 4v 2 − =
v2 ) 3  mv
=  3W1 KE 1
2 2  ∴ == 1: 3
PE 3
1 18. 3 Let mass of boy be m, therefore, mass of
14. 3 As, E = mg 2 t 2 ;
2 man = 2 m,
As,
1
KE of man = KE of boy
1 2
mg 2 × 32
E1 2 9 1
=
= =
E 2 1 mg 2 ( 62 − 32 ) 9 × 3 3 1 1 1
∴ ( 2m ) u 2 =
× mu ′2
2 2 2 2

107
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

u ′2 u′
2 dx d  t 3  2
=
u = ,u u 21. v
2 = =  =  t
4 2 dt dt  3 
When t = 0, then v = 0, when t = 2, then v
When man speeds upto 1 m/s. = 4 m/s
KE of man = KE of boy Work done in first two seconds = change
in K.E.
1 2 1 1 2
1 ( ) 2 1
( 2m ) ( u + 1=
) ′2
mu= m ( 2u ) W= m  4 − ( 0 )  = 2 ×16 = 16
2
2 2 2 2 2

2 22. 4 When bead passes through central

( u + 1) =
2u 2 position there will not be any deformation
of spring hence no potential energy, all
u +1 = 2 u energy will be kinetic.
23. 3 Potential energy of the spring when
1 2 +1 stretched through a distance x,
=
u =
2 −1 ( 2 − 1)( 2 + 1) 1 2
=
U′ =kx 10J
2
=
u ( 2 + 1) ms −1 When x becomes 2x, the potential energy
will be
= 2 ( 2 + 1) ms −1
u=′ 2u
1 2 1 2
  U′ = k ( 2x ) =4 × kx =4 ×10 =40J
19. 3 Fext =
0, ∴ Wext. Fext. s =
= 0 2 2

By work energy theorem: W = KF – KI ∴ Work done = U′ − U = 40 − 10 = 30J

1 1  24. 2 Initial length of spring

Wext + Wint. =
0− mv 2 + mv 2 
2 2  2
( 2R ) + (1.5 ) R =
2
2.5R

Wint. =−mv 2 =−5 × 22 =−20 J So, x = 2.5 R – 2 R = 0.5 R

1 From conservation of energy:
20. 1 m ×100 ×100 =×
f 1 or f = 5000 mN
2 2 1 1 2
mv
= mgh + kx
2 2
1 1
Again mv 2 − mv′2 =
f × 0.5 1 1 4mg
2 2 ⇒ mv 2 = mg1.5R + ( 0.5R )2
2 2 R

or m [ v − v′ ] =
2 2
f ×1 ⇒v=2 gR

or v′= v − 5000 ; =
v′2 10000 − 5000
2 2

25. 4 Change in momentum = Force × time
v′2 5000
or = = 2500 × 2 P2 − P1 = F × t = 0.2 × 10 = 2

or v′ = 50 2 ms
−1
⇒ P2 =2 + P1 =2 + 10 =12kg − m / s

108
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

Increase in K.E. 1/2 −1/2 −1/2

or a = K m t
1 1 2
=
( P22 − P12 ) Now S = at
2m 2

1 ( ) 2 44 1
 12 − (10 )  = =
2
= 4.4J ∴ S = ( K1/2 m −1/2 t −1/2 ) t 2
2×5 10 2

P 1 1/2 −1/2 3/2 K 3/2 −1/2

26. 1 P = Fv = mav ⇒ a = ; =or S =K m t or S t m
mv 2 2

dv P P 29. 2 Let M kg of water fall per second. The

⇒v = ⇒ v 2 dv = ds power is P = rate at which work is done =
ds mv m mass per second × g × h = Mgh
But P = 1 MW = 106 W, h = 10 m. Therefore
s v2
P P 106
m ∫0 ∫v v dv
2
⇒ ds = M
= = = 104 kgs −1
1 gh 10 ×10

P 1 3 30. 3 Wind energy

s
⇒ = ( v2 − v13 ) ⇒=s m ( v32 − v13 ) 1 1 1
m 3 3P E= mv 2 = ( Avtρ ) v 2 = Atρv3
2 2 2
27. 1 Motor makes 600 revolution per minute.
ρ - density of air, v is wind speed, A is the
revolution rev
=
∴ n 600
= 10 area through which wind is flowing,
min ute sec
∴ ( Avtρ ) =m is the mass of air flowing
∴ Time required for one revolution
1 2
in time t. ρv is the KE.;
1 2
= sec
10
E 1
Energy requierd for one revolution = ∴ Power P= = Aρv3
Power × time
t 2
1 1 746 So wind power is proportional to the third
= × 746 × = J
4 10 40 power of wind speed.
31. 2 Neglecting any variation of gravity
But work done = 40% of input
with altitude, the work required to lift
746 40 746 a 3.60 × 107 kg load at constant speed to
= 40% × = × = 7.46 J
40 100 40 an altitude of ∆y =2.0 km is
28. 4 Power = force × velocity W= mg ( ∆y )
∆PE g =
∴ Force × velocity = constant (K)
or (ma) (at) = K ( 3.6 ×107 kg ) (10.0 m / s2 ) ( 2.0 ×103 m )
or ma2t = K
2 −1 −1
or a = Km t
= 7.2 × 1011 J

109
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

The time required to do this work using a 35. 3 u1 – u, u2 = 0;

power P = 2.0 kW = 2.0 × 103 J/s. u
=
v1 = , v2 v
W 7.2 ×1011 J 3
∆t= = = 3.6 ×108 s u
P 2.0 ×103 J / s v−
e =1 ⇒ 3 =1 ⇒ v − u = u
u −0 3
( 3.6 ×108 s )   1h 
=5 ×105 h
 3600s  4u
∴ v=
3
32. 4 Kinetic energy given to a sphere at lowest
point = potential energy at the height of From the law of conservation of momentum,
suspension. m1u + 0 = m1v1 + m2v2
u 4u
m
=1u m1 + m2
3 3

m1 2
⇒ m2 = = =1kg
2 2

36. p1 100 α ;
1 Let original momentum =

= 150 α
Final momentum

1
⇒= mv 2 mg ∴v
= 2g p2 2mK1 K1
2 =
1
2
=
p2 2mK 2 K 2
33. 2 It is a case of elastic collision. As masses
of two balls are equal and 2nd ball is at rest 2
before collision, hence after the collision  100α  K1
  = ;
the speeds are just exchanged i.e., 1st ball  150α  K2
will now come to rest while the second ball
will move forward with the same speed as 2
that of the first, ie.,5ms–1. 2 K1 4 K1
∴  = or =
34. 1 Change in momentum of bullet 3 K2 9 K2

= mv − ( −mv ) = 2mv = 2 × 5 × v = 10v 9K

∴ K 2 =1
Force = rate of change of momentum 4
10
= 10 v × = 100 v
1 Change in KE K 2 − K1
×100
= ×100
For equilibrium, this force has to be equal Original KE K1
to the weight of saucer ie,
100 v = 10 × 980
9
9800 K1 − K1
4 5
or,=v = 98 cms −1 = ×100 = ×100 =125%
100 K1 4

110
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

37. 3 In the collision of two bodies of masses 39. 4 Let V be the speed of the block after the
m1 and m2 , velocity of the first mass after bullet emerges out of it. From conservation
the collision is given by: of momentum we have
m1 − m 2 2m 2
=
v1 u1 + u2 u
m1 + m 2 m1 + m 2 mu
= MV + m  
4
(8 − 2 ) 6
=

(8 + 2 )
=u1 + 0 ( u 2 0 )
u1= 3mu
10 which gives V =
4M
KE after collision
∴ The minimum speed the block must have
KE before collision ( E ) to complete the vertical circle is.

3mu
V= 5g ⇒ = 5g
1 4M
× 8 × v12 2 2

2 v   6  36
= =  1=   =  = 0.36
1 2  u   10  100
× 8 × u1 1
4M
2 ⇒u= 5gL
3m
KE after collision = 0.36 E
38. 2 Let u = initial velocity of the bullet
u’ = velocity of the bullet after crossing the 4
= × 6 × 5 ×10 × 0.5 = 40 ms −1
first plate. 3
V = velocity of each plate.
Applying law of conservation of linear 40. 2 Let V be the velocity of wall. Relative
momentum at the first plate, velocity of separation = relative velocity of
approach 8 – V = 4 + V, if wall is moving
0 M1V + mu ′
mu + M1 ×= towards left; V = 2 m/s towards left and
8 + V = 4 – V, if wall is moving towards
or 0.02 u = V + 0.02u’ .........(1) right; V = –2 m/s, moves towards right.
Applying the law of conservation of linear
41. 4 When face of the largest area is touching
momentum of the second plate,
the table, height of centre of gravity above
mu ′ + M 2 × 0 = ( m + M2 ) V the table

6
or 0.02u ′ =( 0.02 + 2.98 ) V =3V ..........(2) h1= = 3cm
2
Putting eqn. (2) in eqn. (1), we have, With its length vertical, height of centre of
0.02u ′ 16
0.02u
= + 0.02u ′ gravity would become h=
2 = 8 cm
3 2

Minimum work required

1 
=
0.02u 0.02u ′  + 1
3  W = ( P.E.)2 − ( P.E.)1 = mg ( h 2 − h1 )

u 4 u′ 3 u′ − u 8 ×10 ( 8 − 3)
=
or = or ×100
= 25% =
W = 4J
u′ 3 u 4 u 100

111
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

42. 2 If a is the deceleration due to the force of 46. 1 The work done on the spring against
friction f, then the restoring force is stored as potential
1 energy in both conditions when it is
2ax = ν 2 ; or mν 2 =max compressed or stretched.
2
or KE = fx (∴ f = ma)
Thus if KE is doubled, x is also doubled. 47. 1 On compressing or stretching a spring, the
energy stored is called elastic potential
43. 486
energy. The restoring force depends on
According to law of conservation of
the nature of material.
angular momentum,

48. 1 In case of inelastic collision, KE is not

conserved but conservation of energy
always holds good.
30 × 0 = 18 × 6 + 12 × v
⇒ 108 = −12v ⇒ v = −9 m / s
49. 1 In a quick collision, time t is small. As
F× t = constant, therefore, force involved
Negative sign indicates that both fragments
is large, i.e., collision is more violent in
move in opposite direction.
comparison to slow collision.
(K.E. of 12 kg)
1 1
= mv 2 = ×12 × 81 = 486 J 50. 3 For 0 to t1, slope is constant, speed is
2 2 constant and so work done is zero. (r)
44. 3 Work done is a scalar quantity. It can
be positive or negative unlike mass and For t1 to t2, slope is zero, speed is zero
kinetic energy which are positive scalar and so work done is zero. (r)
quantities. Assertion is true Reason is
false.
45. 4 In an elastic collision, both the momentum For t 2 to t 3, slope is increasing, speed
and kinetic energy remains conserved. is increasing and so work done is
This rule is not for individual bodies but positive. (p)
for the system of bodies before and after
the collision. For t3 to t4, slope is decreasing, speed
The collision is perfectly inelastic if two is decreasing and so work done is
bodies stick to each other after collision. negative. (q)

112
 CHAPTER SYSTEMS OF PARTICLES AND
06 ROTATIONAL MOTION

A rigid body is defined as a body in which the distance between the particles never change,
whatever be the force applied on it or it may not deform under the influence of forces.

A rigid body can have translational motion and rotational motion and rotation and translation
together. In translational motion at any instant of time all particles of the body have the same velocity.
In rotational motion the particles of the body rotates about an axis called axis of rotation. In rotation of
a rigid body, the particles of the body moves in a circle, about an axis.

CENTRE OF MASS

Centre of Mass of a body or system is a point where the whole mass of the body or system is
supposed to be concentrated, and forces are directly applied to this point for translational motion.

   
For a system of particles of masses m1, m2, ..... mn whose position vectors are given by r1 , r2 , r3 ..... rn
respectively.

n

  
m1r1 + m 2 r2 + .....m n rn ∑m r i i
R cm = ; R cm i =1
n
m1 + m 2 + m3 + ....m n
∑m
i =1
i

1 n n
R
= = ∑ ii
M i =1
m r , when ∑i mi M
1 n 1 n 1 n
In three dimensional=
form X
=
= ∑ i i
m
M i 1=
x , Y =∑ i i
m
M i1=
y ; Z ∑ m1zi
Mi1
For a system of continuous distribution of mass, consider an elemental mass dm at a distance r
from the origin.

113
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

1  1 1 1
M∫ ∫ ∫ M∫
R= r dm ; Then X = = x dm ; Y = ydm; Z z dm
M M
n
If the centre of mass is at the origin O, then ∑m r = 0 ,
i =1
i i

Here the centre of mass is the point about which the sum of the moments of the mass of the
system is zero.

Consider a system of two particles of mass m1 and m2 separated by a distance r. The centre of
mass lies between the particles at distances r1 and r2 from m1 and m2 respectively. The distance of the
centre of mass is inversely proportional to the mass of the particles.

m1r1 + m 2 r2 r1 + r2
r= when m1 = m2; r=
m1 + m 2 2
r
If m1 = m2, r1 = r2 = ; ie, centre of mass lies at a point midway between the masses.
2
1 m2 m1
For a two particle system r ∝ ; m1r1 = m 2 r2 ; r1 = r; r2 = r
m m1 + m 2 m1 + m 2

Centre of mass moving with uniform velocity

If Fext = 0, Vcm is a constant, so also the net momentum of the system remains constant. ie, the
centre of mass of the system continues to move with initial velocity.

Linear displacement s
displacement ( θ )
Angular= = , unit-radian.
Radius r
∆θ
The angular displacement per unit time is defined as angular velocity, ω = , unit - radian/sec
∆t
   2π
Linear velocity v = ω× r, ω = = 2πν [where T = time period, ν = frequency]
T
The magnitude of angular velocity is called the angular speed which is also represented by ω .

The rate of change of angular velocity is defined as angular acceleration.

114
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

If a particle has angular velocities ω1 and ω2 at time t1 and t2, then

 
 ω2 − ω1
Angular acceleration α = Unit - rad/sec2
t 2 − t1 

 dω d 2 θ
Instantaneous angular acceleration =α =
dt dt 2

ω − ω1
Average angular acceleration ωav = 2
   t 2 − t1
Linear acceleration a = α × r

Angular acceleration is an axial vector whose direction is along the change in direction of angular
velocity ie, normal to the rotational plane, outward or inward along the axis of rotation.

Moment of a force about a point or Torque

Fig.(1) Fig.(2)

The moment of the force about a point is the product of the force and the perpendicular distance
 
from the point of the line of action of the force. Moment of force = F × OA
 
When the force makes an angle with the rod. Moment of the force about O= F × ON
   
= r Fsin φ = r × F
   
The moment of a force about a point is also called torque ( τ ) ∴ τ = r ×F
Torque is an axial vector, ie, its direction is always perpendicular to the plane containing vector
 
r and F in accordance with right hand screw rule.

= τ F ( r sin=
τ r Fsin φ, or= φ ) Fd [As=
d r sin φ]
ie, Torque = Force × Perpendicular distance of line of action of force from the axis of rotation.

Torque is also called as moment of force and d is called moment of lever arm. Unit: newton-
metre(SI)

If there are a number of forces acting on the body then, τ = τ1 + τ2 + τ3 + ..... .

115
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Work done by a torque

If a force F acts on a body at a perpendicular distance r ( r⊥ ) from the axis of rotation, the work

done by the force in rotating the body through an angle ∆θ is given by ∆W = F r⊥ × ∆θ = τ ∆θ

dW dθ
Power = = τ = τω , where ω is the angular velocity.
dt dt
Angular momentum

The turning momentum of a particle about the axis of rotation is called the angular momentum of
the particle.

  
L = r × P = rP sin φ nˆ

Angular momentum is an axial vector ie, always directed perpendicular to the plane of rotation
and along the axis of rotation. S.I. Unit : kgm2s–1 or J sec
    
In case of circular motion, L = r × P = m ( r × v ) = mvr sin φ

∴ L = mvr = mr 2 ω ( as r ⊥ v )
 
In vector form L = Iω
  
  dL dω    dω   
From- L = Iω ∴ = I = Iα = τ  As dt = α and τ = Iα 
dt dt

ie, the rate of change of angular momentum is equal to the net torque acting on the particle.
[Rotational analogue of Newton’s second law]

The angular momentum of a system of particles is equal to the vector sum of angular momentum
    
of each particle ie, L = L1 + L 2 + L3 + ..... + L n .

Law of Conservation of Angular Momentum


 dL
Newton’s second law for rotational motion τ = .
dt

dL
If the net external torque on a particle (or system) is zero then =0
dt

116
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS
   
ie, L = L1 + L 2 + L3 + ..... = constant

Angular momentum of a system remains constant if resultant torque acting on it zero.

 1
As L = Iω so if τ = 0 then Iω = constant ∴ I∝
ω
Angular Impulse

dp
=
Impulse I ∫=
Fdt ∫ dt ;
dt
dp = change in momentum.

dL
∫
In rotational motion angular impulse J is, J = τ dt = ∫ dt dt =dL = change in angular momentum.
Parallel forces

If the lines of action of a set of forces are parallel, they are called parallel forces. If the parallel
forces are in the same plane, they are called coplanar parallel forces. If all the forces are in the same
direction, they are called like parallel forces. If they are in opposite directions, they are called unlike
parallel forces.

conditions for equilibrium of a set of coplanar parallel forces

Two conditions are to be satisfied.

1. Translational equilibrium 2. Rotational equilibrium

1. Translational equilibrium

For translational equilibrium, the algebraic sum of the forces acting on the body =0

i.e.; P+Q-R-S-W = 0, P + Q = R + S + W

The total force acting along a direction= the total force acting in the opposite direction. If this
condition is satisfied, the body is either at rest or moving with uniform linear velocity.

2. Rotational equilibrium

For rotational equilibrium, the algebraic sum of the moments of forces about any point is equal
to zero . About O,

P × OA + Q ×OB = R × OC + S × OD + W × OE.

117
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Total anticlock wise moments = Total clock wise moments. About D,

Q × DB + R × DC = P × DA + W × DE.

If this condition is satisfied, the body is either not rotating or rotating with constant angular velocity.

A body is said to be in rotational equilibrium if resultant torque acting on it is zero ie, Στ = 0 .

In case of beam balance or see-saw the system will be in rotational equilibrium if,
 
τ1 + τ2 0 or F1=
= 1 − F2  2 0 ∴ F11 F2  2
=
   
However if, τ1 > τ2 , L.H.S. will move downwards and if τ1 < τ2 . R.H.S. will move downward and
the system will not be in rotational equilibrium.

Couple

Two equal unlike parallel forces acting at different points in a body constitute a couple.

Consider a body in which two equal forces (F) acting at points A and B in opposite directions. Let
O be a point in between A and B.

Moment of the couple about O = OB × F + OA × F = F(OA+OB) = F × AB

Moment of the couple is called torque ( τ ) , Therefore ( τ ) = F × AB

Thus torque is the product of one of the forces and the perpendicular distance.

Generally both couple and torque have same meaning. The basic difference between torque and
couple is that in case of couple both the forces are externally applied while in case of torque one force
is externally applied and the other is reactionary.

118
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

1 2
Work done by torque in twisting the wire W
= Cθ
2
Where τ = Cθ ; C is known as twisting coefficient or couple per unit twist.

Equations of Rotational motion

If angular acceleration is 0, then ω = const. and θ = ωt

If angular acceleration α = constant, then

ω1 + ω2 ω − ω1
θ= t; α = 2 ; ω2 = ω1 + αt
2 t
1 α
α = ω1t + αt 2 ; ω22 = ω12 + 2αθ; θn th = ω1 + 2 ( n − 1)
2 2
If α is not constant, then

dθ dω d 2 θ
ω= ;α= = ; ω dω = αdθ
dt dt dt 2
Concept of moment of inertia

According to Newton’s Ist law in rotational motion, there is an inability of a body to change by
itself its state of rest or of uniform rotational motion. This inability is called rotational inertia or moment
of inertia.

Moment of Inertia

Moment of inertia plays the same role in rotational motion as mass plays in linear motion. It is
the property of a body due to which it opposes any change in its state of rest or of uniform motion.

(1) Moment of inertia of a particle I = mr2; where r is the perpendicular distance of the particle from
the rotational axis.
2 2 2
(2) Moment of inertia of a body made up of a number of particles, I = m1r1 + m 2 r2 + m3 r3 + ....

(3) Moment of inertia of a continuous distribution of mass, treating the element of mass dm at position
r 2 ie, I ∫r
2
=
r as particle. dI dm
= dm

Unit : kg m2

119
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Radius of Gyration

Radius of gyration of a body about a given axis is the perpendicular distance of a point from the
axis, where if whole mass of the body were concentrated, the body shall have the same moment of
inertia as it has with the actual distribution of mass.

When square of radius of gyration is multiplied with the mass of the body, it gives the moment of
inertia of the body about the given axis.

2 I
=
I Mk
= or k ; Here k is called radius of gyration.
M

From the formula of discrete distribution,

2 2 2 2
I = mr1 + mr2 + mr3 + ..... + mrn

2
I Mk =
Radius of gyration, k, then = m ( r12 + r22 + ..... + rn2 )

nmk 2 − m ( r12 + r22 + r32 + .... + rn2 ) (As M = nm)

r 2 + r 2 + r 2 + ..... + rn2
∴ k =1 2 3
n
Hence radius of gyration of a body about a given axis is equal to root mean square distance of
the constituent particles of the body from the given axis.

Through this concept a real body (particularly irregular) is replaced by a point mass for dealing
its rotational motion.

Example: In case of a disc rotating about an axis through its centre of mass and perpendicular
to its plane,

I (1/ 2 ) MR 2 R
=k = =
M M 2

So instead of disc we can assume a point mass M at a distance ( R / 2 ) from the axis of rotation
for dealing the rotational motion of the disc.

120
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Values of moments of inertia for simple geometrical objects

Moment of
Body Axis of Rotation Figure K
inertia
Ring About an axis passing
through C.G. and
MR2 R
perpendicular to its plane

Ring About its diameter

1 R
MR 2
2 2
Disc About an axis passing
through C.G. and
perpendicular to its plane
1 R
MR 2
2 2
Disc About its Diameter
1 R
MR 2
4 2
Solid About its own axis
cylinder
1 R
MR 2
2 2

Solid About its diametric axis

Sphere
2 2
MR 2 R
5 5
Spherical About its diametric axis
shell
2 2
MR 2 R
5 3

Long thin About on axis passing

rod through its centre of mass
ML2 L
and perpendicular to the rod
12 12
Long thin About an axis passing
rod through its edge and
ML2 L
perpendicular to the rod
3 3

121
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Theorem of Parallel Axes

Moment of inertia of a body about a given axis I is equal to the sum of moment of inertia of the body
about an axis parallel to given axis and passing through centre of mass of the body, Ig and Ma2 where
M is the mass of the body and a is the perpendicular distance between the two axes.

I IG + Ma 2
=

For a disc, about an axis passing through the edge and perpendicular to the plane.

1 3
I=IG + Ma 2 = MR 2 + MR 2 = MR 2
2 2

Theorem of perpendicular axes

According to this theorem the sum of the moment of inertia of a plane lamina about two mutually
perpendicular axes lying in its plane is equal to its moment of inertia about an axis perpendicular to the
plane of lamina and passing through the point of intersection of first two axes.

Iz = Ix + Iy

Kinetic Energy and Power for Rotating Body

Work: If the body is initially at rest and angular displacement is dθ due to torque then work done on

the body.

W = ∫ τ dθ

Analogue to work in translatory motion W = Fdx ∫

Kinetic Energy: The energy, which a body has by virtue of its rotational motion is called rotational kinetic
energy. A body rotating about a fixed axis possesses kinetic energy because its constituent particles
are in motion, even though the body remains in place.

122
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Rotational Analogue to Translatory

Kinetic Energy Kinetic Energy
1 2 1
K=
R Iω KT = mv 2
2 2
1 1
K=
R Lω KT = Pv
2 2

L2 P2
KR = KT =
2I 2m

Power: Rate of change of kinetic energy is defined as power.

d d 1 dω
P= ( K R ) =  Iω2  = Iω = Iωα = Iαω = τω
dt dt  2  dt
   
In vector form Power, P =τ . ω [Analogue to power in translatory motion P = F.v ]
Rolling without slipping
Rolling without slipping is when an object rolls across and there is no relative motion of object and
surface, at the point of contact.
It may be treated as a pure rotation about an axis passing through the point of contact with same
angular velocity ω .
1 1 2 1 1
By the law of conservation of energy: K=
N mv 2 + Iω= mR 2 ω2 + Iω2
2 2 2 2

1 1
=ω2 [ I 2 + mR 2 ] =I p ω2  As I p =
I + mR 2 
2 2
where I is moment of inertia of rolling body about its centre ‘O’ and IP is moment of inertia of rolling
body about point of contact ‘P’.
Comparison of linear and rotational motions
Translatory Motion Rotatory Motion
Mass (m) Moment of Inertia (I)
Linear momentum P = mv Angular momentum L = Iω
P = 2mE L = 2IE
Force F = ma Torque τ = Iα

1 1 2
Kinetic Energy E= mv 2 E
= Iω
2 2
P2 L2
E= E=
2m 2I

123
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

QUESTIONS

1. Particles of mass 2 kg, 2kg, 1 kg and 1 kg 4. The mass per unit length of a non uniform
are placed at the corners A, B, C and D of a 2 a
square of side L as shown in figure. Locate rod is given by λ = x where a is a
L
the centre of mass of the system.
constant, L is length of the rod and x is
distance of any point from one end. The
distance of the COM of the rod from the same
end is
L 2L
1) 2)
2 3

3 3
3) L 4) L
5 4

L L L L 5. A diver makes 2.5 revolutions on the way from

1) , 2) , a 10 m high platform to the water. Assuming
3 2 2 3 zero initial vertical velocity, the average
3) L, L 4) None of these angular velocity during the dive is
2. An isolated particle of mass m is moving in a 3π 5π
1) rad s −1 2) rad s −1
horizontal plane (x-y), along the x-axis, at a 2 2
certain height above the ground. It suddenly
explodes into two fragments of masses 5π π
m/4 and 3m/4. An instant later, the smaller 3) rad s −1 4) rad s −1
fragment is at y = +15 m. The larger fragment
3 2
at this instant is at 6. A cylinder of mass m and radius r is placed
1) y = –5 m 2) y = + 20 m on a horizontal platform along x-y plane with
axis along y-axis. The cylinder can rotate
3) y = + 5 m 4) y = –20 m freely about this axis. The platform is given
motion in x direction governed by relation
3. Considering a system having two masses m1
=x a cos ωt . If there is no slipping between
and m2 in which first mass is pushed towards
cylinder and platform, the maximum torque
centre of mass by a distance a, the distance
acting on the cylinder during the motion is
required to be moved for second mass to
keep centre of mass at same position is

m1 m1m 2 3
1) a 2) 1) marω 2) marω
m2 a 2

m2  mm  1 1
3) a 4)  2 1
a 3) marω 4) mar 2 ω
m1  m1 + m 2  2 2

124
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

7. A thin disc of mass (9 M) and radius (R) is 10. Four spheres, each of mass M and radius r,
given. A concentric disc of radius (R/3) is cut are situated at the four corners of a square
at the centre. The M.I. of the remaining part of side R, as shown in figure. The moment
is of inertia of the system about an axis
perpendicular to the plane of square and
passing through its centre will be

20 40
1) MR 2 2) MR 2
3 9

10 20 5M ( 4r 2 + 5R 2 ) 2M ( 4r 2 + 5R 2 )
3) MR 2 4) MR 2 1) 2)
3 6 2 5

8. A cube, a disc and a sphere have same mass

m. The side of a cube is equal to the diameter 5M ( 4R 2 + 5r 2 ) 2M ( 4R 2 + 5r 2 )
3) 4)
of disc as well as sphere, given as d. If all 2 5
rotate about the axes passing through their
11. Two particles of masses 4 kg and 8 kg are
centres of mass the ratio of their moments of
separated by a distance of 12 m. If they
inertia Icube : Idisc : Isphere is
are moving towards each other under the
influence of a mutual force of attraction, then
the two particles will meet each other at a
distance of :
1) 12 : 15 : 20 2) 15 : 12 : 20 1) 6 m from 8 kg mass
3) 30 : 20 : 15 4) 20 : 15 : 12 2) 2 m from 8 kg mass
9. Two solid spheres, each of mass M and 3) 4 m from 8 kg mass
radius R/2, are connected by a massless 4) 8 m from 8 kg mass
rod of length 2R, as shown in the figure. The 12. Masses of 2 kg each are placed at the corners
moment of inertia of the system about YY’ B and A of a rectangular plate ABCD as
will be shown in the figure. A mass of 8 kg has to
be placed on the plate so that the centre of
mass of the system should be at the centre
O. Then the mass should be placed at:

21 5
1) MR 2 2) MR 2 1) 1 m from O on OE
5 21
2) 2 m from O on OF
2 4 3) 2 m from O on OG
3) MR 2 4) MR 2
5 5 4) 2 m from O on OH

125
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

13. 3 particles of masses 2 kg each are placed

such that 1st one lies on –ve x-axis, 2nd
one lies on –ve y-axis and the third the lies
on +ve z-axis at distance of 2 m, 3 m and
1 m respectively from the origin. Then the
square of the distance of centre of mass of
the system from the origin is
1) 2MR2 2) 3MR2
2
1) 1.55 m 2
2) 1.55 m
3
3) MR 2 4) 5MR2
2
3) 2.55 m2 4) 1.25m2
14. Two particles P and Q initially at rest are 1 17. Four spherical particles, each of mass m
m apart. P has a mass of 0.1 kg and Q has and radius r are kept at the four corners of
a mass of 0.3 kg. P and Q attract each other a square of side a. Moment of inertia of the
with a constant force of 10–2 N. No external system along a side of the square is
forces act on the system. At what distance
from P’s original position do the particles
collide? The time taken by the particles for
collision is.
1) 0.25 m, 1 sec
2) 0.75 m, 15 sec
3) 0.5 m, 4 sec
4) 0.75 m, 3 sec
15. Moment of inertia of a solid sphere about a 2  2 
2 2 2 2
tangential axis varying with distance x from it 1) 4m  r + a  2) 4m  r + a 
is represented by I. The curve between I and 5  7 
x is:
4
2 2  42 2 
1) 2) 3) 2m  r + a  4) 2m  r + a 
5  7 

18. A thin wire of length L and uniform linear

mass density ρ is bent into a circular loop
with centre at O as shown. The moment of
inertia of the loop about the axis XX’ is
3) 4)

16. Two discs A and B of same mass M and

ρL3 ρL3
radius R are connected to one another to 1) 2)
form single rigid body. Moment of inertia of 8π2 16π2
this attachment about an axis normal to the
plane of disc A and passing through its centre 5ρL3 3ρL3
is 3) 4)
16π2 8π2

126
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

19. Two discs of same thickness but of different 23. Two similar beads each of mass m slide
radii are made of two different materials such smoothly along a uniform rod of mass M and
that their masses are same. The densities length  . The rod can rotate along an axis
of the materials are in the ratio 1 : 3. The passing through its centre and normal to its
moments of inertia of these discs about the length. Initially the rod is rotated with angular
respective axes passing through their centres speed ωi when beads are at the centre C of
and perpendicular to their plains will be in the the rod. The angular speed ωf of the rod
ratio when beads slide to the two ends of the rod
1) 1 : 3 2) 3 : 1 without any external force is given by

3) 1 : 9 4) 9 : 1

20. The moment of inertia of a door of mass m,

length 2 and width  about its longer side
is
( M + m ) ωi Mωi
2 2 1) 2)
11 m 5 m Mm ( 6m + M )
1) 2)
24 24
Mm 2mωi
3) ωi 4)
m 2 M+m ( M + 2m )
3) 4) None of these
3 24. A solid sphere rests on a horizontal surface.
A horizontal impulse is applied at a height h
21. A ring is suspended from a point S on its rim from the centre. The sphere starts rotating
as shown in figure. It behaves like a seconds just after the application of impulse. The ratio
2
pendulum. If g = π , The radius of the ring is (h/R) will be

1 2
1) 2)
2 5
1) 0.1 m 2) 0.3 m

3) 0.5 m 4) 1.0 m
2 3
3) 4)
 3 5
22. If L cm is the angular momentum about centre
 25. A uniform solid cylinder of mass M and radius
of mass of a system of particles, rcm is the R is free to rotate on frictionless horizontal
position vector of the center of mass relative axle, as shown in figure. Two masses, m

to any point P and P is the total momenta, each, hung from two cords wrapped around

then angular momentum L of the system the cylinder. If the system is released from
relative to point P is given by rest, the tension in each cord will be
     
1) L = L cm 2) L =p × rcm + L cm
       
3) L cm + rcm × p =L 4) L cm =L + rcm × p

127
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Mmg Mmg
1) 2)
( 4m + M ) ( 2m + M )

2Mmg 2Mmg
3) 4)
( 2m + M ) ( 4m + M )

26. The time dependence of the position

n 1n 2 n2
1) mx 2 2) mx 2
of a particle of mass m = 2 is given by n1 + n 2 n1 − n 2

t ) 2t ˆi − 3t 2 ˆj Its angular momentum,
r (=
with respect to the origin, at time t = 2 s is : n1 n2
3) mx 2 4) mx 2
n1 − n 2 n1 + n 2
1) −48 kˆ 2) −34 ( kˆ − ˆi )
30. Two point masses A of mass M and B of
4) 48 ( ˆi + ˆj)
mass 4 M are fixed at the ends of a rod of
3) 36 kˆ
length  and of negligible mass. The rod
27. A cord is wound round the circumference of is set rotating about an axis perpendicular
a wheel of radius r. The axis of the wheel is to its length with a uniform angular speed.
horizontal and the moment of inertia about it The work required for rotating the rod will be
is I. A weight mg is attached to the cord at the minimum, then the distance of axis of rotation
end. The weight falls from rest. After falling from the mass A is at
through a distance h, the angular velocity of
wheel will be 2 8
1)  2) 
5 5
2gh 2mgh
1) 2)
I + mr I + mr 2 4 
3)  4)
5 5
2mgh 31. A particle of mass m is fixed to one end
3) 4) 2gh
I + 2mr 2 of a light spring of force constant k and
unstretched length  . The system is rotated
28. A wheel, initially at rest, is rotated with a about the other end of the spring with an
uniform angular acceleration. The wheel angular velocity ω , in gravity-free space. The
rotates through an angle θ1 in the first one increase in length of spring will be
second and through an additional angle θ2
θ2
in the next one second. The ratio is
θ1

1) 4 2) 3

2) 2 4) 1

29. A uniform disc rotates freely about a mω2  mω2 

1) 2)
perpendicular axis making n1 revolutions per k + mω2 k − mω2
minute. Wax of mass m falls vertically and
sticks to the disc at a distance x from the
mω2  mω2 
axis. Rotational speed reduces to n2 rpm, 3) 4)
then moment of inertia of the disc is k + mω k − mω

128
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

32. A thin rod MN, free to rotate in the vertical 35. A thin disc of mass m and radius r is moving
plane about the fixed end N, is held horizontal. up an inclined plane. Before ascending this
When the end M is released the speed of this plane disc was rolling horizontally without
end, when the rod makes an angle α with the slipping with speed v. The maximum height
horizontal, will be proportional to (see figure) to which it can rise is

1 v2 2v 2
1) 2)
3 2g 3g
1) cos α 2) sin α
3v 2 v2
3) 4)
3) cos α 4) sin α 4g g

33. A coin of radius r rolls without slipping on a 36. A hoop of radius r and mass m rotating with
smooth horizontal floor. If velocity of its centre an angular velocity ω0 is placed on a rough
of mass is v, the linear velocity of point P on horizontal surface. The initial velocity of the
the coin is centre of the hoop is zero. What will be the
velocity of the centre of the hoop when it
ceases to slip?

rω0
1) rω0 2)
4
2
1) 1.5 v 2) v rω0 rω0
3 3) 4)
3 2
3) 2 v 4) v
34. A disc of mass M and radius R is free to 37. Linear acceleration of cylinder of mass m2 is
rotate about a horizontal axis passing through a2. Then angular acceleration α 2 is (given
its centre. A body of mass M is fixed at the that there is no slipping)
highest point of the disc. Now the system
is released. When the body comes to the
lowest position, then its angular speed will be

3g 5g a2 (a2 + g)
1) 2) 1) 2)
5R 3R R R

3g 8g 2 (g − a2 ) ( 2a 2 + g )
3) 4) 3) 4)
8R 3R R R

129
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

38. Two blocks of masses 10 kg and 4 kg are of the inner circles, and each of the two line
connected by a spring of negligible mass and segments is m. The mass of the ink used to
placed on a frictionless horizontal surface. draw the outer circle is 6 m. The coordinates
An impulse gives a velocity of 14 m/s to the of the centres of the different parts are: out
heavier block in the direction of the lighter circle (0, 0), left inner circle (–a, a), right
block. The velocity of the centre of mass in inner circle (a, a), vertical line (0, 0) and
m/s is horizontal line (0,–a). The y-coordinate of
the centre of mass of the ink in this drawing
1) 5 2) 10 a
is where n is
n
3) 15 4) 20

39. A thin rod of length L and mass M is held

vertically with one end on the floor and is
allowed to fall. Find the velocity of the other
end when it hits the floor, assuming that the
end on the floor does not slip: 43. A circular plate of uniform thickness has
a diameter of 56 cm. A circular portion of
3g diameter 42 cm is removed from one edge
1) 2) 3gL of the plate as shown in the figure. Find
L the position of the centre of mass of the
remaining portion in centimeters
L g
3) 4)
3g 3L

40. A body having moment of inertia about its axis

of rotation equal to 3 kg-m2 is rotating with
angular velocity equal to 3 rad/sec. Kinetic
energy of this rotating body is the same as
that of a body of mass 27 kg moving with a Statement Type
speed of The following questions consist of two
statements each given as Statement I and
1) 1.0 m/s 2) 0.5 m/s Statement II. It is needed to choose any one
of the following responses.
3) 1.5 m/s 4) 2.0 m/s 1) Statement I and Statement II both are
correct
Integer Type 2) Statement I and Statement II both are
incorrect
41. Two balls of equal mass are projected
3) Statement I is correct , and Statement II is
upwards simultaneously, one from the ground
incorrect
with initial velocity 50 ms–1 and the other from
a 40 m tower with initial velocity of 30 ms–1. 4) Statement I is incorrect, but Statement II
The maximum height (in m) attained by their is correct.
COM will be 44. Statement I : Centre of mass of a system
does not move under the
42. Look at the drawing given in the figure, which action of internal forces.
has been drawn with ink of uniform line- Statement II : Internal forces are non-
thickness. The mass of ink used to draw each conservative forces.

130
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

45. Statement I : I n a n e l a s t i c c o l l i s i o n 48. Assertion : A helicopter must necessarily

between two bodies, the have two propellers.
relative speed of the bodies
after collision in equal to the Reason : Two propellers are provided
relative speed before the in helicopter in order to
collision. conserve linear momentum.
Statement II : In an elastic collision, the
49. Assertion : When moment of inertia of
linear momentum of the
a rotating body changes its
system is conserved.
angular momentum remain
46. Statement I : In an elastic collision of conserved, but its kinetic
two bodies, the momentum energy changes.
and energy of each body is
Reason : Angular momentum does
conserved.
not depend upon moment of
Statement II : If two bodies stick to each inertia of the body.
other after colliding, the
collision is said to be perfectly Match the following
elastic.
50. A ring of mass m and radius R is placed on
Assertion - Reason Type a rough inclined plane so that it rolls without
slipping, then match the following.
In each of the following questions, a
statement of Assertion (A) is given followed Column I Column II
by a corresponding statement of Reason (R) A) Linear acceleration P) is directly
just below it. Of the following statements, of centre of mass proportional
choose the correct answer. to m
1) If both Assertion and Reason are true B) Angular acceleration Q) is inversely
and Reason is the correct explanation of proportional
Assertion to m
C) Rotational kinetic R) is inversely
2) If both Assertion and Reason are true but energy at any proportional
Reason is not the correct explanation of instant to R
Assertion
D) Translational kinetic S) None
3) If Assertion is true but Reason is false energy at any
instant
4) If Assertion is false but Reason is true
1) A - S; B - R; C - P; D - P
47. Assertion : If earth shrinks to half its
present size, length of the 2) A - R; B - S; C - P; D - Q
day would become 6 hours.
3) A - Q; B - R; C - S; D - P
Reason : As the size of the earth
changes, its moment of 4) A - P; B - S; C - R; D - Q
inertia changes.

131
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

KEY WITH HINTS

1. 2 4. 4 Mass of element is
a 2
dm =
λdx or dm =
x dx
L

x =L L
a
∫ ∫ L x dx
3
x dm
If A is taken as origin,
x COM= x= 0
= 0
L
;
Then, X CM
m x + m 2 x 2 + m3 x 3 + m 4 x 4
= 1 1
∫ dm a 2
∫0 L x dx
m1 + m 2 + m3 + m 4

L4
1
= L or x COM
= =4 3L
2 L3 4
3
m1 y1 + m 2 y 2 + m3 y3 + m 4 y 4 1 5. 2 Let the free fall time be t
YCM = L
m1 + m 2 + m3 + m 4 3
1 2 2∆y
∆y= v 0 t + gt ⇒ t=
2. 1 Since there is no external force acting on 2 g
the particle hence

m1Y1 + m 2 Y2 2 (10m )
=
YCM = 0; =
= 2s
m1 + m 2 10ms −2

m  3m  ( 2.5 rev ) ( 2π rad rev −1 ) 5π

Hence,   × 15 +   × Y2 =
0 =
ωavg = rad s −1
4  4  2s 2
6. 3=x a cos ωt is an equation of simple
⇒ Y2 =
−5m
harmonic motion.
3. 1 Let x1 and x2 be the distance of COM from
m1 and m2, then m1x1 = m2x2 ----- (1) aω ( a max =
∴ acceleration a max = Aω)
If a and a’ are the distance moved by m1
and m2 towards m1 then aω
and angular acceleration =
r
∴ m1 ( x1 −=
a ) m 2 ( x 2 − a ′ ) -------(2);

m mr 2 aω 1
τmax =Iα max = × = m arω
Solving (1) and (2) a ′ = 1 a 2 r 2
m2

132
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

9M
7. 2 Mass per unit area of disc =
πR 2 2 2  R 
2

or I
= Mr + M  
∴ Mass of removed portion = m 5  2

2Mr 2 MR 2 M ( 4r 2 + 5R 2 )
or I = + =
5 2 10

For all the four spheres,

2
9M R taken together;
m
∴= 2  M
× π =
πR 3
4M ( 4r 2 + 5R 2 ) 2M ( 4r 2 + 5R 2 )
M.I. of remaining portion =
4I =
10 5
9M × R 2 M × R 2 40
= − = MR 2 11. 3 Two particles will meet at their centre of
2 2×9 9 mass.
∴ Distance of the centre of mass from
md 2 md 2  d 
8. = I
4 cube = ; I disc  2 r 
=
6 8 8kg mass

8 × 0 + 4 × 12
2 2 = 4m
=
2md  d  md 8+ 4
Isphere=  2= r=
 10
5× 4

1 1 1 12. 1 Here,
∴ Icube : Idisc : Isphere =
: : 20 :15 :12
=
6 8 10
=
m1 4kg;
= x1 2m;
= m 2 8kg;
= x2 ?
9. I YY′
1= ( IA )YY′ + ( IB )YY′ where YY’ denotes

axis

2M  R   2M  R 
2 2
2
I YY′
∴=   +   + M ( 2R ) 
5 2  5 2 

m x1 + m 2 x 2
21MR 2 X CM =∴
0; X CM =1 ;
= m1 + m 2
5
10. 2 The situation of the four spheres is 4 × 2 + 8x 2 8
symmetrical about the given axis of 0= ; ∴ x 2 =− =−1m
rotation. Obviously each has same 4+8 8
moment of inertia. Now, for any one
sphere, say at A, ∴ m2 ( =
8 kg ) must be placed at 1 m from
2
I IG + M ( OA )
= O on OE.

133
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

13. 1 Given that,

ˆ m =  
m1 =
2kg; r1 =
−2i, 2 −3jˆ ;
2kg; r2 =
 ˆ
=
m3 2kg;
= r3 k
  
 m1r1 + m 2 r2 + m3 r3
∴ rCM =
m1 + m 2 + m3
∴ Moment of inertia of the solid sphere
from the tangential axis to the axis passing
2 ( −2iˆ ) + 2 ( −3jˆ ) + 2 ( kˆ ) −2iˆ − 3jˆ + kˆ through centre of mass should decrease
= non linearly and then should increase
6 3 towards the second tangential axis.

 MR 2 2
∴ | rCM | = x 2 + y2 + z2 16. 4 Here I A = ; I AB= I A + M ( 2R ) from
2
4 9 1 14 theorem of parallel axis
= + + =
9 9 9 9 MR 2 9
I AB = + M4R 2 = MR 2
2 2
 14
∴ | rCM |2 = =
1.55 m 2
9
MR 2 9MR 2
Then I =I A + I AB = + = 5MR2
14. 2 Two particles collide at their centre of 2 2
mass.
17. 3 Moment of inertia of the two spheres lying
∴ Distance of CM from P 2 2
on the axis of rotation itself is 2 × mr .
0.1× 0 + 0.3 ×1 5
= 0.75 m
= Moment of inertia of the two spheres lying
0.1 + 0.3
on other two corners (using parallel axes
2 2 
1 2 =
theorem) is 2  mr + ma 2 
Consider P : s1 = a1t 5 
2
Total moment of inertia =

1 F 2 1 10−2 2 2 2 2 
= 2  mr 2 +
mr + ma 2 
or 0.75 = t =× ×t ; 5 5 
2 m1 2 0.1

∴ t = 15 sec 8 4 
= mr 2 + 2ma 2 = 2m  r 2 + a 2 
5 5 
15. 1 Moment of inertia of a sphere about an
2MR 2 18. 4 ∴ Mass of wire = ρL
axis at centre and moment of
5 Since the wire of length L is turned into a
inertia of the sphere about a tangential circle,
7 L
axis = MR 2 2πR = L ⇒ R =
5 2π

134
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

M.I. of loop about given axis 4 × π2

=
T 2s;
= R = 0.5 m
2 MR 2 3 8π2
= MR + = MR 2
2 2      
22. 3 Using L =Σ ri × pi ; But ri =ri′ + rcm
   
Σ ( ri′ + rcm ) × pi
2
Then L =
3
3  L  3 ρL
( ) 
= × ρL  = .
2  2π  8 π 2    
= Σ ( ri′× pi ) + Σ ( rcm × Σpi )
   
Mass M pi Lcm + ( rcm × p )
= Lcm + rcm × Σ=
19. =
2 Density ρ =
Volume πR 2 t 23. 2 Using Iω = constant.

M 2
M Ii ωi = If ωf ; Ii =

2
or R = 12
πρt

2
1 1 M M 2  M 2 m 2
=
I = MR 2 .M. ; Here, If = + 2m   = +
2 2 πρt 12 2 12 2

I 1 M 2 2πtρ2 ρ2 3 Mωi
=
1
. . = = ∴ ωf =
I2 2 πtρ1 M 2 ρ1 1 ( 6m + M )

24. 2
m 2
20. 3 I ( about YY′ ) =
12

Angular Impulse = Change in angular
momentum ( mv ) h = Iω
Using parallel axis theorem : 2 v h 2
or mvh =
= mR 2  or
2
m m 2
m 2
5 R R 5
I ( about AD ) = + =
12 4 3
25. 1 The equation of motion of the system.
2mg – 2T = 2ma
I or T + ma = mg ----(i)
21. 3 The period of a pendulum= 2π
mg cm  Torque τ = Iα

I = ( mR 2 + mR 2 ) = 2mR 2  MR 2  a
∴ R×F = 
 cm = R ′  2 R

2mR 2 2R T 2g 2F 2 × 2T 4T
T 2
= π 2
= π ; R = or=
a = = ------ (ii)
mgR g 8π2 M M M

135
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

From (i) and (ii), 1

= 0+ α × 4 = 2α ....... (ii)
 4T  2
T + m× =mg
M
3
∴ θ2 = α ...... (iii)
 4m  Mmg 2
or T 1 + mg or T =
=
 M  ( M + 4m )
θ2
26. 1 The velocity ∴ 3
=
 θ1
 dr d
=
v = ( 2t ˆi − 3t 2 ˆj)
dt dt
n1 nπ
29. 2 ω=
i × 2π= 1
 60 30
v= 2iˆ − 6t ˆj
So, the angular momentum with respect
n2 n π
to origin, ω=
f × 2π= 2
 60 30
 
(
L = m ( r × v ) = 2  2t ˆi − 3t 2 ˆj × 2iˆ − 6t ˆj )
 If= Ii + mx 2 ; But Ii ωi = If ωf ;
L t = 2 =2 ( −12t 2 + 6t 2 ) kˆ t = 2

= 2 ( 6 ) ( 4 )( −k ) = 48 ( −kˆ ) ∴ I=
If ωf
=
( Ii + mx 2 ) . n 2 π30
i
ωi n 1π 30
27. 2 Loss of potential energy = Gain of kinetic
energy.
1 1 n 2 ( I1 + mx 2 )
or mgh
= mv 2 + Iω2 i.e., I1 =
2 2 n1

1 2 2 1 2 n2
or mgh
= mr ω + Iω or n1I=
i − n 2 Ii n 2 mx 2=
; or Ii mx 2
2 2 n1 − n 2

30. 3 Let x is the distance of CM from A;

2
ω [ 2 ] 2
or
= mgh mr + I I =Mx 2 + 4M (  − x )
2
and if I is minimum, W will be minimum.

2mgh 2mgh dI
=
or ω 2
= or ω = 2Mx + 4M × 2 (  − x ) x − 1
( I + mr 2 ) I + mr 2 dx

28. 2 ω0 =0 =2Mx − 8M (  − x )
1 2 1 1 dI
θ1 =ω0 t1 + = 10Mx − 8M ;
αt1 =0 + α ×1 = α ----(i)
2 2 2 dx

1 2 4
Further, θ1 + θ2 = ω0 × 2 + α × ( 2) ∴ 10 Mx − 8M = 0; x = 
2 5

136
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

31. 2 Let the spring increase its length by x. 35. 3 Using

Force = kx.
1 1
∴ Radius of circle= (  + x ) K.E.
= mv 2 + Iω2
2 2
∴ Centripetal force = Force due to spring
mRω2 kx or m ( =
or= + x ) ω2 kx 1 2 1 mr 2 v 2 3
= mv + . 2 = mv 2
or mω2 = kx − mxω2 = x ( k − mω2 ) 2 2 2 r 4

mω2 
or x =
( k − mω2 ) ∴ mgh
=
3
mv 2 ; ∴
= h
3 v2

4 4 g
32. 4 Using energy conservation principle, loss
in potential energy = gain in kinetic energy

1 m 2 2
mg sin
= α ω
2 3
36. 4
⇒ 6g sin α =v 2
According to law of conservation at point
=
⇒v 6g sin α or v ∝ sin α of contact,
33. 1 Velocity of any point on the rolling body mr 2 ω= mvr + mr 2 ω
0
is the sum of rotational velocity and the
velocity of CM. 2 v rω0
mvr + mr  = 2mvr or v=
r v cm r 2
v=
p v cm + ω= v cm +
2 2
37. 3 m2g – T = m2 a2 ----- (1);
( v cm = ωr when there is no slipping)
m2R 2
v 3 =
TR α 2 ------ (2)
∴ vp = v + = v =1.5 v 2
2 2

34. 4 Energy is conserved. Potential energy 2T

1 2 From eqn. (2) α 2 = . Substitute the
= Kinetic energy ∴ Mgh =Iω m2R
2
value of T from eqn. (1)
11 2 2
or Mg ( 2R=) 2
 MR + MR  ω 2 2 (g − a2 )
22  =
∴ α2 ( m 2g=
− m2a 2 )
m2R R

3MR 2 ω2 8g 38. 2
=
or 2MgR = or ω2
2× 2 3R

8g
or ω =
3R

137
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

m1v1 + m 2 v 2 10 ×14 + 4 × 0 0 + 40
=v CM = =
a = –g, (hcm) initial = 20 m
m1 + m 2 10 + 4 2
2 2
140 v= u cm + 2a cm H ; H is the maximum
= = 10 m / s
cm
14
height reached by the cm of two balls from
39. 2 When the rod is held vertically, its centre initial level
of mass is at a height L/2 from the floor,
so that the potential energy of the stick is 02= 402 − 2 ×10 × H
Mg(L/2). On releasing, the stick falls, i.e.,
1600
it rotates about the end on the floor and =
H = 80 m
the potential energy is converted into 20
1 2
rotational KE  Iω  , where I is the Hence maximum height reached by the
2  centre of mass from ground
moment of inertia of the rod about the
= ( h cm )initial =
+ 80 100 m
lower end and ω the angular velocity
when it hits the floor. Then, by conservation 42. 10
of mechanical energy,
m1 y1 + m 2 y 2 + m3 y3 + m 4 y 4 + m5 y5
L 1 2 L 1 ML2 y CM =
Mg = Iω ; or Mg =ω2 m1 + m 2 + m3 + m 4 + m5
2 2 2 2 3

or ω = 3g / L ( 6m )( 0 ) + ( m ) ( a ) + m ( a ) + m ( 0 ) + m ( −a )
6m + m + m + m + m
If v is the linear velocity of the end hitting
the floor, then
a
v = rω = 3gL =
10

43. 9 Let ‘r1’ be the distance of the centre of

1 2 1 2
40. 1 KR = Iω = × 3 × ( 3) = 13.5 J mass of remaining portion from centre of
2 2 bigger-circle.
π
( 56 ) − ( 42 ) 
2 2
1 2 1 2 =
Remaining area, A1
Now, 13.5 = mv = × 27 × v 4
2 2
v = 1 m/s. ∴ A1r1 =
A 2 r2
41. 100
Initial velocity of cm
A 
or, r1 =  2  r2
m × 50 + m × 30  A1 
= u=
cm = 40 m / s
2m
2
π ( 42 ) × 4 7
=
⇒ r1 ×
π ( 56 ) − ( 42 )  × 4 1
2 2

42 × 42 × 7
=
or r1 ⇒ 9 cm
98 ×14

138
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

44. 3 Centre of mass does not move under 2π

the influence of internal forces because (where K is radius of gyration and ω = )
T
all the internal forces add upto zero net
force on the system as a whole. Thus in
the absence of any external force, centre 1 2
When K becomes , K becomes (1/4)th.
of mass will not move. 2
Therefore, T becomes (1/4) th of initial
Internal forces may be conservative. 24
Consider the case of two mass system value, i.e., = 6 hours .
connected by a spring.
4
48. 3 If there were only one propeller in the
45. 1 In an elastic collision linear momentum helicopter, the helicopter itself, would have
and kinetic energy are conserved. Also turned in opposite direction of the direction
relative speed of the bodies remains of propeller due to conservation of angular
same. momentum. Thus, two propeller provides
helicopter a steady movement.
46. 2 49. 3 As no torque is applied, angular momentum
remains constant
47. 1 According to principle of conservation of ω2 I1
angular momentum, I1ω1 = I 2 ω2 ; ∴ =
ω1 I 2
Iω = constant
2
E 2 (1/ 2 ) I 2 ω22 I 2  I1  I1
=
Now, = =  
2  2π  E1 ( ) 2
1/ 2 I1ω1 I1  I 2  I2
MK   = constant
 T 
K2 Clearly, if moment of inertia decreases,
or = constant KE of rotation increase and vice-versa.
T
50. 1

139
 CHAPTER
GRAVITATION
07

NEWTON’S LAW OF GRAVITATION

Newton’s law of gravitation states that every body in the universe attracts every other body with
a force, which is directly proportional to the product of their masses and inversely proportional to the
square of the distance between their centres. The direction of the force is along the line joining the
particles.
m1m 2 mm
For masses m1 and m2 at a distance r apart, F ∝ 2
or F =
G 12 2
r r
G is the universal gravitational constant, when m1 = m2 = 1, r = 1, F = G

VECTOR FORM OF NEWTON’S LAW OF GRAVITATION

Consider two bodies A and B of masses m1 and m2, placed at a distance r apart,
 −Gm1m 2 −Gm1m 2 
A by B, F12
Gravitational force on= = 2
rˆ21  r21 . r̂21 = unit vector from B to A
r | r21 |3

 −Gm1m 2 −Gm1m 2 
B by A, F21
Gravitational force on = = 2
rˆ12  r12
r | r12 |3
 
F12 = −F21 . By Newtons third law of motion.
Properties of Gravitational Force
1) It is always attractive in nature.
2) It is independent of the medium between the particles.
3) It holds good over a wide range of distances. It is found true for interplanetary to inter atomic
distances.
4) It is a central force, ie, acts along the line joining the centres of two interacting bodies.
5) It is the weakest force in nature : As Fnuclear > Felectromagnetic > Fgravitational
6) It is always conservative in nature.
Acceleration Due to Gravity
The force of attraction exerted by the earth on a body is called gravitational pull or gravity.
When a force acts on a body, it produces acceleration. Therefore, a body under the effect of
gravitational pull must accelerate.

140
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

The acceleration produced in the motion of a body under the effect of gravity is called acceleration
due to gravity, it is denoted by g.
Consider a body of mass m, lying on the surface of earth then gravitational force on the body is
given by
GMm
F= ; Where M = mass of the earth and R = radius of the earth.
R2

If g is the acceleration due to gravity

Force on the body due to gravity = mass × acceleration, or F = mg

GMm
mg =
R2

GM 4  4 2 
∴ g= ∴ g= πρGR  M= πR ρ 
R2 3  3 

It is clear that g value depends upon the mass, radius and density of planet and it is independent
of mass, shape and density of the body placed on the surface of the planet.
Acceleration due to gravity is a vector quantity and its direction is always towards the centre of
the planet.
Average value of g = 9.8 m/s2 at the surface of earth.

gR 2
Mass of earth, M = ; M = 6.018 × 1024 kg
G

3gR 2 / G 3g
=
Density of earth, ρ = 3
≈ 5.5 ×103 kg m −3
4πR 4πRG

VARIATION OF ACCELERATION DUE TO GRAVITY

The value of acceleration due to gravity changes with height (i.e. altitude), depth, shape of the
earth and rotation of earth about its own axis.
Variation of g with height
Consider earth to be a sphere of mass M, radius R with centre at O. Let g be the value of
acceleration due to gravity at a point A on the surface of earth.,

GM
∴g = 2
R

141
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

−2
GM g′ GM R2 R2 g′  h
g′ = ∴ = × = ; =1 + 
( R + h )2 2
g ( R + h ) GM ( R + h ) 2
g  R

h g′ 2h  2h 
If << 1 , then = 1 − g′ g 1 − 
or =
R g R  R
Acceleration due to gravity decreases with height.
1
g decreases with height as g ∝ and at r = ∞ , g’ = 0
r2

 2h  2hg
g′ g 1 −  , then ∆g = g − g′ =
If h << R, then =
 R R
Variation in g with Depth
Consider earth to be a homogeneous sphere of radius R and mass M with centre at O. Let g be
GM
the value of acceleration due to gravity at a point A on the surface of earth, (Fig. below). Then g =
R2

The body at B will experience gravity pull due to shaded portion of earth whose radius is (R – d)
and mass is M’
GM′ 4 3
then g′ = 2
and M′ = π ( R − d ) ρ
(R − d) 3

4
∴ g′ = πG ( R − d ) ρ
3

g′ R − d  d
= g′ g  1 − 
;=
g R  R
We note that the value of acceleration due to gravity decreases with depth. At the centre of the
earth,d = R
 R
g′ = g  1 −  = 0
 R
The acceleration due to gravity is zero at the centre of earth. Therefore the weight of the body of
mass m at the centre of earth = mg0 = 0, but the mass of the body will not be zero.

142
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

The value of g decreases on going below the surface of the earth.

At the centre of the earth d = R ∴ g′ =
0

∆g g − g′ d
% Decrease in the value of g with depth. ×100 = ×100 = ×100
g R R

gd
Absolute decrease ∆g = g − g′ =
R

Kepler’s Laws of Planetary Motion

Johannes Kepler, a German mathematician and astronomer (1571-1630) after a life time study worked
out three empirical laws which govern the motion of the planets and are known as Kepler’s laws of
planetary motion. These are,
(1) The law of Orbits : Every planet moves around the sun in an elliptical orbit with sun at one of
the foci.

(2) The law of Area : The line joining the sun to the planet sweeps out equal areas in equal interval
of time. i.e. areal velocity is constant. According to this law planet will move slowly when it is
farthest from sun and more rapidly when it is nearest to sun. It is similar to the law of conservation
of angular momentum

dA 1 r ( vdt ) 1 dA L  L
Areal velocity = = = rv ∴ =  As L mvr;
= = rv
dt 2 dt 2 dt 2m m 

(3) The law of periods: The square of period of revolution (T) of any planet around sun is directly
proportional to the cube of the semi-major axis of the orbit.
3
2 3 r +r 
2
T ∝ a or T ∝  1 2 
 2 

r1 + r2
From the figure AB = AF + FB; 2a = r1 + r2 ∴a = where a = semi - major axis.
2
r1 = Shortest distance of planet from sun (perigee);r2 = Largest distance of planet from sun (apogee)

143
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Gravitational Field
The space surrounding a material body in which gravitational force of attraction can be experienced
is called its gravitational field.
INTENSITY OF GRAVITATIONAL FIELD
The intensity of gravitational field at a point in a gravitational field is defined as the force experienced
by a body of unit mass placed at that point provided the presence of unit mass does not disturb the original
gravitational field. It is always directed towards the centre of gravity of the body whose gravitational field
is considered. Intensity of gravitational field at a point is a vector quantity and is denoted by E.

  F
So if a test mass m at a point in a gravitational field experiences a force F then E=
m
It is a vector quantity and is always directed towards the centre of gravity of the body whose
gravitational field is considered. Unit. N/kg
F GMm / r 2 GM 1
then intensity of gravitational field E = = ∴E = 2
, E∝ 2
m m r r
E = 0 at r = ∞
Intensity at a given point (P) due to the combined effect of different point masses can be calculated
by vector sum of different intensities.

   
For a system of point masses, E net = E1 + E 2 + E 3 + .....

Gravitational field intensity due to point mass

Force acting on a mass m placed at B

GMm
F=
r2

F GM GM
∴ =2 , directed towards M. I = 2
m r r
Gravitational field intensity due to uniform solid sphere.

For a mass m placed at A, directed towards centre of sphere.

GMm F GM GM
=F 2
;
= = 2
; I
r m r r2
at the surface of the sphere, r = R

144
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

GM
I= , directed towards the centre of the sphere.
R2

3
M 4 r
Inside the sphere, ρ = ; m′ = ρ× πr 3 ; m′ = M  
4 3 3 R
πR
3

GM′m F Gm′
Force F
= = ;
r2 m r2

GMr 3 GMr
=I = directed towards the centre of the sphere.
r 2R 3 R3

Gravitational field intensity due to spherical shell.

A point outside the shell.

GM
I= directed toward the centre of sphere.
r2

GM
at surface r = R; I =
R2

At a point inside the sphere

145
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Gravitational Potential
At a point in a gravitational field, potential V is defined as negative of work done per unit mass in
shifting a test mass from infinity to the given point ie,
 
F. dr  
−∫
V= − ∫ E. dr
=
m
dV GM
∴ E=− ; V=−
dr r
ie, negative gradient of potential gives intensity of field or potential is a scalar function of position
whose space derivative gives intensity. Negative sign indicates that the direction of intensity is in the
direction where the potential decreases.
Gravitational potential due to a uniform solid sphere
Outside the sphere

GM
V=
r

At the surface

GM
V= −
R

Inside the sphere

GM ( 2 2 )
V=
− 3R − r
2R 3

GM ( 2
=
At the centre of the sphere Vcentre 3R − 0 )
2R 3

3GM 3
Vcentre =
− = Vsurface
2R 2

146
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Gravitational potential due to a spherical shell

At a point outside

GM
V= −
r

GM
At surface V= −
R

GM
Inside the shell V= −
R

Potential inside the shell is same as that on the surface.

Gravitational potential difference : It is defined as the work done to move a unit mass from one point
to the other in the gravitational field.

W 1 1
∆V =VB − VA = A →B =−GM  − 
m  rB rA 
Gravitational Potential Energy
Gravitational potential energy of a body at a point in a gravitational field of another body is defined
as the amount of work done in bringing the given body from infinity to that point without acceleration.
The gravitational potential energy of a body at a point is defined as the amount of work done in
bringing the body from infinity to that point against the gravitational force.
r
GMm GMm GMm
W=∫∞ x 2 dx; W=−
r
∴U=−
r

Gravitational potential energy of a system of three particles

mm m m mm 
U=
−G  1 2 + 2 2 + 1 3  ; when m1 = m2, and r1 = r2 = r3
 r1 r2 r3 

147
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

3Gm 2
U= −
r
Gravitational potential energy of four particles at the corners of a square.

Gm 2 Gm 2
U=− ×4+ − ×2
a 2a

 Gm1m 2 Gm 2 m3 
Gravitational potential energy U =Σu i = + + .....
 r12 r23 

GMm  −GM 
Relation between gravitational potential energy and potential U =
− m
=
r  r 
∴U=
mV

Work Done Against Gravity

If the body of mass m is moved from the surface of earth to a point at a distance h above the
surface of the earth, then change in potential energy or work done against gravity will be
1 1  mgh
W =∆U =GMm  −  , when r1 = R and r2 = R + h; W =
 r1 r2  h
1+
R
ESCAPE VELOCITY
The escape velocity of a body is defined as the minimum velocity with which the body has to be
projected vertically upwards from the surface of a planet so that it just crosses the gravitational field of
that planet and never returns on its own.

If ve is the escape velocity of the body projected from the surface of earth, then
1
Kinetic energy of the body = mv e2
2

1 2 GMm 2GM 2GM

∴ mv
= e v e2
or= or=
ve
2 R R R

GM 2gR 2
=
As g =Ve = 2gR
R2 R

148
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

SATELLITE
A satellite is a body which is revolving continuously in an orbit around a comparatively much larger
body. For example, earth is a satellite of sun and moon in turn is a satellite of earth.
Orbital Velocity of Satellite
Orbital velocity of a satellite is the velocity required to put the satellite into its orbit around the
earth.
For revolution of satellite around the earth, the gravitational pull provides the required centripetal
force.

mv 2 GMm GM
= ;⇒
= v
r r2 r

gR 2 g
=v = R [As GM = gR2 and r = R + h]
R+h R+h
Orbital velocity is independent of the mass of the orbiting body and is always along the tangent
of the orbit.
For a given planet, greater the radius of orbit, lesser will be the orbital velocity of the satellite
 1 
v ∝ 
 r

GM vc
v0
Close to the surface of planet= ; ∴=
v0 i.e., v escape
= 2 v orbital
R 2
Time Period of Satellite
It is the time taken by satellite to go once around the earth.
Circumference of the orbit 2πr r
∴ T = = =2πr
orbtial velocity v GM

r3 ( R + h )3 R h
3/2

⇒ T =2π ; ⇒ T =2π =2π 1 +  [As r = R + h]

GM gR 2 g  R
Time period of nearby satellite
R3 R
T=
2π 2
2π
=
gR g
For earth R = 6400 km and g = 9.8 ms–2.
T = 84.6 minutes = 1.4 hr

149
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Height of Satellite

r3 ( R + h )3
As we know, time period of satellite T =
2π 2π
=
GM gR 2

1/3
 T 2 gR 2 
=
From the above rearranging the equation h   −R
 4π 2 
Geostationary Satellite
The satellite which appears stationary relative to earth is called geostationary or geosynchronous
satellite. It is used as a communication satellite. Such a satellite appears stationary due to its zero
relative velocity with respect to that place on earth. The orbit of a geostationary satellite is known as
the parking orbit
Height of geostationary satellite:

r3 ( R + h )3
As T = 2π ⇒ 2π = 24 hr
GM GM
Substituting the value of G and M we get R + h =r ≈ 42000 km ≈ 7R

∴ height of geostationary satellite from the surface of earth h ≈ 6R ≈ 36000 km

GM
Orbital velocity of geostationary satellite, v = , v = 3.08 km/sec.
r
Polar satellite
These satellites are revolving in a plane containing axis of rotation of earth. They go round poles
of earth in north south direction. Polar satellites are launched at low altitudes around 500-800 km.
Time period of revolution is around 100 minutes.
Angular Momentum of Satellite
GM
=
Angular momentum of satellite L = mvr; ⇒L m r
= ∴L m 2 GMr
r
Energy of a satellite
2
1 2 GMm 1  GM  GMm
Total energy of a satellite ; E = KE + PE = mv − = m  −
2 r 2  r  r

GMm GMm GMm

=− =
−
2r r 2r

150
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

QUESTIONS

1. Mass M is divided into two parts xM and 5. In planetary motion the areal velocity of
(1 − x ) M . For a given separation, the value position vector of a planet depends on
of x for which the gravitational attraction angular velocity ( ω) and the distance of the
between the two pieces becomes maximum planet from sun (r). If so the correct relation
is for areal velocity is
1 3 dA dA
1) 2) 1) ∝ ωr 2) ∝ ω2 r
2 5 dt dt
3) 1 4) 2
dA dA
2. The magnitudes of gravitational fields at 3) ∝ ωr 2 4) ∝ ωr
dt dt
distances r 1 and r 2 from the centre of a
uniform sphere of radius R are F1 and F2.
6. The radii of two planets are respectively R1
The ratio F1/F2 when r1 < R and r2 < R, is
and R2 and their densities are respectively
r1 r1 ρ1 and ρ2 . The ratio of the acceleration due
1) 2)
r2 r2
to gravity at their surface is

2 ρ1 ρ2
r  r2 1) g1 : g 2 = :
3)  1  4) R12 R 22
 r2  r1
2) g=
1 : g2 R1R 2 : ρ1ρ2
3. Two particles of equal mass m each, go round
a circle of radius R, under the action of their 3) g1 : g 2 =R1ρ2 : R 2ρ1
mutual gravitational attraction. The speed of
each particle is 4) g1 : g 2 =R1ρ1 : R 2ρ2
Gm 1 1 7. Two spheres, each of radius r, are touching
1) 2)
2R 2R Gm each other. The force of attraction between
them is proportional to
1 Gm 2Gm 1) r6 2) r4
3) 4)
2 R R
3) r2 4) r–2
4. If the gravitational force between two
objects were proportional to 1/R; where R is 8. g is the acceleration due to gravity at a point
separation between them, then a particle in very near earth’s surface. The earth suddenly
circular orbit under such a force would have shrinks to a smaller radius (x) where (x) = 0.8
its orbital speed v proportional to R, where R denotes radius of earth, without
change in its mass. Now, the acceleration
1 due to gravity at the same point will be
1) 2) R0
R2
1) 0.8 g 2) 0.4 g

1 g
3) R1 4) 3) g 4)
R 2

151
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

9. A simple pendulum is taken from the equator 15. A spherical planet far out in space has a
to the pole its period. mass M0 and diameter D0. A particle of mass
1) decreases m falling freely near the surface of this planet
2) increases will experience an acceleration due to gravity
which is equal to
3) remain the same
4) decreases and then increases GM 0 4mGM 0
1) 2)
10. A body released from a height h takes time D02 D02
t to reach earth’s surface. The time taken by
the same body released from the same height 4GM 0 GmM 0
to reach the moon’s surface is 3) 4)
D02 D02
1) t 2) 6t
1 16. The depth d at which the value of acceleration
3) 6 t 4) 1
6 due to gravity becomes times the value at
n
11. The angular velocity of the earth with which
it has to rotate so that acceleration due to the surface, is [R = radius of the earth]
gravity on 60o lattitude becomes zero is R  n −1 
(Radius of earth = 6400 km. At the poles 1) 2) R  
n  n 
g = 10 ms–2)
1) 2.5 × 10–3 rad/sec
2) 5.0 × 10–3 rad/sec
R  n 
3) 4) R  
3) 10 × 101 rad/sec n2  n +1 
4) 7.8 × 10–2 rad/sec 17. Two blocks of masses m each are hung
12. The acceleration of a body due to the from a balance. The scale pan A is at height
attraction of the earth (radius R) at a distance H1 whereas scale pan B is at height H2. The
2R from the surface of the earth is (g = difference in weight when H1 > H2 and R being
acceleration due to gravity at the surface of the radius of earth =
the earth)
g g
1) 2)
9 3

g
3) 4) g
4
13. The height of the point vertically above earth’s
 1 − 2H1 
surface at which acceleration due to gravity 1) mg  
becomes 1% of its value at the surface is  R 
(Radius of earth = R)
1) 8R 2) 9R  H1 H 2 
2) 2mg  − 
3) 10 R 4) 20 R R R 
14. If radius of earth is R, then the height h at
which value of g becomes one-fourth is
 H 2 H1 
R R 3) 2mg  − 
1) 2)  R R 
4 2
H 2 H1
3R 4) 2mg
3) 4) R H1 + H 2
4

152
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

18. A spherical shell is cut into two pieces along 22. A uniform ring of mass m is lying at a distance
a chord as shown in the figure. P is a point 1.73 a from the centre of a sphere of mass
on the plane of the chord. The gravitational M just over the sphere where a is the small
field at P due to the upper part is I1 and that radius of the ring as well as that of the
due to the lower part is I2. What is the relation sphere. Then gravitational force exerted on
between them the sphere is

1) I1 > I2 2) I1 < I2 GMm GMm

1) 2)
3) I1 = I2 4) No definite relation 8a 2 (1.73a )2
19. Mass of moon is 7.34 × 10 22 kg. If the GMm GMm
acceleration due to gravity on the moon is 1.4 3) 3 4) 1.73
m/s2, the radius of the moon is (G = 6.667 × a2 8a 2
10–11 Nm2/kg2) 23. The intensity of gravitational field at a point
situated at a distance of 8000 km from the
1) 0.56 × 104 m centre of the earth is 6N/kg. The gravitational
2) 1.87 × 106m potential at that point is – (in Joule / kg)

3) 1.92 × 106m 1) 8 × 106 2) 2.4 × 103

4) 1.01 × 108 m 3) 4.8 × 107 4) 6.4 × 1014

20. There are two bodies of masses 100 kg and
10,000 kg separated by a distance of 1 m. 24. The gravitational potential difference between
At what distance from the smaller body, the the surface of a planet and a point 20 m above
intensity of gravitational field will be zero? it is 14 J kg–1. The work done in moving a 2.0
kg mass by 8.0 m on a slope of 60o from the
1 1 horizontal, is equal to
1) m 2) m
9 10
1) 7 J 2) 9.6 J
1 10
3) m 4) m 3) 16 J 4) 32 J
11 11

21. Infinite number of masses, each of 3 kg, are 25. Infinite number of masses, each of 1 kg, are
placed along a straight line at the distances placed along a straight line at the distances
of 1 m, 2m, 4 m, 8m, .... from a point O on of 1 m, 2 m, 4 m, 8 m,..... from a point O
the same line. If G denotes the universal on the same time. If G denotes universal
constant of gravitation, then the magnitude gravitational constant, then the gravitational
of the gravitational field intensity at O is potential at O is

1) G 2) 2 G 1) – G 2) –2G

3) 3 G 4) 4 G 3) –3G 4) –4G

153
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

26. A body of mass m is taken from earth surface

to a height equal to radius of earth. The
increase in potential energy will be
mgR
1) mgR 2)
2

mgR
3) 2mgR 4) 1 1 
4 1) GM  − 
d R
27. Energy required to move a body of mass m
from an orbit of radius 2R to 3R is (where M
= Mass of the earth, R = Radius of the earth)  1 1
2) 2GM  − 
R d
GMm GMm
1) 2)
12R 3R
 1 1
3) 3GM  − 
GMm GMm R d
3) 4)
8R 6R
1 1 
4) 2GM  − 
28. If mass of earth is M, radius is R and d R
gravitational constant is G, then work done to
take 1 kg mass from earth surface to infinity 31. A point mass m is released from rest at a
will be distance of 3R from the centre of a thin-
walled hollow sphere of radius R and mass
GM GM M as shown. The hollow sphere is fixed in
1) 2) position and the only force on the point mass
2R R
is the gravitational attraction of the hollow
sphere. There is a very small hole in the
2GM GM hollow sphere through which the point mass
3) 4)
R 2R falls as shown. The velocity of a point mass
when it passes through point P at a distance
29. The gravitational field due to a mass R/2 from the centre of the sphere is
K
distribution is E = in the x-direction (K is
x3
a constant), Taking the gravitational potential
to be zero at infinity, its value at a distance x is
K K
1) 2)
x 2x

K K
3) 4)
x2 2x 2 2GM 5GM
1) 2)
3R 3R
30. Velocity of a body released from a distance
d measured from the centre of earth of mass
M and radius R when it strikes the surface of 25GM 4GM
3) 4)
earth is given by v is 24R 3R

154
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

32. ve and vp denote the escape velocities from 37. An artificial satellite of mass m orbits earth
the earth and another planet having twice the at a height R above the surface of earth. If
radius and the same mean density as that of g denotes gravitational field intensity at the
the earth. Then surface of earth of radius R, the kinetic energy
of the revolving satellite will be
vp mgR mgR
1) v c = 2) vc = vp 1) 2)
2 4 2

vp mgR mgR
3) vc = 2vp 4) v c = 3) 4)
4 3 5
38. A geostationary satellite orbits earth at a
33. The period of revolution of planet A around height of 6R above the surface of earth where
the sun is 8 times that of B. The distance of R denotes radius of earth. Another satellite
A from the sun is ............ times greater than revolves around earth at a height 2.5R from
that of B from the sun? earth’s surface. The period of other satellite
will be
1) 4 2) 5 1) (6 × 2.5) hour 2) (6/2.5) hour
3) 6 4) 8 3) (2.5/6) hour 4) hour
1 Integer Type
34. If the radius of earth contracts of its present 39. At surface of earth weight of a person is 72N
n
R
value, the length of the day will be then his weight (in N) at height from
approximately 2
24 24 surface of earth is (R = radius of earth)
1) h 2) h
n n2 40. A simple pendulum has a time period T1 when
3) 24 nh 4) 24n2 h on earth’s surface and T2 when taken to a
35. The distance of Neptune and Saturn from sun height R above the earth’s surface, where R
are nearly 1013 and 1012 meters respectively. is the radius of earth. The value of T2/T1 is
Assuming that they move in circular orbits, 41. If the radius of earth shrinks by 1.5%
their periodic times will be in the ratio (mass remaining same), then the value
10 of acceleration due to gravity changes by
1) 2) 100
.......%.
Statement Type
1 The following questions consist of two
3) 10 10 4)
10 statements each given as Statement I and
36. One projectile after deviation from its path, Statement II. It is needed to choose any one
starts moving round the earth in a circular of the following responses.
path of radius equal to nine times the radius 1) Statement I and Statement II both are
of earth R, its time period will be correct
R R 2) Statement I and Statement II both are
1) 2π 2) 27 × 2π incorrect
g g
3) Statement I is correct , and Statement II is
incorrect
R R
3) π 4) 8 × 2π 4) Statement I is incorrect, but Statement II
g g is correct.

155
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

42. Statement I : A pulsar is a source of radio 46. Assertion : The time period of revolution
waves that varies in intensity of a satellite close to the
at regular intervals. surface of the earth is smaller
than that revolving away
Statement II : A pulsar is a rotating neutron from the surface of the earth.
star.
Reason : The square of time period of
43. Statement I : The square of the period the revolutions of a satellite
of revolution of a planet is is directly proportional to the
proportional to the cube of cube of its orbital radius.
the semi-major axis of the
ellipse. 47. Assertion : Gravitational potential and
gravitational potential energy
Statement II : Sun’s gravitational field is both are related to the work
inversely proportional to the done by the gravitational
square of its distance from force in the gravitational
the planet field.

Reason : Gravitational field strength

44. Statement I : A t p o l e , t h e v a l u e o f
is related to the gravitational
acceleration due to gravity
force in the gravitational
(g) is greater than that of
field.
equator.
Match the following
Statement II : Earth rotates on its axis in
addition to revolving round 48. Density of a planet is two times the density
the sun. of earth. Radius of this planet is half the
radius of the earth. Match the following (As
Assertion - Reason Type compared to the earth).

1) If both the Assertion and Reason are true Column I Column II

and the Reason is true explanation of the
A) Acceleration due P) Half
Assertion
to gravity on this
planet’s surface
2) If both the Assertion and Reason are true
but the Reason is not the true explanation B) Gravitational Q) Same
of the Assertion potential on the
surface
3) If Assertion is true but Reason is false C) Gravitational R) Two times
potential at centre
4) If Assertion is false but Reason is true D) Gravitational field S) Four times
strength at centre
45. Assertion : If a body is taken from earth
to moon, its gravitational 1) A - Q; B - P; C - P; D - Q
mass becomes one-sixth on
the moon. 2) A - P; B - Q; C - P; D - R

Reason : Gravitational mass depends 3) A - R; B - P; C - Q; D - S

upon acceleration due to
gravity. 4) A - S; B - P; C - P; D - Q

156
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

49. On the surface of earth acceleration due to 50. Let V and E denote the gravitational potential
gravity is g and gravitational potential is V. and gravitational field respectively at a point
Match the following. due to certain uniform mass distribution
described in four different situation of List-I,
Column I Column II then
A) At height h = R, P) decreases to a Column I Column II
value of g factor 1/4 A) At centre of thin P) E = 0
spherical shell
B) At depth h = R/2, Q) decreases by a
value of g factor 1/2 B) At centre of solid Q) E≠0
sphere
C) At height h = R, R) increases by a C) At solid sphere R) V≠0
value of V factor 11/8 has non concentric
spherical cavity at
D) At depth h = R/2, S) increases by a the centre of the
value of V factor 2 spherical cavity
D) At centre of line S) V = 0
T) None joining two point
masses of equal
1) A - R; B - P; C - S; D - Q magnitude
1) A - P, R; B - P, R; C - Q, R; D - P, R
2) A - P; B - Q; C - S; D - T
2) A - P, R; B - Q, R; C - P; D - R, S
3) A - R; B - P; C - Q; D - S
3) A - Q, R; B - P, S; C - Q; D - P, S
4) A - P; B - Q; C - R; D - S 4) A - R, S; B - P, R; C - P; D - Q, R

157
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

KEY WITH HINTS

1. 1 Gravitational force 3. 3
Gm1m 2 GxM (1 − x ) M
=
F =
r2 r2

GM 2 (
=
x 1− x)
r2 Centripetal force = Gravitational force

dF mv 2 Gm × m
=0 or =
For maximum value of force R ( 2R )2
dx

d  GM 2 x (  2 Gm 1 Gm
∴ 1 − x ) =
0 =
or v = or v
 2 4R 2 R
dx  r 

d ( 1 1 1
⇒ x − x 2 ) = 0 ⇒ 1 − 2x = 0 ⇒ x = 4. 2 If F ∝ n then
v∝ ;
R R n −1
dx 2
2. 1 here n = 1
1
∴v∝ ∝ R0
1−1
R

dA L mvr 1 2
5. 3 = = = ωr
dt 2m 2m 2
The two points are situated inside the
sphere as r1 < R and r2 < R. Consider a Since L = mvr and
point at distance r. v = rω
G × ( Mass of sphere of radius r ) dA
∴F= ∴ ∝ ωr 2
r2 dt

G × 4 × π× r 3 × ρ
or F = 4
r2 × 3 G × πR 3ρ
GM 3 4
6. 4 g= 2
= 2
= πρGR
R R 3
 4πGρ 
or F =   r = (constant) r
 3  7. 2

F1 r1
∴ =
F2 r2

158
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

Gm1m 2 ω2 R 4g g
F= , where d = 2 r = g; ω= = 2
d2 4 R R

G4πr 3ρ 4πr 3ρ 2
=
or F × =
[g′ 0 and
rad / sec= = λ 60]
2 ; 800
3 3 × ( 2r )

1
G × 4π 2ρ 2 r 4 ω
= = 2.5 ×10−3 rad / sec
=
or F or F ∝ r 4 400
9

8. 3 Acceleration due to gravity on or near g′  R   R 

2
1
2

earth = g. 12.=
1 =    =
g  R + h   R + 2R  9
GM
g=
R2 g
∴ g′ =
where R = radius of earth when g is taken 9
on surface of earth.
GM GM
GM =
13. 2 g′ = ,g ;
g= when the point is near earth and (R + h) 2
R2
r2
r > R.
g1′ R2 g′ 1
Obviously r >> R.; =
= 2
Given 1
g (R + h) g 100
When the earth shrinks, r and M are still
the same.; Hence g remains as such
2
 1  R 
9. 1 T = 2π ∴ = 
g 100  R + h 
or R + h = 10 R or h = 9 R
As we go from equator to poles of the
2
earth, the value of ‘g’ increases.  R 
14. 4 g′ = g   ;
∴ time period of simple pendulum R+h

decreases. 2 2
g  R  1  R 
10. 3 If body falls from height h then time of ⇒ g   ⇒ = 
4 R+h 4 R+h
2h
descent t =
g =
R + h 2R = ∴h R

t g earth GM GM 4GM
=
moon
= 6;=
t moon 6 t 15. =
3 We know g = 2
= 2
t earth g moon R ( D / 2) D2

11. 1 Effective acceleration due to gravity due If mass of the planet = M0 and diameter
to rotation of earth g′= g − ω R cos λ
2 2 4GM 0
of the planet = D0. Then g =
D02
0= g − ω2 R cos 2 60o

159
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

 d g  d GM GM GM
16. 2 g′ =
g 1 − ; =g 1 −  21. 4 Intensity, I = + + + ....
 R n  R (1)2 ( 2 )2 ( 4 )2

d 1  n −1   1 1 
= 1 − ; d= R = GM 1 +
+ + ....
R n  n   4 16 

 2H 
17. g h g 1 −
2 Using =   1 
 R  = GM × 

1
1 − 
 4
 2H   2H 
g1 =
g 1 − 1  and g 2 =
g 1 − 2

 R   R   a 
 Sum of series =
 1 − r 
∴ w 2 − w1 = mg 2 − mg1

4GM 4G × 3
= =
= 4G
 2H 2 2H1   H1 H 2  3 3
= mg 1 −
−1+ =  2mg  − 
 R R  R R 
18. 3 Intensity at P due to upper point = I1 and ∴ Intensity = 4G
intensity at P due to lower point = I2
22. 4 Intensity due to uniform circular ring at a
Net intensity at P due to spherical shell Gmr
will be zero point on its axis I =
  ( a 2 + r 2 )3/2
I1 + I 2 =0; ∴ I1 =− I2 ; | I1 | =| I2 |
∴ Force on sphere
GM
19. 2 We know g = 2
R GMmr GMm 3a
=
F =
2 3/2 3/2
(a + r )
2
a 2 + ( 3 a )2 
 
GM 6.67 ×10−17 × 7.34 ×1022
∴
=R =
g 1.4 GMm 3a 3 GMm 
=
=  As r = 3 a 
( 4a 2 )3/2 8a 2

= 1.87 × 106 m 23. 3 Gravitational intensity at point p,

20. 3 Gravitational intensity due to a mass = E
GM
G × Mass I= and gravitational potential;
∴E = r2
( distance )2
GM
V= −
G ×100 G ×10000 1 10 r
∴ = or
=
2
x (1 − x ) 2
x (1 − x )
∴ V = I × r = 6 N / kg × 8000 km
1 Joule
or 10 x = 1 – x or x = m = 4.8 ×10

7
11 kg

160
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

24. 2 Gravitational intensity, 27. 4 Energy spent = Increase in potential

energy
dV 14
=
I = = 0.7 Nkg −1
dx 20 GMm  GMm  GMm
=− −− =
3R  2R  6R
Acceleration due to gravity,
g = I = 0.7 N kg–1. 28. 2 Work done =U final − U initial =U∝ − U R
Work done under this field in displacing a
 GMm  GMm GM
body on a slope of 60o through a distance s = 0−− = =
 R  R R
= m(g sin 60o)s
[As m = 1 kg]
= = 2 × ( 0.7 × 3 / 2 ) × 8 = 9.6 J
K K
25. 2 Potential 29. 4 V= ∫
− E dx =
− 3 kx =2 ∫x 2x
GM  GM   −GM 
V =− +− +  + ....
1  2   4  30. 2 At the time of rest

Total energy = K E + P E
 1 1   1 
=−GM 1 + + + ..... =−GM  GMm
 2 4  1 = 0+
......... (i)
1 −  d
 2
 a  On reaching the ground
 Sum of series =
 1 − r 

= –2GM = –2G × 1 = – 2G 1 GMm

=
Ef mv 2 − .......... (ii)
2 R
∴ Potential = – 2G
26. 2 At height h = R; Equating (i) and (ii)

gR 2 gR 2 gR 2 g  1 1
=v 2GM  − 
=
g′ = = = R d
( R + h )2 ( R + R )2 4R 2 4

Potential energy at surface of earth 31. 4 Inside the spherical shell, V is constant,
so from energy conservation.
= – mgR
GMm mv 2 GMm
Potential energy at height = –mg’h − = −
3R 2 R
g −mgR
∴ P.E. =−m × × ( R + R ) =
4 2
v2 GM  1  GM 2
∴ Increase potential energy = 1− = ×
2 R  3  R 3

−mgR −mgR mgR
= − ( −mgR
= ) + mgR
=
2 2 2 4GM
or v =
3R

161
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

2GM r3 ( 9R )3
32. 1 Escape velocity v e = 36. 2 T=
2π 2π
=
R gR 2 gR 2

2G  4 3  8πGρ 3/2 R R
=
×  πR =
ρ .R 2π ( 9 ) = 27 × 2π
R 3  3 g g

2 GM
32Gπρ 37. 1  For orbital velocity, v 0 =
Similarly, v p = .R r
3
2 GM GM
∴ v=
0 =
v R 1 R + R 2R
Then, =
c
=
vp 2R 2
1 1 GM
33. 1 Apply Kepler’s third law, ∴ K.E. = mv 02 = m ×
2 2 2R
2 3
 T1  R 
 T = 64
=  1
m × gR 2 mgR
 2  R2  =
or K.E. =
4R 4
3
 R1  ( )3 R1 4
 R  =64 = 4 ∴ R ⇒ 1 , R 1 =4R 2 mgR
 2 2 ∴ Kinetic Energy =
4
34. 2 Conservation of angular momentum 2 3
38. 4  For revolving satellite, T ∝ r
2 2π
L = Iω = MR 2 × = constant. 2
 T   r   2.5R + R 
3 3
5 T ∴ 2  =  2  =  
 T1   r1   6R + R 
2
∴T∝ R [if M remains same]
2 3
T2  R 2   R / n  1
2 2 T   3.5R  1
or
=   =
2

=
=  =  ( 2 )3
 
T1  R1   R  n2  T1   7R 

T1 ×1 24
24 or=
T2 = = 6 2 hour
T2 = 2 hr [As T1 = 24 hr] 2 2 2 2
n
∴ T2 =
6 2 hour
2 3
35. 3 Kepler’s third law T ∝ R 39. 32
TNeptune  R Neptune 
3/2 Weight of the body at height R,
∴ =
  2 2
R Saturn  R Saturn   R   R 
= W′ W
=   W
R+h R
R + 
 2
 1013 
3/2
= =
 10 10 2 4
2
4
 1012  =W   =W × N = × 72 =32N
3 9 9

162
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

47. 2
1 T g1
40. 2 T∝ we get; 2 = 1
g T1 g2 48. 1 ρp = 2ρe and R = Re
2
Here g1 = g; 4
g g g (A) g p = πGρR = g e
=
g2 = 2
= 2
3
 h  R 4
1 +  1 + 
 R  R GM V
(B) Vp =
− −gR =e
=
R 2

T g 3GM 3 Ve
∴ =2
= 2 (C) V =
− − gR =
=
1
T g/4 2R 2 2
GM ∆g ∆R I I=
(D) = 0
41. 3 g =2 ∴ −2
= e
R g R GM
49. 2 A) g = 2 , At a height h = R
(GM is constant) R
GM GM
= | – 2 × 1.5 | = 3%
=g′ =
42. 1 A neutron star is composed of neutrons ( R + R )2 4R 2
which behave as a degenerate Fermi gas.
1
Because of the action of the magnetic ∴ g decreases to a factor
field inside a neutron star the ionized gas 4
radiates light, radio waves and X-rays. R
B) At a depth h =
43. 1 To make out calculations easy, let’s 2
imagine that the semi major axis of the R  g

ellipse be equal to the average distance g1 =g 1 − =
of the sun from the planet .  2R  2
By applying Newton’s law. 1
∴ g decreases by a factor
Gmm 2
2 = m ( ω a )
2

a C) At h = R potential
ω = angular velocity of the planet

= (T = time period of the planet) Since potential is negative, the potential
GM ( 2π ) 2 increases by a factor 2.
m 2 a
∴ 2 = D) Potential at a depth d
a T
GM
− 3 ( 3R 2 − r 2 )
V=
2R
 4π 2  22 2 3
⇒
= T  a ⇒ T ∝ a
 Gm 
GM  2 R 2  GM 11
44. 1 Because of the rotation of the earth, V
1 =
− 3 
3R − =− .
the value of acceleration due to gravity 2R  4  R 8
changes. Due to this rotation, the value of Since the potential is negative, it decreases
‘g’ becomes minimum at the equator and 11
maximum at the poles. by a factor .
8
45. 4
50. 1
46. 1

163
 CHAPTER MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
08 OF SOLIDS

SOLIDS
A solid is that state of matter in which its constituent atoms or molecules are held strongly at the
positions of minimum potential energy and it has a definite shape and volume.
Elasticity : The property of matter by virtue of which a body tends to regain its original shape and size
after the removal of deforming force is called elasticity.
Elastic limit:
The maximum deforming force upto which a body retains its property of elasticity is called elastic
limit of the material of body.
Stress
The internal restoring force acting per unit area of cross section of the deformed body is called
stress.
At equilibrium, restoring force is equal in magnitude to external force, stress can therefore be
defined as external force per unit area on a body that tends to cause it to deform.
If external force F is applied on the area A of a body then,
Force F
Stress
= =
Area A
Strain
The ratio of change in configuration to the original configuration is called strain.
It has no dimensions and units.
a) Linear strain : When the deforming force produces a change in length of the body alone,
the strain produced is called linear strain or tensile strain.
Change in length ( ∆ )
Linear strain =
Original length (  )
Linear strain in the direction of deforming force is called longitudinal strain and in a direction
perpendicular to force is called lateral strain.
b) Volumetric strain : When the deforming force produces a change in volume of the body
alone, the strain produced is called volumetric strain.
Change in volume ( ∆V )
Volumetric strain =
Original volume ( V )
c) Shearing strain : When the deforming force produces a change in the shape of the body
without changing its volume, strain produced is called shearing strain.
It is defined as the angle in radians through which a plane perpendicular to the fixed surface
of the cubical body gets turned under the effect of tangential force.

164
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

x
φ=

L

Note: When a beam is bent both compression strain as well as an extension strain is produced.

Hooke’s law and Modulus of Elasticity

According to this law, within the elastic limit, stress is directly proportional to the strain.
stress
ie, stress ∝ strain or = constant = E, E is modulus of elasticity.
strain

E-depends on nature of the material, temperature of the body and the manner in which body is
deformed and is independent of dimensions.

Stress-strain Curve
a) Stress-strain curve vary from material to material.
b) In region OP stress is proportional to strain, obeying Hookes law. Point P is called limit of
proportionality and slope of line OP gives the Young’s modulus Y of the material of the wire.
Also =Y tan θ .
c) In the region PE, the stress is not proportional to strain. The wire still regains its original
length after the removal of stretching force. E is known as elastic limit or yield-point. The
region OPE represents the elastic behaviour of the material of wire.
d) Beyond the elastic limit E, ie, between EA, the strain increases much more rapidly and if the
stretching force is removed the wire does not come back to its natural length and permanent
increase in length takes place.

165
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

e) Beyond A, for a very small increase in stress a very large increase in strain is produced
(region AB) and after B, the strain increases even if the wire is unloaded and ruptures at C.
In the region BC the wire flows. The maximum stress (corresponding to B) after which the
wire begins to flow and breaks is called breaking or tensile strength. The force applied is
called the breaking force.
Important points.
Breaking force ∝ A
∴ Breaking force = P × A; P is the breaking stress.
breaking stress
The safety factor =
working stress

Breaking of wire under its own weight.

Breaking force = Breaking stress × Area of cross section.
Weight of wire = Mg = ALdg = PA
P
⇒ Ldg= P ∴ L= ; This is the length of wire if it breaks by its own weight.
dg

Brittle material
A brittle material when subtended to stress, it breaks without significant plastic deformation.
e.g., ceramics, glass etc.

The plastic region between E and C is small for brittle material and it will break soon after the
elastic limit is crossed.
Ductile material
Ductility is a measure of materials ability to undergo significant plastic deformation before rupture.
Malleability is materials ability to deform under compressive stress, can be made a sheet by hammering.
Gold has good ductility and malleability while lead has low ductility but high malleability.

The material of the wire have a good plastic range and such materials can be easily changed into
different shapes and can be drawn into thin wires.

166
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Elastomers
They are polymers capable of recovering their original shape after being stretched to great extents
called elastomer.

Stress strain curve is curved within the elastic limit and strain produced is much larger than the
stress applied and have no plastic range. The breaking point lies very close to elastic limit. Example
rubber.
Elastic Moduli
There are three moduli of elasticity namely Young’s modulus (Y), Bulk modulus (K) and modulus
of rigidity ( η ) corresponding to the three types of the strains.

Young’s Modulus (Y)

It is defined as the ratio of normal stress to longitudinal strain within limit of elasticity.
Normal stress F / A FL
=Y = =
Longitudinal strain  / L A
MgL
If force is applied on a wire of radius r by hanging a weight of mass M, then Y=
πr 2 
Important points
 2L − L
(i) If the length of a wire is doubled, longitudinal strain= = = 1
L L

=∴ y stress
= ( strain 1)

FL L
(ii) Increment in the length=
of wire  ∝ when F and Y are constants.
πr 2 Y r2
(iii) When two wires of same length  , same area of cross-section A, Young’s modulii Y1 and
2Y1Y2
Y2 are connected in series. Then the equivalent Young’s modulus is Y =
Y1 + Y2

Y1 + Y2
(iv) When two wires are connected in parallel, then equivalent Young’s modulus is Y =
2
Elongation in a wire by its own weight: The weight of the wire Mg act at the centre of gravity of the
wire so that length of wire which is stretched will be L/2.
FL Mg ( L / 2 ) MgL L2 dg
∴ Elongation  = = = = ( M =
AL × d )
AY AY 2AY 2Y
Force constant of wire: Force required to produce unit elongation in a wire is called force constant
(k) of material of wire.

167
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

F F/A F YA
∴ k = ----------(i) Also young’s modulus Y
= ⇒= --------(ii)
 /A  L

YA
from (i) and (ii) k =
L
Actual length of the wire : If the actual length of the wire is L, then under the tension T1, its length
becomes L1 and under the tension T2, its length becomes L2.
T1 T
L1 = L + 1 ⇒ L1 = L + ----(i) and L 2 =L +  2 ⇒ L 2 =L + 2 ----(ii)
k k

L1T2 − L 2 T1
From (i) and (ii) we get L =
T2 − T1
Work Done in Stretching a Wire
In stretching a wire work is done against internal restoring forces. This work is stored in the wire
as elastic potential energy or strain energy.
FL YA
For a wire of length L stretched by x, by a force F, Y= ⇒ F= .x
Ax L

YA
So the work done for an additional small increase dx in length, dw
= Fdx
= x .dx
L
Hence the total work done in increasing the length by l,
1 1
YA 1 YA 2
W
= ∫=
dW ∫
0 0
L
.x
= dx
2 L
 ; This work done is stored in the wire.

1 YA 2 1
wire U
∴ Energy stored in = = F
2 L 2
Dividing both sides by volume of the wire we get energy stored in per unit volume of wire.
1 F  1 1 2 1
U v = × × = × stress × strain = × Y × ( strain ) = ( stress )2
2 A L 2 2 2Y
[As AL = volume of wire]
Total energy stored in wire (U) Energy stored in per unit volume of wire (Uv)
1 1 F
F
2 2 volume
1 1
× stress × strain × volume × stress × strain
2 2
1 1
× Y × (strain)2 × volume × Y × (strain)2
2 2
1 1
× (stress)2 × volume × (stress)2
2Y 2Y

168
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Bulk Modulus

The ratio of normal stress to the volumetric strain within the elastic limits is called as Bulk
modulus(k).

Normal stress F/A −PV

=K = ;K = (– sign shows as P increases, V decreases)
Volumetric strain −∆V / V ∆V

where P = increase in pressure ; V = original volume; ∆V = change in volume.

1 ∆V
The reciprocal of bulk modulus is called compressibility. C
= =
K PV

Modulus of Rigidity

Within limits of elasticity, the ratio of tangential stress to the shearing strain is called modulus of
Shearing stress
rigidity of the material of the body ( η ) ie, η =
Shearing strain

Consider a cube of material fixed at its lower face and acted upon by a tangential force F at its
F
upper surface having area A. The shearing stress, will be =
A
φ is angle of shear.

QQ′ x
Shearing strain ==φ =
PQ L
shear stress F / A F
So =η = = , shearing is observed only for solids.
shear strain φ Aφ
Practical Applications of Elasticity

a) The metallic parts of machinery are subjected to a stress within elastic limit, to avoid
permanent deformation.

b) The thickness of the metallic rope used in order to lift a load is decided by considering the
elastic limit of the material and the factor of safety.

c) The bridges are declared unsafe after long use since it loses the elastic strength.

169
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

QUESTIONS

1. A bar is subjected to equal and opposite 5. The strain stress curves of three wires of
forces as shown in the figure. PQRS is a different materials are shown in the figure.
plane making angle θ with the cross-section P, Q and R are the elastic limits of the wires.
of the bar. If the area of cross-section be ‘A’, The figure shows that
then what is the tensile stress on PQRS

F Fcos θ 1) Elasticity of wire P is maximum

1) 2) 2) Elasticity of wire Q is maximum
A A
3) Tensile strength of R is maximum
4) Elasticity of wire P is minimum
F cos 2 θ F
3) 4) 6. The diagram shown in figure is a force-
A A cos θ extension graph for a rubber band. Consider
2. A man grows into a giant such that his the following statements.
linear dimensions increase by a factor of 9. I) It will be easier to compress the band than
Assuming that his density remains same, the expand it.
stress in the leg will change by a factor of II) Rubber band does not return to its original
1) 3 2) 6 length after it is stretched.
III) The rubber band gets heated if after
3) 9 4) 1
stretching it is released at once.
3. The slope of the stress verses strain curve is

1) directly proportional to modulus of elasticity Which of the following statements can be

deduced from graph
2) inversely proportional to the modulus of
elasticity 1) I only 2) III only
3) I and III 4) II and III
3) directly proportional to the elastic limit
7. Rigidity modulus of steel is n and its young’s
4) inversely proportional to the elastic limit modulus is q. A piece of steel of cross
4. According to the Hooke’s law the force sectional area a is stretched into a wire of
required to change the length of a wire by  length L and area a/10. Then
is proportional to 1) q increases and n decreases
2 −1 2) q and n remain the same
1)  2) 
2 3) q decreases and n increases
3)  4) 
4) both q and in increase

170
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

8. The diagram shows stress v/s strain curve 12. A steel wire of 1 m long and 1 mm2 cross-
for the materials A and B. From the curves section area is hung from rigid end. When a
we infer that weight of 1 kg is hung from it, then change in
length will be : (Young’s coefficient for wire
Y= 2 ×1011 N / m 2 )

1) 0.5 mm 2) 0.25 mm
3) 0.05 mm 4) 5 mm
13. Young’s modulus of rubber is 104 N/m2 and
area of cross section is 2 cm2. If force of 2×105
dyne is applied along its length, then its new
length becomes
1) A is brittle but B is ductile
1) 3 2) 4
2) A is ductile and B is brittle
3) 2 4) none of these
3) both A and B are ductile
14. A rope 1 cm in diameter breaks if the tension
4) both A and B are brittle in it exceeds 500 N. The maximum tension
that may be given to a similar rope of diameter
9. The Young’s modulus of three materials are in 2 cm is
the ratio 2 : 2 : 1. Three wires made of these 1) 500 N 2) 250 N
materials have their cross-sectional areas in
3) 1000 N 4) 2000 N
the ratio 1 : 2 : 3. For a given stretching force
the elongation’s in the three wires are in the 15. When a certain weight is suspended from a
ratio long uniform wire, its length increases by 1
cm. If the same weight is suspended from
1) 1 : 2 : 3 2) 3 : 2 : 1 another wire of the same material and length
but having a diameter half of the first one, the
3) 5 : 4 : 3 4) 6 : 3 : 4
increase in length will be
10. Two wires are made of the same material 1) 0.5 cm 2) 2 cm
and have the same volume. However wire 3) 4 cm 4) 8 cm
1 has cross-sectional area A and wire 2 has 16. If the ratio of lengths, radii and Young’s
cross-sectional area 3 A. If the length of wire modulus of steel and brass wires in the
1 increases by ∆x on applying force F, how figure are a, b and c respectively, then the
much force is needed to stretch wire 2 by the corresponding ratio of increase in their
same amount is lengths would be:
1) 3 F 2) 9 F
3) 6 F 4) F
11. A steel wire of length 4.5 m and cross-
sectional area 3 × 10–5 m2 stretches by the
same amount as a copper wire of length 3.5m
and cross-sectional area of 4 × 10–5 m2 under
a given load. The ratio of the young’s modulus 2a 2 c 3a
1) 2)
of steel to that of copper is b 2b 2 c
1) 1.3 2) 1.5
2ac 3c
3) 4)
3) 1.7 4) 1.9 b2 2ab 2

171
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

17. When a uniform wire of radius r is stretched 23. Two rods A and B have same material and
by a 2 kg weight, the increase in its length is same cross sectional area. The length of
r rod A is more than rod B. If the tensile force
2.00 mm. If the radius of the wire is and applied on both the rods are the same then.
2
other conditions remain in the same, increase 1) Elongation of both the rods will be equal
in its length is 2) Elongation of rod A will be less than rod B
1) 2.00 mm 2) 4.00 mm 3) Elongation of rod A will be more than rod B
3) 6.00 mm 4) 8.00 mm 4) Can’t say
18. When a weight of 10 kg is suspended from a 24. A cable breaks if stretched by more than
copper wire of length 3 metres and diameter 2mm. It is cut into two equal parts. How much
0.4 mm, its length increases by 2.4 cm. If either part can be stretched without breaking?
the diameter of the wire is doubled, then the
extension in its length will be 1) 0.25 m 2) 0.5 mm
1) 9.6 cm 2) 4.8 cm 3) 1 mm 4) 2 mm
3) 1.2 cm 4) 0.6 cm 25. A wire can sustain the weight of 20 kg before
19. An aluminium wire and steel wire of the same breaking. If the wire is cut into equal parts,
length and cross section are joined end to each part can sustain a weight of
end. The composite wire is hung from a rigid 1) 10 kg 2) 20 kg
support and a load is suspended from the free
3) 40 kg 4) 35 kg
end. The young’s modulus of steel is 20/7
times the aluminium. The ratio of increase 26. A nylon rope 2 cm in diameter has a breaking
of length of steel and aluminium is strength of 1.5 × 105 N. The breaking strength
of a similar rope 1 cm in diameter is
20 400
1) 2) 1) 0.375 × 105 N 2) 2 × 105 N
7 49
3) 6 × 105 N 4) 9 × 104 N
7 49 27. A weight is suspended from a wire fixed
3) 4)
20 400 at a rigid support. The wire stretches and
gravitational energy is lost. What happens
20. To break a wire of 1 m length, minimum to the gravitational energy so lost? It appears
40 kg wt. is required. The wire of the same as
material and twice the radius and 6 m length
will require breaking weight: 1) elastic potential energy and heat
1) 100 kg wt 2) 140 kg wt 2) elastic potential energy alone
3) 160 kg wt 4) 200 kg wt 3) heat alone
21. The breaking stress for steel is 8.0 × 105 4) None of the above
Nm–2 and its density is 8 × 102 kg m–3. The
28. A wire elongates by 1.0 mm when a load W is
maximum length of a steel wire which can
hanged from it. If this wire goes over a pulley
remain suspended without breaking is
and two weights W each are hung at the two
1) 1000 cm 2) 100 cm ends, the elongation of the wire will be
3) 100 m 4) none
22. A polyester fibre rope of diameter 3 cm has a
breaking strength of 15 kN. If it is required to
have 600 kN breaking strength, what should
be the diameter of similar rope.
1) 12 cm 2) 6 cm
3) 3 cm 4) 1.5 cm

172
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

1) 0.5 m 2) 1.0 mm 1) 0.2 mm 2) 0.4 mm

3) 2.0 mm 4) 4.0 mm 3) 0.6 mm 4) 0.8 mm
29. A wire of length L, modulus Y and cross-section 35. The fractional change in volume per unit
a is stretched through  ( when  << L ) . If increase in pressure is called
the elastic limit is not exceeded, the potential 1) Bulk modulus 2) Compressibility
energy of the wire increases by
3) Pressure coefficient 4) Volume coefficient
Ya 2 Ya 2
1) 2) 36. A solid sphere of radius 20 cm is subjected
2L 4L to a uniform pressure of 106 N m–2. If the
bulk modulus of the solid is 1.7 × 1011 Nm–2,
YaL2 YaL2 the decrease in the volume of the solid is
3) 4)
2  approximately equal to
1) 0.2 cm3 2) 0.3 cm3
30. A wire fixed at the upper end stretches by
length  by applying a force F. The work 3) 0.4 cm3 4) 0.5 cm3
done in stretching is 37. Bulk modulus of water is 2 × 109 N/m2. The
F change in pressure required to increase the
1) 2) F density of water by 0.1% is
2
1) 2 × 109 N/m2 2) 2 × 108 N/m2
F 3) 2 × 106 N/m2 4) 2 × 104 N/m2
3) 2F 4)
2 38. A uniform cube is subjected to volume
compression. If each side is decreased by
31. When the load on a wire is slowly increased
1%, then bulk strain is
from 3 kg to 5 kg wt, the elongation increases
from 0.61 mm to 1.02 mm. The work done 1) 0.01 2) 0.06
during the extension of wire is (g = 10 m/s) 3) 0.02 4) 0.03
1) 0.16 J 2) 0.016 J 39. The compressibility of water is 4 × 10–5 per
3) 1.6 J 4) 16 J unit atmospheric pressure. The decrease
32. A wire suspended vertically from one of its in volume of 100 cubic centimeter of water
ends is stretched by attaching a weight of 200 under a pressure of 100 atmosphere will be
N to the lower end. The weight stretches the 1) 0.4 cc 2) 4 × 10–5 cc
wire by 1 mm. Then the elastic energy stored
3) 0.025 cc 4) 0.004 cc
in the wire is
1) 0.2 J 2) 10 J 40. A copper bar of length L and area of
cross section A is placed in a chamber of
3) 20 J 4) 0.1 J
atmospheric pressure. If the chamber is
33. When a force is applied on a wire of uniform evacuated, the percentage change in its
cross-sectional area 3 × 106 m2 and length volume will be (compressibility of copper is
4 m, the increase in length is 1 mm. Energy 8 × 10–12 m2/N and 1 atm = 105 N/m2)
stored in it will be : (Y = 2 × 1011 N/m2)
1) 8 × 10–7 % 2) 8 × 10–5 %
1) 6250 J 2) 0.177 J
3) 1.25 × 10–4 % 4) 1.25 × 10–5 %
3) 0.075 J 4) 0.150 J
34. The base of a rubber cube of side 3.0 cm Numerical Type
is clamped. A horizontal force F of 2.7 N 41. Work done in stretching a wire by 2 mm is 4J.
is applied on the top face. Calculate the The work necessary for stretching another
horizontal displacement of the top face of the wire of similar material but with double radius
eraser. Shear modulus of rubber = 1.5 × 105 of cross-section and half the length by 2mm
N/m2. is .......... J.

173
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

42. When a 4 kg mass is hung vertically on a Statement Type

light spring that obeys Hooke’s law, the spring
stretches by 2 cm. The work required to be 1) If both Statement I and Statement II are
done by an external agent in the stretching true
this spring by 5 cm will be (g= 10 m/s2) N/10J.
2) If both Statement I and Statement II are
The value N is
false
43. A metal rod of Young’s modulus 2 × 1010 Nm–2
undergoes an elastic strain of 0.06%. The 3) If Statement I is true but Statement II is
energy per unit volume stored in Jm–3 is false
44. When a pressure of 100 atmosphere is
4) If Statement I is false but Statement II is
applied on a spherical ball of rubber, then its
true
volume reduces to 0.01 %. The bulk modulus
of the material of the rubber is ...× 10+11 N/m2 48. Statement I : Rubber is an elastomer.
Assertion - Reason Type Statement II : Rubber has large elastic limit
1) If both the Assertion and Reason are true but it does not obey Hooke’s
and the Reason is true explanation of the law.
Assertion
49. Statement I : If length of a rod is doubled
2) If both the Assertion and Reason are true the breaking load remains
but the Reason is not the true explanation unchanged.
of the Assertion
Statement II : Breaking load is equal to the
3) If Assertion is true but Reason is false elastic limit.
4) If Assertion is false but Reason is true
Match the following
45. Assertion : Strain has units of length in
S.I. system 50.

Reason : Strain is ratio of change in Column I Column II

dimension to the original
dimensions of the body. A) Stress × Strain p) N-m

46. Assertion : In stretching a wire, work has

to be performed. B) YA q) m

Reason : The work done in stretching
the wire is stored in it in C) Y3 r) N/m2
the form of elastic potential
energy. F
D) s) N/m
47. Assertion : The restoring force F on a AY
stretched string at extension
x is related to the potential 1) A - r, B - s, C - p, D - q
dU
energy U as : F = − 2) A - p, B - q, C - s, D - r
dx
1 2
Reason : F = – kx and U = kx , 3) A - r, B - q, C - p, D - s
2
where k is the spring 4) A - q, B - q, C - s, D - r
constant.

174
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

KEY WITH HINTS

[where θ is the angle from stress axis.]

1. 3 ∴ YP < YQ < YR  As θP > θQ > θR  .
Then elasticity of wire P is minimum.
Normal force FN 6. 2 We know that area of hysteresis loop tells
=
As tensile stress = the energy loss in the process of stretching
Area AN
and unstretching of rubber band and this
loss of energy will appear in the form of
 A  heating.
and here A N =  ,
 cos θ  7. 2 Young’s modulus and rigidity modulus
are independent of the dimension of the
= Fcos θ
FN = Normal force material.
Fcos θ Fcos 2 θ 8. 2 In ductile materials yield point exist
So, Tensile=
stress = whereas in brittle materials, failure would
A / cos θ A
occur without yielding.
2. 3 We know stress is given by FL
9. 4 = and for a given stretching force
Force mg ρVg AY
=
Stress = =
Area A A
1
∝
 m AY
Let three wires have young’s modulus 2Y,
 ρ = 
 V 2Y and Y and their cross sectional areas
are A, 2A and 3A respectively.

L3 1 1 1
i.e., stress ∝ (L is the linear dimension) 1 :  2 :  3 = : :
L2 A1Y1 A 2 Y2 A 3 Y3

⇒ Stress ∝ L 1 1 1
: :
Since linear dimension increases by a A × 2Y 2A × 2Y 3A × Y
factor of 9, stress also increases by a
factor of 9. 1 1 1
Stress = =
: : 6:3: 4
3. 1 E
= = slope 2 4 3
Strain 10. 2 For the same material, Young’s modulus
is the same and it is given that the volume
4. 3 According to Hooke’s law stress ∝ strain is the same and the area of cross-section
F  for the wire 1 is A and that of  2 is 3A.
That is ∝ ; Since A and L are fixed, V = V1 = V2;
A L
1
therefore F ∝  V = A × 1 = 3A ×  2 ⇒  2 =
3
5. 4 On the graph stress is represented on
x-axis and strain y-axis.
F/A ∆
1 1 Y
= F1 YA 1
⇒=
Y
= cot =
θ ∝ ∆ /  1
tan θ θ

175
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Given ∆1 =∆ 2 =∆x (for the same ∆ S FS  S rB2 YB

∴ = × × ×
∆ B FB  B rS2 YS
extension)
∆x 3Mg 1 1 3a
∴ F2 =
Y.3A. =
× a × 2 ×=
1 / 3 2Mg b c 2b 2 c

 YA∆x  FL 1
9  = 9F1 or 9F 17.=
4  ∴∝
 1  πr 2 Y r2
(F, L and Y are constant)
Ysteel  A
11. 3 = s × c (F , e are constant) 2
Ycopper  c A s   r 2
2 =  1  = ( 2 ) ⇒  2 = 41
1  r2 
Ys 4.5 4 ×10−5 = 4 × 2 = 8 mm
=× 1.7
=
Yc 3.5 3 ×10−5
1
18. 4 ∝
(F, L and Y are constant)
r2
mgL 1× 10 × 1 2
 2  r1   1 
2
12. 3=e = = =
YA 2 ×1011 ×10−6  
1  r2   2 
5 ×10−5 m =
= 0.05 mm
1 2.4
F 2 ×105 ×10−5 ×  ⇒ 2 = = ⇒  2 = 0.6 cm
13. 3 ∆=
 ; ∆=
 4 4
aY 2 ×10−4 ×104
or ∆ = ; So, new length is  +  =2 1 e YAL 7
19. 3 elongation α ⇒ S = =
Y e AL YS 20
2
14. 4 Max. Tension αr ; 20. 3 Breaking force = Breaking stress × Area
of cross section of wire.
T2 r22 ( 2 )2
= 2 ⇒ T2 = T1 2 ∴ Breaking force αr 2
T1 r1 1
(Breaking stress is constant)
= 500 × 4 = 2000 N
If radius becomes doubled then breaking
F 1 1 force will become 4 times
15. 3=Y or ∆ ∝ ; ∆ ∝ 2
a∆ a D i.e., 40 × 4 = 160 kg wt.
21. 3 Breaking stress
2
∆ 2 D mg ρ (  max ) Ag
= =4 or ∆ 2 =4∆1 =4 cm
1
∆1 D 2 = =
= (  max ) ( ρ ) ( g )
2 A A

 r Y 8 ×105=  max .8 ×102 ×10

16. 2 Here,=S
a;=S
b;=S
c;
B rB YB

F  F F 8 ×105
=
Y =or ∆ ; or ∆ ∝ 2 =
∴  max ∴  max 100 m
=
2
πr ∆ 2
πr Y r Y 8 ×103

176
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

FL T1 
22. 2 Y= i.e., Breaking force F ∝ A As = 1; ∴ 1 =1 ⇒  2 =1 =1.0 mm
A∆L T2 2

F A 2 πD 22

  FL
=
2
F1
=
A1 πD12
; 29. =
1 Work done, ∫0 d; but A  Y
F.
=

1/2 Ya
D2 F2  600  or F =
= =  = 4 2
= L
D1 F1  150 

∴ D 2 = 2D1 = 2 × 3 = 6 cm Ya Ya

Ya 2

W ∫ =
L ∫0
∴= d =
 d
23. 3 0
L 2L
24. 3 The breaking load remains unchanged,
therefore breaking strain should be same
Ya 2
as before. Since length of the cable is P.E. increases by
reduced to half, hence change in length 2L
should also be halved.
25. 2 The breaking force is independent of FL
30. 4 Young’s modulus Y = ........ (i)
length of wire. A
26. 1 Breaking strength = Breaking stress
πD 2 YA YA ( d )
× ∴ F= ; dW= Fd=
4 L L
Breaking stress is unchanged.

YA YA 2
D is halved. So, breaking strength
=
or dW ∫ =
L ∫0
 d 
2L
becomes one-fourth
1 YA 2
i.e., ×1.5 ×105 N or 0.375 ×105 N or work done = ........ (ii)
4 2L
27. 1 Stretched wire possesses elastic potential From (i) and (ii);
energy. Also stretching causes heating.
F
28. 2 Elongation in the wire ∝ Tension in the Work done =
wire. 2
31. 2 Workdone W = W2 – W1
1 1
= F2 ×  2 − F1 × 1
2 2

1(
=
5 ×10 ×1.02 ×10−3 − 3 ×10 × 0.61× 10−3 )
2
In first case T1 = W and in second case
2W × W 1 1
=T2 = W = ( 0.051 − 0.0183) = ( 0.327 ) = 0.016 J
W+W 2 2

177
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

32. 4 Elastic energy per unit volume

∆x = L tan θ = Lθ ( θ is small )
1
= × stress × strain
2 = 3cm × 2.0 × 10–2 = 6 × 10–2 cm = 0.6 mm
∴ Elastic energy 35. 2 Compressibility
1 1 strain
= × stress × strain × volume = =

2 B stress

1 F ∆L ( ) Fractional change in volume

= × × × AL =
2 A L Pressure

1 1
= F∆L = × 200 × 10−3 = 0.1J ∆p
2 2 36. 1 The bulk modulus is given by B =
( ∆V / V )

1 YA 2 V∆p
33. 3 U= × ∴ Decrease in volume ∆V = where
2 L B

1 2 ×1011 × 3 ×10−6 × (1× 10−3 )

2 4
= × 0.075 J
= V= πr 3
2 4 3
3
4π ( 0.2 ) ×106
34. 3 ∴ ∆V= ×
3 1.7 ×1011

0.2 10−6 m3 =
=× 0.2 cm3
37. 3 The density would increase by 0.1% if the
volume decreases by 0.1%.
∆P
K=
∆V / V

Area of top face (A) = 3 cm × 3 cm = 9 cm2 ∆V 0.1

∆P = K = 2 ×109 × = 2 ×106 N / m 2
= 9 ×10 m–4 2
V 100
Shearing stress
38. 4 If side of the cube is L then
F 2.7
= = −4
= 3 × 103 N / m 2 dV dL
A 9 ×10 V =L3 ⇒ =3
V L
Angle of shear
shearing stress ∴ % change in volume
θ=
shear modulus = 3 × (% change in length)
= 3 × 1% = 3%
3 ×103 ∆x ∆V
=
= 5
2.0 ×10−2 rad ; tan θ = ∴ Bulk strain = 0.03
1.5 ×10 L V

178
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

1 ∆V / V 1 1 2
39. 1 K= = U=kx 2 =× 2000 ( 5 ×10−2 )
B ∆P 2 2

⇒ ∆V= K × ∆P × V = 25 × 10–1 J

= 4 × 10–5 × 100 × 100 = 0.4 cc

43. 3600
1 ∆V / V ∆V 1
40. 2 = or = ∆P   Energy 1
K ∆P V K =× stress × strain
Volume 2

∆V
or ×100= 105 × 8 ×10−12 ×100 1 1
V Y × strain × strain =Ystrain 2

2 2
= 8 × 10–5 %

41. 32 101 −2 −2
× 2 × 10 × 0.06 × 10 × 0.06 × 10
2
F L Yπr 2 ∆L
As Y =× or F = ;
πr 2 ∆L L = 3600 Jm–3

44. 1 1 atm = 105 N/m2

r2
so F ∝ ( Y and ∆L are constant) 107 N / m 2
∴ 100 atm =
L
∆V
=
and ∆V 0.01% V =
∴ 0.0001
V
2
F′ ( 2r ) L
∴ = × = 8 or F=′ 8F
F r 2
( L / 2)
P 107
K= = = 1× 1011 N / m 2
Workdone in stretching a wire ∆V / V 0.0001
1 45. 4 Strain is a unitless and dimensionless
W =F∆ or W ∝ F
2 quantity.

46. 2 Both reason and assertion are true but

W′ F′ reason is not the correct explanation.
∴ = = 8 or W′ = 8W = 8 × 4 = 32 J
W F 47. 1

42. 25 48. 1

When a 4 kg mass is hung vertically on a 49. 3 Breaking load depends on the area of
spring, it stretches by 2 cm. cross-section and is independent of
length of the rod. That is breaking load =
F 4 ×10 breaking, stress × cross-section area.
∴ k= = = 2000 N / m
x 2 ×10−2
50. 1
Now work done in stretching this spring
by 5 cm

179
 CHAPTER MECHANICAL PROPERTIES
09 OF FLUIDS

HYDROSTATICS AND HYDRODYNAMICS

Any state of matter that can flow is a fluid. Study of fluids at rest is fluid statics and fluids in motion
is called fluid dynamics or hydrodynamics.
Pressure
∆F
It is defined as the magnitude of the normal force ( ∆F ) acting on unit surface area ( ∆A ) , P =
∆A

The pressure is a scalar. Unit of pressure N/m2, or Pascal ; 1 Pascal = 1 N/m2

Atmospheric pressure
The pressure exerted by the atmosphere is called atmospheric pressure.
At sea level 1 atm. = 1.013 × 105 Pa.
Gauge Pressure
The excess of pressure of a system above Atmospheric pressure is called Gauge pressure. e.g.,
Tyre Pressure.
Absolute pressure
Absolute pressure = Atmospheric pressure + Gauge Pressure
Variation of pressure with depth
Consider a column of a liquid of height h, Let P1 is the pressure on the top of the column and P2
is the pressure on the bottom of the column of area A. P2 > P1.

Force exerted by the liquid column at the bottom

= Force due to atmosphere + Force due to liquid at the bottom.
P2=
A P1A + ρhAg ; where ρ is the density of the liquid. ∴ P2 = P1 + hρg

dP
So along the liquid column the pressure gradient is = ρg .
dh

180
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Pascals law: The pressure applied to an enclosed fluid is transmitted equally to every part of the fluid
and to the walls of the container.
At the same level in a liquid the pressure is the same.
Hydraulic lift

It is used to lift heavy objects. A liquid is enclosed in a vessel, by two pistons of area A1 and A2,
where A2 > A1.
F1
When a force F1 is applied on the liquid at the piston of smaller area, then P = .
A1
The pressure is transmitted equally to the other part of the liquid having larger area. The force
F1
applied at the other end F2 = P × A2= F=
2 × A 2 then F2 > F1.
A1
So that a large force is applied on the second piston.
Note: Hydraulic brakes in automobiles work on this principle.
Floatation
When a body of density ρB and volume V is immersed in a liquid of density σ , the forces acting
are
1) The weight of the body W= mg= VρB g acting vertically downwards through the centre of
gravity of the body.
2) The upthrust (Th) = Vσg acting vertically upwards through the centre of gravity of the
displaced liquid (centre of buoyancy)
Then according to the following situations the body will sink or float.
a) If ρB > σ , then weight of the body is greater then the upthrust, the body will sink.
b) If ρB =σ , then W = Th, so the body will be completely submerged, and there will be neutral
equilibrium any where in the liquid.
c) If ρB < σ , then W < Th, the body moves up and will be in equilibrium and will float in the
liquid such that
W
= VA σg (where VA is the volume of the body inside the liquid.)
∴ VρB g = VA σg; VρB = VA σ

∴ The law of floatation states that, a body will float in a liquid if weight of the liquid displaced by
the immersed part of the body is equal to the weight of the body.

181
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Hydrodynamics
Steady flow
It is defined as the type of flow of a fluid in which the fluid characteristics does not change with
time. In unsteady flow, velocity, pressure and density at a point in the liquid flow varies with time.
Stream line flow
In a steady flow, all the particles passing through a given point follow the same path and hence a
unique line of flow, then the flow is called streamline. The velocity of the particles in stream line remain
constant or vary in a regular manner.
Laminar and Turbulent flow
The flow of a viscous fluid in which particles of the fluid move in parallel layers, each of which has
a constant velocity but is in motion relative to its neighbouring layers. Laminar flow over a horizontal
surface may be thought of as consisting of thin layers or laminae, all parallel to each other. The layer
near the surface is stationary and all the other layers slide over each other.
Turbulant flow of a liquid in which the fluid undergoes irregular fluctuations or mixing takes place.
The speed of the fluid at a point is continuously undergoing changes in magnitude and direction.
Critical velocity
During the steady flow of a liquid, if the velocity of the liquid is below a particular value, the motion
of the liquid is streamline. If it crosses this velocity the flow of the liquid becomes Turbulent. Then the
fluid particles don’t follow the path of their preceeding particles. The maximum velocity upto which fluid
motion is streamline is called critical velocity (vc).
Equation of continuity
For a steady flow of an incompressible and non viscous fluid through a tube of non-uniform cross
section, the product of the area of cross section and the velocity of flow is same at every point in the
tube.
ie, A × v = a constant.

A1 and A2 are the area of cross section of a tube of non uniform cross section (A2 > A1) at B and C
respectively. Let v1 is the velocity of liquid at B, and v2 is the velocity of liquid flowing at C. The volume
of liquid flowing through the tube at B, per sec = A1v1,
Since the liquid is in compressible, and the liquid cannot accumulate in the tube, mass of the
liquid entering the tube must be equal to mass of the liquid coming out per sec.
∴ ρA1v1 =ρA 2 v 2 ∴ Av = a constant

This is the equation of continuity and represents the conservation of mass in case of moving
fluids.
Energy of a flowing fluid
Pressure energy
If P is the pressure on the area A of a fluid and the liquid moves through a distance due to this pressure,
then the pressure energy of liquid = work done = force × displacement = P × A × L
PAL
∴ pressure energy per unit volume
= = P
AL

182
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Kinetic energy
1m 2 1 2
For a volume V of liquid of mass m and velocity v, then KE per unit volume=  v = ρv
2 V  2
Potential energy
m
For a liquid of volume V and mass m at a height, PE per unit volume =   gh = ρgh
V
Bernoullis Theorem
According to Bernoullis theorem for the steady flow of an incompressible and non-viscous fluid
through a tube of non-uniform cross section, the sum of pressure energy per unit volume, the potential
energy per unit volume and kinetic energy per unit volume is same at every point in the tube.
2
i.e., P + ρgh + ½ρv = a constant.

• Lifting force on an aeroplane wings works on this principle.

Application of Bernoullis theorem
1) Venturimeter
It is used to measure the flow speed of a liquid through a pipe of non-uniform cross section.

At the points A and B, applying Bernoulis equation

P1 + ½ρv12 = P2 + ½ρv 22 since h1 = h2

A1v1
from equation of continuity A1v1 = A 2 v 2 ; v 2 =
A2
 A12 
2
∴ P1 − P2 =ρ
½ v  2 − 1 =
1 ρgh is the pressure difference.
 A2 

2gh dV 2gh
then v1 = 2 ; The volume flow rate = A=
1 v1 A1 2
 A1  dt  A1 
 A  −1  A  −1
 2  2

183
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

2) Toricellis’ Theorem (speed of efflux)

Liquid is flowing out through the orifice B. The pressure at A & B are the same, P0, atmospheric
pressure. The speed at A is very small (vA = 0) compared to speed at B. By Bernoullis’ theorem.
P0 + ρgH + ½ρv 2A= P0 + ρg ( H − h ) + ½v 2Bρ

½ρv 2B =
ρgh, v B =2gh

It is the velocity acquired by a liquid when it is freely falling through (h) from the surface to the
orifice and is called velocity of efflux.
Note:
• For a uniformly accelerated motion in the y-direction,
2(H − h)
H − h = 0 + ½gt 2 ∴ t =
g

2(H − h)
• ∴ Horizontal Range R = v × t = 2gh × = 2 h (H − h)
g

d ( 2)
• Range is maximum when R2 is maximum. i.e., R =0
dh

d ( H
ie, 4 hH − h 2 ) =
0 ; i.e., H – 2 h = 0, ∴h =
dh 2

H H
• R max 2
=  H −  So the maximum range a liquid can have is the height of the liquid
2 2
A 2H
• If the hole is at the bottom of the tank, time ‘t’ to make the tank empty t = , where
A is the area of orifice and A is the area of the container. A0 g
0

VISCOSITY
Viscosity is the property of the fluid by virtue of which an internal frictional force comes into play
when the liquid is in motion and opposes the relative motion between adjacent layers. Force between
the layers opposing the relative motion is called viscous force.
According to Newton the tangential viscous force F acting on any layer of a fluid is directly
dv dv dv
proportonal to its area A and to the velocity gradient at the layer. F ∝ A or F = −ηA
dx dx dx

184
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Velocity gradient at a layer of a fluid is the rate of change of speed with distance in a direction
dv
perpendicular to the flow given by ; dv - change in velocity for a distance dx between two layers.
dx
η is the coefficient of viscosity.
dv
When = 1 ,and A = 1, F = −η ,
dx

∴ coefficient of viscosity is the viscous force acting between two layers of a liquid having unit
area and unit velocity gradient.
Dimension is ML–1T–1, and unit is poise (cgs) dyne sec-cm–2 and in SI units Poisenille (Nsm–2).
1 pl = 10 Poise
Note: (1) Viscosity of liquids is much greater than that of gases, ηL > ηG (about 100 times or more).
(2) When temperature increases viscosity of liquids decreases, and viscosity of gases increases.
(3) When density increases, viscosity of liquids increases while in gases viscosity decreases.
(4) With increase in pressure, the viscosity of liquids except water increases. While in gases
viscosity has no variation. For water viscosity decrease with pressure.
Reynold’s number
Reynold’s showed that when fluids flow through the tubes, the critical velocity depends on density
( ρ ) Viscosity ( η) of the fluid and on the diameter (D) of the tube.
 η   η  v cρD
vc ∝   or v c =
NR   ∴ NR =
 Dρ   Dρ  η

NR is the Reynolds number, if the value of NR is less than 2000, the flow is streamline.
If NR > 3000 the flow is turbulent.
If the value of NR is between 2000 to 3000, the flow can be streamline or turbulent.
Poiseuille’s Formula
For the steady flow of a liquid through a capillary tube of length L and radius r, under a pressure
π Pr 4
difference of P across it, the volume of the liquid flowing per second is given by Q =
8Lη

This is Poiseuille’s Formula.

Stokes Law
When a body moves through a fluid, the fluid opposes the motion of the body due to viscosity.
The magnitude of the viscous force depends on shape and size of the body and also on the velocity of
the body and viscosity of the liquid.
Stokes stated that if a sphere of radius r moving with a velocity v, through a liquid of viscosity η ,
then the viscous force opposing the motion of the sphere is F= 6πηrv

185
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

4 2
When the liquid is moving down the weight of the body acts downwards W = mg = πr ρg and
3

4 3
the upthrust of the liquid U = πr σg acting upwards, where ρ and σ are the densities of sphere and
3
liquid respectively.
4 3 4 4 3
Net force acting downwards = πr ρg − πr 3σg= πr g ( ρ − σ )
3 3 3
At a certain state the viscous force balances the net downward force and after that the body falls
4 3
with constant velocity called Terminal velocity (vT), then 6πηrv T = πr ( ρ − σ ) g
3

2 r2
vT
= ( ρ − σ ) g; ∴ vT ∝ r 2
9η
ie, when radius increases the terminal velocity increases.
SURFACE TENSION
Intermolecular Force
The force of attraction or repulsion acting between the molecules are known as intermolecular
force. The nature of intermolecular force is electromagnetic.
The intermolecular forces of attraction may be classified into two types.

Cohesive force Adhesive force

The force of attraction between molecules of The force of attraction between the molecules
same substance is called the force of coehsion. of the different substances is called the force of
This force is lesser in liquids and least in gases. adhesion.
Surface Tension
The property of a liquid by which its free surface tends to have minimum surface area and behaves
as if it were under tension acting like a stretched membrane is called surface tension. Due to this liquid
drops takes spherical shape to reduce surface area.
Surface tension of a liquid is the force acting per unit length on an imaginary line, drawn on the
free surface of the liquid. The direction of the force is perpendicular to the line and tangential to the
surface of the liquid.

F
Let F is the force acting on a line of length L, then T = . Unit: N/m
L

186
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Factors Affecting Surface Tension

(1) Temperature: The surface tension of liquid decreases with rise of temperature. The surface
tension of liquid is zero at its boiling point and it vanishes at critical temperature.
(2) Impurities: The presence of impurities, considerably affect the force of surface tension,
depending upon the degree of contamination.
Applications of Surface Tension
(1) The oil and grease spots on clothes cannot be removed by pure water because pure water-
does not wet oily clothes. On the other hand, when detergents (like soap) are added in water,
the surface tension of water decreases. As a result of this, wetting power of water increases.
Thus, oil, grease and dirt particles get mixed with water easily. Hence clothes are washed
easily.
(2) The antiseptics have very low value of surface tension. Due to low surface tension, the
antiseptics spreads properly over wound.
Surface Energy
The molecules on the liquid surface experience net downward force. So to bring a molecule from
the interior of the liquid to the free surface, some work is required to be done against the intermolecular
force of attraction, which will be stored as potential energy of the molecule on the surface. The potential
energy of surface molecules per unit area of the surface is called surface energy.
Unit : Joule / m2 (S.I.) erg / cm2 (C.G.S.); Dimension : [MT–2]
If a rectangular wire frame ABCD, equipped with a sliding wire LM dipped in soap solution, a film
is formed in the frame. Due to the surface tension, the film will have a tendency to shrink and thereby,
the sliding wire LM will be pulled in the inward direction. However, the sliding wire can be held in this
position under a force F, which is equal and opposite to the force acting on the sliding wire LM all along
its length due to surface tension in the soap film.

If T is the force due to surface tension per unit length, then F = T × 2l.
Here, l is length of the sliding wire LM. The length of the sliding wire has been taken as 2l for the
reason that the film has got two free surfaces.
Suppose that the sliding wire LM is moved through a small distance x, so as to take the position
L’M’. In this process, area of the film increases by 2l × x (on the two sides) and to do so, the work done
is given by
W = F × x = ( T × 2 ) × x = T × ( 2x ) = T × ∆A
∴ W= T × ∆A [ ∆A = Total increase in area of the film from both the sides.’
If temperature of the film remains constant in this process, this work done is stored in the film as
its surface energy.
W
=
From the above expression T =or T W [ If=
∆A 1]
∆A

187
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

ie, surface tension may be defined as the amount of work done in increasing the area of the liquid
surface by unity against the force of surface tension at constant temperature.

Work done in Blowing a Liquid Drop or Soap Bubble

If the initial radius of liquid drop is r1 and final radius of liquid drop is r2 then

W = T × Increment in surface area = T × 4π  r2 − r1  [drop has only one free surface]

2 2

W = T × 8π  r22 − r12  [Bubble has two free surface]

Splitting of Bigger Drop

When a drop of radius R splits into n smaller drop, (each of radius r) then surface area of liquid
increases. Hence the work is to be done against surface tension.

4 3 4
Since the volume of liquid remains constant therefore πR = n πr 3
3 3

∴ R3 =
nr 3 or R = n1/3 r

Work done = T × ∆A = T = T [ n4πr − 4πR ] = 4πT [ nr − R ]

2 2 2 2

Excess Pressure
Due to the property of surface tension a drop or bubble tries to contract and so compresses the
matter enclosed. This in turn increases the internal pressure which prevents further contraction and
equilibrium is achieved. So in equilibrium the pressure inside a bubble or drop is greater than outside
and the difference of pressure between two sides of the liquid surface is called excess pressure.

Note:

2T
• Excess of pressure inside a liquid drop ∆P =
R

4T
• Excess of pressure inside a soap bubble ∆P =
R

• Radius of the new bubble formed when two bubbles coalesce,=r r12 + r22
r1r2
• Radius of interface when two soap bubbles of different radii are in contact, r =
r2 − r1

Angle of Contact

Angle of contact between a liquid and a solid surface is defined as the angle enclosed between
the tangents to the liquid surface and the solid surface inside the liquid, both the tangents being drawn
at the point of contact of the liquid with the solid.

188
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

On increasing the temperature, angle of contact decreases.

Capillarity
If a tube of very narrow bore (called capillary) is dipped in a liquid, it is found that the liquid in
the capillary either ascends or descends relative to the surrounding liquid. This phenomenon is called
capillarity.
Examples of capillarity :
(i) Ink rises in the fine pores of blotting paper leaving the paper dry.
(ii) A towel soaks water.
(iii) Oil rises in the long narrow spaces between the threads of a wick.
Ascent Formula
When one end of a capillary tube of radius r is immersed into a liquid of density d which wets the
sides of the capillary tube (water and capillary tube of glass), the shape of the liquid meniscus in the
tube becomes concave upwards.
R = radius of curvature of liquid meniscus; T = surface tension of liquid; P = atmospheric pressure
2T
Pressure at point A = P, Pressure at point B= P − .
R

Pressure at points C and D just above and below the plane surface of liquid in the vessel is also
P (atmospheric pressure). The points B and D are in the same horizontal plane in the liquid but the
pressures at these points are different.
In order to maintain the equilibrium the liquid level rises in the capillary tube into height h (Tube 2).
Pressure due to liquid column = pressure difference due to surface tension.
2T 2T 2T cos θ  r 
⇒ hρ=
g ; ∴=
h =  As R
=
R Rρg rρg cos θ 
o
• If θ < 90 , h is positive i.e., liquid rises in capillary tube.
o
• If θ > 90 , h is negative i.e, liquid falls in a capillary tube.
Note: When a capillary tube dipped vertically in a liquid is tilted, length of liquid (  ) in capillary tube
increases but vertical height of liquid (h) in the tube above the surface of liquid in trough remains the
h
=
same. Then,  or
= h  cos θ
cos θ

189
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

QUESTIONS

1. Water is filled in two vessels A and B to the 5. From the adjacent figure, the correct
same height as shown in figure. The base observation is:
area of the two vessels are same. If FA and
FB are the forces exerted by the water on the
base of A and B respectively and WA, WB are
the weights of the vessels, then

1) The pressure on the bottom of tank (a) is

greater than at the bottom of (b)
1) FA > FB : WA > WB 2) The pressure on the bottom of tank (a) is
smaller than at the bottom of (b)
2) FA < FB : WA < WB 3) The pressure depends on the shape of the
3) FA = FB : WA > WB container
4) The pressure on the bottom of (a) and (b)
4) FA = FB : WB > WA is the same
2. The density of the atmosphere at sea level is A height H of water ( ρ =1000 kg m ) column
−3
6.
1.29 kg/m2. Assume that it does not change which can produce the same pressure as that
of a mercury column ( ρ =13600 kg m )
with altitude. How high would the atmosphere −3
of
extend?
height 1 m at the bottom of a vessel is
1) 3 km 2) 7 km 1) 0.136 m 2) 1.36 m
3) 8 km 4) 9 km 3) 13.6 m 4) 136 m
7. Air is streaming past the wings of an
3. An inverted (bell) lying at the bottom of a aeroplane with a speed of 90 ms–1 below
lake 47.6 m deep has 50 cm3 of air trapped and 120 ms–1 above the surface. If the wing
in it. The bell is brought to the surface of the is 15 m long and has an average width of 2
lake. The volume of the trapped air will be m, then :[Density of air = 1.2 kgm–3]
(atmospheric pressure = 70 cm of Hg and
density of Hg = 13.6 g/cm3): 1) pressure difference between the surface
of the wing is 4090 Pa
1) 350 cm3 2) 300 cm3 2) up-lift on the wing is 81900 N
3) 250 cm3 4) 22 cm3 3) up-lift on the wing is 113.4 kN
4) pressure difference between the surface
4. The volume of an air bubble becomes three
of the wings is 2680 Pa
times as it rises from the bottom of a lake to
its surface. Assuming atmospheric pressure 8. Area of cross-section of the press-plunger of
to be 75 cm of Hg and the density of water to a Bramah press is 2 cm2 and that of pump
be 1/10 of the density of mercury, the depth plunger is 0.02 cm2. If we apply a downward
of the lake is force of 10 N on the pump plunger, the load
that can be lifted is given by
1) 5 m 2) 10 m 1) 10 N 2) 100 N
3) 15 m 4) 20 m 3) 1000 N 4) 10000 N

190
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

9. A cube of side 20 cm is floating on a liquid 1) Four times that of Q

with 5cm of the cube outside the liquid. If the 2) Two times that of Q
density of liquid is 0.8 g/c.c then the mass of
the cube is 1
3) time that of Q
2
1) 4.2 kg 2) 4.8 kg

3) 5 kg 4) 5.2 kg 1
4) times that of Q
4
10. In a test experiment on a model aeroplane in a
wind tunnel, the flow speeds on the lower and 14. Water flows through a tube shown in Fig.
upper surfaces of the wing are ν and 2 ν The areas of cross-section at A and B are
respectively. If the density of air is r and the 3 cm2 and 1.5 cm2 respectively. The height
surface area of the wing is A, the dynamic lift difference between A and B is 15 cm and both
on the wing is given by points A and B are open to atmosphere. If
g=10 m/s2, the speed of water at B in m/s is
1 1 2
1) ρν 2 A 2) ρν A
2 2

2
3) 2 ρν 2 A 4) 2ρν A 1) 1 m/s 2) 2 m/s
11. A liquid is kept in a cylindrical vessel which 3) 3 m/s 4) 4 m/s
is rotated along its axis. The liquid rises at
15. In which one of the following cases will the
the sides. If the radius of the vessel is 0.05
liquid flow in a pipe be most streamlined.
m and speed of rotation is 2 revolution per
second. The difference in height of liquid at 1) Liquid of high viscosity and high density
the centre of the vessel and its sides is flowing through a pipe of small radius.
2) Liquid of high viscosity and low density
1) 0.04 m 2) 0.03 m
flowing through a pipe of small radius
3) 0.02 m 4) 0.01 m 3) Liquid of low viscosity and low density
flowing through a pipe of large radius
12. A tank has a square shaped hole of side L at
a depth y from the top of the tank and circular 4) Liquid of low viscosity and high density
hole of radius R at a depth 9y from the top. flowing through a pipe of large radius
The quantities of water flowing out per second 16. Neglecting the density of air, the terminal
from both the holes are same when tank is velocity obtained by a raindrop of radius 0.3
completely filled. Then R is equal to mm falling through the air of viscosity 1.8 ×
L 10–5 N/m2 will be (g = 9.8 m/s2)
1) 8πL 2) 1) 10.9 m/s 2) 8.3 m/s
3π
3) 9.2 m/s 4) 7.6 m/s
L 17. Eight spherical rain drops of the same mass
3) 4) 8 L
3π and radius are falling vertically through air
with a terminal speed of 6 cm s–1. If they
13. Two water pipes P and Q having diameter coalesce to form one spherical drop, what
2 × 10–2 m and 4 × 10–2 m respectively are will be its terminal speed? (in cms–1)
joined in series with the main supply line of
1) 12 cms–1 2) 32 cms–1
water. The velocity of water flowing in pipe P
is : 3) 24 cms–1 4) 64 cms–1

191
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

18. Spherical balls of radius ‘R’ are falling in a 22. 16 cm3 of water flows per sec through a
viscous fluid of viscosity η with a velocity capillary tube of radius a cm and of length
V. The retarding viscous force acting on the  cm when connected to a pressure head of
spherical ball is h cm of water. If a tube of the same length
and radius a/2 cm is connected to the same
1) directly proportional to R but inversely pressure head, the quantity of water flowing
proportional to V through the tube per second will be
2) directly proportional to both radius R and
1) 1 cm3 2) 2 cm3
velocity V

3) inversely proportional to both radius R and 3) 3 cm3 4) 4 cm3

velocity V
23. Two tubes of radii r1 and r2, and lengths
4) inversely proportional to R but directly 1 and  2 , respectively, are connected in
proportional to velocity V series and a liquid flows through each of them
in streamline conditions. P 1 and P 2 are
19. Which of the following is NOT the characteristic pressure differences across the two tubes. If
of turbulent flow? 1
P2 is 4P1 and  2 is , then the radius r2 will
1) Velocity more than the critical velocity 4
be equal to
2) Velocity less than the critical velocity

3) Irregular flow r1
1) 2r1 2)
2
4) Molecules crossing from one layer to
another 3) 4r1 4) r1

20. The rate of steady volume of water through 24. An air bubble of radius 1 cm rises from the
a capillary tube of length l and radius r under bottom portion through a liquid of density
a pressure difference P is V. This tube is 1.5g/ cc at constant speed of 0.25 cm/s. If
connected with another tube of same length the density of air is neglected the coefficient
but half the radius in series. Then the rate of of viscosity of the liquid is approximately (In
steady volume through them is (the pressure Pa-s)
difference across the combination is P)
1) 13,000 2) 11,300
V V
1) 2) 3) 130 4) 13
16 17
25. The rate of flow of liquid in a tube of radius r,
16V 17V length  , whose ends are maintained at a
3) 4)
17 16 πQ Pr 4
pressure difference P is V = where
η
21. A solid ball of volume V experiences a viscous
force F when falling with a speed v in a liquid.
If another ball of volume 8 V with the same η is coefficient of the viscosity and Q is
velocity v is allowed to fall in the same liquid
it experiences a force: 1
1) 8 2)
8
1) F 2) 16 F
1
3) 4 F 4) 2 F 3) 16 4)
16

192
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

26. A layer of glycerine of thickness 1 mm is 1) 100% 2) 75%

present between a very large surface area 3) 50% 4) 25%
and a small surface area of 0.1 m2. With
what force the small surface is to be pulled 32. A soap bubble assumes a spherical shape.
so that it can move with a velocity of 1m/s? Which of the following statement is wrong?
(coefficient of viscosity = 0.07 kg-m–1 s–1) 1) The soap film tends to shrink to as small
1) 70 N 2) 7 N surface area as possible

3) 700 N 4) 0.70 N 2) Soap film consists of two surface layers

27. Soap solution can be spread into a fairly large 3) Pressure of the air enclosed by the soap
vertical thin film, but the same cannot be done film is same as that of the atmosphere
with water. Why? outside

1) Density of water is more than that of soap 4) Pressure of air enclosed by the soap film
solution is more than the atmosphere pressure

2) Surface tension of water is more than that 33. Water rises to a height of 1.25 cm in a
of soap solution capillary tube. If the height of the tube is 1cm,
the water will
3) Surface tension of water is less than that
of soap solution 1) continuously flow out of the tube

4) Because of some reason other than those 2) stay at the top of the tube
mentioned above 3) be depressed a little below the upper end
28. A wooden stick 2 m long is floating on the of the tube
surface of water. The surface tension of 4) no rise in the tube
water 0.07 N/m. By putting soap solution on 34. Two soap bubbles, one of radius 50 mm
one side of the sticks the surface tension is and the other of radius 80 mm, are brought
reduced on 0.06 N/m. The net force on the in contact so that they have a common
stick will be interface. The radius of the curvature of the
1) 0.07 N 2) 0.06 N common interface is
3) 0.01 N 4) 0.02 N 1) 0.003 m 2) 0.133 m
29. A rectangular film of liquid is extended from 3) 1.2 m 4) 8.9 m
(4cm × 2 cm) to (5 cm × 4 cm). If the work 35. A small soap bubble of radius 4 cm is trapped
done is 3 × 10–4 J, the value of the surface inside another bubble of radius 6 cm without
tension of the liquid is any contact. Let P2 be the pressure inside
1) 0.250 N m–1 2) 0.125 N m–1 the inner bubble and P0, the pressure outside
3) 0.2 N m–1 4) 8.0 N m–1 the outer bubble. Radius of another bubble
with pressure difference P2 – P0 between its
30. Two small drops of mercury, each of radius inside and outside would be
R, coalesce to form a single large drop. The
ratio of the total surface energies before and 1) 12 cm 2) 4.8 cm
after the change is 3) 2.4 cm 4) 6 cm
1) 1 : 21/3 2) 21/3 : 1 36. If the excess pressure inside a soap bubble
3) 2 : 1 4) 1 : 2 is balanced by an oil column of height 2 mm,
then the surface tension of soap solution
31. A frame made of metallic wire enclosing a will be (r = 1 cm, density of oil = 0.8 g/cm3)
surface area is covered with a soap film. If the (g=10m/s2)
area of the frame of metallic wire is reduced
by 50%, the energy of the soap film will be 1) 2 × 10–4 N/m 2) 4 × 10–4 N/m
changed by 3) 2 × 10–2 N/m 4) 4 × 10–2 N/m

193
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

37. A liquid flows through two capillary tubes A 43. A small spherical ball of steel falls through a
and B connected in series. The length and viscous medium with terminal velocity v. If a
radius of B are twice that of A. The ratio of ball of twice the radius of the first one but of
pressure difference across A and across B is the same mass is dropped through the same
v
1) 1 2) 8 method, it will fall with a terminal velocity
(neglect buoyancy) where n is n
3) 4 4) 2
44. On putting a capillary tube in a pot filled with
38. What will be the angle of contact of a liquid
water, the level of water rises upto a height of
relative to a solid. If forces of adhesion and
4 cm in the tube. If a tube of half the diameter
cohesion are equal?
is used instead, the water will rise to a height
1) 0o 2) 30o of ....... cm

3) 90o 4) None of these Assertion-Reason Type

1) If both the Assertion and Reason are true
39. A glass rod of diameter d = 2 mm is inserted
and the Reason is true explanation of the
symmetrically into a glass capillary tube of
Assertion
radius r = 2 mm. Then the whole arrangement
is vertically dipped into liquid having surface 2) If both the Assertion and Reason are true
tension 0.072 N/m. The height to which liquid but the Reason is not the true explanation
will rise on capillary is (Take g = 10 ms–2, of the Assertion
ρliq =1000 kg / m3 . Assume contact angle to
3) If Assertion is true but Reason is false
be zero of capillary tube to be long enough)
4) If Assertion is false but Reason is true
1) 1.44 cm 2) 6 cm
3) 4.86 cm 4) None of these 45. Assertion : Pascal law is the working
principle of hydraulic lift.
40. A tube of 0.8 mm radius is dipped into a liquid
with surface tension and density 6 × 10–2 N/m Reason : Pascal law is a universal law
and 900 Kg/m3 respectively. If the tube is kept according to which pressure
vertical, the height of liquid rises in it will be is directly proportional to
area of surface in contact.
1) 0.017 m 2) 0.17 m
46. Assertion : When a drop of water
3) 1.7 m 4) 17 m vapour introduced in a
mercury barometer tube, the
Numerical Type
barometric height decreases.
4
41. A block of wood floats in water with th of Reason : It happens due to vapour
5 pressure of water.
its volume submerged, but it just floats in
another liquid. The density of liquid is (in kg/ 47. Assertion : Free surface of a liquid
m3 ) behave like a stretched
membrane.
42. A flat plate of area 0.1 m2 is placed on a flat
surface and is separated from it by a film of oil Reason : The molecule on the free
10–5 m thick whose coefficient of viscosity is surface of liquid experience
1.5 N sm–2. The force (in N) required to cause a upward force, so due to
the plate to slide on the surface at constant reaction force membrane is
speed of 1 mm s–1 is : stretched.

194
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

Statement Type 50. Match the following.

1) If both Statement I and Statement II are
true Column I Column II
2) If both Statement I and Statement II are
p) Pascal’s law a)
false 2gh
3) If Statement I is true but Statement II is
false q) Surface tension b) Reynolds
number
4) If Statement I is false but Statement II is
true
r) Velocity of efflux c) Hydraulic jack
48. Statement I : Bigger drops of liquid resists
deforming forces better than s) Viscosity d) Ventrimeter
tiny drops.
t) Bernoulli’s theorem e) Angle of
Statement II : E x c e s s p r e s s u r e i n a
contact
soap bubble is inversely
proportional to its radius.
1) p - b, q - c, r - d, s - e, d - a
49. Statement I : When two boats sails parallel
in the same direction and
2) p - c, q - e, r - a, s - b, t - d
close to each other, they are
pulled towards each other.
3) p - a, q - e, r - d, s - c, t - b
Statement II : The viscous drag on a
spherical body moving with
speed v is proportional to v. 4) p - c, q - a, r - b, s - d, t - e

195
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

KEY WITH HINTS

1. 3 Water is filled to the same height in both 8. 3 Pressure is same on both sides.
the vessels. Therefore, pressures on the F1 F
bottom face of both the vessels are equal. Hence, = 2 ;
A1 A 2
Force = pressure × base area.;
Since base areas are equal FA = FB.
F1A 2 2
The volume of water contained in vessel ∴ F2 = = 10 × = 1000N
A is more than volume of water in vessel A1 0.02
B. ∴ WA > WB 9. 2 Weight = Buoyant force;
5
1.0 ×10 =
m Area × height × ρliquid
2. 3 P=
hρg; h = 8 km
=
1.29 × 9.8

3. 2 ( P0 + hdg ) V0 =
P0 V ; m = ( 20 cm ) ×15cm × 0.8 = 600 × 8
2

 hdg 
V= 1 + V0
 P0  = 4800 gram = 4.8 kg
10. 2 Let p1 and p2 be the air pressures on the
 4760 ×1× g  upper and lower surfaces of the wing.
= 1 + × 50 = 300 cm3 From Bernoulli’s theorem, we have
 70 ×13.6 × g 
1 2 1
p1 + ρv1 = p 2 + ρv 22 ;
4. 3 ( Patm + xρw g ) ( V ) =( Patm ) ( 3V ) 2 2
 75 
2Patm =
xρw g; 2   ρrg g where v1 = 2 v and v2 = v
 100 
ρbag
= x
g; =
⇒ x 15
10
1
p 2 − p1 = ρ ( v12 − v 22 )
5. 4 P =Patm =hρg; ⇒ Pa =Pb ; ⇒ Pa =
Pb as 2
h is same in both cases.
6. 3 The pressures are the same at the bottom 1 1
of the vessel. Therefore, ρ w gH =
ρm gh m = ρ ( 2v 2 − v 2 ) = ρv 2
2 2
Force or the dynamic lift = Pressure
ρm h m 13600 ×1 difference × surface area of the wing
H
⇒= = = 13.6 m
ρw 1000 1
=
ρv 2 A
2
7. 3 ∆p
= ( ν 2 − ν12=) 1.2 (1202 − 902 )
ρ 3
11. 3 When the rotation is there, the velocity of
2 2
sides of the vessel has to be high.
= 0.6 (14400 – 8100) = 3780 Pa 1 2
Then P + ρv = constant
Force = ∆p × area 2
= 3780 ×  ×=
b 3780 ×15 × 2
(From Bernoulli’s theorem)
= 113400 N = 113.4 kN

196
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

15. 2 For streamline flow, Reynold’s number

rρ
Nk ∝ should be less.
η

For less value of NR, radius and density

should be small and viscosity should be
high.
ie, pressure at sides is lower. Then to 16. 1 The terminal velocity of the spherical
maintain pressure line,
2r 2ρg
1 raindrop of radius r is given by v t =
2
ρv =ρgh We get, 9η
2 2 2 2
v ( rω) ( r2πn )
2
2 × ( 0.3) ×10−3 × 9.8
or=h = = vt = = 10.9 m/s
2g 2g 2g 9 ×1.8 ×10−5
2
( 2π× 2 × 0.05 ) 17. 3 Let r be the radius of each small drop and
= 0.02 m
=
2 × 9.8 R that of the big drop. Since the volume
remains the same,
12. 3 A1v1 = A 2 v 2 ;  4π 3  4π 3
8×  r= R ⇒= R 2r
 3  3
L2 2gy = πR 2 2g ( 9y ) Since terminal speed ∝ (radius)2, if the
L radius is doubled, the terminal speed
L2 =πR 2 ( 3) ⇒ R = becomes four times
3π = 6 cm s–1 × 4 = 24 cm s–1.
13. 1 Rate of flow through both pipes will be 18. 2
same, i.e., Q1 = Q2 19. 2
π Pr 4
V1 V2 πr12 1 πr22  2 20. 2 V= ; when tubes are connected in
= = ; 8η

t t t t
2 2
πd πd
⇒ 1 vP = 2 × vQ series, then the rate of flow of water
4 4 2 through each tube (V1) is same. Let (P–P1)
 4 ×10−2  be the difference in pressure across the
=
⇒ VP  =VQ ; ⇒ v P 4v Q
 2 ×10−2  first tube and P 1 be the difference in
pressure across the second tube. Then
14. 2 From equation of continuity,
π ( P − P1 ) r 4 πP1 ( r / 2 )
4

3 × v A = 1.5 × v B ⇒ v B = 2v A =
V1 = ---- (i)
8η 8η
From bernoulli’s equation
1 2 1 P1 16P
PA + ρv A + ρgh = PB + ρv 2B + 0 or P
= − P1 or P1
=
2 2 16 17

1 v  1
2 π (16P /17 ) ( r 4 /16 )
⇒ ρ  B  + ρgh = v 2B From (i), V1 =
8η
2  2  2

1 π Pr 4 V
8 8 =× =
∴ vB = gh = ×10 × 0.15 = 2 m / s 17 8η 17
3 3

197
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

21. 4 Let r and r’ be the radii of the ball of volume 2r 2 ( ρ − σ ) g

V and V’ ( = 8 V) respectively. Then 24. 3 η=
9v
4 4
πr 3 and V′ =
V= πr′3 2 ( 0.01) (15 − 0 )103 × 9.8
2
3 3 = = (σ 0)
9 × 25 ×10−4
3 1/2
V′  r′  r′  8V 
∴=   = ,  =  2 ----- (i) 3 × 9.8 ×103
V r r  V  = 130 Pas
=
225
Viscous force, F= 6πηrv
25. 2 According to poiseuille’s formula Rate of
flow liquid
F ∝ r, ( η and V same ) πρr 4
V= ---- (1);
F′ r′ 8η
∴ = =2
F r
[Using (i)] orr F’ = 2F πQρr 4
VV = ---- (2)
η
πpr 4 1
1 As, V
22. = i.e., V ∝ r 4 Compare (1) and (2) we get Q =
8η 8
26. 2 Given: n = 0.07 kg-m–1s–1; F = ?;
4
V′ (a / 2) 1 A = 0.1 m2 ; v = 1 m/s
⇒= 4
=
V a 16 Thickness = 1 mm = 10–3 m;
F 0.07 × 0.1
V 16 =
η ⇒F
= = 7N
or V=′ = = 1 cm3 dv 10−3 ×1
A.
16 16 dx
23. 2 Rate of flow of liquid through narrow tube, 27. 2
dv π Pr 4
28. 4 Surface tension is given by
=
dt 8η F
T= ⇒ F = T ×  ----- (1)
As both the given tubes are connected in 
series so rate of flow of liquid is same. Hence, net force is given by
4 4
πP r πP r 4  P1   2  4 F = F1 – F2 = (2 × 0.07) – (2 × 0.06)
∴ 11
= ⇒ r=
2  P    r1
2 2

8η1 8η 2  2  1  [Using (1)]

F = 0.02 N
1 29. 2 Workdone = Surface tension of film ×
=
Here, P2 4P
=1;  2 ;
4 Change in area of the film. T × A
2
=
A1 8cm
= , A 2 20 cm 2
4  P    4
So, r2 =  1  1  r1 ; ∆A = 2 ( A 2 − A1 ) = 24 ×10−4 m 2
 4P1  41 
W = 3 × 10–4 J
4 4 W 3 ×10−4 1
4 r r  r ∴T = = = = 0.125 Nm −1
r=
2
1
=  1 =r2 1 ∆A 24 ×10 −4
8
16  2  2

198
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

30.
1/3
R n=
2 As = r 21/3 r ⇒ R 2 4T 4T 4T
35. 3 P= ; P2 =P0 + + ;
R 4 6
r2
= 2 r ⇒ 2 = 2−2/3

2/3 2

R 5
P = P2 − P0 = × 4T
Initial surface energy 12
Finalsurface energy
12
∴R = = 2.4 cm
5
2 ( 4πr 2 T )  r2  36. 4 Pressure due to oil column
= 2 = 2 2  =2 × 2−2/3 =
21/3
( 4πR T ) R  0.8 ×10−3
=ρoil × g × h oil = ×10 × 2 ×10−3 =16
−2 3
31. 3 Surface energy = surface tension × (10 )
surface area or U = S × 2A.
Now, excess pressure
A = pressure due to oil column
Newsurfaceenergy, U1 =
S× 2  =S× A
2
4T 4× T
⇒ = 16; ⇒ = 16
% decrease in surface energy R 1× 10−2
U − U1 2SA − SA
= × 100% = × 100% = 50% ⇒ T =4 × 10−2 N / m
U 2SA
4
32. 3 The pressure inside the soap bubble is  ∆P1 1  r2 
37. 2 ∆P α 4 =
more than that outside it. r ∆P2  2  r1 
33. 2 The meniscus at the top adjusts its
curvature so the surface tension is 4
balanced by the weight of 1= 
cm column =  2r  ∆P1
  8
of water. 2  r  ∆P2
34. 2 Excess pressure at interface is 38. 3 At equilibrium, force of adhesion
4σ = force of cohesion.
P2 − P1 =
R
⇒ meniscus is neither convex nor

 4σ   4σ  4σ concave.
 P0 + R  −  P0 + R  =R o
 2  1 Hence, θ =90
39. 1 Here, surface tension force support the
1 1 1 weight of liquid rising in the tube.
or = −
R R 2 R1 2T
h= , where r=′ r2 − r1
r′ρg
R 1R 2 50 × 80
=
or R = m
R1 − R 2 30 0.072 × 2
=
h = 0.0144
= 1.44 cm
4 1×10−3 ×1000 ×10
= = m 0.133m
30

199
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

2T cos θ 2T
40. 1 h= 44. 8 For capillary tube h = ;
Rρg rρg

1 1
2 ( 6 ×10−2 ) 12 ×10−1 We can say h ∝ or h ∝
=
h = r d
( 8 ×10−4 ) ( 900 )(10 ) 72
h1 d 2 4 d
0.1 So, = ; ⇒ = ; ⇒ x= 8 cm
= = 0.0166
= 0.017 m h 2 d1 x 2d
6

41. 800 45. 3 According to Pascal’s law if pressure is

increased in any part of the fluid, then
4 change of pressure is transmitted to all
v b × ρ w × g= v b × ρg × g
5 other parts of the fluid.
ρw 5 4
⇒ = ; ρb = × 1000 = 800 kg/m3
ρb 4 5
46. 1 Both the reason and assertion are true
And when block is put in liquid of density and reason does explain the assertion.
ρ1 it just floats, ρb =ρ1 =800 kg / m3
42. 15 47. 3 The molecules on the free surface of liquid
experiences a downward force, due to
v 1×10−3 which the surface of liquid behaves as a
F=
ηA = 1.5 × 0.1× 15N
=
 10−5 stretched membrane.
2r 3ρg
43. 2 Given, v = ;
9η
48. 4 Tiny drops of liquid resist deforming force
4 2 4 ( )3 ρ better than bigger drops.
Mass = πr ρ= π 2r ρ or ρ =
3 3 8

Terminal velocity of second ball is 49. 1

2 ( 2r ) ( ρ / 8 ) g v v
2

v = = = ∴n =2
9η 2 n 50. 2

200
 CHAPTER THERMAL PROPERTIES OF
10 MATTER

Heat

Heat is a form of energy that is transferred between systems with different temperatures (flowing
from high to low temperature system.). Due to heat there is the sensation of hotness or coldness in a
body.

Temperature

Degree of hotness or coldness of a body is due to its temperature. It is a measure of the average
KE of the system.

Thermometry

Thermometry is the branch of Physics concerned with the measurement of temperature and the
design and use of thermometers.

Scales of temperature

The SI unit of temperature is kelvin which is defined as (1/273.16)th part of thermodynamic

temperature of triple point of water (ice, water and water vapour co-exist in dynamic equilibrium at this
temperature.)

Celsius scale or centigrade scale is also common.

Conversion between different scales.

TC − 0 TF − 32 TK − 273.15
= = --------(1)
100 − 0 212 − 32 373.15 − 273.15

The change in temperature in different scales will be

∆TC ∆TF ∆TK 9

= = ;=
F C + 32
100 180 100 5

9
C =K − 273; F − 32 = ( K − 273)
2

Triple point of water 273.16 K (0.01oC) at a pressure of 6.11 × 102 P is taken as the reference
point.

201
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

THERMOMETERS
A thermometer is used to measure the temperature of a body. The variation of some physical
property of a substance is used to measure temperature.
Liquid Thermometer
Thermal expansion of a liquid, usually mercury or alcohol is used to measure temperature. Mercury
has the advantage that it has uniform and large expansion and high thermal conductivity and low specific
heat capacity. The range of such thermometer is –50oC to 350oC.
Gas Thermometer
An ideal gas at constant volume or at constant pressure can be used for measuring temperature.
For constant volume gas thermometer P ∝ T
P − P0
=TC ×100o C
P100 − P0

F or constant pressure V ∝ T , Based on Charles law.

Resistance Thermometer
Variation of resistance of metals with temperature is used to measure temperature. Since platinum
has high melting point and expansion coeffecient large, is used in resistance thermometry.
R − R0
=TK ×100o C
R100 − R 0

Thermoelectric Thermometer
Thermocouples which apply Seebeck effect is used to measure temperature. Thermo-emf
e aTC + bTC2 , a and b are constants.
generated at a temperature is given by=
Pyrometers
Pyrometers are used to measure very high temperature such as of a furnace or glowing filament.
4
These are primarily based on ‘Stefan’s law’ of thermal radiations, viz., R = eATK

THERMAL EXPANSION
When matter is heated the interatomic distance and the matter as a whole expands. Thermal
expansion for solids are minimum and gases are maximum.
Solids have linear expansion, superficial expansion and volume expansion while liquids and gases
have only volume expansion.
∆L
For eg. coefficient of linear expansion=
α L′ L (1 + α∆T )
;=
L × ∆T

∆A
Coefficient of superficial expansion=
β A′ A (1 + β∆T )
;=
A × ∆T

202
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

∆V
Coefficient of volume expansion=γ V′ V (1 + γ∆T )
;=
V × ∆T

Relation between α, β and γ

2α = β; 3α = γ; α : β : γ = 1: 2 : 3

Application of thermal expansion in solids

Bimetallic strip

It is used in a thermostat. Two strips of equal length but different expansions are joined together.
When heated the strip will bend with metal of greater α on the outer side.

This type of arrangement is used in electrical heating circuits.

A Scale gives correct reading at a temperature θ , at a different temperature θ′ > θ , the scale expands

and the reading will be less than actual length.

= SR [1 + α∆θ] ; SR - scale reading

True value

However, if θ′ < θ , due to contraction of scale, scale reading will be more than true value. So true
value will be lesser than scale reading and is given by True Value, = TV SR (1 − α∆θ )
When object only is expanding

Measured value = True value (1 + α 0 ∆t ) ; =

′  (1 + α 0 ∆t )

′  1 + ( α 0 − α s )  ∆t ;
When object and scale are expanding =

−α 0 − α of object; α s − α scale
A pendulum clock gives correct time at a temperature θ . At a temperature θ′ > θ , due to linear
expansion the length of the pendulum increases and hence the time period will increase. Due to this
time interval measured will be less.

Time loss or gain in pendulam clocks

Period of pendulam clock

 0 (1 + α∆t )
T0 = 2π  / g ; when temperature increases by ∆t; T′ =
2π
g

203
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

 1  1 
T′ T0 1 +
By binomial theorem= ∝ ∆t  ; T′ −=
T0 T0  ∝ ∆t 
 2  2 

∆T 1 1
= ∝ ∆t where ∆t is the change in time period.; ∆T= ∝ ∆t × T0
T0 2 2

when ∆t is positive, clock goes slow; when Temperatures decreases the clock goes fast.
Thermal Stress
The ends of a rod is rigidly fixed to prevent expansion or contraction, when undergoes a change
of temperature, a stress is developed on the rod. Due to this stress, the rod will exert a large force on
the supports.
∆L
Thermal strain = = α∆θ ; Thermal stress= Yα ∆θ and force =
F YAα∆θ
L
CALORIMETERY
Heat
Heat is a form of energy. SI unit of heat is Joule. Also heat can be measured in calories.
1 cal = 4.18 J
Calorie: It is defined as the amount of heat required to raise the temperature of 1g of water by 1oC.
International Calorie : It is the heat required to raise the temperature of 1 g of water from 14.5oC to
15.5oC at a pressure of 1 atm.
work done
When heat is given to a body work is done. The ratio of = 4.18 J per cal is called
mechanical equivalent of heat. heat produced
Specific heat capacity: It is the amount of heat required to raise the temperature of a unit mass of the
substance through unit degree.
1 dQ
The specific heat of a substance s =
m dT

The heat required to raise the temperature of mass m by ∆θ is Q

= ms∆θ
Molar heat capacity (C)
The molar heat capacity of a substance is the amount of heat required to raise the temperature
of one mole of a substance through 1oC.
Molar heat capacity C = Molecular Weight (M) × specific heat capacity (s)
Let molecular mass of the substance is (M) and mass of the substance is (m), the number of
m
moles in the substance µ =
M

1 dQ M  dQ 
=C =  
µ dT m  dT 
SI unit : - J/mole - K

204
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

A gas has two specific heat capacities depending on whether the gas is expanding at constant
volume or at constant pressure. (specific heat at constant volume CV and specific heat at constant
pressure Cp).

Thermal Capacity

The quantity of heat required to raise the temperature of the whole body through 1oK is known
as its thermal capacity.

Thermal capacity = mass × specific heat capacity. Unit - Cal/K

Water equivalent of a body

Mass of water having the same thermal capacity as the body is called its water equivalent.

Water equivalent = mass of body × sp. heat of the material (w = ms)

Latent heat

The heat energy to be supplied to a substance to change its state without change of temperature
is called latent heat.

Latent heat of vapourisation

The heat energy required to convert unit mass of a liquid to the vapour state without change of
temperature is latent heat of vapourisation. For water it is 2.26 × 106 Jkg–1 or 536 cal/g.

Latent heat of Fusion

It is the heat energy required to convert unit mass of a solid into the liquid state without change
of temperature.

L.H. of fusion of ice is 3.36 × 105 Jkg–1 or 80 cal/g

Regelation

It is the process of melting of ice by applying pressure and its resolidification when pressure is
removed.

Variation of melting point and boiling point with pressure applied.

Increase of pressure lowers melting point of water. Increase of pressure increases the boiling
point of water.

Phase diagram

A phase diagram is a graph drawn between Temperature and pressure of a substance. A phase
of a substance is a region of a material that is chemically uniform, physically distinct and mechanically
separable. ice, water and steam are different phases of water.

205
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Phase diagram for water

On each part of the curve the substance is in a particular phase and all the three phases co-exist
at a point called triple point where the solid, liquid and gaseous states co-exists. The ice line, steam
line or sublimation line separates the two states of matter.
Principle of calorimetry
When two bodies, one being a liquid and the other being a solid or both being liquid, at different
temperatures are mixed, heat will be transferred from body at a higher temperature to the body at a
lower temperature till both acquire the same temperature, so that Heat lost = Heat gained.
The heat given to a body Q
= mc∆T , where c is the specific heat capacity and ∆T is change in

temperature.

TRANSFER OF HEAT
Heat is transferred from a body at a higher temperature to a body at lower temperature.
The transfer of heat from one body to another takes place by conduction, convection or radiation.
Conduction
Conduction is the process of transfer of heat from particle to particle without the actual movement
of the particles. In solids and mercury heat is transferred by conduction.
Consider a slab of face Area A, and lateral thickness L, whose face have temperatures TH and TC,
(TH > TC)

206
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

For a small element dx of a slab. If Q is the heat crossing through the area A, for a time t,
Q dT dT
then = −KA , where K is the thermal conductivity. is the temperature gradient.
t dx dx

dT
Q = K when A = 1, = 1 and t = 1
dx

Q
=K = Js −1m −1K −1 or Wm −1K −1
 dT 
A 
 dx 

Q = KA
( TH − TC ) t
L

Thermal Resistance
It is the ability to oppose heat energy flows through the conductor.
Temperature difference ∆T
=
Heat current =
Thermal resistance R

kA∆T
We have H =
L

L
Thermal Resistance is R =
KA
where L is the length of conductor, A is the Area of the conductor and K is the thermal conductivity.
∆T kelvin
Unit.=
R =
H Watt
a) Two slabs joined in series

L1 L
R eq = R1 + R 2 = + 2
K1A K 2 A

L1 + L 2 L1K 2 + L 2 K1 K1K 2 ( L1 + L 2 )
= = ; K eq
K eq A K1 K 2 A ( L1K 2 + L2 K1 )

207
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

2k1k 2
If 1 =
= 2; k eq
k1 + k 2

θ − θ 
In series the total heat conducted H=
1 H=
2 H=  1 2 
 R eq. 

b) When they are in parallel

1 1 1 K eq ( A1 + A 2 ) K1A1 K 2 A 2
= + ; = +
R eq R1 R 2 L L L

K1A1 + K 2 A 2
K eq =
A1 + A 2

k1 + k 2
If A1 A=
= 2 ; k eq
2

θ1 − θ2
In parallel the heat conducted H = H1 + H 2 =
R eq.

Convection

When heat is transferred from one place to another by actual movement of heated substance
(fluids) is called convection. Convection requires a medium.

Growth of ice in ponds

208
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Ice starts forming in a pond at a temperature below 0oC. To find the time later for growth of ice
with a thickness y, consider a small thickness dy.

Let dQ is the heat released when a thickness of dy is formed.

Heat energy transferred to the environment.

kA ( 0 − θ )
dQ = dt
y

For melting dθ = mL = ρAdy × L

kAθ ρL
dt =
ρAdyL, dt = ydy
y kθ

y
ρL 1 ρL 2
The total time taken=t ∫=
dt ∫
kθ
0
y=
dy
2 kθ
y ;

ρ -density of ice; L - Heat of fusion; θ - at temperature

2
Time taken to grow ice upto a thickness, t ∝ y

Due to convection (a) Land and Sea breeze occur, b) Trade winds are formed,

c) Monsoons are originating, d) Ventillation becomes possible

Radiation

Thermal radiation is the transfer of heat by means of electromagnetic radiation, generated by

the thermal motion of particles in matter. The energy is usually transferred in the infrared region. For
radiative transfer it does not require a material medium.

a) Radiant energy Travels in straight lines.

b) It is reflected and refracted as in the case of light.

c) Intensity of radiation obeys inverse square law.

d) Every body above absolute zero emits radiations.

Thermal radiation falling on a surface exerts pressure on the surface, called radiation pressure.
When radiation passes through a medium it absorbs radiation and due to this the temperature of the
medium increases. Bolometer is used to measure radiation intensity.

A perfect Black body is one which completely absorbs radiations falling on it.

A good absorber is a good emitter of radiation. A black body when heated to required temperature
will emit radiation absorbed by it

209
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

If Q is the total incident energy, then part of its is absorbed, partialy reflected and the remaining
transmitted.

∴ Q = A + R + T; ; A - Energy absorbed; R - Reflected; T - Transmitted.

A R T A
1= + + ; a = - Absorptance (absorptive power)
Q Q Q Q

R
r= = Reflective
Q

T
t= - transmittance ∴a+r+t =1
Q

Absorptive power

A
a= ; for a perfect black body a = 1; for others a < 1.
Q

Emissive power

Radiant energy emitted per unit area per unit time

Q Energy Power
= = = ; Unit W / m 2
∆t Area × time Area

Spectral emissive power

Emissive power per unit wavelength change at wavelength λ

α
dE
E= ∫ E × dλ; dλ =
θ
Eλ

Relative Emissivity or Emissivity (er)

It is the ratio of energy emitted by a body to the energy emitted by a black body in the same
conditions.

Q energy emitted by a body

e r= = ; 0 < er < 1
Q BB energy emitted by black body

Prevost’s theory of energy exchange

Above absolute zero of temperature there is a continuous exchange of heat energy between a body
and its surroundings. Heating or cooling of a body takes place depending on its temperature difference
with the surroundings. When temperatures are equal, there is no cooling or heating, the temperature
remains the same.

210
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Kirchhoff’s Law
The ratio of the emissive power to the absorptive power of all bodies at any given temperature and
wavelength is a constant and it is equal to the emissive power of a black body at the same temperature.
e
= a constant = E (E is the emissive power of a black body at the same temperature).
a
Good absorbers are good emitters.
Stefans’ Law
The emissive power of a black body is directly proportional to fourth power of its absolute
temperature.
E ∝ T 4 where T = temperature of ideal black body in Kelvin.
σT 4 , σ = Stefan’s constant = 5.67 × 10–8 w/m2k4; Unit of E = watts/m2.
E=
4
The total energy radiated by a surface of area A in a time t by a black body is Q BB = σAT t
For any other body the total energy radiated by an area A in a time t
QGB = eσAT 4 t (e - emissive power)
When a black body at a temperature T Kelvin surrounded by another body at a temperature.
T0 Kelvin (where To < T),

σ ( T 4 − T04 ) . This is Stefan - Boltzmann law.

Heat lost by black body per unit area E =

eσ ( T 4 − T04 ) (e - is the emissivity)

If the body is not a perfect black body, then E =

For a body of area A, the heat energy radiated by the body in time t, is =eAσ ( T − T0 ) t
4 4

211
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

QUESTIONS

1. The temperature at which the reading of a 6. A 30.0 cm long metal rod expands by 0.0650
Fahrenheit thermometer will be double that cm when its temperature is raised from 0oC
of centigrade thermometer is: to 100oC. A second rod of different metal
1) 160o 2) 180o and of the same length expands by 0.0350
cm for the same rise in temperature. A third
3) 32o 4) 100o composite rod, also 30.0 cm long, is made
2. A centigrade and a Fahrenheit thermometer up of pieces of each of the above metals
are dipped in boiling water. The water placed end to end and expands by 0.0580
temperature is lowerd until the Fahrenheit cm when temperature is increased from 0oC
thermometer registers 140o. What is the to 100oC. The length of the longer portion of
fall in temperature as registered by the the composite bar in cm at 0oC is
Centigrade thermometer?
1) 23 cm 2) 16 cm
1) 30o 2) 40o
3) 18 cm 4) 20 cm
3) 60o 4) 80o
7. A brass rod of length 50 cm and diameter 3.0
3. A glass flask of volume one litre at 0oC is
cm is joined to a steel rod of the same length
filled, level full of mercury at this temperature.
and diameter. What is the change in length
The flask and mercury are now heated to
of the combined rod at 250oC, if the original
100oC. How much mercury will spill out, if
lengths are at 40.0oC? (Coefficient of linear
coefficient of volume expansion of mercury
expansion of brass = 2.0 × 10–5/oC, steel =
is 1.82 × 10–4/oC and linear expansion of glass
1.2 × 10–5/oC)
is 0.1 × 10–4/oC respectively?
1) 21.2 cc 2) 15.2 cc 1) 0.27 cm 2) 0.34 cm
3) 1.52 cc 4) 2.12 cc 3) 0.21 cm 4) 0.18 cm
4. A steel scale measures, the length of a copper 8. A steel tape 1 m long is correctly calibrated
wire as 80.0 cm when both are at 20oC (the for a temperature of 27.0oC. The length of a
calibration temperature for scale). What steel rod measured by this tape is found to be
would be the scale read for the length of the 63.0 cm on a hot day when the temperature is
wire when both are at 40 o C? (Given 45oC. Coefficient of linear expansion of steel
α copper =
−6 o
17 × 10−6 per o C , α s = 11× 10 per C ) = 1.20 × 10–5 K. What is the actual length of
the steel rod on that day?
1) 80.0096 cm 2) 80.0272 cm 1) 63.0136 cm 2) 63.2134 cm
3) 1 cm 4) 25.5 cm 3) 63.1526 cm 4) 63.3136 cm
5. The length of two metallic rods at temperatures 9. A steel tape gives correct measurement at
θ are LA and LB and linear coefficient of 20oC. A piece of wood is being measured
expansion are α A and α B respectively. If with the steel tape at 0oC. The reading is 25
the difference in their lengths is to remain cm on the tape. The real length of the given
constant at any temperature then piece of wood must be
LA α A LA α B 1) 25 cm
1) = 2) =
LB α B LB α A
2) Less than 25 cm
αA 3) More than 25 cm
3) 4) α A α B =1
αB 4) None of these

212
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

10. A rod of length 2 m rests on smooth horizontal 16. The coefficient of volume expansion of
floor. If the rod is heated from 0oC to 20oC. glycerine is 49 × 10 –5 / o C. What is the
Find the longitudinal strain developed? fractional change in its density (approx) for
(α = 5 ×10−5 / o C ) 30oC rise in temperature?
1) 1.5 × 10–2 2) 2.5 × 10–2
1) 10–3 2) 2 × 10–3 3) 2.0 × 10–2 4) 2.8 × 10–2
3) zero 4) 10–4 17. Calculate the stress developed inside a tooth
cavity filled with copper when hot tea at
11. A metal wire of length l and radius r is fixed
temperature of 57oC is drunk. You can take
between rigid supports. Initially it is just taut.
body (tooth) temperature to be 37oC and
Now, due to decrease in temperature, the
tension developed in the wire: α Cu = 1.7 ×10−5 / o C bulk modulus for copper
B= 140 ×109 N / m 2 .
1 Cu
1) ∝  2) ∝

1) 142 × 106 N/m2 2) 122 × 106 N/m2
1 3) 136 × 106 N/m2 4) 118 × 106 N/m2
2
3) ∝ r 4) ∝ 18. Maximum density of H2O is at the temperature
r2
1) 32oF 2) 39.2oF
12. The metal of a pendulum clock has a
3) 42oF 4) 4oF
coefficient of expansion as 2 × 10–5/K. Its
period is 2 s at 15oC. If the temperature 19. A glass flask of volume one litre at 0oC is
increases to 25oC, shall the clock: filled, level full of mercury at this temperature.
The flask and mercury are now heated to
1) show correct time 100oC. How much mercury will spill out if
2) lose time coefficient of volume expansion of mercury is
3) gain time 1.82 × 10–4/oC and linear expansion of glass
is 0.1 × 10–4/oC respectively?
4) first lose and then gain time
1) 21.2 cc 2) 15.2 cc
13. If the length of a cylinder on heating increases
by 2%, the area of its base will increase by 3) 1.52 cc 4) 2.12 cc
20. The ratio of thermal capacities of two spheres
1) 0.5% 2) 2%
A and B, if their diameters are in the
3) 1% 4) 4% ratio 1 : 2, densities in the ratio 2 : 1, and the
14. A solid floats submerged in a liquid. When specific heat in the ratio of 1 : 3, will be
the liquid is heated, which of the following is 1) 1 : 6 2) 1 : 12
most likely to happen? 3) 1 : 3 4) 1 : 4
1) Solid may sink 21. A small quantity, mass m, of water at a
2) Solid may float with a part outside the temperature θ (in oC) is poured on to a larger
surface mass M of ice which is at melting point. If c is
3) Solid may first sink and then rise upwards the specific heat capacity of water and L the
specific latent heat of fusion of ice, then the
4) Solid may oscillate vertically
mass of ice melted is given by
15. If on heating liquid through 80oC, the mass
ML Mcθ
expelled is (1/100)th of mass still remaining, 1) 2)
the coefficient of apparent expansion of liquid mcθ L
is
mcθ mcθ
1) 1.25 × 10–4/oC 2) 12.5 × 10–4/oC 3) 4)
ML L
3) 1.25 × 10–5/oC 4) None of these

213
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

22. If two balls of same metal weighing 5 gm 1) 20 gm of water

and 10 gm strike with a target with the same
2) 20 gm of ice
velocity. The heat energy so developed is
used for raising their temperature alone, then 3) 10 gm ice and 10 gm of water
the temperature will be higher 4) 5 gm ice and 15 gm of water
1) For bigger ball
28. A calorimeter contains 0.2 kg of water at
2) For smaller ball 30oC; 0.1 kg of water at 60oC is added to it,
3) Equal for both the balls the mixture is well stirred and the resulting
4) None is correct from the above three temperature is found to be 35oC. The thermal
capacity of the calorimeter is:
23. How many grams of a liquid of specific heat
0.2 at a temperature 40oC must be mixed 1) 6300 J/K 2) 1260 J/K
with 100 gm of a liquid of specific heat of 3) 4200 J/K 4) None of these
0.5 at a temperature 20oC, so that the final
temperature of the mixture becomes 32oC 29. A solid ball of mass 10 kg at 40oC is gently
placed in a liquid of mass 20 kg at 20oC and of
1) 175 gm 2) 300 g specific heat capacity 1 cal/gm-oC. When the
3) 295 gm 4) 375 g thermal equilibrium is attained, temperature
24. A hammer of mass 1 kg having speed of 50 of the system is 35oC. The specific heat
m/s, hit a iron nail of mass 200 gm. If specific capacity of solid ball is. Neglect heat capacity
heat of iron is 0.105 cal/gm oC and half the of the vessel
energy is converted into heat, the raise in 1) 1 cal/gm-oC 2) 2 cal/gm-oC
temperature of nail is
3) 3 cal/gm-oC 4) 6 cal/gm-oC
1) 7.1 oC 2) 9.2 oC
30. The mass, specific heat capacity and initial
3) 10.5 oC 4) 12.1 oC
temperature of the sphere was 1000 gm,
25. Two bodies at different temperatures are 1/2 cal/gmoC and 80oC respectively. The
mixed in a calorimeter. Which of the following mass of the liquid and the calorimeter are
quantities remain conserved. 900 gm and 200 gm, and initially both were
1) total heat of the two bodies at room temperature 20oC. Both calorimeter
2) sum of the temperature of the two bodies and the sphere are made of same material.
If the steady-state temperature after mixing
3) internal energy of each body is found to be 40oC, then the specific heat
4) total internal energy of the two bodies capacity of unknown liquid, is
26. A vessel contains 110 gm of water. The heat 1) 0.25 cal/gm oC
capacity of the vessel is equal to 10 g of
water. The initial temperature of water in 2) 0.5 cal/gm oC
vessel is 10oC. If 220 g of hot water at 70o is 3) 1 cal/gmoC
poured in the vessel, the final temperature,
4) 1.5 cal/gmoC
neglecting radiation loss, will be
1) 70oC 2) 80oC 31. A geyser heats water flowing at the rate of
3.0 litre per minute from 27oC to 77oC. If the
4) 60oC 5) 50oC geyser operates on a gas burner and its heat
27. 10 gm of ice at –20oC is dropped into a of combustion is 4.0 × 104 J/g, then what is
calorimeter containing 10 gm of water at 10oC the rate of combustion of fuel (approx.)?
the specific heat of water is twice that of ice.
1) 24 g/min 2) 12 g/min
When equilibrium is reached, the calorimeter
will contain: 3) 32 g/min 4) 16 g/min

214
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

32. A copper calorimeter of mass 1.5 kg has 38. A compound slab is made of two parallel
200 g of water at 25oC. How much water plates of copper and brass of the same
(approx.) at 50oC is required to be poured thickness and having thermal conductivities
in the calorimeter, so that the equilibrium in the ratio 4 : 1. The free face of copper is at
temperature attained is 40oC? (Specific heat 0oC. The temperature of the junction is 20oC.
capacity of copper = 390 J/kg-oC) What is the temperature of the free face of
brass?
1) 508.3 gram 2) 450 gram
3) 370 gram 4) 610 gram 1) 0oC 2) 20oC
33. Minimum amount of steam at 100oC required 3) 40oC 4) 100oC
to melt 12 gm ice completely will be
39. The temperature gradient in a rod of 0.5 m
1) 1.5 gm 2) 1 gm
length is 80oC/m. It the temperature of hotter
3) 2 gm 4) 5 gm end of the rod is 30oC, then the temperature
of the cooler end is
34. 100 g of ice at 0oC is mixed with 100 g
of water at 100oC. What will be the final 1) 40oC 2) –10oC
temperature of the mixture? (Latent heat of
fusion for ice = 80 cal/gm and specific heat 3) 10oC 4) 0oC
of water is 1 cal/gm oC)
40. A doubled layered wall has layer A 10 cm thick
1) 10oC 2) 20oC and B 20 cm thick. The thermal conductivity
3) 30oC 4) 0oC of A is thrice that of B. In the steady state,
the temperature difference across the wall is
35. A 10 kg iron bar (specific heat 0.11 cal/gm–oC)
35oC. The temperature difference across the
at 80oC is placed on a block of ice. How much
layer A is
ice melts?
1) 1.1 kg 2) 10 kg 1) 28oC 2) 14oC

3) 16 kg 4) 60 kg 3) 7oC 4) 5oC
36. Two tanks A and B contain water at 30oC and Numerical Type
80oC respectively. Calculate the amount of
water that must be taken from each tank to 41. Steam is passed into 54 g of water at 30oC
prepare 40 kg of water at 50oC. till the temperature of the mixture becomes
1) 24 kg, 16 kg 2) 16 kg, 24 kg 90oC. If the latent heat of steam is 536 cal/g,
the mass of the mixture (in g) will be:
3) 20 kg, 20 kg 4) 30 kg, 10 kg
42. Two temperature scales A and B are related
37. A 2 kg copper block is heated to 500oC and
then it is placed on a large block of ice at 0oC.
A − 42 B − 72
by: = . At which temperature
If the specific heat capacity of copper is 400 110 220
J/kg-oC and latent heat of fusion of water is two scales have the same reading?
3.5 × 105 J/kg the amount of ice that can melt
is: 43. A ball of thermal capacity 10 cal/oC is heated
to the temperature of furnace. It is then
7 7 transferred into a vessel containing water.
1)   kg 2)   kg
8 5 The water equivalent of vessel and the
content is 200 gm. The temperature of the
8 5 vessel and its contents rises from 10oC to
3)   kg 4)   kg 40oC. What is the temperature of furnace?
7 7

215
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Assertion - Reason Type Statement Type

1) If both Statement I and Statement II are
1) If both the Assertion and Reason are true true
and the Reason is true explanation of the
Assertion 2) If both Statement I and Statement II are
false
2) If both the Assertion and Reason are true 3) If Statement I is true but Statement II is
but the Reason is not the true explanation false
of the Assertion 4) If Statement I is false but Statement II is
true
3) If Assertion is true but Reason is false
48. Statement I : W h i l e m e a s u r i n g t h e
4) If Assertion is false but Reason is true thermal conductivity of liquid
experimentally, the upper
44. Assertion : The specific heat capacity layer is kept hot and the
of a given solid can be lower layer kept cold.
determined by using the Statement II : Convection is process of
principle of calorimetery. heat transfer by the bulk
movement of molecules
Reason : Heat gained is equal to the within fluids.
heat lost in a calorimeter 49. Statement I : Water can be made to boil
without heating.
45. Assertion : Th e co e fficie n t o f re a l
expansion of the liquid is Statement II : Boiling point is lowered by
independent of nature of increasing pressure.
container. 50. Match the following.

Column I Column II
Reason : γr = γa + γv , w h e r e , γa
= coefficient of apparent A) Steady state P) A blackened platinum
wire when gradually
expansion, γ r = coefficient
heated, first appear
of real expansion and γ v =
red and then blue
coefficient of expansion of
vessel B) Wein’s Q) Radiated power is
displacement proportional to fourth
46. Assertion : Cooking food is difficult on Law power of absolute
hillls temperature of body
C) Stefan’s Law R) Energy absorbed
Reason : The boiling point decreases is equal to energy
with increase in pressure emitted
D) Black Body S) Absorptive power of
47. Assertion : Two bodies at different body is unity
temperatures, if brought in 1) A - Q; B - P; C - P; D - P, Q
thermal contact do not nec-
essary settle to the mean 2) A - P; B - Q; C- P; D - R, S
temperature.
3) A - R; B - P; C - Q; D - P, S
Reason : The two bodies may have 4) A - S; B - P; C - P; D - Q, R
different thermal capacities.

216
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

KEY WITH HINTS

C F − 32 5. 2 Change in LA = change in LB
1. 1 = ;
100 180 i.e., ∆L A = ∆L B ; ⇒ α A ∆TL A = α B ∆TL B

θ 2θ − 32 or α A L A =
αBLB
=
= or θ 160o C
100 180 ∆L 0.0650
6. 1 =
α1 = = 2.167 ×10−5
L0 ∆T 30 × 100
∆TC ∆TF 212 − 140
2. 2 = =
100 180 180 0.350
α
= 2 = 1.167 ×10−5 ;
30 ×100
100 × 72
∆TC
= = 40o C
180
0.0580
3.
2 Due to volume expansion of both liquid α
= 3 = 1.933 ×10−5
30 ×100
and vessel, the change in volume of liquid
relative to container is given by
x × 2.167 ×10−5 ×100
∆=V V0  γ L − γ g  ∆θ
+ ( 30 − x )1.167 × 10−5 × 100
−4 o
Given V0 = 1000 cc, α g = 0.1× 10 / C =30 ×1.933 ×10−5 ×100

x 57.99 − 35
∴= = 22.99 ≈ 23
∴ γ g = 3α g = 3 × 0.1× 10−4 / o C
L1 = 23 and L2 = 7 cm
−4 o
= 0.3 ×10 / C
7. 2 Change in temperature of each rod,
∆T= 250 − 40= 210o C
=
∴ V 1000 [1.82 ×10 − 0.3 ×10−4 −4
] ×100
Clearly, change in length of the brass bar
= 15.2 cc. ∆L b =α 0 L∆T =( 2.0 ×10−5 ) × 50 × 210
4. 1 With temperature rise (same 25oC for
both), steel scale and copper wire both = 0.21 cm and change in length of steel
expand. Hence, length of copper wire w.r.t rod.
steel scale or apparent length of copper
∆Ls =αs L∆T =(1.2 ×10−5 ) × 50 × 210
wire after rise in temperature.
App increase = L′Cu − L′steel = 0.126 cm
Since the ends of the rod are free to
=  L0 (1 + α Cu ∆θ ) − L0 (1 + αs ∆θ ) 
expand, change in the length of the
combined rod
= L0 ( α Cu − α s ) ∆θ
∆L = ∆L b + ∆Ls = 0.21 + 0.13 = 0.34 cm
8. 1 The steel tape gives correct reading only
= 80 (17 ×10−6 − 11×10−6 ) × 20
at the temperature 27oC at which it has
been calibrated. At any other temperature
= 0.0096 cm 45oC the scale will expand and give less
∴ Lapp =80 + 0.0096 =80.0096 reading than the true value.

217
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Hence, length of the steel rod at 27oC, i.e., 16. 1 Coefficient of volume expansion of
L = 63 cm glycerine;
Let ∆L be the increase in the length of γ= 49 ×10−5 / o C

the steel tape when temperature rises

from 27oC to 45oC, Rise in temperature, ∆T =30o C
T 45o C − 27 o=
i.e., ∆= C 18o=
C 18K 1  ∆V  ∆V
As γ =  ⇒ = γ × ∆T
Clearly, ∆L =αL∆T ∆T  V  V

=(1.20 ×10−5 / K ) × ( 63cm ) ×18K

∆V (
or = 49 ×10−5 ) × 30 = 0.0147
V
= 0.0136 cm
Actual length of the rod at 45oC Since mass remains constant.
= 63 cm + 0.0136 cm = 63.0136 cm Fractional change in density = fractional
9. 2 On heating, the distance between change in volume= 0.0147= 1.5 ×10−2
the divisions increases and hence it 17. 1 Given, decrease in temperature
measures less than actual value. But ( ∆t ) = 57 − 37 = 20 o C
when temperature decreases, distance
between divisions decreases and it
Coefficient of cubical expansion of copper
measures more than actual value.
10. 3 Rod is free to expand from both ends γ Cu =3α Cu =5.1×10−5 / o C
and there is no external stress. Therefore
strain = 0. Let initial volume of the cavity be V and
its volume increases by ∆V due to
∆L
11. = Y ( πr 2 ) α ∆θ
T YA = YA α ∆θ
3 = increase in temperature.
L
∆V
∴ ∆V = γV∆t; ⇒ = γ∆t
∴ T ∝ r2 V
Thermal stress produced
12. 2 When temperature rises, t goes up and = B × Volumetric strain
hence clock runs slow or loses time.
∆V
∆A ∆L ∆A = B×
= B × γ∆t
13. 4 = 2. ; ⇒ = 2 × 2 = 4% V
A L A
14. 1 The density of the liquid will decrease on = 140 ×109 × ( 5.1×10−5 × 20 )
heating. However, the relative change = 142 ×106 N / m 2

in volume of the solid will be negligible
as compared to that in density of liquid. 18. 2 Maximum density of water is at 4oC
Hence, upthrust action on the solid will F − 32 C F − 32 4
decrease and the solid will sink. =
Now, = or
180 100 180 100
Mass expelled
15. 1 γ app = or F = 39.2oF
Mass remained×∆T
19. 2 In case of thermal expansion of liquid,
change in volume of liquid relative to
x /100 1 container is given by:
=
= = 1.25 ×10−4 / o C
x × 80 8000

218
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

= V ( γ L − γ S ) ∆θ
∆V 25. 4

26. 4 Let final temperature of water be θ
V = 1 litre = 1000 cc; Heat taken = Heat given
γ S = 3α g = 0.3 ×10−4 / o C 110 ×1( θ − 10 ) + 10 ( θ − 10 )
= 220 ×1( 70 − θ )

=
∆V 1000 (1.82 − 0.3) ×10 ×100 −4
=
⇒ θ 48.8
= o
C 50o C
= 15.2 cc 27. 3 Q1 = 10 × 1× 10 = 100 cal ;
3
m A c A ( 4 / 3) πr ρ c
3
r  ρ c
20. 2 = A A A
= A  A A ;
m Bc B ( 4 / 3) πr ρ c
3
B B B  rB  ρBc B Q 2 = 10 × 0.5 ( 0 − ( −20 ) ) + 10 × 80

m cA  1  2  1  1
3 = (100 + 800) cal = 900 cal
A =   × × =  As Q1 < Q2, so ice will not completely melt
m Bc B  2  1  3  12
and final temperature = 0oC
21. 4 By the principle of mixtures, heat given out As heat given by water in cooling upto
by water = heat absorbed by the melted 0oC is only just sufficient to increase the
ice. temperature of ice from –20oC to 0oC,
mcθ hence mixture in equilibrium will consist
⇒ mc ( θ −=
0 ) ML ⇒ =
M of 10 gm of ice and 10 gm of water, both
L
at 0oC.
1 28. 2 Let x be the thermal capacity of calorimeter.
2
22. =
3 Energy mv= mc∆θ; ⇒ δθ ∝ v 2 The specific heat of water = 4200 J/kg-K.
2
Heat gained by calorimeter = thermal
Temperature does not depend upon the capacity × rise in temperature
mass of the balls. = x (35 – 30) = 5 x
23. 4 Temperature of mixture Heat gained by water
m c θ + m 2 c 2 θ2
θ= 1 1 1 ; = mc∆t= 0.2 × 4200 × ( 35 − 30 )= 4200 J

m1c1 + m 2 c 2
Total heat gain = 5x + 4200
m × 0.2 × 40 + 100 × 0.5 × 20
⇒ 32 =1 Heat lost by 0.1 kg of hot water when
m1 × 0.2 + 100 × 0.5 added to calorimeter.

⇒ m1 =
375 gm Q= ms∆t= 0.1× 4200 × ( 60 − 35 )

= 10500 J
11 2 According to principle of calorimetry, Heat
24. 1 W
= JQ ⇒  Mv
=  J ( m.c.∆θ ) ;
22  gained = heat lost
5x + 4200 = 10,500; x = 1260 J/K
1 2 29. 4 Heat gain by liquid = heat loss by solid
⇒ ×1× ( 50 )
4 ball.
10 × S × 5= 20 ×1×15 ⇒ S= 6 cal / gm- o C
= 4.2 [ 200 × 0.105 × ∆θ] ; =
⇒ ∆θ 7.1o C

219
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

1 33. 1 Heat required = Heat supplied,

30. 3 1000 × × 40
2 x.L
= f y ( L v + c.∆T ) ;

1 12 × 80 = m[540 + 1 × 100];
= 900 × s 2 × 20 + 200 × × 20

2 12 × 80
=
m = 1.5 gm
20000 = 18000 s2 + 2000 640
18000 = 18000 s2
1 cal / g m o C
∴s = 34. 1 Let the final temperature of mixture be θ .
2
Then 100 × 80 + 100 ( θ – 0)
31. 4 Mass of water heated,
= 100 × 1 × (100 – θ )
M = 3 × 1000 × 1 = 3000 g/min
Rise in temperature, Solving, we get θ = 10oC.
∆T = 77 − 27 = 50o C 35. 1 Iron bar will release heat till its temperature
falls to 0oC. After that thermal equilibrium
Amount of heat spent, Q
= mc∆T will be reached and ice will not melt further.
If m gm be the mass of ice melted, then
Q 3000 ×1× 50 cal
or = m × 80 = 10 × 103 × 0.11 × 80 ;
∴ m = 1.1 × 103 gm = 1.1 kg
= 3000 × 50 × 4.2 J / min

= 6.3 ×103 J / min 36. 1 m1 × 1× ( 50 − 30 )= m 2 × 1× ( 80 − 50 )

Rate of combustion of fuel

m1 3
6.3 ×105 J / min or m1 × 20 = m 2 × 30 or =
=
≈ 16 g / min m2 2
4.0 ×104 J / g
Mass of water from tank
32. 1 Let ‘m’ be the required mass of water. 3
Then heat lost by hot water A = × 40 =24 kg
5
=
Qlost ( mg ) (1 cal / g o C ) ( 50 − 40 ) o C ---(i)
Mass of water from tank
Heat gained by the calorimeter 2
B = × 40 =16 kg
   (390  5
Q1 = (1500g )  3 
40 − 25 ) o C
 4.2 ×10   37. 3 Let x kg of ice can melt.
Using law of calorimetry, heat lost by
Heat gained by the water present in it copper = heat gained by ice
Q2 ( 200g ) (1cal / g o C )  ( 40 − 25 ) o C
2 × 400 × (500 – 0) = x × 3.5 × 105
Total heat gained by the calorimeter and 2 × 400 × 500 8
=
or x = kg
the water present in it 3.5 ×105 7
Qgain
= Q1 + Q 2 ------ (ii)
Q 4K.A ( 20 − 0 ) KA ( θ − 20 )
From principle of calorimetery, heat lost = 38. 4 = ;
by hot body = heat gained by cold body. t d d
So, equating Eqs. (i) and (ii), and solving
for m, we get m = 508.3 gm. or 80 = θ − 20 or θ = 100 o C

220
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

30 − θ 44. 1 Calorimetery means measurement of

39. 2 = 80 ⇒ 30 − θ= 40 heat, the heat lost by the body is equal
0.5
to the heat gained by the cold body
provided no heat is allowed to escape to
⇒ θ = −10 o C the surroundings.
40. 4 In the steady state, rate of heat across
each layer of the wall is the same. 45. 4 Coefficient of real expansion γ r = γ a + γ v
K A ( ∆T ) K B A ( 35 − ∆T )
A =
10 20 Hence, γ v is coefficient of cubical
expansion of vessel (container)
Using KA = 3KB, Solving, ∆T =5 oC
Thus, real expansion coefficient depends
41. 60 on nature of vessel.
Let m gm of steam is passed. Then,
46. 3 At hills, the atmospheric pressure is lower,
54 ×1× ( 90o − 30o )
reducing the boiling point of water as
compared to that at sea level.
= m ( 536 ) + m × 1× (100 − 90 )
o o

54 × 60 = m × 546
47. 2 When two bodies at temperature T1 and
54 × 60 T2 are brought in thermal contact, they do
=
m = 6g ; settle to the mean temperature (T1 + T2)/2.
546
They will do so, in case the two bodies
were of same mass and material i.e.,
∴ Mass of mixture = 54 + 6 = 60 g
same thermal capacities. In other words,
42. 12 the two bodies may be having different
thermal capacities, that’s why they do
Let at temperature T both the scales A and not settle to the mean temperature, when
B have the same reading. brought together.
T − 42 T − 72
= 48. 1 We know that to measure thermal
110 220
conductivity of liquids experimentally,
or 2T – 84 = T – 72 or T = + 12o they must be heated from the top, i.e.,
upper layer is kept hot, so as to prevent
43. 640 convection in liquids.
for ball mc = 10 cal/oC,

water equivalent = 200 gm 49. 3 We know that liquid starts boiling when
its vapour pressure becomes equal to
Heat lost by hot body = heat gained by atmospheric pressure. Hence, to boil
cold body, T is temperature of furnace. the water without heating we have to
mc (T – 40) = mc(40 – 10); decrease the external pressure.

10 (T – 40) = 200 × 30
50. 3
∴ T = 640oC

221
 CHAPTER
THERMODYNAMICS
11

Thermodynamics deals with transformation of heat energy into other forms of energy and vice
versa.
Thermal Equilibrium
If two systems are at same temperature. They are at Thermal Equilibrium.
The thermodynamical equilibrium
A system is in the thermodynamical equilibrium, when it is in a state of thermal mechanical
and chemical equilibrium. Thermodynamic variables: The physical quantities like pressure, volume,
temperature, energy, entropy etc. are thermodynamic variables.
Thermodynamic process
If the state of a system changes in such way that P, V, T etc. changes the process is called
thermodynamical process.
If the system undergoes a series of changes and comes back to the initial state, then the process
is called a cyclic process.
A reversible process is one which can be reversed in such a way that all changes taking place in
the direct process are replaced when the conditions are reversed.
Zeroth law of thermodynamics
If two systems A and B are separately in thermal equilibrium with a system C, then A & B are in
thermal equilibrium with each other. When the temperature of a body is measured, the thermometer
will be in thermal equilibrium with the body.
Internal energy
Internal energy of a system is the energy possessed by the system due to molecular motion
and molecular configuration. Due to molecular motion it posses internal KE (Uk) and due to molecular
configuration it possess internal PE (Up). Then the change in energy, dU = dUk + dUp
If there is no inter molecular force dUp = 0, then dU = dUk = mCv dT
For µ moles of an ideal gas, dU = µC v dT ie, the internal energy in the absence of inter molecular

force is the function of temperature and state only.

First law of Thermodynamics
Ist law of thermodynamics is equivalent to law of conservation of energy.
It states that the heat energy given to a system ( ∆Q ) is used for increasing the internal energy
( ∆U ) of the system and for doing the work ( ∆W ) by the system against its surroundings.
∆Q = ∆U + ∆W

222
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Indicator diagram
A graph representing the variation of any one of the quantity (P, V, T) against another is called
an indicator diagram. Every point on the indicator diagrams represent a unique value for (P, V or T) of
gases.

Work done by a gas

Let P and V represent the pressure and volume of a gas taken in a cylinder closed by a piston of
area A. Force exerted on the piston F = P × A.

Let the piston move through a small distance dx, when the gas expands. Work done during
expansion dW =F × dx =PAdx =PdV

∴ Work done= W
= ∫ dW= ∫ PdV
The area enclosed by the curve gives work done during the process.
Thermodynamic Process
(1) Cyclic process
If the system undergoes a series of changes and comes back to the initial state then it is a cyclic
process. Let UF and UI are the final and initial internal energies.

In the case of cyclic process UF = UI

∴ change in internal energy ∆U = U F − U I = 0
∆Q =∆W ie, heat supplied is equal to the work done.

223
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

(2) Isochoric process

For a thermodynamic process, the volume remains constant during isochoric process. So the gas
P
cannot do any work. ∆W= 0, P ∝ T, = a constant
T

For isochoric process ∆Q =µCV ∆T

µRT
∴ ∆Q =∆U, ∆U =µC v ∆T =
( γ − 1)
The energy supplied at constant volume will be increasing the internal energy of the gas and
thereby temperature increases.
Isothermal process

In any thermodynamic process, the temperature remains constant during isothermal process.
Consequently the internal energy remains constant.
The equation of state for the gas is PV = a constant.
P1 V1 dP P
= . ∴ ∆Q = 0 + ∆W; = − 
P2 V2 dV V

V2 P
∆W =
µR T log µR T log 1 .
= Energy supplied is used to do external work.
V1 P2

Isobaric process
It is a process in which pressure remains constant. The equation of state for the process
V
= constant. the amount of heat transferred =∆Q =µCp ∆T .
T
The slope of the P-V curve for isobaric process is zero.

∫
Work done ∆W =PdV =P [ V2 − V1 ] =
µR [ T2 − T1 ]

224
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

dQ= dU + P∆V
Fractions of energy for internal energy changes
dV nC v dT C v 1
= = =
dQ nCp dT Cp γ

dW 1
Fractions of energy for work done = 1−
dQ γ

Adiabatic Process
It is a process in which the system is thermally insulated, so that no heat enters or leaves the
system. ∆Q = 0
µR ( T1 − T2 ) 1
0 = ∆U + ∆W, ∆W = = µR [ P1V1 − P2 V2 ]
( γ − 1) γ −1

The equation of state for adiabatic process, PV = constant.

γ

 dP  P
The slope of the adiabatic curve   = −γ  
 dV  V

Slope of adiabatic curve = γ × slope of isothermal curve

Adiabatic process is taking place if there is no exchange of heat between the system and
surroundings. For this, the system is thermally insulated from surroundings.
For an adiabatic process ∆Q =0 . ∴ ∆U + ∆W = 0
dU + dW = 0
µC v dT + PdV =
0
But for a gas PV =
µRT, PdV + VdP =
µRdT

µC v ( PdV + VdP )
+ PdV =
0
µR

225
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

R PdV + VdP
But C v = ;∴ + PdV = 0
γ −1 ( γ − 1)

dV dP
γPdV + VdP = 0; γ + = 0; γ log e V + log e P = C
V P

log ( PV γ ) = constant , ( PV γ ) = a constant

The equation is called the equation of state for an adiabatic change.

This can be rewritten as TV γ−1 = constant , T γ P1−γ = constant

Slope of adiabatic is greater than isothermal.

stress ∆P V∆P
Elasticity of gas = = = −
strain − ( ∆V / V ) ∆V

 P
Adiabatic elasticity = − V  −γ  = γP
 V

 P
−V−
Isothermal elasticity = =P
 V

γP C
Ratio of adiabatic to isothermal elasticity = = γ = p >1
P Cv

Adiabatic curve for different gases

226
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Second Law of Thermodynamics

Clausius statement

It is impossible for a self acting machine unaided by an external agency to transfer heat from a
cold body to a hot reservoir.

Kelvins statement

It is not possible to get a continuous supply of work from a body by cooling it to temperature lower
than that of the surroundings.

Reversible and irreversible process

A thermodynamical process taking a system from initial to final state is reversible if the process
can be turned back such that both the system and surroundings return to their original states, when the
conditions are reversed.

Any process which cannot be reversed by reversing the conditions is called an irreversible process.
It is also called the natural process because all the process occuring in nature are irreversible.

eg. current flow from high potential to low potential. Heat flow between two bodies having a temperature
gradient between them etc.

227
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

QUESTIONS

1. During adiabatic expansion of 2 moles of a 7. Unit mass of a liquid of volume V1 completely

gas, the internal energy of the gas is found turns into a gas of volume V2 at constant
to decrease by 2 J, the work done during the atmospheric pressure P0 and temperature T.
process on the gas will be equal to The latent heat of vaporization is L. Then the
change in internal energy of the gas is
1) –2 J 2) 2 J
3) –1 J 4) 1 J 1) L 2) L + P0 (V2 – V1)

2. One mole of an ideal monoatomic gas 3) L – P0(V2 – V1) 4) zero

is heated at a constant pressure of one
8. In a thermodynamic process, workdone by
atmosphere from 0oC to 100oC. The change
the system equals decrease in its internal
in the internal energy is
energy. The process is
1) 12.46 × 102 J 2) 20.80 J
1) Isothermal 2) Isobaric
3) 25 × 102 J 4) 50 J
3) Adiabatic 4) Isochoric
3. If the ratio of specific heats of a gas at
constant pressure to that at constant volume 9. 100 g of water is heated from 30oC to 50oC.
is γ , the change in internal energy of a mass Ignoring the slight expansion of the water,
of gas, when the volume changes from V to the change in its internal energy is : (specific
2 V at constant pressure P is heat of water is 4184 J kg–1 K–1)
( V − 1) PV 1) 4.2 kJ 2) 8.4 kJ
1) 2)
PV ( γ − 1) 3) 84 kJ 4) 2.1 kJ

P V 10. 5.6 litres of helium gas at STP is adiabatically

3) 4) compressed to 0.7 litre. Taking the initial
V ( γ − 1) P ( γ − 1)
temperature to be T1, the work done in the
4. If ∆Q and ∆W represent the heat supplied process is
to a system and the work done on the system 9 3
respectively, the first law of thermodynamics 1) RT1 2) RT1
can be written as
8 2

1) ∆Q = ∆U + ∆W 2) ∆Q = ∆W − ∆U
15 9
3) ∆Q = ∆U − ∆W 4) ∆Q = 2∆W − ∆U 3) RT1 4) RT1
8 2
5. If the internal energy does not depend on the
path, then the process is called: 11. An ideal gas is found to obey a law PV2 =
constant. The gas is initially at temperature T
1) isothermal 2) adiabatic
and volume V. Then it expands to a volume
3) both (1) and (2) 4) none of these 2V, the temperature becomes
6. In a closed vessel, pressure increases by T
0.4% when temperature increases by 1oC. 1) 2) 2 T
What is the initial temperature? 2

1) 250 K 2) 250oC T
3) 4) 4 T
3) 25 K 4) 25oC 2

228
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

12. Three moles of an ideal monoatomic gas 16. If a gas is heated at constant pressure, its
performs a cycle 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 1 as isothermal compressibility
shown. The gas temperatures in different 1) Increases 2) Decreases
states are, T1 = 400 K, T2 = 800 K, T3 = 2400 3) Becomes zero 4) Remains constant
K and T4 = 1200 K. The work done by the gas
during the cycle is (2-3 and 4-1 are isobaric) 17. A certain amount of an ideal gas is enclosed
in a vessel. It undergoes a process such that
pressure varies with temperature as shown
in Fig. Ratio of density of gas at A to that of
B is

1) 1200 R 2) 3600 R
3) 2400 R 4) 2000 R
1) 2 : 1 2) 1 : 2
13. A sample of ideal gas ( γ =1.4 ) is heated at 3) 4 : 1 4) 1 : 4
constant pressure. If an amount of 100 J is
18. An ideal gas is initially at temperature T and
supplied to the gas, the work done by the gas
is volume V. Its volume is increased by ∆V due
to an increase in temperature ∆T , pressure
1) 42.12 J 2) 56.28 J ∆V
remaining constant. The quantity δ =
3) 28.57 J 4) 36.23 J varies with temperature as:
( V∆T )
14. Starting with the same initial conditions, an
ideal gas expands from volume V1 to V2 in
three different ways. The work done by the
gas is W1 if process is purely isothermal, W2 1) 2)
if purely isobaric and W3 if purely adiabatic.
Then
1) W1 > W2 > W3 2) W2 > W3 > W1
3) W2 > W1 > W3 4) W1 > W3 > W2
15. For one complete cycle of a thermodynamic
3) 4)
process on a gas as shown in the P – V
diagram, which of the following is correct?

19. A gas ( γ = 1.3) is at a pressure 105 N/m2

in a vessel surrounded by a non-conducting
medium and having a non-conducting piston.
The volume becomes half of its initial value
by suddenly pressing the piston. Then what
is the pressure afterwards
1) ∆E int > 0, Q < 0 2) ∆E int = 0, Q > 0
0.7 5 2 1.3 5 2
1) 2 × 10 N / m 2) 2 × 10 N / m

3) ∆E int = 0, Q < 0 4) ∆E int < 0, Q > 0 1.4 5

3) 2 × 10 N / m
2 5
4) 2 × 10 N / m
2

229
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

20. In an adiabatic process, the root mean square 40

speed of the molecules of a monoatomic gas 1) 32 2)
3
becomes twice its initial value. The ratio of the
initial volume of the gas to the final volume is
24
1) 2 2) 23/2 3) 4) 8
5
3) 4 4) 8
21. Heat energy absorbed by a system in going 25. Two cylinders A and B fitted with pistons
through a cyclic process shown in the figure contain equal amounts of an ideal diatomic
is gas at 300 K. The piston of A is free to move
while that of B is held fixed. The same amount
of heat is given to the gas in each cylinder. If
the rise in temperature of the gas in A is 30 K,
then the rise in temperature of the gas in B
is

1) 30 K 2) 18 K

3) 50 K 4) 42 K

26. A closed hollow insulated cylinder is filled with

7 4
1) 10 πJ 2) 10 πJ gas at 0oC and also contains an insulated
piston of negligible weight and negligible
2 −3
thickness at the middle point. The gas on one
3) 10 πJ 4) 10 πJ side is heated to 100oC. If the piston moves
22. The pressure and volume of a given mass of through 5 cm, the length of the hollow cylinder
gas are related as VP = constant. The bulk
α is
modulus for the gas in this process is
1) 13.65 cm 2) 27.3 cm
α P
1) 2)
P α 3) 38.6 cm 4) 64.6 cm

−1 27. A motor-car tyre has a pressure of 2

3) αP 4) ( αP )
amosphere at 27 oC. It suddenly bursts.
23. During an adiabatic process, the pressure of a
If ( C p / C v ) = 1.4 for air, find the resulting
gas is proportional to the cube of its absolute
temperature:
temperature. The value of Cp/Cv for the gas
is: 1) 27 K 2) 27oC
3 4
1) 2) 3) –27oC 4) 246oC
5 3
28. One mole of an ideal gas at an initial
5 3 temperature of TK does 6R joules of work
3) 4)
3 2 adiabatically. If the ratio of specific heats of
this gas at constant pressure and at constant
24. A monoatomic gas is suddenly compressed volume is 5/3, the final temperature (Tf) of gas
to (1/8)th of its initial volume adiabatically. will be:
The ratio of its final pressure to the initial
5 1) (T + 2.4) K 2) (T – 2.4) K
pressure is: (given γ = )
3 3) (T + 4) K 4) (T – 4) K

230
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

29. If for hydrogen C p − C v =

m and for nitrogen 32. Five moles of hydrogen ( γ =7 / 5 ) , initially at
Cp − Cv = n , where Vp and C v refer to STP, is compressed adiabatically so that its
specific heats per unit mass respectively temperature becomes 400oC. The increase
at constant pressure and constant volume, in the internal energy of the gas in kilojoules
the relation between m and n is (molecular is (R = 8.30 J/mol-K)
weight of hydrogen = 2 and molecular weight
1) 21.55 2) 41.50
of nitrogen = 14)
3) 65.55 4) 80.55
1) n = 14 m 2) n = 7 m
2
3) m = 7n 4) m = 14 n 33. In an adiabatic process, R = C v . The
3
30. Two samples A and B of a gas initially pressure of the gas will be proportional to:
at the same pressure and temperature
are compressed from volume V to V/2 (A 1) T5/3 2) T5/2
isothermally and B adibatically). The final
3) T5/4 4) T5/6
pressure of A is
34. An ideal as is expanding such that PT2 =
1) greater than the final pressure of B constant. The coefficient of volume expansion
2) equal to the final pressure of B A
of the gas is where T is temperature in
T
3) less than the final pressure of B
kelvin. Find the value of A.
4) twice the final pressure of B
1) 2 2) 4
31. Three processes compose a thermodynamics
cycle shown in the accompanying P-V, 3) 3 4) 5
diagram of an ideal gas. 35. When an ideal diatomic gas is heated at
constant pressure, the fraction of the heat
energy supplied which does external work is
2
. Find ‘m’.
m

1) 5 2) 9
3) 6 4) 7

Process 1 → 2 takes place at constant 36. The volume of air increases by 5% in

temperature, during this process 60 J of heat its adiabatic expansion. The percentage
enters the system. decrease in its pressure will be

Process 2 → 3 takes place at constant 1) 1% 2) 3%

volume. During this process 40 J of heat 3) 5% 4) 7%
leaves the system.
37. An ideal gas ( γ = 1.5) is expanded
Process 3 → 1 is adiabatic. adiabatically. How many times has the gas
to be expanded to reduce the r.m.s. velocity
What is the change in internal energy of the
of molecules 2.0 times?
system during process 3 → 1 ?
1) 16 2) 8
1) – 40 J 2) – 20 J
3) 4 4) 32
3) + 20 J 4) + 40 J

231
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

38. If at 60o and 80 cm of mercury pressure, a 42. Assertion : The specific heat of a gas
definite mass of a gas is compressed slowly, in an adiabatic process is
then the final pressure (in cm of Hg) of the zero and in an isothermal
gas, if the final volume is half of the initial process, it is infinite.
volume ( γ =3 / 2 ) is:
Reason : Specific heat of gas is directly
1) 100 2) 160 proportional to change of
heat in the system and
3) 170 4) 60
inversely proportional to
Integer Type change in temperature.
39. 70 calories of heat are required to raise the 43. Assertion : The ratio of specific heat of
temperature of 2 moles of an ideal gas at a gas at constant pressure
constant pressure from 30oC to 35oC. The and specific heat at constant
amount of heat in cal required to raise the volume for a diatomic gas
temperature of the same gas through same is more than that for a
range (30oC to 35oC) at constant volume is monoatomic gas.
40. When a system is taken from state i to state Reason : The molecules of a
f along the path iaf, it is found that Q = 50 cal monoatomic gas have more
and W = 20 cal. Along the path ibf Q = 36 cal. degree of freedom than
W along the path ibf in cal is those of a diatomic gas.

44. Assertion : Work done by a gas in

isothermal expansion is more
than the work done by the
gas in the same expansion
adiabatically.
41. One mole of an ideal gas undergoes a cyclic Reason : Te m p e r a t u r e r e m a i n s
process ABCD shown in the given diagram, constant in isothermal
then the net work done (in J) in the process expansion not in adiabatic
is : (1 atm = 106 dyne cm–2) expansion.

Statement Type

1) If both Statement I and Statement II are

true

2) If both Statement I and Statement II are

false
Assertion - Reason Type
3) If Statement I is true but Statement II is
1) If both the Assertion and Reason are true
false
and the Reason is true explanation of the
Assertion 4) If Statement I is false but Statement II is
2) If both the Assertion and Reason are true true
but the Reason is not the true explanation 45. Statement I : Thermodynamic processes
of the Assertion in nature are irreversible.
3) If Assertion is true but Reason is false
Statement II : Dissipative effects cannot be
4) If Assertion is false but Reason is true eliminated.

232
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

46. Statement I : First law of thermodynamics 49. Match the following columns.
is a restatement of the
principle of conservation of Column I Column II
energy. A) First law of P) path dependent
thermodynamics
Statement II : Energy is a fundamental
quantity. B) ∆W Q) ∆Q =0
47. Statement I : In a pressure cooker the
C) Isothermal R) P∆V
water is brought to boil. The
process
cooker is then removed from
the stove. Now on removing D) ∆Q S) conservation of
the lid of the pressure cooker, energy
the water starts boiling again. 1) A - S, B - Q, C - R, D - P
Statement II : The impurities in water bring 2) A - S, B - P, C - R, D - Q
down its boiling point.
3) A - S, B - R, C - Q, D - P
Match the following
48. Match the following columns. 4) A - S, B - Q, C - R, D - P

Column I Column II 50. Match the following columns for the process-
es with ideal gas.
A) Adiabatic walls P) ∆Q is Non-zero
Column I Column II
B) Diathermic walls Q) ∆Q =0 A) Isothermal P) ∆Q =∆U
process
C) Thermodynamic R) state variables B) Adiabatic Q) ∆Q =0
do not vary process
equilibrium with
time C) Isochoric process R) ∆U =0
D) Mechanical S) F and τ are D) Cyclic process S) ∆Q =∆W
ext ext
equilibrium both zero
1) A - Q, R; B - P; C - Q; D - R, S
1) A - Q, B - P, C - R, D - S
2) A - R, S; B - Q; C - Q; D - P, Q
2) A - P, B - Q, C - R, D - S
3) A - R, B - P, C - Q, D - S 3) A - R, S; B - Q; C - P; D - R, S

4) A - Q, B - P, C - S, D - R 4) A - P, Q; B - Q; C - P; D - R, S

233
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

KEY WITH HINTS

1. 1 dQ = dU + dW or dQ = 0 = –2 + dW; 8. 3 Given : dW = – dU; or dU + dW = 0

⇒ dW = 2J = work done by the gas or dQ = 0
∴ Work done on the gas = –2 J ∴ No heat is exchanged. Hence the
3R process is adiabatic.
2. 1 dU =
C v × dT, C v = 9. 2 ∆Q = ms∆T ;
2
3R Here, m = 100 g = 100 × 10–3 kg
∴ dU
= (100 − 0 )
2 s = 4184 J kg −1K −1
and ∆T= ( 50 − 30 )= 20 C
o

3
= × 8.31×100 =12.46 ×102 J ∴ ∆=Q 100 ×10 × 4184 × 20 −3
2
= 8.4 × 103 J
As, ∆Q = ∆U + ∆W ;
 R 
3. ∆U nCV=
2 = dT n   ∆T ; ∴ Change in internal energy,
 γ −1  ∆U =∆Q = 8.4 ×103 J =8.4 kJ

P∆V P ( 2V − V ) PV
∆U
⇒= = = ( ∆W =
0)
( γ − 1) ( γ − 1) γ −1 5.6 1
10. 1 Number of moles of=
He = ;
4. 3 ∆Q = ∆U + ∆W , ∆W = work done by the 22.4 4
γ−1 γ−1
system. When work is done on the system, Now T1 ( 5.6 ) = T2 ( 0.7 )
∆W is expressed as negative.

⇒ ∆Q = ∆U − ∆W 1
2/3

T1 = T2   ; ⇒ 4T1 =
T2
8
5. 3 Internal energy is path independent for
every process.
nR [ T2 − T1 ]
R Work done =
6. 1 Pressure P =   T = constant × T. γ −1
V
1
Take logs and differentiate R [3T1 ]
4 9
= = RT1
∆P ∆T 0.4 1 2 8
=
then = or
P T 100 T 3

or 11. 3 This process is considered as an adiabatic

process for which the below equations are
7. 3 From first law of thermodynamics applicable.
∆U = ∆Q − ∆W ; PV = constant and TV = constant. We
γ γ−1

Here ∆Q= mL= L ( m= 1) want to find the change in temperature.

Here γ =2 and V becomes 2V. Then the
= P0 ( Vf − V= second equation becomes TV = T’(2V);
and ∆W i) P0 ( V2 − V1 )
T
T′ =
2
∴ ∆U = L − P0 ( V2 − V1 )

234
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

12. 3 1 → 2 and 3 → 4 are isochoric process. ∆Q = zero + negative work = negative;

Since T-P graph is a straight line V is ⇒Q<0

constant.
Therefore, work done is zero
Hence answer is ( ∆E
= int 0 and Q < 0 )
∴ Wtotal =W23 + W41
16.
4 For isothermal process, temperature is
= P2 ( V3 − V2 ) + P4 ( V1 − V4 )
constant.
∴ Modulus of elasticity
= nR ( T3 − T2 ) + nR ( T1 − T4 )
dP dP
Eθ =
− −V
=
dV / V dV
= nR ( T3 − T2 + T1 − T4 )

dP
Since PV = constant, V +P=0
= 800 nR = 2400 R dV
 γ 
13. 3 Cp =   R ; dQ = nCp dT -----(i);
 γ −1  or
dU = nCv dT
P
∴dW = dQ − dU = n ( Cp − C v ) dT =
E θ V= P
V
= nRdT ---- (ii) Given P = constant;
Given : dQ = 100 J; 1 1
∴ Compressibility
= = = constant.
100 Eθ P
∴ ndT =
Cp
PA P
17. 1 = B
From eqn. (ii) ρA TA ρBTB
 100   γ −1 
dW = R   = R 100 ρ P  T 
 Cp   γR  =
A

A
 × B 
ρB  PB   TA 
 1.4 − 1 
  ×100 =
28.57 J
 P′   4T′  2
 1.4  =
× =
14. 3 AB is isobaric, AC is isothermal and AD is  2P′   T′  1
adiabatic ∴ W2 > W1 > W3 18. 3 At constant pressure, V ∝ T

⇒ ∆V ∝ ∆T
∆V ∆T  ∆V 
∴ =; T   = constant;
V T  V∆T 

15. 3 ∆E int =
0 for a complete cycle. T .δ = constant.

For the given cycle, work done is negative ∴ Graph of δ − T is a rectangular

∆Q = ∆E + ∆W hyperbola.

235
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

P1  V2 
γ
PV = constant (C)
γ

2 P1V1 P=
2 V or
γ γ
19. =
P2  V1 
2 γ
 RT 
or P   = C;
 P 
1.3 1.3
105  V / 2  1 or P T = C′ ;
1−γ γ
= =
or   
P2  V  2 γ /1−γ
or PT = C= ′′ K -----(ii)

∴ P2 = 21.3 ×105 N / m 2 Comparing eqn. (i) and (ii),

γ 3
20. 4 Let T1 be the initial temperature. Since we get; = −3 or γ =
1− γ 2
v rms ∝ T , the final temperature T2 = 4T1.
24. 1 For adiabatic process,
For an adiabatic process PV = constant;
γ

( γ−1)
T1V1 = T2 V2( γ−1)
γ−1
5
−1
∴ P1V1γ =
P2 V2γ ;
 V1  T2 V  3 γ 5/3
⇒  = 4⇒ 1 
= 4
= P2  V1   8V1 
 V2  T1  V2  ∴ = = = 32
P1  V2   V1 
V1 ( )3/2
⇒ = 4 = 8 25. 4 For A : As piston is free to move, the
V2
process is isobaric.
21. 3 In a cyclic process, dU = 0 ∆Q = µCp ( ∆T )1
∴ ∆Q = ∆V = Area of loop/circle. For B : As piston is held fixed, the process
=πr 2 =π (10 ) =102 πJ =102 πJ
2
is isochoric.
∴ ∆Q = µC v ( ∆T )2 ;
N.B.: Here pressure is in kilopascal and
volume is in litre. Now C p ( ∆T )1 = C v ( ∆T )2
1 litre = 10–3 m3, 1 k Pa = 103 Pa
∴ (1 litre ) × (1k Pa ) =10−3 m3 ×103 Pa ;
7R 5R ( )
× 30= ∆T 2 ; ∴ ∆T2 = 42K
2 2
Pa m3 = joule
26. 4 Let L be the length (in cm) of the hollow
2 Given VP = constant.;
α
22.
cylinder and r its radius. Since the mass
Take log and differentiate
of the gas remains unchanged and the
dV dP dV dP pressure of the gas in both sides are
∴ +α =0 or = −α
V P V P equal, we have, from Charle’s law,
V V2
α × stress P stress 1 = --------(1)
or strain = or = T1 T2
P α strain
L  L 
P Given V1 =  − 5  πr 2 , V2 =  + 5  πr 2
or = k = Bulk modulus of elasticity. 2  2 
α 3 −3
23. 4 Given: P ∝ T ; or PT = K ------ (i) o
T1 0=
= C 273K and= o
T2 100= C 373K
For adiabatic process:

236
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

Using these values in (1), we get ⇒ ∆Q 23 = ∆U 23 ⇒ −40

L L For a cyclic process, ∆U =0;
−5 +5
2 = 2 which gives L = 64.6 cm.
273 373 ∆U12 + ∆U 23 + ∆U 31 =0
γ 1−γ
27. 3 T P = constant;
0 + ( −40 ) + ∆U 31 = 0 ; ∆U 31 =
+40 J
(1−γ ) / γ
or TP = constant;
Cp 7
or T1P1
( 1−γ ) / γ
= T2 P2(1−γ ) / γ 32. 2 =γ= ;
Cv 5

µR
( γ−1) / γ 0.4/1.4 =
Work done × ∆T
P  1 γ −1
T2 T  2  = 300 ×  
or =
 P1  2
8.3 × 400 × 5
300 = 41.5 J
=
= = 246 K = −27 o C 7
−1
( 2 )2/7 5

−1 Work done = change in internal energy

4 W
28.= [ Pf Vf − Pi Vi ] ;
γ −1 = 41.5 kJ.
( ∆Q = 0 for adiabatic process)
−1
=
or 6R R [ Tf − Ti ]
5
−1 2
3 33. 2 R= CV ;
3
or Tf – Ti = – 4; or Tf = (T – 4) K
29. 3 Cp − Cv =
R; We know, C P − C V =
R;
R R m M 2 14 R
m
= ;=
n ; = = = 7 or γ −
= 1 R CV ( γ − 1)
; or =
M1 M 2 n M1 2 CV
m = 7 n 5
γ 1−γ
30. 3 For isothermal process Comparing γ = ; T P = constant = K
3
V
P1V= P2′ ⇒ P2′= 2P1 ------ (i)
2 ( γ / γ−1) 5
or P ∝ T Given γ =
For adiabatic process 3
γ
V
=
P1V γ P2   ;=
⇒ P2 2 γ P1 ------- (ii) γ 5
2 =
So, P ∝ T 5/2
( γ − 1) 2
Since γ > 1, P2 > P2′

 RT  2
31. 4 1 → 2 : isothermal, ∆U12 =
0; ; 34. 3 PT2 = k;  T = k
 V 
2 → 3 : isochoric, ∆W =
0
3
T ∝ V ------(i)

237
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

3T 2 ∆T ∝ ∆V -------(ii) 38. 2 Here, P1 = 80 cm of Hg

Differentiating,
If the gas is compressed slowly then the
3∆T ∆V
Dividing eqn. (ii) by eqn. (i) = process is isothermal.
T V
In this case, P1V1 = P2 V2 ;
P1V1 80 × V1
3 ∆V 3 ∴ P2= = = 160 cm of Hg
= ; =γ ∴A =3 V2 V1 / 2
T V∆T T
39. 50
∆W ( ∆Q )P − ( ∆Q )V Heat absorbed at constant pressure to
35. 4 = increase the temperature by dT is µC p dT
( ∆Q )P ( ∆Q )P
∴ Q1 = µCp dT = 70 cal .
Heat required to raise the temperature of
( ∆Q )V C
same gas by dT at constant volume is,
1−
= 1− V
=
( ∆Q )P CP
Q 2 = µC v dT;
Q2 Cv C
1 5 2 ∴ = or Q 2 =Q1 × v
=1 − =1 − = Q1 Cp Cp
γ 2 7

36. 4 PV = constant in adiabatic change

γ 1 1
or Q 2 = 70 × = 70 ×
γ 7/5
PV γ−1dV + V γ dP =
0
5
= 70 × = 50 cal
7
dP dV dP
= −γ. ⇒ × 100 40. 6 From first law of thermodynamics,
P V P
Q =∆U + W
 dV  For path iaf : 50 =∆U + 20
= −γ  ×100 
 V 
∴ ∆U
= U f − U=
i 30cal ;
dP
∴ ×100 = % decrease in pressure For path ibf : Q =∆U + W ;
P
= 1.4 × 5 = 7% or W= Q − ∆U= 36 − 30= 6cal
3RT 41. 800
37. 1 Vrms
= or Vrms ∝ T
M As the loop is traced in clockwise direction,
Vrms is to reduce two times, i.e., temperature the work done is positive.
of the gas will have to reduce four times Then, work done in the process = Area of
T′ 1 rectangle ABCD = AB × AD
or =
T 4 3 3
Here, AB = 4 − 2 = 2 litre = 2 × 10 cm
γ−1
During adiabatic process TV = T1V γ−1
AD = 8 − 4 = 4 atm = 4 ×106 dyne cm −2
1
V′ T γ−1 1
=   = 1.5−=
2
4= 16 ; Then work done, W = AB × AD
V ′
T  4 1

= 2 × 103 × 4 × 106 = 8 × 109 ergs = 800 J

∴ V′ =
16V

238
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

42. 1 In adiabatic process, no heat transfer 45. 1 In reversible process, there always occurs
takes place between gas and surroundings, some loss of energy. This is because
i.e., ∆Q = 0 . From definition of specific energy spent in working against the
∆Q dissipative force is not recovered back.
=
heat, C = 0. Some irreversible process occur in nature
M∆T
such as friction where extra work to cancel
Again for isothermal process, the effect of friction. Salt dissolves in
∆Q water but a salt does not separate by itself
∆T =0; ∴ C = =∞ into pure salt and pure water.
M∆T
43. 3 For a monoatomic gas, number of degrees 46. 3 First law law of thermodynamics is the
of freedom, n = 3 and for a diatomic gas restatement of the principle of conservation
n = 5. of energy as applied to heat energy.
Cp 2
As = γ = 1+ ;
Cv n 47. 3 The pressure cooker works on the principle
C 5
∴ For monoatomic gas, p= = 1.73 that the boiling point of a liquid increases
and for diatomic Cv 3 with increase of vapour pressure above
the liquid. Water, along with food to be
Cp 7  Cp   Cp  cooked are heated in a closed vessel, so
=1.4 or 
=∴  > 
Cv 5  C v  mono  C v di that the confined water vapour raises the
superincumbent pressure. As a result,
44. 2 The slope of adiabtic curve is γ times the water boils at a temperature higher than
slope of an isothermal curve. As γ > 1 , 100oC. when the cooker is removed from
therefore, adiabatic curve at any point the stove and the lid is removed, pressure
is steeper than isothermal curve at that again decreases due to which its boiling
point. Therefore, area under adiabatic point decreases and water starts boiling
curve is smaller than the area under again.
isothermal curve, i.e., work done by the
gas in adiabatic expansion is smaller than
the work done by the gas in isothermal 48. 1
expansion.
49. 3

50. 3

239
 CHAPTER
KINETIC THEORY OF GASES
12

Ideal gas
A gas which follows all gas laws and gas equation at every possible temperature and pressure is known
as an ideal or perfect gas.
Kinetic Theory of Gases
Postulates
• A gas consists of small identical, particles called molecules.
• The molecules are spherical, rigid and elastic point masses.
• The size of the molecule is negligible in comparison with the intermolecular distance.
• Molecules travel in all directions with all possible velocities.
• The molecules during their travel make collisions among themselves and also with the walls
of the container.
• Between molecules there is no attractive or repulsive force.
• When the molecules collides with the walls of the container, their momentum changes and
due to this, pressure is applied on the walls.
• The time of collision is negligible as compared to the interval between collisions.
• The average distance travelled by a molecule between two successive collisions is called
its mean free path.
Pressure Exerted by a gas
Consider an ideal gas of N molecules contained in a cubical box of side a.

 
Consider a molecule travelling with a velocity v from the origin strikes a wall, the velocity v
  
can be resolved into its components v x , v y and v z along x, y and z axis. After collision the molecule
retraces the same path.
∴ Change in momentum along x -direction, ∆= p mv x − ( −mv =x) 2mv x
2a
The interval between successive collision on the same wall is, t = .
vx

240
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

vx
The number of collision made by a single molecule in one sec on the same face is, n = .
2a

 va  mv 2x
∴ Change in momentum per sec on one face due to a single=
molecule =
  ( 2mv x )
 2a  a

m 2
Change in momentum due to all the molecules striking a face, F=
x Σv x
a

F Fx m 2 m 2
Pressure exerted on the wall Px = = = Σv x = Σv x ∴ V = a3
A A a3 V

m
∴ Total pressure exerted will be = Px + Py + Pz = Σ ( v 2x + v 2y + v z2 )
V

2 2 2 2 m 2
Let Px = Py = Pz = P and v x + v y + v z = v ; 3p = Σv
V

2 2 (v 2
+ v 22 + ....v 2N ) v2 m
∴ 3P =N ( v 2 )
If ( v ) is the mean square velocity, then ( v ) =
1
= Σ
N N V

1 m ( 2) 1 2 mN
=P N v
= =P ( v ) P is density of gas =
3V 3 V

v12 + v 22 + ....v 2N
v rms
The root mean square speed of the gas= ( v )2
=
N
3P 1
=
Also v rms ; v rms ∝ when P is constant.
ρ ρ
When pressure remaining a constant.
1 2
Kinetic energy per unit volume E= ρ( v)
2

For a given gas v rms ∝ T

When temperature remains constant.

1 3RT 3kT
v rms ∝ ; ∴ v rms= =
M M m
m = N0M; M - molecular weight, m - mass of a molecule.

241
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

( v1 + v2 + v3 + ....)
Average speed v av =
N

8RT
For continuous distribution v av =
πM
Most probable velocity in the velocity possessed by the maximum fraction of gaseous molecules
at a particular time.
2RT
v mp = ; M - molecular mass.
M
2RT 8RT 3RT
v mp : v avg : v rms = : :
M πM M

8
v mp : v avg : v rms = 2 : : 3
π

v mp < v av < v rms

Mean free path

Average distance travelled by a gas molecular between collisions is called mean free path.
1
λ=
N
2πd 2
v

N
n= is the no. of molecules per unit volume.
v
d - is the diameter of the molecule.
1
λ=
2πd 2 n
Degrees of freedom
The no. of independent ways in which a molecule or an atom can exhibit motion are called degrees
of freedom. The motion can be translational, rotational or vibrational or a combination of them.
The number of independent co-ordinates required to specify the dynamical state of the system
is called degrees of freedom.
A body moving in space have 3 translational degrees of freedom.
A diatomic gas molecule (H2, O2) can have 5 degree of freedom (3-translational and 2 rotational).
In addition to this a diatomic molecule can have two vibrational degrees of freedom. Such a molecule
has 7 degrees of freedom (At high temperatures)

242
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

A polyatomic molecule such as CO2, H2O have three translational and 3 rotational degrees of
freedom, so it have six degrees of freedom.

Law of equipartition of energy

The energy of a gas molecule is equally distributed among its various degrees of freedom.
Associated with each degree of freedom, there is an energy of ½ kT, where T is the absolute temperature.

For one molecule of a gas

Let f is the no. of degree of freedom of a molecule.

f
Energy related with all degree of freedom = kT
2
3
According to the equipartition theorem the average energy of an ideal gas molecule will be kT
2
. Since it has three degrees of freedom. For diatomic and polyatomic gases the average energy will be
5 6
  kT and   kT respectively.
2 2

Volume coefficient of expansion ( α ) and pressure coefficient of expansion ( β ) is same for an

1 o 1 o
ideal gas and is equal to / C i.e., α = β = / C
273 273

Equation of state for an ideal gas

A relation connecting pressure, temperature and volume of a gas describes the state of the gas.
That is physical condition of the system is called equation of state. The equation of state for an ideal
gas is given by

PV = µRT

m N
where µ = no. of moles of gas. µ
= = , where m is the mass of the gas. M is the mass of
M NA

a molecules. N is no. of molecules in the gas. NA is the Avogadros number.

N  R 
PV
= = RT  =  NT NkT , k is Boltzmanns constant.
NA  NA 

For 1 mole of a gas µ= 1, ∴ PV= RT

N
P = nkT n = no. of molecules / unit volume.
V

This is the gas equation for an ideal gas in terms of number of molecules per unit volume.

243
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Gas laws
1) Boyles’ law
For a given mass of an ideal gas at constant temperature, the volume of a gas is inversely
proportional to its pressure.
1
V∝ , where T = a constant and m = a constant
P
Charle’s law
For a given mass of an ideal gas,
Volume of a gas is directly proportional to its absolute temperature, when the pressure is constant.
V ∝ T , when P is a constant, m is a constant.
Gay - Lussac’s law
For a given mass of ideal gas at constant volume, pressure of a gas is directly proportional to its
absolute temperature.
P ∝ T , when m and V are constant.
Avogadro’s Law
Equal volumes of all gases at the same temperature and pressure contains equal number of
molecules.
N1 = N2 when P, V and T are the same for two gases.
Dalton’s Law
Pressure exerted by a gaseous mixture is equal to the sum of partial pressure of each component
gases in the mixture.
ie, P = P1 + P2 + ...........
Specific heat capacity
When a gas is heated it can change its volume or pressure. So a gas will be having two specific
heat capacities. Specific heat at constant volume and specific heat at constant pressure.
Specific heat at constant volume (Cv) is defined as the quantity of heat required to raise the
( ∆Q )v
temperature of unit mass of gas through 1 K when its volume is kept constant Vv =
m∆T
Specific heat at constant pressure (Cp) is the quantity of heat required to raise the temperature
( ∆Q )p
of unit mass of gas through 1 K, keeping the pressure constant. Cp =
m∆T
At constant volume heat supplied.
( ∆Q )v =∆U =µCv ∆T ∆U is the increase in internal energy.

At constant pressure ( ∆Q )p =µCp ∆T

P∆V
Cp − Cv =
µ∆T

244
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

for an ideal gas P∆V =µR∆T

Cp – Cv = R. This is called the Mayers Relation.
∴ Molar heat capacity at constant pressure is greater than that of constant volume.
∆U 1
Cv =
= Rf
µ∆T 2

1  f
Cp = Cv + R = Rf + R = R 1 + 
2  2
Cp
The ratio of specific heat capacity is γ =
Cv
Cp 2
γ= = 1 + ; f = 3n – r; n - no of atom/molecule; r - no. of possible relations/restrictions.
Cv f
for monoatomic n = 1, r = 0; f = 3n – r = 3 (translational)
Cp 5
For monoatomic gas =
γ =
Cv 3
For diatomic n = 2, r = 1; f = 3 × 2 – 1 = 5; 3-translational + 2 rotational.
7
Cp 2 R 7
For diatomic gas =
γ = =
Cv 5 R 5
2

R γR
=Cv = ; Cp
γ −1 γ −1

R 3 R 5
Cv
For monoatomic; = = R ; for diatomic=
Cv = R
5 2 7 2
−1 −1
3 5

8
Cp 2 R 4
For polyatomic gas =
γ = =
Cv 6 R 3
2
γ decreases with number of atoms in a molecule.

Specific heat of solids

1
2 × kT =
Average energy associated with an atom due to its oscillations in one dimension = kT
2
In three dimension, average energy = U = 3kT

245
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

For 1 gm mole of solid U = 3kT × NA = 3RT

From Ist law of thermodynamics

∆Q = ∆W + ∆U = ∆U + P∆V
For solid ∆V is negligible

∴ ∆Q = ∆U
∆Q ∆U 3RT
C
= = = = 3R
∆T ∆T T

Specific heat capacity of water

Consider water like a solid made up of 3 atoms (2 hydrogen + 1 oxygen)

Total energy of 1 mole of water U = 3 × 3kT × NA = 9RT

∆U 9RT
C
= = = 9R
∆T T

When n1 molecules of an ideal gas is mixed with n2 moles of another gas.

n1M1 + n 2 M 2
M mixtures =
n1 + n 2

n1T1 + n 2 T2
Tmixutre =
n1 + n 2

n1C v1 + n 2 C v2
Cv mixture =
n1 + n 2

n1Cp1 + n 2 Cp2
CP mixture =
n1 + n 2

Cp mixture
γ mixture =
C v mixture

246
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

QUESTIONS

1. Two vessels A and B having equal volume 5. How much should the pressure be increased
contain equal masses of hydrogen in A and in order to decrease the volume of a gas by
helium in B at 300 K. Then, mark the correct 5% at a constant temperature?
statement. 1) 5 % 2) 5.26 %
1) The pressure exerted by hydrogen is half 3) 10 % 4) 4.26 %
that exerted by helium
6. A perfect gas at 27 C is heated at constant
o

2) The pressure exerted by hydrogen is equal pressure so as to double its volume. The
to that exerted by helium temperature of the gas will be:
3) Average KE of the molecules of hydrogen 1) 300oC 2) 327oC
is half the average KE of the molecules of 3) 600oC 4) 54oC
helium
7. 1 mole of H2 at 47oC and at pressure 4
4) The pressure exerted by hydrogen is twice atmosphere is mixed with 2 mole of N 2
that exerted by helium. at 127oC and at 5 atmosphere such that
2. The temperature of a gas at pressure P the volume of their mixture is the sum of
and volume V is 27oC. Keeping its volume their initial volumes. If the mixture is at
constant, if its temperature is raised to 927oC, temperature 97oC, pressure of the mixture
then its pressure will be will be nearly:

1) 2 P 2) 3 P 1) 2.2 atm 2) 3.4 atm

3) 4.6 atm 4) 1.8 atm
3) 4 P 4) 6 P
8. A vessel contains 1 mole of O2 gas (molar
3. The ratio of the molecular masses of two
mass 32) at a temperature T. The pressure
gases is 7/8. What is the ratio of the number
of the gas is P. An identical vessel containing
of moles of the two gases, if they are in two
one mole of He gas (molar mass 4) at a
different containers and have the same mass
temperature 2T has a pressure of
for each gas?
P
8 7 1) 2) P
1) 2) 8
7 8
3) 2P 4) 8P
7 5 9. If the volume of a gas is doubled at constant
3) 4) pressure, the average translational kinetic
5 7
energy of its molecules will
4. An inflated rubber balloon contains one 1) be doubled
mole of an ideal gas which has a pressure
2) remain the same
P, volume V and temperature T. If the
temperature rises to 1.1 T and the volume is 3) increase by a factor 3
increased to 1.05 V, the final pressure will be: 4) become four times
1) 1.1 P 10. 250 litre of an ideal gas is heated at constant
2) P pressure from 27oC such that its volume
becomes 500 litres. The final temperature is
3) less than P
1) 54oC 2) 300oC
4) between P and 1.1 P
3) 327oC 4) 600oC

247
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

11. In order to increase the volume of a gas to 3 16. Oxygen and hydrogen in two enclosures have
times at constant pressure at 40oC, the final same mass, volume and pressure. The ratio
temperature should be of the temperatures of the two gases is
1) 666oC 2) 777oC 1) 1 : 4 2) 4 : 1
3) 555oC 4) 333oC
3) 16 : 1 4) 1 : 16
12. Figure shows the pressure P versus volume
V graphs for a certain mass of a gas at two 17. A jar has a mixture of hydrogen and oxygen
constant temperature T1 and T2 . Which of gases in the ratio of 1 : 5. The ratio of mean
the following inference is correct? kinetic energies of hydrogen and oxygen
molecules is
1) 1 : 6 2) 1 : 4
3) 1 : 1 4) 2 : 1
18. Calculate the average translational kinetic
energy of the molecules of an ideal gas at
0oC and at 100oC. Given Avogadro’s number
N = 6.02 ×10 23 and Boltzmann’s constant
k =1.38 × 10–23 JK–1.
1) T1 = T2 1) 5.65 × 10–21 ; 7.72 × 10–21 J
2) T1 > T2
2) 5.65 × 10–20 ; 7.72 × 10–20 J
3) T1 < T2
4) no inference can be drawn due to 3) 5.65 × 1021 ; 7.72 × 10–21 J
insufficient information 4) 5.65 × 10–21 ; 7.72 × 1020 J
13. Suppose ideal gas equation follows VP3 =
19. A balloon has 5.0 moles of helium at 7oC.
constant. Initial temperature and volume
Calculate the total internal energy of the
of the gas are T and V respectively. If gas
system.
expand to 27 V then its temperature will
become 1) 5 × 104 J
1) T 2) 9T 2) 2.9 × 104 J
T
3) 27 T 4) 3) 1.74 × 104 J
9
4) 8.0 × 104 J
14. The initial temperature of a gas is 100 C.o

The gas is contained in closed vessel. If 20. N molecules, each of mass m, of gas A and
the pressure of the gas is increased by 5%, 2 N molecules, each of mass 2m, of gas B
calculate the increase in temperature of the are contained in the same vessel which is
gas: maintained at a temperature T. The mean
square velocity of molecules of B type is
1) 1oC 2) 2oC
denoted by v2 and the mean square velocity
3) 4oC 4) 5oC v1
15. An ideal gas has a volume of 3V at 2 of A type is denoted by v1, then is
v2
atmosphere pressure. Keeping the
temperature constant, its pressure is doubled. 1) 2 2) 1
The volume of the gas will be:
1) 6 V 2) 3 V 1 2
3) 4)
3) 1.5 V 4) 1 V 3 3

248
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

21. The average translatory energy and rms 27. At a given temperature, the ratio of root mean
speed of molecules in a sample of oxygen square velocities of hydrogen molecule and
gas at 300 K are 6.21 × 10–21 J and 484 ms–1 helium atom will be
respectively. The corresponding values
at 600 K are nearly (assuming ideal gas 1) 1: 2 2) 2 :1
behaviour)
3) 1 : 2 4) 2 : 1
1) 12.42 × 10–21 J, 968 ms–1
2) 7.78 × 10–21 J, 684 ms–1 28. The molecules of a given mass of a gas
3) 6.21 × 10–21 J, 968 ms–1 have root mean square speed of 100 m/s
4) 12.42 × 10–21 J, 684 ms–1 at 27oC and 1.00 atmospheric pressure,
22. An ideal gas is heated at constant volume what will be the root mean square speeds of
until its pressure doubles. Which one of the the molecules of the gas at 127oC and 2.0
following statements is correct? atmospheric pressure?
1) The mean speed of the molecules doubles 200 100
2) The number of molecules doubles 1) m/s 2) m/s
2 3
3) The mean square speed of the molecules
doubles
200
4) The number of molecules per unit volume 3) m/s 4) 200 3 m / s
doubles 3
23. On the basis of kinetic theory of gases, the
29. A closed vessel of fixed volume contains
mean K.E. of 1 mole per degree of freedom
a mass m of an ideal gas, the root mean
is
square speed being v. Additional mass m of
1 3 the same gas is pumped into the vessel and
1) RT 2) RT
2 2 the pressure rises to 2P, the temperature
remaining the same as before. The root mean
1 3 square speed of the molecules now is:
3) kT 4) kT
2 2
 v 
24. The temperature at which the root mean 1)   2) v 2
 2
square velocity of the gas molecules would
become twice of its value at 0oC is 3) 2v 4) v
1) 819oC 2) 1092oC
3) 1100 Co
4) 1400oC 30. At what temperature will the rms speed of
25. If the masses of all molecules of a gas are oxygen molecules become just sufficient for
halved and their speeds doubled, then the escaping from the Earth’s atmosphere?
ratio of initial and final pressures would be: (Given : Mass of oxygen molecule (m) = 2.76
1) 2 : 1 2) 1 : 2 × 1 0 –26 k g B o l t z m a n n ’ s c o n s t a n t
3) 4 : 1 4) 1 : 4 k B 1.38 ×10−23 J K −1 )
=
26. If the molecular weights of two gases are M1 1) 2.508 × 104 K 2) 8.360 × 104 K
and M2, then at a temperature T, the ratio of
root mean square velocities v1 and v2 will be 3) 5.016 × 104 K 4) 1.254 × 104 K
M1 M2 31. Six molecules have speeds 2 unit, 5 unit, 3
1) 2)
M2 M1 unit, 6 unit, 3 unit and 5 unit. The rms speed
is
M1 + M 2 M1 − M 2 1) 4 unit 2) 1.7 unit
3) 4)
M1 − M 2 M1 + M 2 3) 4.2 unit 4) 5 unit

249
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

32. At what temperature is the rms velocity of a 39. The temperature at which rms velocity of
hydrogen molecule equal to that of an oxygen helium molecules is equal to the rms velocity
molecule at 47oC? of hydrogen molecules at NTP is
1) 80 K 2) – 73 K 1) 100 K 2) 300 K
3) 3 K 4) 20 K
3) 502 K 4) 546 K
33. If cs is the velocity of sound in air and c is the
rms velocity, then 40. The molecules of a given mass of a gas have
1) cs < c 2) cs = c a rms velocity of 200 m/sec at 27oC and 1.0
1/2 × 103 N/m2 pressure. When the temperature
γ is 127oC and pressure is 0.5 × 105 N/m2, the
3) cs = c   4) None of these
3 rms velocity in m/sec will be
34. Molecular hydrogen at one atmosphere and 100 2
helium at two atmospheres occupy volume 1) 2) 100 2
3
V each at the same temperature. The rms
velocity of hydrogen molecules is x times the
400
rms velocity of helium molecules. What is the 3) 4) None of these
value of x? 3
1 Numerical Type
1) 2) 2
2 41. A vessel has 6 g of hydrogen at pressure
P and temperature 500 K. A small hole is
3) 2 4) 3 made in it so that hydrogen leaks out. How
many grams of hydrogen leaks out if the final
35. The molecular weights of oxygen and pressure is P/2 and temperature falls to 300
hydrogen are 32 and 2 respectively. The K?
root mean square velocities of oxygen and
hydrogen at NTP are in the ratio 42. Air is pumped into an automobile tube upto
1) 4 : 1 2) 1 : 16 a pressure of 200 kPa in the morning when
the air temperature is 22oC. During the day,
3) 16 : 1 4) 1 : 4
temperature rises to 42o C and the tube
36. A sample of oxygen is compressed to half of
expands by 2%. The pressure (in k Pa) of
its original volume at constant temperature.
the air in the tube at this temperature, will be
If the rms velocity of gas molecules was
approximately
originally c, their new rms velocity is
1) 4 c 2) 2 c 43. Two kilograms of water is converted into
c steam by boiling at atmospheric pressure.
3) c 4) The volume changes from 2 × 10–3 m3 to
2 3.34 m3. The work done in kJ by the system
37. The ratio of the vapour densities of two gases is approximately equal to
at the same temperature is 8 : 9. The ratio Assertion - Reason Type
of the rms velocities of their molecules is
1) 8 : 9 2) 9 : 8 1) If both the Assertion and Reason are true
and the Reason is true explanation of the
3) 9: 8 4) 8: 9 Assertion

38. At a pressure of 24 × 105 dyne cm–2, the 2) If both the Assertion and Reason are true
volume of O2 is 10 litre and mass is 20 g. The but the Reason is not the true explanation
rms velocity will be of the Assertion
1) 800 ms–1 2) 400 ms–1 3) If Assertion is true but Reason is false
3) 600 ms –1
4) Data is incomplete 4) If Assertion is false but Reason is true

250
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

44. Assertion : The rms velocity of gas 49. Statement I : A hydrogen filled balloon
molecules is doubled, when stops rising after it has
temperature of gas becomes attained a certain height in
four times. the sky.
Reason :
Statement II : The atmospheric pressure
45. Assertion : The number of degrees decreases with height and
of freedom of diatomic become zero when maximum
molecules is five. height is attained.
Reason : Diatomic molecules have
three translational degrees Match the following
of freedom, two rotational
degrees of freedom. 50. For a monoatomic gas at temperature T,
46. Assertion : All molecular motion ceases match the following.
at –273oC.
Reason : Temperature –273oC cannot Column I Column II
be attained.
A) Mean square P)
Statement Type 2RT
speed
1) If both Statement I and Statement II are M0
true B) RMS speed of Q)
8RT
2) If both Statement I and Statement II are gas molecule
false πM 0
3) If Statement I is true but Statement II is C) Average speed R)
false 3RT
of gas molecule
4) If Statement I is false but Statement II is M0
true D) Most probable S) v12 + v 22 + .... + v 2N
47. Statement I : Internal energy of an ideal speed of gas
gas does not depend upon molecule N
volume of the gas
Statement II : Internal energy of ideal gas 1) A - Q; B - P; C - P; D - Q
depends on temperature of
gas.
2) A - S; B - R; C - Q; D - P
48. Statement I : The internal energy of a
real gas is function of both,
temperature and volume. 3) A - R; B - P; C - Q; D - S
Statement II : At constant pressure, some
heat is spent in expansion of 4) A - S; B - R; C - P; D - Q
the gas.

251
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

KEY WITH HINTS

1. 4 PV = µRT ; V2 T2
6. 2 At constant pressure, V ∝ T, ∴ =
m RT m RT V1 T1
=PH2 = , PHe
M H2 V M He V
 V2 
PH2 M He 4 ×10−3 T2 =
  T1 =×
2 300 = 327 o C
600 K =
∴ = = = 2  V1 
PHe M H2 2 ×10−3
µ1RT1 1× R × 320
7. 3=V1 = = 80R
2. 3 By gas equation, P1 4
P P2
=
1
= , T1 300 =
K, T2 1200 K
T1 T2 µ 2 RT2 2 × R × 400
=
V2 = = 160 R
P2 5
PT 1200
P2 =1 2
P1 ×
= 4P ; P2 = 4P
=
T1 300
=∴ Pmix
( µ1 + µ=
2 ) RT 3 × R × 370

M Total mass ( V1 + V2 ) 240R
3. 1 =
µ = ;
M 0 Molecular mass = 4.6 atm
8. 3 The amount of each gas is 1 mole and
µ M / ( M 0 )1 ( M 0 )2 8 volume of gas is also the same in both
∴ =
1
= = cases, hence P ∝ T .
µ2 M / ( M 0 )2 ( M 0 )1 7
P T2 T   2T 
∴=2
; =
P2  2 = P1  =  P 2P
4. 4 Using PV = nRT; P1 T1  T1   T 
P1V1 P2 V2 9. 1 If volume is doubled at constant pressure,
or, = ;
T1 T2 then absolute temperature of the gas is
doubled. So, average translational kinetic
Here, P1 = P, V1 = V, T1 = T, T2 = 1.1 T
energy is also doubled.
and V2 = 1.05 V
10. 3 V doubled, T doubled
P1V1T2 P × V ×1.1T
P2
∴= = = 1.05 P T1 = (27 + 273)K = 300 K
V2 T1 1.05V × T
5 95V T2 = 2 × 300 K = 600 K;
5. 2 New volume, V1 = V− V=
100 100 T2 = (600 – 273)o C = 327oC
New pressure, T′ 3V
PV PV 100 11. 1 = = 3;
=
P1 = = P T V
V1 ( 95 /100 ) V 95
∴ % increase in pressure = 3 [ 40 + 273] K
=′ 3T
T
 P1 − P   P1  3 × 313 K = 939 K
=   ×100=  − 1 ×100 T = (939 – 273o) C = 666oC
 P  P 
12. 3 For a given pressure, from the graph V is
 100  small for T1. Since V ∝ T ,
= 
− 1 ×100
= 5.26%
 95  therefore, T1 < T2

252
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

k 5
13. 2 VP3 = constant = k ⇒ P = ; ( K.E.) H 2 2 RT 1
V1/3 17. 3 = =
( K.E.) O 2 5
RT 1
k 2
Also PV =
µRT ⇒ .V
V1/3 18. 1 (a) Average translational K.E. of a
molecule of an ideal gas is
2/3 µRT 3
µRT ⇒ V
= = E= kT , where T = temperature in kelvin;
k 2
At T = 0oC = 273 K,
V 
2/3
T1 3
Hence,  1  = E =× (1.38 ×10 −23
) × 273
2
 V2  T2
−21
5.65 ×10
= 100o C =
J; At T = 373K
2/3
 V  T
⇒  = ⇒ T2 = 9T
 27V  T2
3
E = × (1.38 ×10 −23
) × 373 =7.72 ×10−21 J
2
T1 P1
14. 4 Volume of gas is constant =
T2 P2 19.
3 Given that number of moles of
helium=5;
T = 7oC = 7 + 273 = 280 K
100 P
= Hence, number of atoms
(100 + ∆T ) 1.05P
(He is monoatomic)
5P = Number of moles × Avogadro number
105P =100P + P.∆T; =∆T =5o C = 5 × 6.023 × 1023 = 30.115 × 1023
P
24
= 3.0 ×10 atoms
15.
3 Initial V1 = 3V
Now, average kinetic energy per molecule
Initial pressure P1 = 2 atmosphere.
3
Final pressure, = K BT
2
P2 = 2P1 = 2 × 2 = 4 atmosphere.
Here, KB = Boltzmann’s constant.;
According to the Boyle’s law we have
[Helium has only 3 degrees of freedom]
P1V1 = P2V2 (where V2 is the final volume
of gas) ; ∴ Total energy of all the atoms or total
internal energy
or 2 × 3V = 4 × V2 or V2 = 1.5 V
3
m = K BT × Number of atom
16. 3 PV =
µRT or PV = RT 2
M
3
m = ×1.38 ×10−23 × 280 × 3.0 × 1024
For the given data, RT = constant; 2
M
= 1.74 × 104 J
TO2 MO 32 1M 2 3PV 3RT
∴ = 2 = =16 20. 2 As,=P c2 =
c or=
TH2 M H2 2 3V M M

253
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

2 3RT 3RT 3RT

v1
For gas A, = = ; 26. =
2 RMS velocity, c = v RMS
M M M

2 3RT
For gas B, v 2 = ; v 3RT M2 M2
M 1 = × =
v2 M1 3RT M1
v12 v1
So, =1 ⇒ 1
=
v 22 v2 3RT v rms of He
27. 2 v rms = ,
M v rms of H
c2 T2
21. 4 As, =
c1 T1 M of He 4 2
=
= =
M of H 2 1
T 2T 28. 3 For a given mass of the gas,
=
or c 2 c= 2
c
1
T1 T 3RT
=v rms or v rms ∝ T ,
M
= c=
2 484=2 684 ms −1
( vrms ) =
T1
....... (i)
( vrms )2 T2
c2 ( c 2 )
2
E
∴ 2 = 22 = =2
Given that, ( v rms ) = 100 ms
−1
E1 c1 c2
or E2 = 2E1 = 2 × 6.21 × 10–21 J
T1 = 300 K, T2 = 400 K
= 12.42 × 10–21 J
22. 3 Assume the mass of the gas is unchanged. 100 300 3
From eqn. (i), = =
Use the kinetic theory equation to relate ( vrms )2 400 2
the various factors to the pressure change
3RT 2 3RT 2 ×100 200 −1
=
at constant volume. c = ;c ∴ ( v rms )2 = = ms
M M 3 3

1 1 m 2m P′
23. 1 kT × N =RT 4 PV
29.= = RT; P′V = RT, 2;
2 2 M M P

C1 273 + t 3P 3P
24. 1 = v rms
= =
C0 273 ρ (m / V)
or 4 × 273 – 273 = t or t = 3 × 273 = 819oC
1 mN 2 1 ( m / 2) N 3P′ 3 ( 2P )
25. 2 P
= = v ; P′ ( 2v )2 =
v′rms =
3 V 3 V ( 2m / V ) 2(m / V)

P′ 2 P 3P
∴= or = 1: 2 =
= v= v
P 1 P′ (m / V) rms

254
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

3 3KT 3RT cO2 2 1

30. 2 vescape = vrms ; or, 11.2 × 10 = 35. 4=c ;= =
m M cH2 32 4

36. 3 No change in temperature. No change in

(11.2 ×103 )2 m rms velocity.
∴T =
3K C ρ2 9
37. 3 =1
=
C2 ρ1 8
(11.2 ×103 )2 × 2.76 ×10−26
=
3 ×1.38 ×10−23 3PV
38. 3 C=
M
= 8.360 ×104 K

c12 + c 22 + .... + c62 3 × 24 ×105 ×10 ×1000
31. 3 c rms = = cm s −1
6 20
= 6 × 104 cms–1 = 600 ms–1
22 + 52 + 32 + 62 + 32 + 52 3RT
= 39. 4 C
= or T ∝ M
6 M

= 3=
2 4.242 unit T′ 4
∴ = =2 or T′ =2T
T 2
32. 4 ( vrms )H 2
= ( v rms )O
2
or T = 2 × 273 K = 546 K
40. 3 Change in pressure will not affect the rms
velocity of molecules. So we will calculate
only the effect of temperature.
3RT 3R ( 320 )
=
= ⇒ T 20K v300o 300
2 32 As v rms ∝ T; ∴ =
v 400o 400

γP 3PV 3P 3 200 3 400

33. =
3 As, cs and c
= = = ⇒ = ; v 400 =
ρ m ρ
4 v 400 4 3

γ m
cs = c 41. 1 PV = RT ;
3 M

34. 3 c H 2 = xc He 6
PV
Initially, = R × 500
M

1 P (6 − x )
As c ∝ ; M He =
x M H2 =V R × 300
M
2 M
(if x g gas leaks out);
2
=
4 x =
2 or x = or x 2 6 5
2 =
Hence, 2 × ;∴x =
1 gm
6−x 3

255
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

42. 209 46. 3 When T = – 273oC = –273 + 273 = 9 K

By ideal gas equation PV = nRT Hence, c = 0 as c = T

All molecular motion stops. According
where, P is pressure, V the volume, n the the Charles’ law, the lowest attainable
number of moles, R the gas constant and temperature is – 273.15 oC
T the temperature.
47. 1 Internal energy of an ideal gas does not
P1V1 P2 V2 depend upon volume of the gas, because
∴ = ; V2 =+
V 0.02V there are no forces of attraction/repulsion
T1 T2
amongst the molecules of an ideal gas.
Also, internal energy of ideal gas depends
T1 = 295 K; T2 = 315 K
on temperature.
200 × V P2 ×1.02V 48. 1 In real gas, intermolecular force exist. Work
=
295 315 has to be done in changing the distance
between the molecules. Therefore,
internal energy of real gas is the sum
200 × 315 of internal kinetic and internal potential
=
⇒ P2 = ; P2 209 kPa
295 ×1.02 energy which are function of temperature
and volume respectively. Also change in
43. 340 internal energy of a system depends only
on initial and final states of the system.
W = P × ∆V = 1.01× 105 ( 3.34 − 2 × 10−3 )
49. 1 The atmospheric pressure is due to the
= 1.01× 3.338 × 105 ≈ 3.40 × 105 J = 340 kJ force exerted by the atmosphere on the

region below it. But a hydrogen filled
44. 1 The rms velocity of gas molecules is given balloon rises up in the atmosphere due to
by density difference only. As the density of
hydrogen gas is less than that of air, the
3kT hydrogen filled balloon rises up in the air.
v rms= c= ; So, c ∝ T But as we know that density of air also
m
keeps on decreasing as we move up, so
Hence, it is clear that when temperature there will be a point up in the atmosphere
becomes four times, the rms velocity will where the rising balloon will find that its
be two times. density is same as that of the surrounding
atmosphere. As there is no density
45. 1 Diatomic molecules have five degrees of difference between the balloon and the
freedom, i.e., three translational and two atmosphere, the balloon will stop rising.
rotational. 50. 2

256
 CHAPTER
OSCILLATIONS
13

SIMPLE HARMONIC MOTION

Periodic Motion

When a body or moving particle repeats its motion along a definite path after a regular interval
of time, the motion is said to be periodic motion. The constant interval of time after which the motion is
repeated is called time period (T). The particle may travel along a linear or curved path.

eg: (1) Motion of pendulum of a clock. (2) Motion of planets around the sun

Oscillatory Motion

When a body moves back and forth (to and fro) about a fixed point after a regular interval of time,
the motion is said to be oscillatory. The fixed point about which the body oscillates is called equilibrium
position or mean position.

eg. (1) The movement of a simple pendulum. (2) The vertical movement of a mass suspended on a
spring balance.

The force or torque directed towards mean position in oscillatory motion is called restoring force
or torque.

Every oscillatory motion is periodic. But all periodic motions are not oscillatory.

Simple Harmonic Motion (SHM)

An oscillatory motion is said to be simple harmonic if the restoring force acting on the body in
oscillatory motion is directly proportional to the displacement of the body, and is directed towards the
equilibrium position.

SHM can be divided into two.

(1) Linear SHM - When a particle moves to and fro about the mean position, along a straight line
then the motion is called linear SHM. eg. Motion of a mass connected to a spring.

A and B are extreme positions and O is the mean position.

(2) Angular SHM - When a system oscillates angularly with respect to a fixed axis, then its motion
is called angular SHM. eg: Motion of the bob of a simple pendulum.

257
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Characteristics of SHM

Displacement of a particle in SHM is the distance of the particle from the mean position at that
=
instant, Displacement y A sin ( ωt + φ )

Amplitude: The maximum value of displacement of the particle from equilibrium position is called
amplitude.

y = ± A when sin ( ωt + φ ) = ± 1 ---------(1)

Period of SHM (T)

The smallest time interval after which the oscillatory motion gets repeated is called Time period.

2π
T= ---------(2)
ω
Frequency (v): The number of vibrations completed in unit time interval is called frequency of oscillation,

1 ω
ν= = unit-Hz. (Hertz)
T 2π
2π
Angular frequency (ω): ω= = 2πν , unit - rad/sec.
T
Phase: The state of a vibrating particle is described by the phase of the particle at an instant
=y A sin ( ωt + φ ) , ( ωt + φ ) , is the phase. At =
t 0, φ is called epoch or initial phase.

SHM as a projection of circular motion

Suppose a particle is moving along the circumference of a circle of radius A with angular speed
ω . The points Q and R are foot of the perpendiculars drawn from P to X axis and Y axis.

As the particle P completes one revolution in the anticlockwise direction, the projection R and Q
moves in the X axis and Y axis respectively completing one oscillation. In circular motion the oscillation
of the projection in any axis represents the simple harmonic motion.

258
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Let at t = 0, particle P is on the X axis. After a time t, the point P makes an angle θ with the X-axis,
then

=x A cos ωt 
 ---------(3)
=y A sin ωt 

Here, x and y are the displacements (OQ and OR from the centre) at time t; They represent
displacement equations of SHM.
So when P is under uniform circular motion, Q and R perform SHM about O, with the same angular
speed ω as that of P.
2
The acceleration of P = a c = ω A towards centre.
2 2 2 2
ac can be resolved into two components; a R =Aω sin ωt =ω y and a Q =Aω cos ωt =ω x
aR and aQ are the accelerations corresponding to R and Q respectively.

Velocity (v)
Time rate of change of displacement of a particle at an instant is defined as the velocity in SHM.
dy d
v = = ( A sin ωt ) = Aω cos ωt
dt dt

y2
± Aω 1 − sin 2 ωt =
v = ± Aω 1 −
A2

2 2
= ± ω A − y ; [ y = A sin ωt ]
2
v =ω2 ( A 2 − y 2 )
At mean position y = 0, v = ± ωA ; At y = ± A , then the velocity of particle executing SHM is

zero.
The direction of velocity is towards or away from mean position.

Acceleration in SHM
Time rate of change of velocity of a particle at an instant is called acceleration.
dv d
a= = ( Aω cos ωt )
dt dt

= −ω2 A sin ωt = −ω2 y

The acceleration of the particle executing SHM is always directed towards the mean position.
Acceleration is maximum at extreme position ( −ω A ) and minimum at the mean position (0).
2

259
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Force law for simple harmonic motion

Using Newton’s second law of motion, and the expression for acceleration ( a = −ω y ) of a particle
2

undergoing SHM, the force acting on a particle of mass m in SHM is

F =ma =−mω2 y

i.e., F = – ky ------ (4)

2
where k= mω ------- (5)

k
or ω = ------ (6)
m

Like acceleration, force is always directed towards the mean position - hence it is sometimes
called the restoring force in SHM.

Note that the force in Eq. (4) is linearly proportional to y. A particle oscillating under such a force
is, therefore, calling a linear harmonic oscillator. In the real world, the force may contain small additional
terms proportional to y2, y3, etc. These then are called non-linear oscillators.

Energy of particle in SHM

Potential Energy

dU
F=− ⇒ ∫ dU = − ∫ Fdy ; F = –ky for SHM ∴ ∫ dU =− ∫ ( −ky ) dy
dx
1 2 1 2
=U ky + C ; At y = 0, U = U0, therefore C = U0. ∴U
= ky + U 0
2 2
1 2
U0 is the PE at equilibrium position. When U0 = 0, U = ky
2
=
Also y A sin ( ωt + φ )

1 2 k 2 1 2 2
=U =ky  A sin (=
 ωt + φ )  kA sin ( ωt + φ )
2 2 2
1 2 2 1
φ 0, =
If = U kA sin ω= t mω2 A 2 sin 2 ωt
2 2
PE is minimum at mean position and maximum at extreme position ( ± A )

260
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

T 3T
PE is a periodic function of time. It is minimum at t = 0, , T, etc. and maximum at
2 2

T 3T 5T
, and .
4 4 4
Kinetic Energy

For a particle in SHM m and v are mass and velocity, then KE at any instant is given by

1 1 1
mv 2 = mω2 ( A 2 − y 2 ) = k ( A 2 − y 2 ) ------------(7)
2 2 2
Also v= Aω cos ( ωt + φ )

1
KE
= mω2 A 2 cos 2 ( ωt + φ )
2

1
m 2 A 2 cos 2 ωt ------------(8)
If initial phase φ is zero.; KE =ω
2
1 2
KE is maximum at mean position  kA  and minimum (0) at extreme position.
2 
T 3T 5T
KE is a periodic function of time. It is minimum at t = , , .....
4 4 4
T 3T
It is maximum at 0, , T, ,....
2 2
Total Energy

1 2 1 1 2
E = PE + KE = ky + k ( A 2 − y 2 )= kA = a ------------(9)
2 2 2
1 2 2 1 1 2
Also E
= kA sin ωt + kA 2=
cos 2 ωt kA
2 2 2

261
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Some Sytems executing Simple Harmonic Motion

Spring System

When a spring is given a small displacement by stretching or compressing, a restoring force is

developed in it. According to Hook’s law. F ∝ − x or F = – kx [k is spring constant]

Spring constant depends on length (l), radius of the wire used and the material used.

For any spring, kl = a constant where l is the natural length of spring.

When a spring is stretched or compressed, work done on it is stored as elastic potential energy.

When the force F is applied on a spring produces a compression or stretching by a distance x,

1 2
then W
= ∫ Fdx= ∫ kx dx; U
= W
=
2
kx

1
When the spring is stretched from a length 1 to  2 then work done
= W
= k (  22 − 12 ) --------(10)
2
Here the spring is considered massless.

Spring Mass System

When a small mass is suspended from a massless spring, then this arrangement is known as
spring mass system. For small displacement the motion of the spring is SHM.

d2x
F=
−kx ⇒ m 2 =−kx
dt
d2x k k
2
= − x = −ω2 x; ω2 =
dt m m

262
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

2π m 1 k
Time period T = = 2π , Frequency ν =
ω k 2π m

 1 
It is seen that ( T ∝ m ) and  T ∝ .
 k 

If two masses m1 and m2 are connected by a spring and made to oscillate, then time period
µ
T = 2π
k

m1m 2
where, µ = is called the reduced mass.
m1 + m 2

Combination of springs

Series combination

In series combination of springs same restoring force is acting on all the springs but extension
depends on the force constant.

Total displacement in springs x = x1 + x2.

F F
Force acting on both springs F =
− k1 x1 =
−k 2 x 2 ; x1 =
− , x2 =
−
k1 k2

F F
x=
− + 
 k1 k 2 

263
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Let ks is the equivalent force constant, then

F F F 1 1 1 k 1k 2
F = – ksx ∴ = + , or = + ; ks = ---------(11)
k s k1 k 2 k s k1 k 2 k1 + k 2

m m ( k1 + k 2 )
Time period T =
2π 2π
= ---------(12)
ks k 1k 2

1 k 1k 2
Frequency ν = ---------(13)
2 π m ( k1 + k 2 )

ks k 1k 2
Angular frequency=
ω = ---------(14)
m m ( k1 + k 2 )

Parallel combination of springs

When springs are connected in parallel, the deformation on each spring is the same but restoring
force will be different. kp is the effective spring constant when they are connected in parallel.

F = F1 + F2, F1 = –k1x and F2 = –k2x F = –k1x – k2x

F=
−k p x =
−k1x − k 2 x ∴ k p = k1 + k 2 ---------(15)

m m
Period T =
2π 2π
= ---------(16)
kp k1 + k 2

1 k1 + k 2 k1 + k 2
Frequency n = ---------(17); Angular frequency ω = ---------(18)
2π m m

264
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Note:

Period and frequency of a spring mass system is independent of the acceleration due to gravity
whenever they are making horizontal or vertical oscillations.

Simple Pendulum

An arrangement in which a heavy point mass, suspended by a weightless inextensible string from
a rigid support, is called a simple pendulum.

When a mass m is suspended from a rigid support S by a massless string and the mass is displaced
OA y
through an angle θ , then restoring force acting on the pendulum, F = − mg sin θ.sin θ ≈ =
SA 
y −g × y
∴ ma = − mg sin θ = − mg ; a =
 
When y is small, acceleration is proportional to displacement and it is directed towards mean
position. So the motion is SHM.

g 2π 
a =ω2 y, ω2 = ; T = =2π ---------(19)
 ω g

Second’s Pendulum

A pendulum whose time period is 2s is called a second’s pendulum. For second’s pendulum

T 2 = 4= 4π 2 .
g

g
=
 ≈ 1m .
π2
ie, the length of second’s pendulum on the surface of earth is = 1 m

265
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

QUESTIONS

1. A scientist measures the time period of a 4. A particle of mass m moving along the x-axis
simple pendulum as T in a lift at rest. If the has a potential energy U(x) = a + bx2 where
lift moves up with acceleration as one fourth a and b are positive constants. It will execute
of the acceleration of gravity, the new time simple harmonic motion with a frequency
period is determined by the value of
1) b alone 2) b and a alone
3) b and m alone 4) b, a and m alone
5. A particle is executing a simple harmonic
motion. When it is at its extreme displacement
from its mean position, it receives an
T
1) 2) 4T additional kinetic energy equal to what it
4 had in its mean position. Due to this in its
subsequent motion, the amplitude will change
2 5 to k times its previous amplitude. The value
3) T 4) T of k is:
5 2
1) 2 2) 2
2. The oscillations represented by curve 1
in the graph are expressed by equation 3) 4 4) None of these
=x A sin ωt . The equation for the oscillations 6. Displacement-time equation of a particle
represented by curve 2 is expressed as  π
=
executing SHM is x A sin  ωt +  . Time
 6

A
taken by the particle to go from x = − to
A 2
x= + is
 π 2
1) x 2A sin  ωt − 
= π π
 2 1) 2)
3ω 2ω

 π 2π π
=
2) x 2A sin  ωt +  4) 4)
 2 ω ω
7. Two linear simple harmonic motions of equal
 π amplitude and frequency are impressed on
3) x =−2A sin  ωt − 
 2 a particle along x and y axis respectively. The
π
4) None of these initial phase difference between them is .
2
3. A particle is subjected to two mutually
perpendicular simple harmonic motions The resultant path followed by the particle is
such that its x and y-coordinates are given 1) circle
by x = sin ωt; y = 2 cos ωt . The path of the 2) a straight line
particle will be:
3) an ellipse
1) an ellipse 2) a straight line
4) a parabola.
3) a parabola 4) a circle

266
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

8. An object suspended from a spring exhibits 12. Two simple harmonic motions= y1 A sin ωt
oscillations of period T. Now the spring is
and= y 2 A cos ωt are superimposed on a
cut in two halves and the same object is
particle of mass m. The total mechanical
suspended with two halves as shown in
energy of the particle is
figure. The new time period of oscillation will
become 1
1) mω2 A 2 2 2
2) mω A
2

1
3) mω2 A 2 4) zero
4
13. Two masses M and m are suspended together
T by a massless spring of force constant k.
1) 2) 2T When the masses are in equilibrium, M is
2 removed without disturbing the system. The
amplitude of oscillation is
T T
3) 4) Mg mg
2 2 2 1) 2)
k k
9. A hanging wire is 185 cm long having a bob
of 1.25 kg. It shows a time period of 1.42 s (M + m) g (M − m) g
on a Planet Newtonia. If the circumference of 3) 4)
Newtonia is 51400 km, find the mass of the
k k
planet 14. If a pendulum, which gives correct time beats
1) 3.5 ×1025 kg 2) 9.08 × 1024 kg seconds on ground at a certain place, is
moved to the top of a tower 320 m high, the
3) 2.6 × 1025 kg D) 3.14 × 1024 kg
loss of time of the pendulum clock in one day
10. Two particles execute SHM of the same is:
amplitude and frequency along the same
1) 2.16 sec 2) 1.08 sec
straight line. If they pass one another when
going in opposite directions, each time their 3) 0.54 sec D) 4.32 sec
displacement is half their amplitude; the 15. A block P of mass m is placed on a frictionless
phase difference between them is: horizontal surface. Another block Q of same
mass is kept on P and connected to the wall
π π
1) 2) with the help of a spring, of spring constant
3 4 k as shown in the figure. µs is the coefficient
of friction between P and Q. The blocks move
π 2π together performing SHM of amplitude A. The
3) D)
6 3 maximum value of the friction force between
P and Q is:
11. The potential energy of a harmonic oscillator
of mass 2 kg in its mean position is 5 J. If its
total energy is 9 J and its amplitude is 0.01
m, its time period will be
π  π
1) s 2)  s
100  50 
kA
1) kA 2)
2
 π  π
3)  s 4)  s 3) zero D) µs mg
 20   10 

267
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

16. The equation of motion of a particle executing 21. A particle executes S.H.M. between x = – A
simple harmonic motion is a + 16π x =
2
0 . In to x = +A. The time taken for it in going from
this equation, a is the linear acceleration in 0 to A/2 is T1 and from A/2 to A is T2. Then
m/s2 of the particle at a displacement x in meter. 1) T1 < T2 2) T1 > T2
The time period in simple harmonic motion is:
3 1 3) T1 = T2 4) T1 = 2T2
1) sec 2) sec
4 2 22. A particle moves according to the equation
3) 1 sec 4) 2 sec  π
=x a sin 2  ωt −  . Find the amplitude and
17. A hydrogen atom has mass 1.68 × 10–27 kg.  4
When attached to a certain massive molecule
frequency of oscillations.
it oscillates with a frequency 1014 Hz and with
an amplitude 10–9 cm. Find the force acting a
on the hydrogen atom. 1) a, ω 2) ,ω
2
1) 2.21 × 10–9 N 2) 3.31 × 10–9 N
3) 4.42 × 10 N –9
4) 6.63 × 10–9 N a ω a
18. A glider is oscillating in SHM on air track 3) , 4) , 2ω
with an amplitude A. You slow it so that 2 2 2
its amplitude becomes half. Find the total
23. A particle executes SHM of frequency f. The
mechanical energy in terms of previous value.
frequency of its kinetic energy is
1 1
1) 2) f
2 3 1) f 2)
2
1 1
3) 4) 3) 2f 4) zero
5 4
19. A mass M is suspended from a spring of 24. Two springs of equal lengths and equal cross-
negligible mass. The spring is pulled a little sectional areas are made of materials whose
and then released, so that the mass executes Young’s modulii are in the ratio of 3 : 2. They
SHM of time period T. If the mass is increased are suspended and loaded with the same
5T mass. When stretched and released, they
by m, the time period becomes . The ratio will oscillate with time periods in the ratio of
m 3
of is 1) 3: 2 2) 3 : 2
M
5 3
1) 2)
3 5
3) 3 3 : 2 2 D) 9 : 4
16 25 25. Two simple pendulums A of bob mass M1 and
3) 4) length L1, B of bob mass M2 and length L2,
9 9
such that M1 = M2 and L1 = 2L2 are oscillating.
20. A particle oscillates simple harmonically with If the vibrational energies of both are same,
a period of 8 s. One second after crossing the then which of the following statements is
extreme position its speed becomes 2 ms–1. correct?
The amplitude of oscillation is
4 8 1) Amplitude of B greater than A
1) m 2) m
π π 2) Amplitude of B smaller than A
3) Amplitude will be same
4 2 8 2
3) m 4) m 4) None of these above
π π

268
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

26. The acceleration displacement graph of a 1) 10 m, 4s, 10 π m / s

particle executing simple harmonic motion
is shown in fig. The time period of simple
2) 10 m, 5 s, 8 π m / s
harmonic motion

3) 10 m, 3 s, 4 π m / s

4) 10 m, 2 s, 10 π m / s

30. How long after the beginning of motion is the

displacement of a harmonically oscillating
point equal to one half its amplitude, if the
period is 24 sec and initial phase is zero?
4π 1) 12 sec 2) 2 sec
1) s
3 3) 4 sec 4) 6 sec
31. The KE and PE of a particle executing SHM
2π with amplitude A will be equal when its
2) s displacement is:
3
A A
1) 2)
3) The given graph doesn’t represent simple 6 2
harmonic motion
4) Information is insufficient A 2
3) 4) A
27. A rod of length  and mass m is hanged 2 3
from one edge. The time period of small 32. A simple pendulum is made of a body which
oscillations is is a hollow sphere containing mercury
suspended by means of a wire. If a little
  mercury is drained off, the period of pendulum
1) 2π 2) 2π
3g g will:
1) remain unchanged 2) increase
2 3) decrease 4) become erratic
3) 2π 4) None of these 33. For a particle executing simple harmonic
3g
motion, the kinetic energy K is given by :
28. Acceleration of a particle in SHM at = K K 0 cos 2 ωt . The maximum value of
displacement x = 10 cm from the mean potential energy is:
position is a = – 2.5 cm/s2. Find time period 1) K0 2) zero
of oscillations. K0
3) 4) not obtainable
1) 3π 2) 4π 2
34. A girl is swinging in a swing in a sitting
3) 2.5π 4) 2π position. If she stands and swings, how will
29. If a SHM is represented by the equation the period be affected?
 π 1) The period will not change
=x 10sin  πt +  in SI units, then determine 2) The period will now be longer
 6
3) The period will now be shorter
its amplitude, time period and maximum
4) The period will first increase and then
velocity, vmax?
decrease

269
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

35. A pendulum bob carries a –ve charge –q.

1 k 1 4k
A positive charge +q is held at the point of 1) 2)
support. Then, the time period of the bob is: 2π 4M 2π M
L
1) greater than 2π 1 k 1 7k
g 3) 4)
2π 7M 2π M
L 39. A body executes simple harmonic motion.
2) less than 2π
g The potential energy (PE), kinetic energy
(KE) and total energy (TE) are measured as
a function of displacement x. Which of the
L following statement is true?
3) equal to 2π
g
1) TE is zero when x = 0
2) PE is maximum when x = 0
2L
4) equal to 2π 3) KE is maximum when x = 0
g
4) KE is maximum when x is maximum
36. Two pendulums begin to swing simultaneously. 40. An object of mass 0.2 kg executes simple
The first pendulum makes 9 full oscillations harmonic motion along X-axis with frequency
when the other makes 7. The ratio of lengths 25
of Hz . At the position x = 0.04 m, the
of the two pendulums is: π
9 7 object has kinetic energy of 0.5 J and
1) 2)
7 9 potential energy of 0.4 J amplitude of
oscillation in meter is equal to
49 81 1) 0.05 2) 0.06
3) 4)
81 49 3) 0.01 4) None of these
37. Two SHMs are represented by
Integer Type
 π
=y1 0.1sin 100πt +  and
= y 2 0.1cos πt . 41. A ball of mass 2 kg hanging from a spring
 3 oscillates with a time period 2π seconds. Ball
The phase difference of the velocity of particle is removed when it is in equilibrium position,
1 with respect to the particle 2 is then spring shortens by ........... m
π π 42. A block of mass 100 g attached to a spring of
1) − 2)
6 3 stiffness 1.752 N/m is lying on a frictionless
floor as shown. The block is moved to
π π compress the spring by 10 cm and released.
3) − 4)
3 6 If the collision with the wall is elastic then find
the time period of oscillations. (in seconds)
38. Four massless springs whose force constants
are 2k, 2k, k and 2k respectively are attached
to a mass M kept on a frictionless plane (as
shown in figure). If the mass M is displaced
in the horizontal direction, then the frequency
of the system is 43. F-x equation of a body of mass 1 kg in SHM
2
is F + π x = 0
Here, F is in newton and x in metre. Find time
period of oscillations. (in seconds)

270
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

Assertion - Reason Type 47. Statement I : In SHM, kinetic and potential

energies become equal
1) If both the Assertion and Reason are true 1
and the Reason is true explanation of the when the displacement
Assertion times the amplitude. 2
Statement II : In SHM, kinetic energy is
2) If both the Assertion and Reason are true
zero when potential energy
but the Reason is not the true explanation
is maximum.
of the Assertion
48. Statement I : If the amplitude of a simple
3) If Assertion is true but Reason is false harmonic oscillator is
doubled, its total energy
4) If Assertion is false but Reason is true
becomes four times.
44. Assertion : The frequency of a Statement II : The total energy is directly
second is pendulum in an proportional to the square of
elevator moving up with an the amplitude of vibration of
acceleration equal to half the the harmonic oscillator.
acceleration due to gravity is 49. Statement I : A man with a wristwatch
0.612 s–1. spring wound on his hand
falls from the top of a tower.
Reason : The frequency of a second’s
The watch will show the
pendulum does not depend
correct time.
upon acceleration due to
Statement II : The acceleration due to
gravity.
gravity have no effect on time
45. Assertion : When a simple pendulum period of watch at the time of
is made to oscillate on the falling.
surface of moon, its time Match the following
period increases.
50. A simple pendulum is vibrating with maximum
Reason : The moon is such smaller as angle θ0 . If  is length of pendulum and m is
compared to the earth. the mass of the bob, then match the following
46. Assertion : The graph of total energy of a for θ < θ0
particle in SHM w.r.t. position Column I Column II
is a straight line with zero A) Potential P) mg cos θ − cos θ
slope. Energy
( 0)

Reason : Total energy of particle

in SHM remains constant B) Kinetic Q)
throughout its motion. mg (1 − cos θ )
Energy
Statement Type
C) Momentum R)
1) If both Statement I and Statement II are m 2g ( cos θ − cos θ0 )
true
2) If both Statement I and Statement II are D)
Momentum S)
false m 2gh
at midpoint
3) If Statement I is true but Statement II is 1) A - Q; B - P; C - R; D - S
false 2) A - S; B - R; C - Q; D - P
4) If Statement I is false but Statement II is 3) A - R; B - P; C - Q; D - S
true 4) A - S; B - R; C - P; D - Q

271
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

KEY WITH HINTS

 1 5. 1 Mechanical energy is given by

1. 3 T =π
2 ∝ ; 1
g g 2 2
mω A
2

T′ g g 2 1  1
∴ = = = ∴ Totalenergy =2  mω2 A 02  = mω2 A f2
T g′ g+g/4 5 2  2

⇒ A f2 = 2A 02 ⇒ A f = 2A 0
2 2π
∴ T′ = T 6. 1 Period of oscillation is T =
5 ω
Now time taken in going from mean
2. 1 Time period of both simple harmonic
motions are same. Therefore ω is same.
A A
position to x = or from x = to mean
2 2
At t = 0, x = – 2 A
T
∴x =−2A cos ( ωt ) position comes out to be . Therefore,
12
π   π the desired time will be
= −2A sin  − ωt  = 2A sin  ωt − 
2   2 T T π
t 2
= =
 =
 12  6 3ω
y 7. 1=x a sin ωt ------(1);
3. 1 sin ωt =x ; cos ωt =
2
and=y a cos ωt ------(2)
Squaring and adding these two equations
we have, Squaring and adding Eqs. (1) and (2), we
get
2 y2 x +y = 2
a 2 2
x + 1
=
4 which is an equation of a circle.
8. 3 Force constant of a spring
This is an equation of an ellipse. 1
∝
length of spring
dU
4. 3 F=
− −2bx ;
= ie, the force constant of two halves will
dx
become 2 k each.
(k = force constant of complete spring)
F  2b  ∴ k eff = 2k + 2k = 4k
a= = − x
m  m 1
As, T ∝
k
Angular frequency
T
2b 2π m ie, T′ =
ω = ⇒T= = 2π 2
m ω 2b

272
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

 4π 2  A R = 2A
9. 1 T=
2π or g =2
g T
1 1
mω2 A 2R = mω2 ( 2A ) = mω2 A 2
2
E=
2 2
GM 4π2  4 π 2 R 2
=
and = or M
R2 T2 GT 2 13. 1 For equilibrium of (M + m):
(M + m) g
x1 =
2
k
4 ×10 ×1.85 × ( 8185 ) ×106
M= 2
6.67 ×10−11 × (1.42 ) mg
and for equilibrium of m : x 2 =
= 3.5 × 10 kg25 k
10. 4=y A sin ( ωt + φ ) ∴ amplitude of oscillation will be
A A
y
Here, = , ∴ A sin ( ωt +=
φ) Mg
2 2 A = x1 − x 2 =
k

π 5π
So, δ = ωt + φ = or
6 6 1  GM 
14. 4 T∝ ∝R  g = 2 
So, the phase difference of the two g  R 
particles when they are crossing each
A
other at y = in opposite directions are:
2 1 (
T1 ∝ ∝ R + h)
5π π 2π g1
δ = δ1 − δ2 = − =
6 6 3
1 2 T R+h T −T h
11. 1 kA = ( 9 − 5 ) = 4J =
∴ 1 or 1
=
2 T R T R
8 8
∴k = = =8 ×104 N / m T × h 2 × 320
A 2
( 0.01)2 ∴ T1 −=
T = = 10−4 sec
6
R 6.4 ×10
m 2 π
T=
2π 2π
= 4
= s
k 8 ×10 100 Loss of time in one day

12. 2 Phase difference between the two SHM = 10–4 × 43200 = 4.32 sec.
is 90o.
15. 2 For block P, friction will provide the
necessary restoring force.

k k
∴ f max = mω2 A with ω2 = =
m + m 2m

 k  kA
Therefore, resultant amplitude is =
Hence, f max m=
 A
 2m  2

273
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

16. 2 a=−16π2 x 2π π
20. 4 As T= = 8; ∴ ω= ;
2
ω 4
Standard equation of SHM is: A = −ω x
At t = 1 s, v = 2 m/s
Here, comparing two equation, we get;
=
as x A cos ωt
ω = 4π
∴ v =−Aω sin ωt
2π 2π 1 π
=
T = = sec ∴ At t= 1 s, − Aω sin = 2
ω 4π 2 4

k
17. 4=
ω 2 2 2
or 4π=f m k π 1 8 2
m ⇒ −A. . = 2 A
∴=
4 2 π

F= kx 0 = 4π2 f 2 mx 0 21. 1 The speed at mean position is maximum

and at extreme position, speed is zero, so
T1 < T2.
2 28 −27
or F = 4 × π × 10 × 1.68 × 10 × 10
−11
 π
22. 4=x a sin 2  ωt − 
 4
= 6.63 × 10–9 N

1
18. =
4 Initial total energy mω2 A 2 ; a  π 
2 =
1 − cos 2  ωt −  
2   4 
2
1 A 1 − cos 2θ
=
Final total energy mω2   2
since sin θ =
2 2 2
Total mechanical energy becomes 1/4th of
1
3 KE = mω ( x 0 − x )
initial value. 2 2 2
23.
2
5T
19. 3 m1 =
M, T1 =
T; m 2 =
M + m, T2 =
3 During one oscillation the KE becomes
maximum twice, so the frequency of KE
will be 2f.
T 2π m1 / k m1 M F L
=
1
= = 24. 1 Young’s modulus Y = . ;
T2 2π m 2 / k m2 M+m A 

F YA
2 2 Force constant k= =
M+m T   5T / 3  25  L
or = = 2
  = 
M  T1   T  9
where  is the extension in the spring of
original length L and cross-sectional area
m 16 A when a force F = Mg is applied. Now,
∴ = the time period of vertical oscillations is
M 9
given by

274
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

M ML x
T=
2π 2π
= 28. 2 Time period is given by T = 2π
k YA a

Substituting the values we have,

T Y2 3
∴ 1= = 10
T2 Y1 2 T=
2π ( 4π ) s
=
2.5
1 29. 4 Comparing the above equation with
25. E
2 Energy of vibration, = mω2 A 2 ;
2 =
x A sin ( ωt + φ ) , we get A = 10 m

1 rad π
E
=
2
m ( 2πν ) A=
2
2mπ2 ν 2 A 2 ω = ( π) and φ =
2 s 6

For a simple pendulum,

2π
L 1 g T = ⇒ T = 2s
T = 2π ,ν= ω
g 2π L
v max =ωA =(10π ) m / s
2
1 g 2 A
∴ E = 2mπ2 . A ∝ 30. 2=y A sin ( ωt + φ ) , here φ =0 ,
4π 2 L L
T = 24 sec.

A12 A 22 2πt
∴ E1 − E 2 ⇒ = From the equation, y = A sin
L1 L 2 T

A12 A 22 A  2πt 
⇒ = ⇒ A1 = 2 A2 Then, = A sin  
2L 2 L 2 2  T 

da 3 3 T
26. 1 =− tan 37 o =− ⇒ a =− x or =
t = 2s
dx 4 4 12

3 2π 3 4π 1 1
3 K = mω ( A − y ) , U = mω y
2 2 2 2 2 2
so, ω = ⇒ = ⇒T= s 31.
4 T 2 3 2 2

K=U
I
27. 3 T = 2π 1 1
mg or mω2 ( A 2 − y 2 ) = mω2 y 2
2 2

A
M 2 M 2 i.e., 2y2 = A2 or y =
+ 2
12 4 = 2
2π
= 2π
Mg 3g 32. 2 Length of simple pendulum = distance
2 between point of suspension and C.G.

275
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

On draining of a little mercury the centre 1

of gravity gets lowered, so l increases. 39. y x; PE
3 = = mω2 y 2
2
As T ∝  , so time period increases.
33. 1 Kmax = K0 total energy. As total energy 1
KE = mω2 ( a 2 − y 2 )
remains conserved in SHM, hence when 2
U is maximum in SHM, K= 0, ie, E is also
equal to Umax, ie, Umax = E = K0. 1
34. 3 When girl swings on the candle, time TE = PE + KE = mω2 a 2
2

period is given by: T = 2π Since PE is maximum at x = a and KE is
g maximum at x = 0, therefore TE remains
When the girl stands, l decreases, constant throughout the motion.
therefore time period decreases. 1 1 2
40. 2 E= mω2 A 2 ⇒ E = m ( 2πf ) A 2
35. 3 There is no change in the restoring force 2 2
as the electrostatic forces are the central
forces. Negative and positive charges 1 2E
at the two extremities of the string affect ⇒A=
tension T which does not affect the 2πf m
restoring force. Hence, time period of the Putting values we obtain,
bob will remain unchanged.
1 2 × ( 0.5 + 0.4 )
L A=
ie, T = 2π  25  0.2
g 2π  
 π
⇒A=
0.06 m
t  t 
36. 2π 1 and 0 =
3 0 = 2π 2
9 g 7 g 41. 10
m
T = 2π
1  7 
2
49 k
∴ =  =
2  9  81
4π 2 m ( 4π 2 ) ( 2 )
k
∴= = = 2N/ m
π π π T2 ( 2π ) 2
37. 1 φ= − =−
3 2 6

Now, mg = kx0
 π 
 cos
= πt sin  + πt   mg 2 × g
 2  ∴ x0 = = = g metre = 10 m
k 2

( 2k )( 2k )
38. =
2 k eq 2k + k 4k
+= A
2k + 2k 42. 1 The given distance on RHS 5 cm is
2

A T
1 k eq 1 4k and from 0 to time taken is
=
f = 2 12
2π M 2π M

276
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

T T 2 49. 1 When the man falls from the top of a tower,
T=t LHS + t RHS = + 2  =T he will be in the state of weightlessness.
2  12  3 A spring wound watch runs on the basis
of spring action, i.e., on the basis of the
potential energy stored in the wound
2 m 4π 0.1 spring. Since, acceleration due to gravity
= ( 2π ) = =1s
3 k 3 1.752 does not play any role, the watch will give
correct time, when the man falls from the
43. 2 The given equation can be written as, top of tower.
F = −π2 x 50. 1 Potential energy at C
= mg − mg cos= θ mg (1 − cos θ )
Comparing with the standard equation of
SHM, F = –kx we have, Kinetic Energy
= mg (1 − cos θ0 ) − mg (1 − cos θ )
k = π2 N / m
= mg cos θ − mg cos θ0

m 1
∴ T =2π =2π 2 =( 2 ) s =2s
k π
= mg ( cos θ − cos θ0 )

44. 3 For a second’s pendulum T = 2

1 P2
∴ν = = = mg ( cos θ − cos θ0 )
KE
2 2m

∴ Momentum
= P m 2g ( cos θ − cos θ0 )
1 1 g
ν= = ---- (1);
2 2π 

1 1.5g
ν′ = ------- (2)
2π 

2ν′ = 1.5 ;

1.5
ν′
= = 0.612s −1 = mg (1 − cos θ0 )
2 MaximumPE=MaximumKE

Frequency of a second’s pendulum 2

∴ P=
max 2m 2 g (1 − cos θ0 )
depends on g.

45. 2 Pmax m 2g (1 − cos θ )

=

46. 1
= m 2gh , where h =  (1 − cos θ )

47. 1

48. 1

277
 CHAPTER
WAVES
14

Wave Motion
A wave is a mode of transference of energy from point to point in the direction of propagation of
the wave. The waves are periodic disturbances transmitted through a medium from a point of origin
called the [Link] disturbances from the source are handed over to the particles in the medium.
The particles in the medium behave as if they are connected by some elastic forces. When a particle
in the medium is set into vibration, the adjacent particles acquire a similar kind of vibration.
A wave motion is a form of disturbance which travels through the medium due to the repeated
periodic motion of the particles of the medium about their equilibrium positions, the disturbance being
handed over from particle to particle.
A wave is a disturbance which propagate energy from one place to another without transport of matter.
1. Characteristics of wave motion
(i) It is a sort of disturbance which travels through a medium.
(ii) Material medium is essential for the propagation of mechanical waves.
(iii) When a wave motion passes through a medium, particles of the medium only vibrate simple
harmonically about their mean position.
(iv) There is a continuous phase difference amongst successive particles of the medium ie,
particle 2 starts vibrating slightly later than particle 1 and so on.
(v) The velocity of the particle during their vibration is different at different position.
(vi) The velocity of wave motion through a particular medium is constant. It depends only on
the nature of the medium and not on the frequency, wavelength or intensity.
(vii) Energy is propagated along with the wave motion without any net transport of the medium.
2. Mechanical waves: The waves which require a medium for their propagation are called mechanical
waves.
Example: Waves on string and spring, waves on water surface, sound waves, seismic waves.
3. Non-mechanical waves: The waves which do not require a medium for their propagation are
called non-mechanical or electromagnetic waves.
Examples: Light, heat (Infrared), radio waves, γ -rays, X-rays etc.
4 Transverse waves: Particles of the medium execute simple harmonic motion about their mean
position in a direction perpendicular to the direction of propagation of wave motion.
(i) It travels in the form of crests and troughs.
(ii) A crest is a portion of the medium which is raised temporarily above the normal position of
rest of the particles of the medium when a transverse wave passes through it.

278
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

(iii) A trough is a portion of the medium which is depressed temporarily below the normal position
of rest of the particles of the medium, when transverse wave passes through it.
(iv) Examples of transverse wave motion : Movement of string of a sitar or violin, movement
of the membrane of a Tabla or Dholak, movement of kink on a rope, waves set-up on the
surface of water.
(v) Transverse waves can be transmitted through solids, they can be setup on the surface of
liquids. But they can not be transmitted into liquids and gases.
5. Longitudinal waves : If the particles of a medium vibrate in the direction of wave motion, the
wave is called longitudinal.
(i) It travels in the form of compressions and rarefactions.
(ii) A compression (C) is a region of the medium in which particles are compressed (high density).
(iii) A rarefaction (R) is a region of the medium in which particles are rarefied (low density).

(iv) Sound waves travel through air in the form of longitudinal waves. Vibration of air column in
organ pipes , Vibration of air column above the surface of water in the tube of a resonance
apparatus are longitudinal waves
Wavelength : Wavelength is the distance between any two nearest particles of the medium, vibrating
in the same phase. Distance between two consecutive crests or troughs is a wavelength. Distance
between consecutive compressions or rarefactions is a wavelength.

Frequency :
(i) Frequency of vibration of a particle is defined as the number of vibrations completed by
particle in one second.
(ii) It is the number of complete wavelengths traversed by the wave in one second.
(iii) Units of frequency are hertz (Hz) and per second.
Time period :
(i) Time period of vibration of particle is defined as the time taken by the particle to complete
one vibration about its mean position.
(ii) It is the time taken by the wave to travel a distance equal to one wavelength.

1 1
Relation between frequency and time period : Time =
period = ⇒T ---------(1)
Frequency ν

279
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Relation between velocity, frequency and wavelength of the wave:

distance s
By definition, velocity= = = v
time t

In one complete vibration of the particle, distance travelled, s = λ and time taken, t = T

λ 1
v= = λ, , λ - wavelength, v - velocity, ν -frequency.
T T

Using (1), we get v = νλ -------------(2)

Hence velocity of a wave is the product of frequency and wavelength of the wave. This relation
holds for transverse as well as longitudinal waves.
Some terms related to progressive waves

(i) Wave number ( ν ) : The number of waves present in unit length is defined as the wave number
 1
 ν =  -------------(3); Unit = meter–1 ; Dimension = [L–1].

 λ

φ Phase difference between particles

(ii) Propagation constant (k) : k= =
x Distance between them

ω Angular velocity 2π
k= = and k = = 2πν --------(4)
v Wave velocity λ
(iii) Wave velocity (v) : The velocity with which the crests and troughs or compression and rarefaction
ω ωλ λ
travel in a medium, is defined as wave velocity v = = νλ = =
k 2π T
(iv) Phase and Phase difference : Phase of the wave is given by the argument of sine or cosine in
2π
the equation of wave. It is represented by φ ( x, t ) = ( vt − x ) ,
λ
(v) At a given position (for fixed value of x) phase changes with time (t)
dφ 2πv 2π 2π 2π
= = ⇒ d=
φ .dt ⇒ Phase difference
= × Time difference.
dt λ T T T
(vi) At a given time (for fixed value of t) phase changes with position (x).

dφ 2 π 2π 2π
= ⇒ d= φ × dx ⇒ Phase difference = × × Path difference.---------(5)
dx λ λ λ
T
⇒ Time difference= × Path difference ---------(6)
λ

280
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

One dimensional Travelling wave

To completely describe a wave on a string, we need a function that gives the shape of the wave.
Consider a sinusoidal wave travelling to the right with constant speed, transverse displacement of the
particles of the string is measured with the coordinate y. Figure (a) represents the shape and position
of the pulse at t = 0. At this time, the shape of the pulse, whatever it may be, can be represented as
y = f(x), that is y is some definite function of x. The maximum displacement ym is called the amplitude
of the wave. The pulse travel to the right a distance vt in a time t, then the transverse displacement y
of a string element at position x at time t is given by y = f(x – vt)

Similarly, if the wave pulse travel to the left, the displacement y is given by y = f(x + vt).

The speed of travelling wave

Consider a wave travelling in the direction of increasing x, the entire wave pattern is moving a
distance ∆x in that direction during the interval ∆t . The ratio ∆x / ∆t is the wave speed v.

dx
v=
dt

A snapshot of the travelling wave, at t = 0 and a later time t = ∆t . During the time interval ∆t ,
the entire curve shifts a distance ∆x to the right.

(1) Speed of transverse wave motion :

T
(i) On a stretched string : v = ------(7); T = Tension in the string; m = Linear density of
m
the string.

η
(ii) In a solid body : v = ---------(8) η = Modulus of rigidity; ρ = Density of the material.
ρ

281
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

(2) Speed of longitudinal wave motion :

4
k+ η
(i) In a solid medium v = 3 ---------(9) k = Bulk modulus; η = Modulus of rigidity;
ρ
ρ = Density

Y
When the solid is in the form of long bar v = -----(10)
ρ
Y = Young’s modulus of material of rod

k
(ii) In a liquid medium v = ---------(11)
ρ
k
(iii) In gases v = ---------(12)
ρ
Reflection and transmission of waves

Consider a travelling pulse of a string whose one end is fixed to a rigid support. When the pulse
reached the fixed wall, it will be reflected.
When the pulse reaches at the end of the string that is fixed at the support, the string produces an
upward force on the support. By Newton’s third law, the support must then exert and equal and opposite
reaction force on the string, which causes the pulse to invert upon reflection.
Let us now suppose that the right end of the string is attached to a light frictionless ring which
can freely move on a vertical rod. Now when the pulse reaches at right end, there is no corresponding
restoring force from the right as the rod does not exert a vertical force on the ring. In this case pulse
will be reflected, but this time its displacement is not inverted. The amplitude is the same as that of the
incoming pulse.
Now consider a situation in which the end point is neither completely fixed nor completely free to
move. For example, consider a light string attached to a heavier string as shown in figure. If a wave pulse
is produced on the light string (figure (c)) moving towards the junction, a part of the wave is reflected
and a part is transmitted on the heavier string. The reflected wave is inverted to the original one. If the
wave is produced on the heavier string (figure (d)), which moves towards the junction, a part will be
reflected and a part is transmitted but the reflected wave is no more inverted.
Progressive Wave
(1) These waves propagate in the forward direction of medium with a finite velocity.
(2) Energy and momentum are transmitted in the direction of propagation of waves without actual
transportation of matter.
(3) In progressive waves, equal changes in pressure and density occurs at all points of medium.

282
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

(4) Progressive wave can be represented as.

= Where y displacement
= , Amplitude, ω Angular
=y A sin ( ωt − kx )or 
 frequency,
= ν Frequency,
= k Pr opogation constant,
 2π   -----(13)
=y A sin  ωt −  x  = T Period,
= λ Wave length,= v Wave velocity,
= t Time,
 λ  
x = Position of the particle from the origin
Standing Waves
When two waves of identical frequency (of similar kind) travelling from opposite directions meet,
the resultant wave obtained is known as standing waves. Standing waves can either be pure standing
waves or partial standing waves.
Pure Standing Waves
Here the amplitude of the two superposing waves need to be identical too.
Let the two travelling waves be
y1 ( x,=
t ) A sin ( ωt − kx ) ; y 2 ( x,=
t ) A sin ( ωt + kx )

Due to their superposition, the resultant wave is

( x, t ) y1 ( x, t ) + y 2 ( x, t )
y R=

= A [sin ( ωt − kx ) + sin ( ωt + kx )]

= ( 2A cos kx ) sin ωt ------- (14)

where (2A cos kx) = Ax is clearly a position dependent function (cosine, hence periodic too) and is a
constant for a particular location and is known as amplitude of oscillation at that location.
While the second term, sin ( ωt ) indicates SHM of the particle at position x with amplitude Ax. Therefore,
sin ( ωt ) term is common for all particles, hence each particle has same frequency of oscillation.
The amplitude, Ax = 2Acos(kx) as a function of x can be plotted as below.

There is no phase difference between oscillations of different elements of the wave. The string
as a whole vibrates in phase with different amplitudes at different points. The wave pattern is neither
moving to the right nor to the left. The points at which the amplitude is zero (where there is no motion
at all) are nodes; the points at which the amplitude is the largest are called antinodes.
The positions of nodes are given by sin kx = 0
kx = nπ ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ......
2π nλ
k
= ∴=x ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, .....
λ 2

283
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

λ
The distance between any two successive nodes is .
2
In the same way positions of antinodes are given by the largest value of sin kx.
|sin kx| = 1
 1
kx =  n +  π ; n = 0, 1, 2, 3, ....
 2

2π  1λ
Since k = x  n +  ; ; n = 0, 1, 2, .....
; We get =
λ  2 2
λ
The distance between any consecutive antinodes is .
2
Standing waves in a string
Consider a string of length l, tension T and linear density µ stretched between two fixed points

The smallest frequency with which standing waves can be set up in any system is said to be
fundamental frequency ( ν 0 ) . Frequency ν 0 , clearly means having largest wavelength so that
v = νλ = constant,
since velocity of wave is only medium dependent. Since both the ends are fixed, they will necessarily
form nodes.
Therefore, to have largest wavelength we will have to insert one antinode between these two
nodes.

v T/µ
∴ v = ν 0 λ 0 = ν 0 ( 2 ) ; ⇒ ν0 = = ----------(15)
2 2
Overtones are the higher frequencies, with respect to the fundamental frequency with which
standing waves can be set up. For example, 1st overtone is the immediate next higher frequency (hence
immediate next lower wavelength). Therefore we insert one more antinode here.

 v 
∴ v = ν1λ1 ⇒ ν1 =   2 = 2ν 0
 2 
∴ 1st overtone = 2ν 0 = 2nd harmonic.

284
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

(Note: All integral multiples of fundamental frequency are said to be harmonics of ν 0 .

Similarly for finding 2nd overtone.

3v
∴ v = ν 2λ 2 ⇒ ν2 = 2 = 3ν 0
2
⇒ 2nd overtone = 3rd harmonic. ∴ Generalising, we have, nth overtone
th v
ν n = ( n + 1) harmonic = ( n + 1) ν 0 = ( n + 1)
2
If the string oscillates in m loops, the frequency of oscillation is
v T/µ
ν m = mν 0 = m = m
2 2
We can easily change the frequency of oscillation by changing T (by increasing/decreasing tension),
µ (thin/thick wire) or  (long/short wire). This is the basic of sound production of different frequency in
guitar wires. By the movement of the fingers, on the string one controls the location of nodes whereas
by plucking it with the other hand, we control the location of antinodes.
If the string’s tension is increased/decreased slightly (less than 5%), we can apply error formula
to find the percentage change in frequency of string.
∆ν 1 ∆T
ie, = -----------(16)
ν 2 T
Laws of Transverse Vibrations of String - Sonometer wire

1 ν L
(a) Law of length ν ∝ so 1 = 2 ; If T and µ are constant.-----------(17)
L ν2 L1

ν1 T
(b) Law of tension ν ∝ T so = 1 ; if L and µ are constant.-----------(18)
ν2 T2

1 ν µ
(c) Law of mass ν ∝ so 1 = 2 ; if T and L are constant.-----------(19)
µ ν2 µ1

285
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

SOUND WAVES
Sound Waves
Sound waves are the most common example of longitudinal waves. They travel through any
material medium with a speed that depends on the properties of the medium. As the waves travel
through air, the elements of air vibrate to produce changes in density and pressure along the direction
of motion of the wave. If the source of the sound waves vibrates sinusoidally, the pressure variations
are also sinusoidal.
The mathematical description of sinusoidal sound waves is very similar to that of sinusoidal string
waves.
Sound waves are divided into three categories that cover different frequency ranges. (1) Audible
waves lie within the range of sensitivity of the human ear. They can be generated in a variety of ways,
such as by musical instruments, human voices, or loudspeakers. (2) Infrasonic waves have frequencies
below the audible range. Elephants can use infrasonic waves to communicate with each other, even
when separated by many kilometers. (3) Ultrasonic waves have frequencies above the audible range.
Ultrasonic waves are also used in medical imaging.

Velocity of Sound in Elastic Medium.

When a sound wave travels through a medium such as air, water or steel, it will set particles of
medium into vibration as it passes through it. For this to happen the medium must possess both inertia
(i.e. mass density so that kinetic energy may be stored) and elasticity (so that PE may be stored). These
two properties of matter determine the velocity of sound.
i.e. velocity of sound is the characteristic of the medium in which wave propagate.

E
v= ----------(1) (E = Elasticity of the medium; ρ = Density of the medium)
ρ

Important points
(1) As solids are most elastic while gases least i.e. ES > EL > EG . So the velocity of sound is maximum
in solids and minimum in gases
vsteel > vwater > vair
Lesser the velocity, denser is said to be the medium and vice-versa.
(2) Newton’s formula : He assumed that when sound propagates through air temperature remains
constant

K P
v air
(i.e. the process is isothermal) = = -----------(2)
ρ ρ

As K
= E=
0 P; E 0 = Isothermal elasticity; P = Pressure.
By calculation vair = 279 m/sec.
However the experimental value of sound in air is 332 m/sec which is greater than (52 m/s =
15.6%) that given by Newton’s formula.

286
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

(3) Laplace correction : He modified Newton’s formula assuming that propagation of sound in air
as adiabatic process.

K Eφ
=v = ----------(3) (As K = E φ = γP Adiabatic elasticity)
ρ ρ

v= 1.41 × 279= 331.3 m / s ( γ Air =

1.41)

γP 1
(4) v
Effect of density : = ⇒ v∝
ρ ρ

γP γRT
(5) : v
Effect of pressure= = . -------------(4)
ρ M

Velocity of sound is independent of the pressure of gas provided the temperature remains constant.
( P ∝ ρ when T = constant)

γRT
(6) Effect of temperature :=v ⇒ v∝ T (T in K)
M

v t v 0 (1 + αt )
When the temperature change is small then =

v0 = velocity of sound at 0°C, vt = velocity of sound at t°C ,

α = temp-coefficient of velocity of sound.
m/s
=
Value of α 0.608
= o
0.61 ( Approx )
C

Temperature coefficient of velocity of sound is defined as the change in the velocity of sound,
when temperature changes by 1°C.

(7) Effect of humidity : With increase in humidity, density of air decreases. So with rise in humidity,
velocity of sound increases.

This is why sound travels faster in humid air (rainy season) than in dry air (summer) at the same
temperature.

(8) Effect of wind velocity : Because wind drifts the medium (air) along its direction of motion
therefore the velocity of sound in a particular direction is the algebraic sum of the velocity of sound
and the component of wind velocity in that direction. Resultant velocity of sound along
SL = v + ω cos θ

287
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

(9) Sound of any frequency or wavelength travels through a given medium with the same velocity.

(v = constant) For a given medium velocity remains constant. All other factors like phase, loudness,
pitch, quality etc. have practically no effect on sound velocity.

(10) Relation between velocity of sound and root mean square velocity.
1/2
γRT 3RT v 3 γ
=vsound = and v rms ; =
So, rms = or vsound   v rms ----------(5)
M M vsound γ 3

(11) There is no atmosphere on moon, therefore propagation of sound is not possible there. To
do conversation on moon, the astronaut uses an instrument which can transmit and detect
electromagnetic waves.

Standing Waves in a Closed Organ Pipe.

Organ pipes are the musical instruments which are used for producing musical sound by blowing
air into the pipe. Longitudinal stationary waves are formed on account of superimposition of incident
and reflected longitudinal waves.

2πvt 2πx
Equation of standing wave y = 2a cos sin
λ λ

4L
General formula for wavelength λ =
( 2n − 1)

4L v
(1) First normal mode of vibration : n = 1 ∴=
λ1 = 4L =
ν1
( 2 − 1) 4L

This is called fundamental frequency. The note so produced is called fundamental note or first
harmonic.

v 3v
(2) Second normal mode of vibration : (n = 2) ν 2 = = = 3ν1
λ 2 4L

This is called third harmonic or first overtone.

5v
(3) Third normal mode of vibration : (n = 3) ν3 = = 5ν1
4L

This is called fifth harmonic or second overtone.

288
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Standing Waves in Open Organ Pipes

General formula for wavelength
2L
λ= where n = 1, 2, 3 ............
n

v v
(1) First normal mode of vibration : n =1, λ=
1 2L ∴ ν=
1 =
λ1 2L
This is called fundamental frequency and the note so produced is called fundamental note or first
harmonic.
v v  v 
(2) Second normal mode of vibration (n = 2) ν 2 = = = 2  = 2ν1 ⇒ ν 2 = 2ν1
λ2 L  2L 
This is called second harmonic or first overtone.
v 3v
(3) Third normal mode of vibration (n = 3) ν3 = = , ν 3 = 3ν1
λ 3 2L
This is called third harmonic or second overtone.

In organ pipe an antinode is not formed exactly at the open end rather it is formed a little distance
away from the open end outside it. The distance of antinode from the open end of the pipe is
known as end correction.
Comparative study of stretched strings, open organ pipe and closed organ pipe.
[Link]. Parameter Stretched string Open organ pipe Closed organ pipe
1 Fundamental v v v
frequency or 1st ν1 = ν1 = ν1 =
2 2 4
harmonic
2 Frequency of 2nd
ν 2 = 2ν1 ν 2 = 2ν1 Missing
harmonic
3 Frequency of 3rd
harmonic ν 3 = 3ν1 ν 3 = 3ν1 ν 3 = 3ν1
4 Frequency ratio of
2 : 3 : 4 .... 2 : 3 : 4 .... 3:5:7
overtones
5 Frequency ratio of
1 : 2 : 3 : 4.... 1 : 2 : 3 : 4 ... 1 : 3 : 5 : 7 ...
harmonics
Transverse Longitudinal Longitudinal
6 Nature of waves
stationary stationary stationary

289
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

BEATS
When two sound waves of slightly different frequencies, travelling in a medium along the same
direction, superimpose on each other, the intensity of the resultant sound at a particular position rises
and falls regularly with time. This phenomenon of regular variation in the intensity of sound with time at
a particular position, when two sound waves of nearly equal frequencies superimpose on each other is
called beats.
Beat period : The time interval between two successive maxima or minima of sound is called
the beat period.
Beat frequency : The number of beats produced per second is called beat frequency.
Persistence of hearing : The impression of sound heard by our ears persist in our mind for 1/10th
of a second. If another sound is heard before 1/10 second is over, the impression of the two sound mix
up and our mind cannot distinguish between the two.
So for the formation of distinct beats, frequencies of two sources of sound should be nearly equal
(difference of frequencies should be less than 10)
FORMATION OF BEATS
(a) Graphical method
Suppose we have two tuning forks A and B. Fig. below shows superimposition of the two waves
from forks A and B and in Fig.(d), we have represented the resultant wave according to the principle of
superposition.

290
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

QUESTIONS

1. The equation of displacements of two waves 5. In case of two strings vibrating transversally,
 π the lengths are as 1 : 2, the diameters are
=
are given as y1 10sin  3πt +  and as 2 : 1and the densities are as 4 : 1. When
 3
stretched by same load, the ratio of the two
y 2 5 ( sin 3πt + 3 cos 3πt ) . The ratio of their
= frequencies will be
1) 1 : 16 2) 1 : 4
amplitude is 3) 1 : 2 4) 1: 2 1
1) 1 : 2 2) 2 : 1 6. Equations of motion in the same direction are
3) 1 : 1 4) None of these given by=y1 A sin ( ωt − kx ) ,
2. Two waves traveling in a medium are given y 2 A sin ( ωt − kx − θ ) . The amplitude of
=
 π  the medium particle will be
y1 2sin  3πt − x 
by=
 2  θ
1) [Link] 2) [Link] θ
2
 3π 
=
and y 2 4sin  6πt − x  where y1, y2 and θ
 2  3) [Link] 4) [Link] θ
x are in cm and t in second. The displacement 2
of a particle at x = 1 cm at time t = 1 s is 7. The tension of a stretched string is increased
1) –2 cm 2) – 3 cm by 69%. In order to keep its frequency
3) + 2 cm 4) + 6 cm of vibration constant, its length must be
increased by
3. The displacement of a particle is given by
1) 20% 2) 30%
y= 5 ×10−4 sin (100t − 50x ) where x is in
metre and t in seconds. Find out the velocity 3) 69% 4) 69%
of the wave. 8. A string is rigidly tied at two ends. Its equation
1) 2 m/s 2) 5000 m/s of vibration is given by y = cos 2πt sin 2πx .
The minimum length of string is
3) 0.5 m/s 4) 300 m/s
1) 1 m 2) 0.5 m
4. The path difference between two waves
3) 5 m 4) 2πm
 2πx 
y1 a1 sin  ωt −
=  and 9. Two waves 1 and 2 are shown at a time
 λ 
t = t1, say in two identical strings having same
tensions. Then, the ratio of (1 and 2):
 2πx 
=y 2 a 2 cos  ωt − + φ  is
 λ 

λφ λ  π
1) 2) φ+ 
2π 2π  2
1) amplitudes is 1 : 2
2π  π 2π 2) frequencies is 2 : 1
3) φ−  4) φ
3) intensities is 1 : 1
λ  2 λ
4) phases is 1 : 1

291
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

10. Two wires are kept tight between the same 16. A string is stretched between fixed points
pair of supports. The tensions in the wires separated by 75 cm. It is observed to have
are in the ratio 2 : 1, the radii are in the ratio resonant frequencies of 420 Hz and 315 Hz.
3 :1 and the densities are in the ratio 1 : 2. There are no other resonant frequencies
The ratio of their fundamental frequencies is between these two. Then, the lowest resonant
1) 2 : 3 2) 2 : 4 freqeuncy for this string is
3) 2 : 5 4) 2 : 6 1) 10.5 Hz 2) 105 Hz
11. The equation of a transverse wave travelling on 3) 1.05 Hz 4) 1050 Hz.
a rope is given by y =10sin π ( 0.01x − 2.00t ) 17. A string of length 10 cm is fixed at both ends
where y and x are in cm and t in seconds. oscillates in 5 segments, and the velocity of
The maximum transverse speed of a particle wave is 20 m/s. What is the frequency of the
in the rope is about wave?
1) 63 cm/s 2) 75 cm/s 1) 20 Hz 2) 500 Hz
3) 100 cm/s 4) 121 cm/s
3) 10 Hz 4) 15 Hz.
12. Length of a sonometer wire is 1.21 m. The
three segments for fundamental frequencies 18. A uniform rope of length 12 m and mass 6 kg
in the ratio 1 : 2 : 3 hangs vertically from a rigid support. A block
of mass 2 kg is attached to the free end of the
rope. A transverse pulse of wavelength 0.06
m is produced at the lower end of the rope.
1) 0.66 m, 0.33 m, 0.22 m What is the wavelength of the pulse when it
2) 0.22 m, 0.33 m, 0.66 m reaches the top of the rope?
3) 0.77 m, 0.33 m, 0.11 m 1) 0.06 m 2) 0.03 m
4) 0.11 m, 0.33 m, 0.77 m 3) 0.12 m 4) 0.09 m
13. A transverse wave described by equation 19. A sample of oxygen at NTP has volume V and
y = 0.02 sin (x + 30 t) (where x and t are a sample of hydrogen at NTP has volume 4 V.
in metres and seconds, respectively) is Both the gases are mixed and the mixture is
travelling along a wire of area of cross-section maintained at NTP. If the speed of sound in
1 mm2 and density 8000 kg/m3. What is the hydrogen at NTP is 1270 m/s, then that in the
tension in the string? mixture will be
1) 20 N 2) 7.2 N 1) 317 m/s 2) 635 m/s
3) 30 N 4) 14.4 N
3) 830 m/s 4) 950 m/s
14. Two wires are in unison. If the tension in one
of the wires is increased by 2%, 5 beats are 20. A man stands between two parallel cliffs (not
produced per second. The initial frequency in middle). When he claps his hands, he
of each wire is hears two echoes one after 1 second and the
other after 2 second. If the velocity of sound
1) 200 Hz 2) 400 Hz
in air is 330 ms–1, the width of the valley is
3) 500 Hz 4) 1000 Hz
1) 330 m 2) 495 m
15. When the length of the vibrating segment of
a sonometer wire is increased by 1%, the 3) 660 m 4) 990 m
percentage change in its frequency is 21. A stone is dropped into a lake from a tower
100 99 500 metre high. The sound of the splash will
1) 2) be heard by the man approximately after
101 100
1) 10 sec 2) 14 sec
3) 1 4) 2
3) 21 sec 4) 11.5 sec

292
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

22. Under similar conditions of pressure and 1) 165 Hz 2) 330 Hz

density, the speed of sound is greatest in a 3) 496 Hz 4) 660 Hz
1) Triatomic gas 2) Diatomic gas 28. An open and a closed organ pipe have the
3) Monoatomic gas 4) None of these same length. The ratio of frequencies, in the
23. When the temperature of an ideal gas is pth mode of vibration of the pipes is
increased by 600 K, the velocity of the sound 1) unity 2) p (2p – 1)
in the gas becomes 3 times the initial 2p
3) 2p (2p + 1) 4)
velocity in it. The initial temperature of the ( 2p − 1)
gas is
29. An open pipe is suddenly closed at one end
1) –73oC 2) 27oC
with the result that the frequency of third
3) 127oC 4) 327oC harmonic of the closed pipe is found to be
24. The intensity of sound gets reduced by 20% higher by 100 Hz than the fundamental
on passing through a slab. The reduction in frequency of the open. The fundamental
intensity on passage through two consecutive frequency of open pipe is
slabs is 1) 200 Hz 2) 240 Hz
1) 40% 2) 36% 3) 300 Hz 4) 480 Hz
3) 30% 4) 50% 30. When a closed pipe is suddenly opened, then
25. Two periodic waves meet at the same point in the second overtone of closed pipe and first
the same direction. Their individual intensities overtone of open pipe differ by 100 Hz. The
are I1 and I 2 . The sum of maximum intensity fundamental frequency of closed pipe will be
and minimum intensity is 1) 200 Hz 2) 100 Hz

I12 + I 22
( I1 + I2 ) 3) 300 Hz 4) 400 Hz
1) 2)
2 31. If two tuning forks A and B are sounded
together they produce 4 beats per second.
3) 2 ( I1 + I 2 ) 4) ( I1 + I 2 ) A is then slightly loaded with wax. They
produce 2 beats/sec when sounded again.
26. If you set up the ninth harmonic on a string The frequency of A is 256 Hz. The frequency
fixed at both ends, its frequency compared of B will be
to the seventh harmonic will be
1) 262 Hz 2) 260 Hz
1) Equal 2) Half
3) 252 Hz 4) 250 Hz
3) Lower than half 4) Higher than one
32.
Beats are produced by two waves given by
27. Two loudspeakers L 1 and L 2 driven by =y1 a sin 2000π=t and y 2 a sin 2008πt . The
a common oscillator and amplifier, are number of beats heard per second is
arranged as shown. The frequency of the
oscillator is gradually increased from zero 1) Four 2) One
and the detector at D records a series of 3) Zero 4) Eight
maxima and minima. If the speed of sound 33. 56 tuning forks are arranged in a series such
is 330 ms–1 then the frequency at which the that each fork gives 6 beats per sec with the
first maximum is observed is previous one. Assuming the frequency of the
last fork to be double of the first fork, the
frequency of the last fork should be
1) 220 Hz 2) 330 Hz
3) 440 Hz 4) 660 Hz

293
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

34. Two sources of sound placed close to each 38. The frequencies of two sound sources are
other, are emitting progressive waves given 256 Hz and 260 Hz. At t = 0, the intensity
by y1 4sin 600 πt and
= = y 2 5sin 608πt . A of sound is maximum. Then the phase
listener located near these two sources of difference at the time t = 1/16 sec will be
sound will hear 1) Zero 2) π
1) 4 beats per second with intensity ratio π π
3) 4)
25 : 16 between waxing and waning. 2 4
2) 8 beats per second with intensity ratio 39. Beats are produced by two waves given by
25 : 16 between waxing and waning. = y1 a sin 2000 π=t and y 2 a sin 2008πt . The
3) 8 beats per second with intensity ratio number of beats heard per second is
81 : 1 between waxing and waning. 1) Zero 2) One
4) 4 beats per second with intensity ratio 3) Four 4) Eight
81 : 1 between waxing and waning. 40. Wavelengths of two notes in air are 1 m and
35. The frequency of tuning forks A and B are
1
1 m . Each note produces 1 beat/s with a
respectively 3% more and 2% less than the 164
frequency of tuning fork C. When A and B are third note of a fixed frequency. The speed of
simultaneously excited, 5 beats per second sound in air is
are produced. The frequency of tuning fork 1) 330 m/s 2) 340 m/s
A is
3) 350 m/s 4) 328 m/s
1) 98 Hz 2) 100 Hz Integer Type
3) 103 Hz 4) 105 Hz
41. A string is stretched by a weight of 10 kg.
36. Two vibrating strings of the same material (Take g = 10 ms–2). The mass of one metre
but lengths L and 2L have radii 2r and r of string is 10 g. The velocity of transverse
respectively. They are stretched under the wave in the string in ms–1 is
same tension. Both the strings vibrate in their 42. The linear density of a wire is 1.3 × 10–4
fundamental modes, the one of length L with kg m–1. A transverse wave is produced in
frequency ν1 and the other with frequency ν 2 . it which can be described by the equation
The ratio of frequencies is given by = y –0.21sin ( x + 30t ) . Where x is in metre
3 and t is in sec. The tension in the wire in N is
1) 1 2) approximately n×10–2N, where n is
2
43. The tension in a piano wire is 10 N. What
5 should be the tension in N in the wire to
3) 2 4) produce a note of double the frequency?
2
Assertion - Reason Type
37. A closed organ pipe and an open organ pipe 1) If both the Assertion and Reason are true
of same length produce 2 beats when they and the Reason is true explanation of the
are set into vibrations simultaneously in Assertion
their fundamental mode. The length of open
organ pipe is now halved and of closed pipe 2) If both the Assertion and Reason are true
is doubled. The number of beats produced but the Reason is not the true explanation
will now be of the Assertion
3) If Assertion is true but Reason is false
1) 3 2) 5
4) If Assertion is false but Reason is true
3) 7 4) 9

294
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

44. Assertion : Radio waves can be 48. Statement I : On a rainy day, sound travels
polarised. slower than on a dry day.

Reason : Sound waves in air are Statement II : When moisture is present

longitudinal waves. in air the density of air
increases.
45. Assertion : Sound would travel faster on
a hot summer day than on a 49. Statement I : Where two vibrating tuning
cold winter day. forks having frequencies 256
Hz and 512 Hz are held near
Reason : Velocity of sound is directly each other, beats cannot be
proportional to the square of heard.
its absolute temperature.
Statement II : The principle of superposition
46. Assertion : In n normal mode of a
th is valid only if the frequencies
stretched string, there are n of the oscillations are nearly
antinodes and (n + 1) nodes. equal.

Match the following.

Reason : The ends of string are nodes,
so the number node is one
more than the number of  π
50. y A sin 2π  ax + bt +
In the equation,= 
antinodes.  4
match the following.
Statement Type
Column I Column II
1) If both Statement I and Statement II are
true A) Frequency of wave P) b
a
2) If both Statement I and Statement II are
false B) Wavelength of wave Q) b

C) Phase difference R) π
3) If Statement I is true but Statement II is between two points 1/4a
false 4
distance apart
D) Phase difference of S) π
4) If Statement I is false but Statement II is a point after a time
true 2
interval of 1/8b
E) Velocity of the wave T) 1
47. Statement I : Solids can support both
longitudinal and transverse a
waves but only longitudinal
waves can propagate 1) A - Q, B - T, C - S, D - R, E - P
through gaseous medium.
2) A - Q, B - S, C - T, D - T, E - P
Statement II : For the propagation of
transverse waves, medium 3) A - S, B - Q, C - T, D - T, E - P
must also necessarily have
the property of rigidity. 4) A - S, B - T, C - Q, D - T, E - P

295
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

KEY WITH HINTS

1. 3=y a sin ( ωt + φ ) ; 5 ×10 sin (100t − 50x )

= −4

Compare coefficients of t.
ω =100
 π
=
y1 10sin  3πt +  ;
 3 2πf =100 ;

=
y 2 5sin 3πt + 5 3 cos 3πt
100 50
=f =
Amplitude of 2π π

y2 = A12 + A 22 = 25 + 75 = 10 Again, compare coefficients of x;

k = 50;
Amplitude of y1 = 10 cm
2π
∴ Ratio of amplitude = 1 : 1 = 50
λ
2. 4 The displacement of the particle at x = 1
cm at t = 1 s are given by
2π π
 π   π =
λ =
=
y1 2sin  3π×1 − =×1 2sin  3π −  50 25
 2   2
50 π
 5π   π Velocity v = fλ = × = 2 m/s
= 2sin =
  2sin  2π +  π 25
 2   2
 2πx 
π 4. y1 a1 sin  ωt −
2= 
= 2sin
= 2cm  λ 
2

 2πx π 
 3π  = a1 cos  ωt −
− 
=
and y 2 4sin  6π×1 − ×1  λ 2
 2 

 2πx 
 9π   π =
y 2 a 2 cos  ωt − + φ
= 4sin =
  4sin  4π +   λ 
 2   2
Phase difference between the two waves
 π
π = φ+  .
= 4sin
= 4 cm  2
2
According to superposition principle λ
=
Path difference × phase difference
y = y1 + y2 = 2 + 4 = 6 cm 2π
3. 1 Standard wave eqn. is=y a sin ( ωt − kx )
λ  π
∆
=x φ+ 
2π  2

296
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

Now % change in length =

1 T
5. 3 For a string, f = ; T is same
D πd  2 − 1  1.31 − 1 
=
×100
=  100
1   
f D2  2 d2 = 30 or 30%
1
=
f2 D1 1 d1 8. 2 At two ends, where the string is rigidly tied,
two nodes are formed. The minimum
length of the string is equal to the distance
 2  1  1 1 1 1 f 1 between the two nodes is ( λ / 2 ) .
=    = 2× × = ; 1 =
 1  2  4 2 2 2 f2 2
Given eqn., y =sin 2π x cos 2πt ;
6. 1 y = y1 + y2 ;
=
y A sin ( ωt − kx ) + A sin ( ωt − kx − θ )
2πx 2πt
Standard eqn. y = 2A sin cos
λ λ
 ( ωt − kx ) + ( ωt − kx − θ )  Compare coefficient of x
y A2sin  ×
 2  2πx
∴ 2πx
=
λ
 ( ωt − kx ) − ( ωt − kx ) − θ 
cos   or λ =1m ;
 2 
λ 1
Maximum length L min= = = 0.5 m

{ }
θ θ 2 2
y = 2A sin ( ωt − kx ) − cos ;
2 2
A1
9. 3 (1) = 2 :1
A2
θ  θ
=
y 2A cos sin  ωt − kx −  ;
2  2
f v / λ1 λ 2 1
(2) =
1
= =
cos θ f2 v / λ 2 λ1 2
Amplitude = 2A
2
2 2
7. 2 For transverse vibration of strings I A  ω  v 
(3) 1 =  1   1   1 
I 2  A 2   ω2   v 2 
1 T T1
n= ; 2 1 n =
2 m m
2 2
 2   1  1
=
=      1:1
T2  T2  1   2  1
=
2 2 n = or 2
m 1 T1
φ ω1t ω1 1
T1 = (100T) ; T2 = (169 T) (4) =
1
= =
φ2 ω2 t ω2 2
 169T 169
∴ 2= = = 1.3
1 100T 100 1 T 1 T 1 T
10. =
1 ν = = 2
or  2 = 1.3 2 µ 2 ρ.πr 2.r ρ.π

297
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

Here  is same for both the wires, so 14. 3 For vibrating string, frequency f = k T
ν1 r2 T1 ρ2 1 2 2 ν1 2 For small changes in f and tension, take
= = =. ;
ν 2 r1 T2 ρ1 3 1 1 ν 2 3 logs and differentiate.
11. 1 The given equation is 1 df 1 dT
log f =
log k + log T; = .
2 f 2 T
=
y 10sin π ( 0.01πx − 2πt )
Here, ω = coefficient of t = 2π Given df = 5

⇒ Maximum speed of the particle dT 5 1 2

2%;
= = × ;f =
500 Hz
T f 2 100
ν max = aω = 10 × 2π
= 10 × 2 × 3.14 = 62.8 = 63 cm/s 1 T
15. 3 f =
12. 1 Using v = constant 2L m
( T and µ are same) Take log and differentiate,
We get ν11 =
ν 2 2 =
ν 3 3 ; ∆f ∆L 1 ∆T 1 ∆m
we get = + +
1 1 1 f L 2 T 2 m
ie, : : = 1 :  2 :  3
ν1 ν 2 ν 3 ( one takes only absolute values)
∆f ∆L
1 1 1 ∴ = + 0+ 0;
or 1 :=
2 : 3 =: : 6:3: 2 f L
1 2 3
% change in frequency = 1% increase in
length. = 1%
6
Hence 1 = 1.21× = 0.66 m 16. 2 Let the successive loops formed be p and
11 (p + 1) for frequencies 315 Hz and 420 Hz.

p T pv
3 ∴f
= =
 2 = 1.21× = 0.33m 2 µ 2
11

2 pv ( p + 1) v
 3 = 1.21× = 0.22 m =
∴ 315 Hz
= and 420 Hz
11 2 2

=
13. 2 y 0.02sin ( x + 30t )=
; y sin ( kx − ωt ) ( p + 1) v pv v
or − = 420 − 315 or = 105
2 2 2
Comparing k = 1, ω =30 ; Wave velocity
ω ∴ lowest resonant frequency = 105 Hz.
= = 30 m / s
k 17. 2
T
We have v = ⇒ T =µv 2 =A.ρV 2
µ

(10 m ) ( 8 × 10 kg / m ) ( 30 ) ;
−6 2 3 3 2
= 5λ 5λ
=L ⇒ =10 cm
⇒T=
7.2N 2 2

298
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

0.1× 2 v H2 1270
=
∴λ = 0.04 m v= = = 635 m / s
5 mix
2 2

v 20 20. 2
v = νλ ⇒ ν = = = 500 Hz
λ 0.04
18. 3

2x1 v 330
=1 ⇒ x1 = = =165 m ;
v 2 2

As the rope has a mass and a mass is 2x

also suspended from the lower end, the 2 =2 ⇒ x 2 =v =330m
v
tension in the rope will be different at
T d = x1 + x 2 =165 + 330 = 495 m
different points v = where µ is mass
µ
per unit length of the string. 21. 4 Time of downward journey of stone = t;

v TA 6+2 2h 2 × 500
=A
= = 2 ; As v = fλ =
t = = 100 10 sec
=
g 10
vB TB 2
Time of sound to cover 500 m
vA fA λ A 500
∴ = = = 1.5 sec ;

vB fB λ B 330
Since frequency is the characteristic of the Total time = 11.5 sec.
source producing the wave. Cp 5
22. 3 =
γ = is highest for monoatomic gas.
vA λ A Cv 3
f A= f=
B =
vB λ B
γp
v Velocity = ;
or λ A = A λ B = 2 × 0.6 m = 0.12 m ρ
vB
velocity ∝ γ;

ρO VO2 + ρH2 VH2 ∴ speed of sound is greatest in

19. 2 ρmix =2 ;
VO2 + VH2 monoatomic gas.
v1 T1 v T
23. 2 = ; =
16 × V + 1× 4V v2 T2 3v 600 + T

V + 4V
1 T
= ; 3T = T + 600;
3 T + 600
v ρH 2 1 1
=
mix = = T = 300 K = 27oC
v H2 ρmix 4 2

299
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

24. 2 Let original intensity = I ; nv n × 330

=
f = = 330 n
∆x 1
Intensity after passing through Ist slab
n = 1, f = 330 Hz
80 I
= v
100 28. 4 For open pipe, n = p , for pth of mode
2
Intensity after passing through 2nd slab of vibration.
80 80 I 80 × 80 I 64 v
=
I′ of
= = I n′
For closed pipe, = ( 2p − 1) ;
100 100 100 ×100 100 4

Reduction in intensity n′ v 2 2p − 1
= ( 2p − 1) × =
Original intensity n 4 pv 2p

1 64 I  36 I n 2p
= I − = =36% =
I 100  100 I n′ ( 2p − 1)
29. 1 Fundamental frequency of open pipe,
25. 3 I max = I1 + I 2 + 2 I1I 2 cos 0 ( φ= 0) v
F=
I min = I1 + I 2 + 2 I1I 2 cos180 o 2

(=
φ 180o ) ; I max. + I min.
= 2 ( I1 + I 2 ) Frequency of 3rd harmonies of closed pipe
 v 
26. 4 In case of a string, length l is broken up = 3  .
λ1 2λ 2 3λ 3 4λ 4  4 
into , , , etc. in successive
2 2 2 2 Frequency of third harmonic
harmonoics. = 100 + Fopen;
λ1 2λ 2 3λ 4λ 3v v v
Thus  = or or 3 or 4 ; ∴ = 100 + or = 100
2 2 2 2 4 2 4

⇒ v=
400 
v 9v 7v
f9 =
= ; =
f7 ∴ Fundamental frequency of open pipe
λ 9 2 2
v 400
= =
= 200 Hz
2 2
f 9 9v 2 9  v 
∴ = × = >1 30. 2 Second overtone of closed pipe = 5  
f 7 2 7v 7  4 
27. x L 2 D − L1D
2 ∆= First overtone of open pipe
2 2  v  5v 2v
= ( 9 ) + ( 40 ) − 40 = 41 − 40 = 1m = 2
 ∴ = − 100
 2  4 2
For maximum intensity.
v v
∆x = nλ = n ; = 100
f 4

300
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

∴ Fundamental frequency of closed pipe 34. 4=y1 4sin 600

= πt A1 sin 2πf1t
 v 
= =  100 Hz A1 = 4, f1 = 300 Hz
 4 
31. 3 =
y 2 5sin 608
= πt A 2 sin 2πf 2 t
A2 = 5, f2 = 304 Hz;
Beat frequency = f1 – f2 = 4Hz
2 2
I max  A1 + A 2   4 + 5  81
=
= = 
I min  A1 − A 2   4 − 5  1

Intensity ratio is 81 : 1 between waxing

= n=
Beats/sec A nB ; and waning.

On loading A, nA decreases, 3n 103n

35. 3 n A =+
n = ;
thus nA – nB too.
100 100

Here beats decrease from 4 to 2.

2n 98n
∴ n A − n B =4 ⇒ 256 − n B =4 n B =−
n =
100 100
⇒ nB =
252 Given nA – nB = 5
32. 1 Standard wave equation is 103n 98n 5n
∴ − =5 ; = 5; n = 100
=
y a sin ( ωt − kx ) 100 100 100

From two equations given, 103n 103 ×100

∴ n A= = = 103Hz
ω1 2000 π and ω
= =2 2008 π 100 100

ω = 2πn ; ∴2π=
n1 2000π 36. 1 For a vibrating string frequency,
n1 = 1000 1 T 1 T
ν= or ν =
2πn 2= 2008π 2 m 2 r πd
∴ n2 =
1004
Beats 1 T 1 T
= n 2 − n1 = 10004 − 1000 = 4 =
ν1 =
sec ( 2L )( 2r ) πd 4Lr πd

33. 4 56 forks have frequencies, where x

denotes beats/sec, n, 1 T 1 T ν1
=
ν2 = = ; 1
(n + x), (n + 2x), (n + 3x) .... (n + 55 x) 2 × ( 2L ) r πd 4Lr πd ν 2
Last fork has frequency
v
= 2n = n +55 x; 37. 3 Frequency of open pipe, f 0 = ;
2
2n = n + 55 × 6 = n + 330; n = 330
∴ frequency of last fork v
Frequency closed pipe, f c =
4
= 2 × 330 = 660 Hz

301
LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK - PHYSICS

v v 165
Now, ∆f =f 0 − f c =2 ⇒ − =2 40. 1 λ=
1 1m, λ=
2 m
2 4 164

v C 164C
⇒ 8
= f1
= ; f=
2 ; f1 − f=
2 2
 1 165

∆f = f 0 − f c = 2 C
= 2;=
C 330 m / s
v v v 165
⇒ − =2 ⇒ =8
2 4 
41. 100
New frequencies, T 10 ×10
=
v =
v v v v m 10 /1000
=
f 0′ = and
= f c′ =
2 / 2  4 × 2 8
= =
10, 000 100 m / s
v v 7v 7 42. 12
∴ ∆f ′= f 0′ − f c′= − = = × 8= 7
 8 8  8 y = – 0.21 sin (x + 30t)

38. 3 Time interval between two consecutive = 2π

a sin ( vt + x )
beats λ
1 1 1
=
T = = sec 2π
n1 − n 2 260 − 256 4 Comparing ∴ 1 , coefficient of x.;
=
λ
1 T
t
so,= = sec 2πv
16 4 = 30 coefficient of t
λ
∴v=30 m / s
By using time difference Velocity of transverse wave;
T T
=
× Phase difference; =v ; ∴
=T mv 2
2π
m

T (1.3 ×10−4 ) ( 30 )
2
T T π =
⇒= × φ ⇒=
φ
4 2π 2 12 ×10−2 N
≈ 0.12 N =
39. 3 Number of beats per second
43. 40
= n1 − n 2 ; ω1 = 2000π = 2πn1
1 T
⇒ n1 =
1000 n= for transverse vibration of
2 m
and ω2 = 2008π = 2πn 2 ⇒ n 2 = 1004 ; strings.

Number of beats heard per sec n T1 10 n

=
1
= = ∴T2 =
40N
= 1004 – 1000 = 4 n2 T2 T2 2n

302
 LT 2026 - CLASS (XI) - BRAIN BANK- PHYSICS

44. 2 Both Assertion and Reason are true but transverse waves cannot be produced
Reason is not the correct explanation of in gases. On the other hand, the solids
Assertion. possess both volume and shear elasticity
and likewise both the longitudinal and
Radio waves are electromagnetic, so it is transverse waves can be transmitted
transverse in nature. It can be polarised. through them.
Sound waves is longitudinal in nature
which can never be polarised. These two 48. 2 When moisture is present in air, the density
statements are not correlated. of air decreases. It is because the density
of water vapours is less than that of dry
45. 3 The velocity of sound in a gas is directly air. The velocity of sound is inversely
proportional to the square root of its proportional to the square root of density,
absolute temperature. hence sound travels faster in moist air
than in the dry air. Therefore, on a rainy
day sound travels faster than on a dry day.
γRT
v=
ρV 49. 3 The principle of superposition does not
Since, temperature of a hot day is more state that the frequencies of the oscillation
than cold winter day, therefore, sound should be nearly equal. For beats to be
would travel faster on a hot summer day heard the condition is that difference in
than on a cold winter day. frequencies of the two oscillations should
not be more than 10 Hz for a normal
human ear to recognize it. Hence we
46. 1
cannot hear beats in the case of two tuning
forks vibrating at frequencies 256 Hz and
47. 1 For the propagation of transverse waves, 512 Hz respectively.
medium must have the property of rigidity.
Because gases have no rigidity, (they
50. 1
do not possess shear elasticity), hence

303